summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf/doc/man
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-03 00:00:18 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-03 00:00:18 +0000
commita540e256be85df29c60ac323d4460c6cde1d9350 (patch)
treed83a3a57112a9ec6966691569ecc2dfe78d82b81 /Master/texmf/doc/man
parent84a45ba83a3095eb4908d4325981b11fc1b31b05 (diff)
trunk/Master/texmf/doc
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@42 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf/doc/man')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1380
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1275
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.125
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.128
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.130
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.169
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.194
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1146
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bzip2.1453
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1111
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1101
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1111
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.187
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-de.1458
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-en.1458
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-nl.1458
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.155
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1133
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1126
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dmp.160
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1156
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1715
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.122
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1131
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.153
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.146
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.122
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1127
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1275
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.11
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.11
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.11
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1322
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.136
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1483
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1517
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.163
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1129
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1137
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.117
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.174
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.155
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.134
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1103
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.151
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.154
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1429
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.194
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.147
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fdf2tex.131
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixmacps.127
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.124
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.180
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.145
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.129
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getnonfreefonts.1182
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1167
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1103
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.197
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1301
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gzip.1478
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1736
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.141
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/info.189
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/infokey.141
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-info.178
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.163
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.132
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.153
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1106
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.150
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1160
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1113
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lambda.1292
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.170
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.168
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.11203
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeinfo.1205
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempx.189
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempy.160
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.1501
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.1134
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.150
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.133
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.146
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.159
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.1122
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.168
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.1183
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.1211
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.1478
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpto.168
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/newer.141
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.11
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvips.11
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.191
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/omega.1292
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.174
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.1143
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.11473
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.141
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.144
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.187
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.178
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/oxdvi.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.1170
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.1487
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.1479
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.119
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.139
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.1103
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.185
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.174
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.145
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.141
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.1156
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.144
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.136
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.1160
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.181
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.184
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.1166
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.163
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.163
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.194
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.151
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.196
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.196
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.196
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.162
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.1149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.162
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.171
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.1180
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tcdialog.1217
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.1541
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.127
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.194
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.1217
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.1574
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfind.172
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfont.184
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2dvi.195
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2html.1164
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2pdf.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindex.147
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.165
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texshow.169
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texutil.1266
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.1117
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.1100
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.139
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.174
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.1311
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pt1.1619
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.11182
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.1124
l---------Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.1260
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.1100
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.1130
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.168
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.177
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.14101
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvizilla.1115
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man3/zlib.3159
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/fmtutil.cnf.575
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/info.572
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/texinfo.561
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/updmap.cfg.5137
196 files changed, 31521 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ec06d892da8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1
@@ -0,0 +1,380 @@
+.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
+.\"
+.\" Standard preamble:
+.\" ========================================================================
+.de Sh \" Subsection heading
+.br
+.if t .Sp
+.ne 5
+.PP
+\fB\\$1\fR
+.PP
+..
+.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
+.if t .sp .5v
+.if n .sp
+..
+.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
+.ft CW
+.nf
+.ne \\$1
+..
+.de Ve \" End verbatim text
+.ft R
+.fi
+..
+.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
+.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
+.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
+.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
+.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
+.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
+.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
+.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
+.ie n \{\
+. ds -- \(*W-
+. ds PI pi
+. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
+. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
+. ds L" ""
+. ds R" ""
+. ds C` ""
+. ds C' ""
+'br\}
+.el\{\
+. ds -- \|\(em\|
+. ds PI \(*p
+. ds L" ``
+. ds R" ''
+'br\}
+.\"
+.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
+.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
+.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
+.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
+.if \nF \{\
+. de IX
+. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
+..
+. nr % 0
+. rr F
+.\}
+.\"
+.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
+.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
+.hy 0
+.if n .na
+.\"
+.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
+.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
+. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
+.if n \{\
+. ds #H 0
+. ds #V .8m
+. ds #F .3m
+. ds #[ \f1
+. ds #] \fP
+.\}
+.if t \{\
+. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
+. ds #V .6m
+. ds #F 0
+. ds #[ \&
+. ds #] \&
+.\}
+. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
+.if n \{\
+. ds ' \&
+. ds ` \&
+. ds ^ \&
+. ds , \&
+. ds ~ ~
+. ds /
+.\}
+.if t \{\
+. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
+. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
+. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
+. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
+. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
+. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
+.\}
+. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
+.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
+.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
+.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
+.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
+.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
+.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
+.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
+.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
+.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
+. \" corrections for vroff
+.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
+.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
+. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
+.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
+\{\
+. ds : e
+. ds 8 ss
+. ds o a
+. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
+. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
+. ds th \o'bp'
+. ds Th \o'LP'
+. ds ae ae
+. ds Ae AE
+.\}
+.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
+.\" ========================================================================
+.\"
+.IX Title "A2PING 1"
+.TH A2PING 1 "2004-05-26" "perl v5.8.1" "User Contributed Perl Documentation"
+.ds pts-dev \*[.T]
+.do if '\*[.T]'ascii' .ds pts-dev tty
+.do if '\*[.T]'ascii8' .ds pts-dev tty
+.do if '\*[.T]'latin1' .ds pts-dev tty
+.do if '\*[.T]'nippon' .ds pts-dev tty
+.do if '\*[.T]'utf8' .ds pts-dev tty
+.do if '\*[.T]'cp1047' .ds pts-dev tty
+.do if '\*[pts-dev]'tty' \{\
+.ll 79
+.pl 33333v
+.nr IN 2n
+.\}
+.ad n
+
+.SH "NAME"
+a2ping.pl \-\- convert between PS, EPS and PDF and other page description
+formats
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
+\&\& \fBa2ping.pl\fR [\fB\-\-\fR]\fBhelp\fR
+ \fBa2ping.pl\fR [\fB\-\-\fR]\fBdoc\fR
+ \fBa2ping.pl\fR [\fIoptions\fR] <\fIinputfile\fR> [[\fIoutformat\fR:] \fIoutputfile\fR]
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
+\&\fBa2ping\fR is a \s-1UNIX\s0 command line utility written in Perl that
+converts many raster image and vector graphics formats to \s-1EPS\s0 or \s-1PDF\s0 and
+other page description formats. Accepted input file formats are: \s-1PS\s0
+(PostScript), \s-1EPS\s0, \s-1PDF\s0, \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1PNM\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1GIF\s0, \s-1LBM\s0, \s-1XPM\s0, \s-1PCX\s0,
+\&\s-1TGA\s0. Accepted output formats are: \s-1EPS\s0, \s-1PCL5\s0, \s-1PDF\s0, \s-1PDF1\s0, \s-1PBM\s0, \s-1PGM\s0, \s-1PPM\s0,
+\&\s-1PS\s0, markedEPS, markedPS, \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1XWD\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1GIF\s0, \s-1XPM\s0.
+\&\fBa2ping\fR delegates the low-level work to
+Ghostscript (\s-1GS\s0), \fBpdftops\fR and \fBsam2p\fR. \fBa2ping\fR fixes many glitches
+during the \s-1EPS\s0 to \s-1EPS\s0 conversion, so its output is often more compatible
+and better embeddable than its input.
+.PP
+Without the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-below\*(C'\fR option, it is guarenteed to start at the 0,0
+coordinate. \f(CW\*(C`\-\-below\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-hires\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-v\*(C'\fR are recommended options.
+.PP
+The page size is set exactly corresponding to the BoundingBox.
+This means that when Ghostscript renders it, the result needs no
+cropping, and the \s-1PDF\s0 MediaBox is correct.
+.PP
+If the bounding box is not right, of course, you have problems. If you
+feed crap in, you get crap. But you can supply the
+\&\fB\-\-bboxfrom=compute\-gs\fR option to make \s-1GS\s0 recompute the bounding box.
+.PP
+The name of the input file doesn't matter \*(-- \fBa2ping\fR detects the file
+format based on the first few bytes of the file. The name of the output
+file matters if \fIoutformat\fR is missing from the command line: then the
+extension of the output file determines the FileFormat (\fIoutformat\fR).
+.SH "EXTERNAL PROGRAMS"
+.IX Header "EXTERNAL PROGRAMS"
+The internal file format of \fBa2ping.pl\fR is \s-1PS/EPS\s0. Everything read is
+first converted to \s-1PS\s0 or \s-1EPS\s0, then processed by \fBa2ping.pl\fR, then
+converted to the output format.
+.PP
+To analyse the bounding box and other properties of non-EPS \s-1PS\s0 files
+(and \s-1EPS\s0 files with option \fB\-\-bboxfrom\fR other than \fB=guess\fR), \s-1GS\s0 is
+used. Converting \s-1PS\s0 to \s-1EPS\s0 involves this analysis.
+.PP
+To write \s-1PDF\s0 files, \s-1GS\s0 is used.
+.PP
+To read \s-1PDF\s0 files, \fBpdftops\fR from the \fBxpdf\fR package is used.
+.PP
+Sampled input formats are \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1PNM\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1GIF\s0, \s-1LBM\s0, \s-1XPM\s0, \s-1PCX\s0
+and \s-1TGA\s0. To read sampled input formats, \fBsam2p\fR is used. \fBsam2p\fR is
+a raster image converter written in \*(C+ by the author of \fBa2ping.pl\fR.
+.PP
+Extra output formats are \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1XWD\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1GIF\s0 and \s-1XPM\s0. To
+write extra output formats, \fBsam2p\fR and \s-1GS\s0 are used.
+.PP
+\&\s-1PNM\s0 output formats are \s-1PGM\s0, \s-1PGM\s0 and \s-1PPM\s0. To write \s-1PNM\s0 output formats, \s-1GS\s0
+is used.
+.SH "TIPS AND TRICKS"
+.IX Header "TIPS AND TRICKS"
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+Call with the \fB\-v\fR option to see progress and debug messages.
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+If your \s-1EPS\s0 contains a wrong bounding box, you can fix it by running
+\&\f(CW\*(C`a2ping.pl \-v \-\-bboxfrom=compute\-gs thefile.eps \-\-\*(C'\fR
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+You can specify \fB\-\fR as \fIinputfile\fR to get stdin and as \fIoutputfile\fR
+to get stdout. This works even for \s-1PDF\s0 files (which must be seekable),
+because \fBa2ping\fR copies them to a temporary file automatically.
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+If \fIinputfile\fR and \fIoutputfile\fR are the same, \fBa2ping\fR copies the
+\&\fIinputfile\fR to a temporary location first. However, this usage is
+recommended only if there is a backup of the file to be restored in case
+\&\fBa2ping\fR doesn't produce the desired result.
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+If you specify \fB\-\-\fR as \fIoutputfile\fR, it will be the same as \fIinputfile\fR.
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+\&\fBa2ping\fR respects \fB\-\-Duplex\fR for FileFormat \s-1PCL5\s0, even though \s-1GS\s0 doesn't.
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+If you have an incompatible \s-1PS\s0 that \s-1GS\s0 can read but your printer cannot print,
+just run \f(CW\*(C`a2ping.pl foo.ps PDF: \- | a2ping.pl \- PS: foo.ps\*(C'\fR
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+If you have a \s-1PS\s0 coming from Win32 (often with extension \f(CW\*(C`.prn\*(C'\fR), run
+it through \fBa2ping\fR. It will remove the resolution changes and the
+progress text printed to the terminal (which confuses \fIgv\fR\|(1) and makes
+some filters in the print queue emit incorrect output).
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+\&\fBa2ping\fR does antialiasing (\fB\-\-antialias=scale3no\fR) of glyphs and
+curves when emitting a sampled image (FileFormats such as \s-1PGM\s0 and \s-1PPM\s0).
+This improves readability of the glyphs. \fB=yes\fR instructs \s-1GS\s0 to do
+internal antialiasing, but it usually doesn't improve much. \fB=scale3no\fR
+turns off \s-1GS\s0 internal antialiasing, but makes it render everything 3x3
+as big, and then scales it back down. \fB=scale3no\fR turns on both 3x3
+scaling and \s-1GS\s0 internal antialiasing, which results in thicker lines and
+worse quality in general.
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+When creating a \s-1PBM\s0 file, antialiasing usually doesn't improve the
+quality, so it is switched off by default. But if you set
+\&\fB\-\-antialias=scale3no\fR or \fB\-\-antialias=scale3yes\fR, \s-1GS\s0 will render a \s-1PGM\s0 file,
+and the value of \fB\-\-threshold\fR determines the minimum intensity for white in
+the final \s-1PBM\s0.
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+If you need a bigger sampled output file, specify a larger
+\&\fB\-\-Resolution\fR. The default is \fB\-\-Resolution=72\fR. If your sampled output file
+is going to be really big, you should specify \fB\-\-AntiAlias=yes\fR instead of
+the default \fB\-\-AntiAlias=scale3no\fR to speed up conversion.
+.SH "MISC"
+.IX Header "MISC"
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+Doesn't depend on the filename or extension of the input file.
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+Conversion from \s-1EPS\s0 to \s-1PDF:\s0 fixes glitches etc., calls gs
+\&\-sDEVICE=pdfwrite
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+Conversion from \s-1EPS\s0 to \s-1EPS:\s0 fixes various glitches, moves (llx,lly) to
+(0,0), removes binary junk from the beginning of the \s-1EPS\s0 etc.
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+Conversion from \s-1PDF\s0 to \s-1PDF:\s0 keeps the file intact
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+Conversion from \s-1PDF\s0 to \s-1EPS:\s0 calls pdftops \-eps (of the xpdf package)
+.IP "\(bu" 2
+Conversion from \s-1PS\s0 to \s-1EPS:\s0 keeps 1st page only, removes setpagedevice etc.
+.SH "AUTHORS"
+.IX Header "AUTHORS"
+The author of \fBa2ping\fR is Szabó Péter <\fIpts@fazekas.hu\fR>.
+.PP
+\&\fBa2ping\fR is inspired by and historically based on the \fBepstopdf\fR Perl
+script modified by Thomas Esser, Sept. 1998, but his modifications have
+been removed from \fBa2ping\fR, and also \fBa2ping\fR and \fBepstopdf\fR do not
+share common code anymore. \fBepstopdf\fR is written by Sebastian Rahtz,
+for Elsevier Science. \fBepstopdf\fR contained extra tricks from Hans Hagen's
+texutil.
+.SH "HISTORY"
+.IX Header "HISTORY"
+.Sh "1999/05/06 v2.5 (Heiko Oberdiek)"
+.IX Subsection "1999/05/06 v2.5 (Heiko Oberdiek)"
+.Vb 14
+\& * New options: --hires, --exact, --filter, --help.
+\& * Many cosmetics: title, usage, ...
+\& * New code for debug, warning, error
+\& * Detecting of cygwin perl
+\& * Scanning for %%{Hires,Exact,}BoundingBox.
+\& * Scanning only the header in order not to get a wrong
+\& BoundingBox of an included file.
+\& * (atend) supported.
+\& * uses strict; (earlier error detecting).
+\& * changed first comment from '%!PS' to '%!';
+\& * corrected (atend) pattern: '\es*\e(atend\e)'
+\& * using of $bbxpat in all BoundingBox cases,
+\& correct the first white space to '...Box:\es*$bb...'
+\& * corrected first line (one line instead of two before 'if 0;';
+.Ve
+.Sh "2000/11/05 v2.6 (Heiko Oberdiek)"
+.IX Subsection "2000/11/05 v2.6 (Heiko Oberdiek)"
+.Vb 1
+\& * %%HiresBoundingBox corrected to %%HiResBoundingBox
+.Ve
+.Sh "2001/03/05 v2.7 (Heiko Oberdiek)"
+.IX Subsection "2001/03/05 v2.7 (Heiko Oberdiek)"
+.Vb 2
+\& * Newline before grestore for the case that there is no
+\& whitespace at the end of the eps file.
+.Ve
+.Sh "2003/02/02 (Szabó Péter)"
+.IX Subsection "2003/02/02 (Szabó Péter)"
+.Vb 10
+\& * option --below
+\& * removes DOS EPSF binary junk correctly
+\& * adds all 3 BoundingBox DSC comments
+\& * reads all 3 BoundingBox DSC comments, and picks the best
+\& * forces BoundingBox to be an integer
+\& * adds %%EndComments and proper %!PS-Adobe-?-? EPSF-?.? header
+\& * adds %%Pages:
+\& * adds invocation syntax: a2ping <infile.eps> <outfile.eps|pdf>
+\& * can convert PDF to EPS (by calling pdftops(1)) and PDF to PDF
+\& * emulates work for PDF input
+.Ve
+.Sh "2003/04/16 (Szabó Péter)"
+.IX Subsection "2003/04/16 (Szabó Péter)"
+.Vb 7
+\& * added PS and sam2p support, renamed to a2ping
+\& * sam2p and pdftops if $InputFilename eq '-';
+\& * remove PJL UEL header from the beginning
+\& * works for PS non-EPS files for input
+\& * input support for PNG JPEG TIFF PNM BMP GIF LBM XPM PCX TGA via sam2p
+\& * removes ^L (form feed) from end of EPS file
+\& * -x=-c:rle to add sam2p options
+.Ve
+.Sh "2003/04/26 (Szabó Péter)"
+.IX Subsection "2003/04/26 (Szabó Péter)"
+.Vb 14
+\& * omit the unnecessary setpagedevice calls when creating normal eps
+\& * --noverbose --nocompress supported differently
+\& * no more option defaults :-(
+\& * justlib2
+\& * multi-page output with PS:, PDF:, PCL5:
+\& * after `a2ping -pa4', file out.pcl says: `HP PCL printer data - A4 page
+\& size', instead of `US letter'
+\& * justlib2-ified doesn't depend on Getopt::Long anymore
+\& * fully supports filtering (stdin and/or stdout), PDF and PCL5 output to
+\& pipe (!$$ll_zero)
+\& * adds DSC ``%%DocumentMedia: plain 612 792 0 () ()''
+\& * BoundingBox precedence for EPS input: --PageSize, %%*BoundingBox,
+\& setpagedevice. Precedence for other inputs: --PageSize, setpagedevice,
+\& %%*BoundingBox
+.Ve
+.Sh "2003/09/25 (Szabó Péter)"
+.IX Subsection "2003/09/25 (Szabó Péter)"
+.Vb 7
+\& * --bboxfrom=adsc: %%BoundingBox overrides -sDEVICE=bbox
+\& * improved bbox discovery
+\& * many bugfixes
+\& * MetaPost EPS input fixes for prologues:=0;
+\& * a2ping.pl -v --papersize=50,60 --bboxfrom=compute-gs t.ps t2.ps
+\& * consistent bbox, --PageSize, /PageSize handling
+\& * consistent --Resolution and --Duplex handling
+.Ve
+.Sh "2003/12/02 (Szabó Péter)"
+.IX Subsection "2003/12/02 (Szabó Péter)"
+.Vb 1
+\& * --bboxfrom=compute-gs option to fix PS -> EPS bbox (gs -sDEVICE=bbox), tuzv.eps
+.Ve
+.Sh "2004/02/10 v2.77 (Szabó Péter)"
+.IX Subsection "2004/02/10 v2.77 (Szabó Péter)"
+.Vb 7
+\& * the compute-pipe routine is now run unless --bboxfrom=guess with EPS
+\& * added --gsextra=
+\& * added --antialias=
+\& * added FileFormat PBM, PGM, PPM
+\& * separated FileFormat features to FL_* constants
+\& * added --doc
+\& * there is no default FileFormat (PDF) anymore
+.Ve
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..91c8282166d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1
@@ -0,0 +1,275 @@
+.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
+.de Sh \" Subsection
+.br
+.if t .Sp
+.ne 5
+.PP
+\fB\\$1\fR
+.PP
+..
+.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
+.if t .sp .5v
+.if n .sp
+..
+.de Ip \" List item
+.br
+.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
+.el .ne 3
+.IP "\\$1" \\$2
+..
+.TH "AFM2PL" 1 "February 2004" "" "afm2pl"
+.SH NAME
+afm2pl \- convert AFM font metrics to TeX pl font metrics
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.ad l
+.hy 0
+.HP 7
+\fBafm2pl\fR [\fB\-p\fR\ \fIencoding_file\fR] [\fB\-o\fR] [\fB\-e\fR\ \fIextension_factor\fR] [\fB\-s\fR\ \fIslant_factor\fR] [\fB\-f\fR\ \fIfont_dimensions\fR] [\fB\-k\fR] [\fB\-m\fR\ \fIletter_spacing\fR] [\fB\-l\fR\ \fIligkern_spec\fR] [\fB\-L\fR\ \fIligkern_spec\fR] {\fIinput_file[\&.afm]\fR} [\fIoutput_file[\&.pl]\fR]
+.ad
+.hy
+.ad l
+.hy 0
+.HP 7
+\fBafm2pl\fR {\fB\-\-help\fR | \fB\-\-version\fR}
+.ad
+.hy
+
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+
+.PP
+afm2pl converts an afm (Adobe Font Metric) file into a pl (Property List) file, which in its turn can be converted to a tfm (TeX Font Metric) file\&. It preserves kerns and ligatures\&.
+
+.PP
+afm2pl is meant to be a replacement for afm2tfm, on which it is based\&. With afm2tfm, preserving kerns and ligatures is possible only in a roundabout way\&.
+
+.PP
+For text fonts, Y&Y's texnansi is the recommended encoding to be used with afm2pl\&. This gives you a good character set with all the more important accented characters and many typographic symbols available as single characters, without a need for either virtual fonts or a separate text companion font\&.
+
+.PP
+Full LaTeX support for this encoding is available in the form of the texnansi package, which is already part of TeX Live and teTeX\&. These distributions also contain the encoding file texnansi\&.enc\&.
+
+.PP
+The distribution contains uppercased and lowercased versions of texnansi, viz\&. texnanuc\&.enc and texnanlc\&.enc, to allow font\-based rather than macro\-based uppercasing and lowercasing, and the familiar old ot1 encoding plus some variations in PostScript \&.enc format (I included these because they seem to be absent from teTeX/TeX Live)\&.
+
+.PP
+Return value: 0 if no error; a negative number indicating the number of missing glyphs if conversion was successfull but glyphs are missing, and 1 in case of error\&.
+
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+
+.TP
+\fB\-p\fR \fIencoding_file\fR
+The default is the encoding specified in the afm file, which had better match the encoding in the fontfile (pfa or pfb)\&. The generated mapfile entry (see below) instructs pdftex or the dvi driver to reencode the font on the fly\&. On\-the\-fly reencoding does not require virtual fonts\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-o\fR
+Use octal for all character codes in the pl file\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-e\fR \fIextend_factor\fR
+Widen or narrow characters by \fIextend_factor\fR\&. Default is 1\&.0 (natural width)\&. Not recommended, except that arguably a narrowed Courier is less jarring than a full\-width Courier, when used in combination with a normal proportional font\&. For Courier, choose \&.833 to match the width of cmtt\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-s\fR \fIslant_factor\fR
+Oblique (slant) characters by \fIslant_factor\fR\&. Not recommended\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-f\fR \fIfont_dimensions\fR
+The value is either the keyword afm2tfm or a comma\-separated list of up to five integers\&. The parameters are listed below, with their defaults and their value when the afm2tfm keyword is specified\&. 'Space' means the width of a space in the target font, except of course in the last row\&. Keep in mind that the design size is 1000, and that all numbers must be nonnegative integers\&.
+
+.PP
+.TS
+lll
+___
+lll.
+Font dimension Default value Afm2tfm value
+\fIstretch\fR space div 2 300 x \fIextend_factor\fR
+\fIshrink\fR space div 3 100 x \fIextend_factor\fR
+\fIextra space\fR space div 3 missing
+\fIquad\fR 2 x width of '0' 1000 x \fIextend_factor\fR
+\fIspace\fR (space source font) x \fIextend_factor\fR (space source font) x \fIextend_factor\fR
+.TE
+For fixed\-pitch fonts, different values apply:
+
+.PP
+.TS
+lll
+___
+lll.
+Font dimension Default value Afm2tfm value
+\fIstretch\fR 0 0
+\fIshrink\fR 0 0
+\fIextra space\fR space missing
+\fIquad\fR 2 x character width 1000 x \fIextend_factor\fR
+\fIspace\fR character width character width
+.TE
+Specify just a non\-default stretch and shrink with e\&.g\&. 150,70 and just a non\-default extra space with ,,10\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-k\fR
+Keep original ligatures\&. This option only has effect in combination with positive letterspacing; see the section on letterspacing and extra ligkern info\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-m\fR \fIletter_spacing\fR
+Letterspace by \fIletter_spacing\fR/1000 em (integer)\&. This is useful for making all\-caps typesetting look better\&. Try a value of e\&.g\&. 50 or 100\&. But see the section on letterspacing and extra ligkern info for details\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-l\fR \fIligkern_spec\fR, \fB\-L\fR \fIligkern_spec\fR
+See the section on extra ligkern info for details\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-V\fR
+Verbose\&. If turned on, it reports the number of missing glyphs to stderr and their names to stdout\&. This is not particularly logical, but this way the glyph names can be captured even under Windows\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-\-help\fR
+Display a short usage message\&.
+
+.TP
+\fB\-\-version\fR
+Display the version number of afm2pl\&.
+
+.SH "MAPFILE ENTRIES"
+
+.PP
+afm2pl writes a mapfile entry to a file with the same basename as the pl output file, but with extension \&.map\&. It can be used for the dvips mapfile and for the pdftex mapfile, although, in case of a geometrically transformed font, it may be better to remove the PostScript name for a pdftex mapfile entry\&. It is assumed that the pfb file has the same basename as the afm file and must be downloaded\&. You may have to hand\-edit this entry\&.
+
+.PP
+You can configure dvips and pdftex to read this additional mapfile or otherwise add the entry to an existing mapfile\&. It appears that pdftex automatically will consult a mapfile xxx\&.map for a font xxx\&.
+
+.SH "EXTRA LIGKERN INFO"
+
+.PP
+Most users are well\-advised to leave this mess alone and to accept the default behavior\&.
+
+.PP
+The ligatures and kerns present in the afm file can be modified in various ways\&. Default, the encoding file is scanned for extra ligkern specifications, whose format will be described below\&. If there are no ligkern specifications in the encoding file, then extra ligkern specifications will be read from a file default\&.lig\&. A value of 0 for \fIligkern_spec\fR means that the ligatures and kerns from the afm file won't be tampered with and a value of 1 specifies default behavior\&. One can also specify a comma\-separated list of files with extra ligkerns specs\&.
+
+.PP
+If afm2pl is compiled with the kpathsea library, then these files will be searched for under $TEXMF/fonts/lig\&.
+
+.PP
+Note that ligatures and kerns are hints for the typesetting application; there is no need to download this information to the printer or to make it available to a dvi driver\&.
+
+.PP
+The parser for ligkern info has been inherited from afm2tfm virtually without change\&. A ligkern specification can have one of the following forms:
+
+.IP
+
+\fIglyph_name1\fR \fIglyph_name2\fR \fIlig_op\fR \fIglyph_name3\fR ;
+
+.PP
+This specifies a ligature\&. Possible values for \fIlig_op\fR are =:, |=:, |=:>, =:|, =:|>, |=:|, |=:|> and |=:|>>\&. These correspond to LIG, /LIG, /LIG>, LIG/, LIG/>, /LIG/, /LIG/>, /LIG/>> in \&.pl syntax; see the pltotf documentation and the \&.lig files in the distribution\&.
+
+.IP
+
+\fIglyph_name1\fR <> \fIglyph_name2\fR ;
+
+.PP
+Kern \fIglyph_name1\fR as \fIglyph_name2\fR\&.
+
+.IP
+
+\fIglyph_name1\fR {} \fIglyph_name2\fR ;
+
+.PP
+Remove the kern between \fIglyph_name1\fR and \fIglyph_name2\fR\&. A value of * for either glyph name is interpreted as a wildcard\&.
+
+.IP
+
+|| = \fIglyph\fR ;
+
+.PP
+Set the (right) boundary character to \fIglyph\fR\&. \fIglyph\fR may be either a glyphname or a slot in the encoding vector\&. Choosing a glyph which doesn't occur in the output encoding is equivalent to not specifying a boundarychar at all\&. It is ok to pick an encoded glyphname which does not occur in the afm\&. In fact, this is what default\&.lig does: || = cwm ;\&.
+
+.PP
+You can copy the kerns of an unencoded character to the boundarychar:
+
+.IP
+
+|| <> space ;
+
+.PP
+This ligkern specification should occur before the one that deletes space kerns\&.
+
+.PP
+A ligkern specification should be contained within one line\&. One line may contain several ligkern specifications, separated by spaces\&. Note that ; (space followed by semicolon) is considered part of the ligkern specification\&. See the lig files included in this distribution\&. Example:
+
+.IP
+
+one {} * ; * {} one ; two {} * ; * {} two ;
+
+.PP
+Lines with ligkern specifications inside an encoding file should start with % LIGKERN\&. Ligkern specifications in a lig file may optionally start this way\&.
+
+.SH "LETTERSPACING AND EXTRA LIGKERN INFO"
+
+.PP
+Letterspacing has various side\-effects for ligkern info\&. Instead of simply applying the extra ligkern info (see previous section), the following is done:
+
+.TP 3
+1.
+In case of positive letterspacing, native ligatures are removed, unless the \-k option is specified\&.
+.TP
+2.
+Extra ligkern info is applied as usual, except that in case of positive letterspacing different defaults apply: \-l 0 is quietly ignored, ligkern comments in the encoding file are ignored, and defpre\&.lig is read instead of default\&.lig\&.
+.TP
+3.
+Letterspacing is applied\&. This adds a lot of kerns, and modifies existing kerns\&.
+.TP
+4.
+The extra ligkern info specified with \-L is applied\&. The only ligkern specs which are allowed here, are removals of kerning pairs (with the {} operator)\&. Values 0 and 1 have a similar meaning as for the \-l parameter\&. The tfm format has room for only about 180x180 ligatures and kerning pairs\&. This is enough for OT1 encoding, but for texnansi encoding quite a few ligkern specifications have to be removed\&. The pltotf program will remove all ligkern info if too many ligatures and kerns remain\&. The default lig file is defpost\&.lig\&. This file throws out kerning pairs which are unlikely to be involved in letterspacing, such as kerns involving accents or kerns with a punctuation character or right bracket at the left\&. It does not add letterspacing kerns involving boundarychars\&. Instead, fontspace is increased by twice the letterspacing\&. defpost\&.lig throws out enough kerns in case of texnansi encoding\&. With other encodings, you may have to throw out additional kerning pairs\&.
+.LP
+
+.SH "FONT-BASED UPPER- AND LOWERCASING"
+
+.PP
+The distribution includes encoding vectors texnanuc\&.enc and texnanlc\&.enc which produce all\-uppercase and all\-lowercase fonts\&. The distribution contains an example ucshape\&.tex on how to use such fonts with LaTeX font selection\&.
+
+.PP
+The principal uses for an all\-uppercase font are page headers and section heads\&. If these contain math, then macro\-based uppercasing would create unpleasant complications\&.
+
+.SS "The sz ligature"
+
+.PP
+Note that the texnanuc encoding provides no glyph for the sz ligature; you'll either have to substitute ss or provide a macro\-based solution\&. The following code uses either the usual glyph or substitutes the letters ss, depending on whether the glyph exists in the current font:
+
+.nf
+
+
+\\def\\ss{%
+ \\setbox0\\hbox{\\char25}%
+ \\ifnum\\wd0=0 ss\\else\\box0\\fi
+}
+
+
+.fi
+
+.PP
+In LaTeX, this code appears to work well enough, although on occasion you may need to insert \\protect\&. A better solution might involve the sixth parameter of the \\DeclareFontShape macro, but I failed to get that to work\&.
+
+.SH "AFM2PL, FONTINST AND ARTIFICIAL SMALLCAPS"
+
+.PP
+Afm2pl currently doesn't do virtual fonts\&. That means that for things such as artificial smallcaps you have to turn elsewhere, e\&.g\&. to the fontinst package, which is part of any mainstream TeX distribution\&.
+
+.PP
+Look under texmf/tex/fontinst for fontinst support files, which allow you to generate a smallcaps font (tfm and vf files) from an afm2pl\-generated tfm file\&. This package only supports texnansi encoding\&.
+
+.PP
+There should be no real problem in doing the same for OT1 encoding\&. However, there are several variations of the OT1 encoding to take care of\&. Also, there are as far as I know no officially sanctioned PostScript names for all the variations of the OT1 encoding; the fontinst names contain spaces and are therefore not useable as PostScript names\&.
+
+.SH "FUTURE PLANS"
+
+.PP
+I am considering a revision which makes afm2pl a more complete replacement for afm2tfm\&. In that version, afm2pl can optionally create a second, virtual font, possibly with a different encoding and possibly letterspaced\&. The current option of non\-virtual letterspacing via kerns will be dropped\&. If the encodings differ then it is assumed that the virtual font is intended as a small\-caps version of the main font, and a scaling parameter can be specified for non\-matching glyphs\&.
+
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+
+.PP
+The afm2pl distribution is subject to the GNU General Public Licence (GPL)\&. Please refer to the file COPYING for details\&.
+
+.PP
+The afm2pl homepage is http://www\&.ntg\&.nl/afm2pl\&.html: \fIhttp://www.ntg.nl/afm2pl.html\fR\&.
+
+.SH AUTHOR
+Siep Kroonenberg <ntg\-afm2pl@ntg\&.nl>.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..32822173aa4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+.\" man page for afm2tfm
+.TH AFM2TFM 1 "9 August 1990"
+.SH NAME
+afm2tfm \- convert Adobe font metrics to TeX font metrics
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+PostScript fonts are (or should be) accompanied by font metric files
+such as
+.B Times-Roman.afm,
+which describes the characteristics of the font called Times-Roman.
+To use such fonts with TeX, we need TFM files that contain similar
+information. This program does that conversion. For more
+information, print out the dvips manual.
+.SH FILES
+.I psfonts.map
+in the config directory used by dvips (update this).
+.br
+.I ../afm/Makefile
+in the dvips sources (look at this for examples).
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+dvips(1), tex(1), vptovf(1)
+.SH BUGS
+An option to add letterspacing to the virtual font was rejected by Knuth
+because it would make the fi and fl ligatures break the normal rhythmic pattern.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Tomas Rokicki <rokicki@cs.stanford.edu> and Donald E. Knuth
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fe75f4ef6d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+.TH allcm 1 "11/94" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.SH NAME
+allcm \- force the most important Computer\-Modern\-fonts to be calculated
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B allcm [-r]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I allcm
+forces a large number of Computer Modern Fonts to be calculated as pixel files.
+This is done through running
+.IR dvips (1)
+over a certain test-file. Therefore, the fonts are created in the resolution
+needed by dvips.
+
+If the \-r flag is specified, the command
+.IR dvired (1)
+will be used instead of dvips.
+
+.I allcm
+does not recalculate existing fonts (as long as the Metafont mode does not change).
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+allec(1),
+allneeded(1),
+dvips(1),
+dvired(1).
+
+.SH AUTHOR
+Thomas Esser <te@dbs.uni-hannover.de>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..fa06b6c24bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+allcm.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7d9a67548b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+.TH allneeded 1 "11/94" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.SH NAME
+allneeded \- force the calculation of all fonts now needed
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B allneeded [\-r] files ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I allneeded
+forces the calculation of all fonts that are needed to preview a set of
+dvi files. Just specify where the program should search for files on the
+commandline.
+The fonts generation is triggered by running
+.IR dvips (1)
+over all accessible dvi\-files. Therefore, the fonts are created in the resolution
+needed by dvips.
+
+If the \-r flag is specified, the command
+.IR dvired (1)
+will be used instead of dvips.
+
+.I allneeded
+does not recalculate existing fonts (as long as the Metafont mode does not change).
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+allec(1),
+allcm(1),
+dvips(1),
+dvired(1).
+
+.SH AUTHOR
+Thomas Esser <te@dbs.uni-hannover.de>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..68697a02901
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+.TH AMSTEX 1 "27 December 1992" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+amstex \- structured text formatting and typesetting
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B amstex
+[ first line ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The \*(AX language is described in the book
+.IR "The Joy of \*(OX" .
+\*(AX is a \*(TX macro package, not a modification to the \*(TX source
+program, so all the capabilities described in
+.BR tex (1)
+are present.
+.PP
+The \*(AX macros encourage writers to think about the content of their
+documents, rather than the form. The ideal, not always realized, is to
+have no formatting commands (like ``switch to italic'' or ``skip 2
+picas'') in the document at all; instead, everything is done
+by specific markup instructions: ``emphasize'', ``start a section''.
+.PP
+\*(AX is the official typesetting system of the American Mathematical
+Society, and nearly all of its publications are typeset using \*(AX. The
+online version of AMS Math Reviews uses \*(AX input syntax for display of
+mathematical material. AMS authors can provide editors with
+computer-readable \*(AX files.
+.PP
+For authors more familiar with \*(LX, an AMS-supported package called
+.I amsmath.sty
+is is available.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.I amsguide.tex"
+Documentation for \*(AX, typesettable by \*(TX.
+.TP
+.I amfndoc.tex"
+Documentation for AMS fonts, typesettable by \*(TX.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR latex (1),
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR slitex (1).
+.br
+Michael Spivak,
+.IR "The Joy of \*(OX" ,
+2nd edition, Addison-Wesley, 1990, ISBN 0-8218-2997-1.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a1925691345
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+.\" man page for bg5conv
+.
+.TH BG5CONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0"
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.
+.\" and here the same for \LaTeX
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \
+.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX
+.\}
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.
+.\" \LaTeXe
+.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be
+.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font)
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v'
+.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v'
+.\}
+.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e
+.
+.\" a typewriter font
+.if t \{\
+.de C
+\fC\\$1\fP\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.if n \{\
+.de C
+\\$1\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== end of macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.
+.
+.SH NAME
+bg5conv \- convert a TeX document in Big\ 5 encoding into `preprocessed'
+form.
+.
+.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B bg5conv
+<
+.I infile
+>
+.I outfile
+.
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Big\ 5 encoding for traditional Chinese uses the characters
+.C { ,
+.C } ,
+and
+.C \e
+which have special meanings in \*(TX
+documents.
+.PP
+After processing a \*(LE
+document which contains Big\ 5 characters with
+.B bg5conv
+you need not care about these special characters.
+.PP
+This filter is part of the
+.B CJK
+macro package for \*(LE.
+.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR \%sjisconv (1),
+.BR \%cefconv (1),
+.BR cef5conv (1),
+.BR \%cefsconv (1),
+.BR \%extconv (1),
+.br
+the
+.B CJK
+documentation files.
+.
+.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Werner Lemberg
+.C <wl@gnu.org>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4be5efd8bb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+.TH BIBTEX 1 "24 November 1994" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\\s-2A\\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+bibtex \- make a bibliography for (La)TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B bibtex
+[
+.BI -min-crossrefs =number
+]
+[
+.B -terse
+]
+[
+.I auxname
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+\*(BX reads the top-level auxiliary
+.RI ( .aux )
+file that was output during the running of
+.BR latex (1)
+or
+.BR tex (1)
+and creates a bibliography
+.RI ( .bbl )
+file that will be incorporated into the document on subsequent runs of
+\*(LX or \*(TX. The
+.I auxname
+on the command line must be given without the
+.I .aux
+extension. If you don't give the
+.IR auxname ,
+the program prompts you for it.
+.PP
+\*(BX looks up, in bibliographic database
+.RI ( .bib )
+files specified by the \\bibliography command,
+the entries specified by the \\cite and \\nocite commands
+in the \*(LX or \*(TX source file.
+It formats the information from those entries
+according to instructions in a bibliography style
+.RI ( .bst )
+file (specified by the \\bibliographystyle command,
+and it outputs the results to the
+.I .bbl
+file.
+.PP
+The \*(LX manual
+explains what a \*(LX source file must contain to work with \*(BX.
+Appendix B of the manual describes the format of the
+.I .bib
+files. The `\*(BXing' document describes extensions and details of
+this format, and it gives other useful hints for using \*(BX.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.B -min-crossrefs
+option defines the minimum number of
+.B crossref
+required for automatic inclusion of the crossref'd entry on the citation
+list; the default is two.
+With the
+.B -terse
+option, \*(BX operates silently. Without it, a banner and progress
+reports are printed on
+.IR stdout .
+.PP
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+\*(BX searches the directories in the
+path defined by the BSTINPUTS environment variable for
+.I .bst
+files. If BSTINPUTS is not set, it uses the system default.
+For
+.I .bib
+files, it uses the BIBINPUTS environment variable if that is set,
+otherwise the default.
+See
+.BR tex (1)
+for the details of the searching.
+.PP
+If the environment variable
+TEXMFOUTPUT is set, \*(BX attempts to put its output
+files in it, if they cannot be put in the current directory. Again, see
+.BR tex (1).
+No special searching is done for the
+.I .aux
+file.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.I *.bst
+Bibliography style files.
+.TP
+.I btxdoc.tex
+``\*(BXing'' \- \*(LXable documentation for general \*(BX users
+.TP
+.I btxhak.tex
+``Designing \*(BX Styles'' \- \*(LXable documentation for style designers
+.TP
+.I btxdoc.bib
+database file for those two documents
+.TP
+.I xampl.bib
+database file giving examples of all standard entry types
+.TP
+.I btxbst.doc
+template file and documentation for the standard styles
+.PP
+All those files should be available somewhere on your system.
+.PP
+The host math.utah.edu has a vast collection of
+.I .bib
+files available for anonymous ftp, including references for all the
+standard \*(TX books and a complete bibliography for TUGboat.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR latex (1),
+.BR tex (1).
+.br
+Leslie Lamport,
+.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" ,
+Addison-Wesley, 1985, ISBN 0-201-15790-X.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHOR
+Oren Patashnik, Stanford University. This man page describes the web2c
+version of \*(BX. Other ports of \*(BX, such as Donald Knuth's version
+using the Sun Pascal compiler, do not have the same path searching
+implementation, or the command-line options.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bzip2.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bzip2.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..623435c2427
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bzip2.1
@@ -0,0 +1,453 @@
+.PU
+.TH bzip2 1
+.SH NAME
+bzip2, bunzip2 \- a block-sorting file compressor, v1.0.2
+.br
+bzcat \- decompresses files to stdout
+.br
+bzip2recover \- recovers data from damaged bzip2 files
+
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.ll +8
+.B bzip2
+.RB [ " \-cdfkqstvzVL123456789 " ]
+[
+.I "filenames \&..."
+]
+.ll -8
+.br
+.B bunzip2
+.RB [ " \-fkvsVL " ]
+[
+.I "filenames \&..."
+]
+.br
+.B bzcat
+.RB [ " \-s " ]
+[
+.I "filenames \&..."
+]
+.br
+.B bzip2recover
+.I "filename"
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I bzip2
+compresses files using the Burrows-Wheeler block sorting
+text compression algorithm, and Huffman coding. Compression is
+generally considerably better than that achieved by more conventional
+LZ77/LZ78-based compressors, and approaches the performance of the PPM
+family of statistical compressors.
+
+The command-line options are deliberately very similar to
+those of
+.I GNU gzip,
+but they are not identical.
+
+.I bzip2
+expects a list of file names to accompany the
+command-line flags. Each file is replaced by a compressed version of
+itself, with the name "original_name.bz2".
+Each compressed file
+has the same modification date, permissions, and, when possible,
+ownership as the corresponding original, so that these properties can
+be correctly restored at decompression time. File name handling is
+naive in the sense that there is no mechanism for preserving original
+file names, permissions, ownerships or dates in filesystems which lack
+these concepts, or have serious file name length restrictions, such as
+MS-DOS.
+
+.I bzip2
+and
+.I bunzip2
+will by default not overwrite existing
+files. If you want this to happen, specify the \-f flag.
+
+If no file names are specified,
+.I bzip2
+compresses from standard
+input to standard output. In this case,
+.I bzip2
+will decline to
+write compressed output to a terminal, as this would be entirely
+incomprehensible and therefore pointless.
+
+.I bunzip2
+(or
+.I bzip2 \-d)
+decompresses all
+specified files. Files which were not created by
+.I bzip2
+will be detected and ignored, and a warning issued.
+.I bzip2
+attempts to guess the filename for the decompressed file
+from that of the compressed file as follows:
+
+ filename.bz2 becomes filename
+ filename.bz becomes filename
+ filename.tbz2 becomes filename.tar
+ filename.tbz becomes filename.tar
+ anyothername becomes anyothername.out
+
+If the file does not end in one of the recognised endings,
+.I .bz2,
+.I .bz,
+.I .tbz2
+or
+.I .tbz,
+.I bzip2
+complains that it cannot
+guess the name of the original file, and uses the original name
+with
+.I .out
+appended.
+
+As with compression, supplying no
+filenames causes decompression from
+standard input to standard output.
+
+.I bunzip2
+will correctly decompress a file which is the
+concatenation of two or more compressed files. The result is the
+concatenation of the corresponding uncompressed files. Integrity
+testing (\-t)
+of concatenated
+compressed files is also supported.
+
+You can also compress or decompress files to the standard output by
+giving the \-c flag. Multiple files may be compressed and
+decompressed like this. The resulting outputs are fed sequentially to
+stdout. Compression of multiple files
+in this manner generates a stream
+containing multiple compressed file representations. Such a stream
+can be decompressed correctly only by
+.I bzip2
+version 0.9.0 or
+later. Earlier versions of
+.I bzip2
+will stop after decompressing
+the first file in the stream.
+
+.I bzcat
+(or
+.I bzip2 -dc)
+decompresses all specified files to
+the standard output.
+
+.I bzip2
+will read arguments from the environment variables
+.I BZIP2
+and
+.I BZIP,
+in that order, and will process them
+before any arguments read from the command line. This gives a
+convenient way to supply default arguments.
+
+Compression is always performed, even if the compressed
+file is slightly
+larger than the original. Files of less than about one hundred bytes
+tend to get larger, since the compression mechanism has a constant
+overhead in the region of 50 bytes. Random data (including the output
+of most file compressors) is coded at about 8.05 bits per byte, giving
+an expansion of around 0.5%.
+
+As a self-check for your protection,
+.I
+bzip2
+uses 32-bit CRCs to
+make sure that the decompressed version of a file is identical to the
+original. This guards against corruption of the compressed data, and
+against undetected bugs in
+.I bzip2
+(hopefully very unlikely). The
+chances of data corruption going undetected is microscopic, about one
+chance in four billion for each file processed. Be aware, though, that
+the check occurs upon decompression, so it can only tell you that
+something is wrong. It can't help you
+recover the original uncompressed
+data. You can use
+.I bzip2recover
+to try to recover data from
+damaged files.
+
+Return values: 0 for a normal exit, 1 for environmental problems (file
+not found, invalid flags, I/O errors, &c), 2 to indicate a corrupt
+compressed file, 3 for an internal consistency error (eg, bug) which
+caused
+.I bzip2
+to panic.
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-c --stdout
+Compress or decompress to standard output.
+.TP
+.B \-d --decompress
+Force decompression.
+.I bzip2,
+.I bunzip2
+and
+.I bzcat
+are
+really the same program, and the decision about what actions to take is
+done on the basis of which name is used. This flag overrides that
+mechanism, and forces
+.I bzip2
+to decompress.
+.TP
+.B \-z --compress
+The complement to \-d: forces compression, regardless of the
+invocation name.
+.TP
+.B \-t --test
+Check integrity of the specified file(s), but don't decompress them.
+This really performs a trial decompression and throws away the result.
+.TP
+.B \-f --force
+Force overwrite of output files. Normally,
+.I bzip2
+will not overwrite
+existing output files. Also forces
+.I bzip2
+to break hard links
+to files, which it otherwise wouldn't do.
+
+bzip2 normally declines to decompress files which don't have the
+correct magic header bytes. If forced (-f), however, it will pass
+such files through unmodified. This is how GNU gzip behaves.
+.TP
+.B \-k --keep
+Keep (don't delete) input files during compression
+or decompression.
+.TP
+.B \-s --small
+Reduce memory usage, for compression, decompression and testing. Files
+are decompressed and tested using a modified algorithm which only
+requires 2.5 bytes per block byte. This means any file can be
+decompressed in 2300k of memory, albeit at about half the normal speed.
+
+During compression, \-s selects a block size of 200k, which limits
+memory use to around the same figure, at the expense of your compression
+ratio. In short, if your machine is low on memory (8 megabytes or
+less), use \-s for everything. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
+.TP
+.B \-q --quiet
+Suppress non-essential warning messages. Messages pertaining to
+I/O errors and other critical events will not be suppressed.
+.TP
+.B \-v --verbose
+Verbose mode -- show the compression ratio for each file processed.
+Further \-v's increase the verbosity level, spewing out lots of
+information which is primarily of interest for diagnostic purposes.
+.TP
+.B \-L --license -V --version
+Display the software version, license terms and conditions.
+.TP
+.B \-1 (or \-\-fast) to \-9 (or \-\-best)
+Set the block size to 100 k, 200 k .. 900 k when compressing. Has no
+effect when decompressing. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
+The \-\-fast and \-\-best aliases are primarily for GNU gzip
+compatibility. In particular, \-\-fast doesn't make things
+significantly faster.
+And \-\-best merely selects the default behaviour.
+.TP
+.B \--
+Treats all subsequent arguments as file names, even if they start
+with a dash. This is so you can handle files with names beginning
+with a dash, for example: bzip2 \-- \-myfilename.
+.TP
+.B \--repetitive-fast --repetitive-best
+These flags are redundant in versions 0.9.5 and above. They provided
+some coarse control over the behaviour of the sorting algorithm in
+earlier versions, which was sometimes useful. 0.9.5 and above have an
+improved algorithm which renders these flags irrelevant.
+
+.SH MEMORY MANAGEMENT
+.I bzip2
+compresses large files in blocks. The block size affects
+both the compression ratio achieved, and the amount of memory needed for
+compression and decompression. The flags \-1 through \-9
+specify the block size to be 100,000 bytes through 900,000 bytes (the
+default) respectively. At decompression time, the block size used for
+compression is read from the header of the compressed file, and
+.I bunzip2
+then allocates itself just enough memory to decompress
+the file. Since block sizes are stored in compressed files, it follows
+that the flags \-1 to \-9 are irrelevant to and so ignored
+during decompression.
+
+Compression and decompression requirements,
+in bytes, can be estimated as:
+
+ Compression: 400k + ( 8 x block size )
+
+ Decompression: 100k + ( 4 x block size ), or
+ 100k + ( 2.5 x block size )
+
+Larger block sizes give rapidly diminishing marginal returns. Most of
+the compression comes from the first two or three hundred k of block
+size, a fact worth bearing in mind when using
+.I bzip2
+on small machines.
+It is also important to appreciate that the decompression memory
+requirement is set at compression time by the choice of block size.
+
+For files compressed with the default 900k block size,
+.I bunzip2
+will require about 3700 kbytes to decompress. To support decompression
+of any file on a 4 megabyte machine,
+.I bunzip2
+has an option to
+decompress using approximately half this amount of memory, about 2300
+kbytes. Decompression speed is also halved, so you should use this
+option only where necessary. The relevant flag is -s.
+
+In general, try and use the largest block size memory constraints allow,
+since that maximises the compression achieved. Compression and
+decompression speed are virtually unaffected by block size.
+
+Another significant point applies to files which fit in a single block
+-- that means most files you'd encounter using a large block size. The
+amount of real memory touched is proportional to the size of the file,
+since the file is smaller than a block. For example, compressing a file
+20,000 bytes long with the flag -9 will cause the compressor to
+allocate around 7600k of memory, but only touch 400k + 20000 * 8 = 560
+kbytes of it. Similarly, the decompressor will allocate 3700k but only
+touch 100k + 20000 * 4 = 180 kbytes.
+
+Here is a table which summarises the maximum memory usage for different
+block sizes. Also recorded is the total compressed size for 14 files of
+the Calgary Text Compression Corpus totalling 3,141,622 bytes. This
+column gives some feel for how compression varies with block size.
+These figures tend to understate the advantage of larger block sizes for
+larger files, since the Corpus is dominated by smaller files.
+
+ Compress Decompress Decompress Corpus
+ Flag usage usage -s usage Size
+
+ -1 1200k 500k 350k 914704
+ -2 2000k 900k 600k 877703
+ -3 2800k 1300k 850k 860338
+ -4 3600k 1700k 1100k 846899
+ -5 4400k 2100k 1350k 845160
+ -6 5200k 2500k 1600k 838626
+ -7 6100k 2900k 1850k 834096
+ -8 6800k 3300k 2100k 828642
+ -9 7600k 3700k 2350k 828642
+
+.SH RECOVERING DATA FROM DAMAGED FILES
+.I bzip2
+compresses files in blocks, usually 900kbytes long. Each
+block is handled independently. If a media or transmission error causes
+a multi-block .bz2
+file to become damaged, it may be possible to
+recover data from the undamaged blocks in the file.
+
+The compressed representation of each block is delimited by a 48-bit
+pattern, which makes it possible to find the block boundaries with
+reasonable certainty. Each block also carries its own 32-bit CRC, so
+damaged blocks can be distinguished from undamaged ones.
+
+.I bzip2recover
+is a simple program whose purpose is to search for
+blocks in .bz2 files, and write each block out into its own .bz2
+file. You can then use
+.I bzip2
+\-t
+to test the
+integrity of the resulting files, and decompress those which are
+undamaged.
+
+.I bzip2recover
+takes a single argument, the name of the damaged file,
+and writes a number of files "rec00001file.bz2",
+"rec00002file.bz2", etc, containing the extracted blocks.
+The output filenames are designed so that the use of
+wildcards in subsequent processing -- for example,
+"bzip2 -dc rec*file.bz2 > recovered_data" -- processes the files in
+the correct order.
+
+.I bzip2recover
+should be of most use dealing with large .bz2
+files, as these will contain many blocks. It is clearly
+futile to use it on damaged single-block files, since a
+damaged block cannot be recovered. If you wish to minimise
+any potential data loss through media or transmission errors,
+you might consider compressing with a smaller
+block size.
+
+.SH PERFORMANCE NOTES
+The sorting phase of compression gathers together similar strings in the
+file. Because of this, files containing very long runs of repeated
+symbols, like "aabaabaabaab ..." (repeated several hundred times) may
+compress more slowly than normal. Versions 0.9.5 and above fare much
+better than previous versions in this respect. The ratio between
+worst-case and average-case compression time is in the region of 10:1.
+For previous versions, this figure was more like 100:1. You can use the
+\-vvvv option to monitor progress in great detail, if you want.
+
+Decompression speed is unaffected by these phenomena.
+
+.I bzip2
+usually allocates several megabytes of memory to operate
+in, and then charges all over it in a fairly random fashion. This means
+that performance, both for compressing and decompressing, is largely
+determined by the speed at which your machine can service cache misses.
+Because of this, small changes to the code to reduce the miss rate have
+been observed to give disproportionately large performance improvements.
+I imagine
+.I bzip2
+will perform best on machines with very large caches.
+
+.SH CAVEATS
+I/O error messages are not as helpful as they could be.
+.I bzip2
+tries hard to detect I/O errors and exit cleanly, but the details of
+what the problem is sometimes seem rather misleading.
+
+This manual page pertains to version 1.0.2 of
+.I bzip2.
+Compressed data created by this version is entirely forwards and
+backwards compatible with the previous public releases, versions
+0.1pl2, 0.9.0, 0.9.5, 1.0.0 and 1.0.1, but with the following
+exception: 0.9.0 and above can correctly decompress multiple
+concatenated compressed files. 0.1pl2 cannot do this; it will stop
+after decompressing just the first file in the stream.
+
+.I bzip2recover
+versions prior to this one, 1.0.2, used 32-bit integers to represent
+bit positions in compressed files, so it could not handle compressed
+files more than 512 megabytes long. Version 1.0.2 and above uses
+64-bit ints on some platforms which support them (GNU supported
+targets, and Windows). To establish whether or not bzip2recover was
+built with such a limitation, run it without arguments. In any event
+you can build yourself an unlimited version if you can recompile it
+with MaybeUInt64 set to be an unsigned 64-bit integer.
+
+
+
+.SH AUTHOR
+Julian Seward, jseward@acm.org.
+
+http://sources.redhat.com/bzip2
+
+The ideas embodied in
+.I bzip2
+are due to (at least) the following
+people: Michael Burrows and David Wheeler (for the block sorting
+transformation), David Wheeler (again, for the Huffman coder), Peter
+Fenwick (for the structured coding model in the original
+.I bzip,
+and many refinements), and Alistair Moffat, Radford Neal and Ian Witten
+(for the arithmetic coder in the original
+.I bzip).
+I am much
+indebted for their help, support and advice. See the manual in the
+source distribution for pointers to sources of documentation. Christian
+von Roques encouraged me to look for faster sorting algorithms, so as to
+speed up compression. Bela Lubkin encouraged me to improve the
+worst-case compression performance.
+The bz* scripts are derived from those of GNU gzip.
+Many people sent patches, helped
+with portability problems, lent machines, gave advice and were generally
+helpful.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7f3a8dc87cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+.\" man page for cef5conv
+.
+.TH CEF5CONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0"
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.
+.\" and here the same for \LaTeX
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \
+.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX
+.\}
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.
+.\" \LaTeXe
+.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be
+.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font)
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v'
+.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v'
+.\}
+.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e
+.
+.\" a typewriter font
+.if t \{\
+.de C
+\fC\\$1\fP
+..
+.\}
+.if n \{\
+.de C
+\\$1
+..
+.\}
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== end of macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.
+.
+.SH NAME
+cef5conv \- convert a TeX document in Big\ 5 encoding containing CEF macros
+into `preprocessed' form.
+.
+.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cef5conv
+<
+.I infile
+>
+.I outfile
+.
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.B Chinese Encoding Framework
+.RB ( CEF )
+developed by Christian Wittern
+.C <cwittern@conline.central.de>
+makes it possible to include CJK characters in various encodings using the
+SGML macros
+.B &CX-aabb;
+for Big\ 5 and CNS encoding and
+.B &U-aabb;
+for Unicode
+.RB ( X
+denotes a number between 0 and 7; 0 represents Big\ 5 encoding, 1-7 CNS
+encoding planes 1-7.
+.B aabb
+is either a decimal or hexadecimal number).
+.PP
+.B cef5conv
+converts the CEF macros of a Big\ 5 encoded document together with the Big\
+5 encoding itself into a form which can directly processed with \*(LE.
+It is identical to
+.IP
+.B bg5conv
+<
+.I infile
+|
+.B cefconv
+>
+.I outfile
+.PP
+This filter is part of the
+.B CJK
+macro package for \*(LE.
+.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR \%sjisconv (1),
+.BR bg5conv (1),
+.BR \%cefconv (1),
+.BR \%cefsconv (1),
+.BR \%extconv (1),
+.br
+the
+.B CJK
+documentation files.
+.
+.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Werner Lemberg
+.C <wl@gnu.org>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d5ff6b17abe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+.\" man page for cefconv
+.
+.TH CEFCONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0"
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.
+.\" and here the same for \LaTeX
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \
+.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX
+.\}
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.
+.\" \LaTeXe
+.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be
+.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font)
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v'
+.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v'
+.\}
+.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e
+.
+.\" a typewriter font
+.if t \{\
+.de C
+\fC\\$1\fP
+..
+.\}
+.if n \{\
+.de C
+\\$1
+..
+.\}
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== end of macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.
+.
+.SH NAME
+cefconv \- convert a TeX document containing CEF macros into `preprocessed'
+form.
+.
+.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cefconv
+<
+.I infile
+>
+.I outfile
+.
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.B Chinese Encoding Framework
+.RB ( CEF )
+developed by Christian Wittern
+.C <cwittern@conline.central.de>
+makes it possible to include CJK characters in various encodings using the
+SGML macros
+.B &CX-aabb;
+for Big\ 5 and CNS encoding and
+.B &U-aabb;
+for Unicode
+.RB ( X
+denotes a number between 0 and 7; 0 represents Big\ 5 encoding, 1-7 CNS
+encoding planes 1-7.
+.B aabb
+is either a decimal or hexadecimal number)
+.PP
+.B \%cefconv
+converts the CEF macros into a form which can directly processed with \*(LE.
+.PP
+This filter is part of the
+.B CJK
+macro package for \*(LE.
+.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR \%sjisconv (1),
+.BR bg5conv (1),
+.BR cef5conv (1),
+.BR \%cefsconv (1),
+.BR \%extconv (1),
+.br
+the
+.B CJK
+documentation files.
+.
+.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Werner Lemberg
+.C <wl@gnu.org>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0dddcecb143
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+.\" man page for cefsconv
+.
+.TH CEFSCONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0"
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.
+.\" and here the same for \LaTeX
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \
+.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX
+.\}
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.
+.\" \LaTeXe
+.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be
+.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font)
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v'
+.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v'
+.\}
+.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e
+.
+.\" a typewriter font
+.if t \{\
+.de C
+\fC\\$1\fP
+..
+.\}
+.if n \{\
+.de C
+\\$1
+..
+.\}
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== end of macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.
+.
+.SH NAME
+cefsconv \- convert a TeX document in SJIS encoding containing CEF macros
+into `preprocessed' form.
+.
+.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cefsconv
+<
+.I infile
+>
+.I outfile
+.
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.B Chinese Encoding Framework
+.RB ( CEF )
+developed by Christian Wittern
+.C <cwittern@conline.central.de>
+makes it possible to include CJK characters in various encodings using the
+SGML macros
+.B &CX-aabb;
+for Big\ 5 and CNS encoding and
+.B &U-aabb;
+for Unicode
+.RB ( X
+denotes a number between 0 and 7; 0 represents Big\ 5 encoding, 1-7 CNS
+encoding planes 1-7.
+.B aabb
+is either a decimal or hexadecimal number).
+.PP
+.B \%cefsconv
+converts the CEF macros of a SJIS encoded document together with the SJIS
+encoding itself into a form which can directly processed with \*(LE.
+It is identical to
+.IP
+.B sjisconv
+<
+.I infile
+|
+.B cefconv
+>
+.I outfile
+.PP
+This filter is part of the
+.B CJK
+macro package for \*(LE.
+.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR \%sjisconv (1),
+.BR bg5conv (1),
+.BR \%cefconv (1),
+.BR cef5conv (1),
+.BR \%extconv (1),
+.br
+the
+.B CJK
+documentation files.
+.
+.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Werner Lemberg
+.C <wl@gnu.org>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dbe0512c1da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+.ds V 2.34
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.de Sp
+.if n .sp
+.if t .sp 0.4
+..
+.TH CFFTOT1 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+cfftot1 \- convert PostScript font from CFF to Type 1
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B cfftot1
+\%[\fB\-a\fR]
+\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.BR Cfftot1
+converts PostScript font programs in the Compact Font Format (CFF) into
+Type 1 font programs in PFB or PFA format, preserving all hints that can be
+represented in Type 1. The input file should be a raw CFF file or a
+PostScript-flavored OpenType font. If the file
+.I output
+is not specified output goes to the standard output.
+If the file
+.I input
+is not specified input comes from the standard input.
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BI \-a "\fR, " \-\-pfa
+Output font in ASCII PFA format.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-b "\fR, " \-\-pfb
+Output font in binary PFB format. This is the default.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-n " name\fR, " \-\-name " name"
+Output the CFF's component font named
+.IR name .
+CFF files can contain more than one font, although few do. Use this option
+to select a particular font from a multi-font collection. By default
+cfftot1 chooses the collection's first font.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-o " file\fR, " \-\-output " file"
+Write output font to
+.IR file
+instead of the standard output.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet
+Do not generate any error messages.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-h ", " \-\-help
+Print usage information and exit.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-v ", " \-\-version
+Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit.
+.PD
+'
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M t1binary 1 ,
+.M t1ascii 1
+.LP
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format"
+.LP
+Adobe Technical Notes #5176,
+.IR "The Compact Font Format Specification" ,
+and #5177,
+.I "The Type 2 Charstring Format"
+.LP
+.IR "OpenType Specification" ,
+Version 1.4
+'
+.SH AUTHOR
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-de.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-de.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e28b87d88e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-de.1
@@ -0,0 +1,458 @@
+.TH PDFETEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.3"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+pdfetex, pdfeinitex, pdfevirtex \- PDF output from e-TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pdfetex
+.RI [ options ]
+.RI [ commands ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+pdfe\*(TX is a version of e-\*(TX that can create
+.I PDF
+files as well as
+.I DVI
+files.
+.PP
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, pdfe\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement of the e-\*(TX
+engine.
+.PP
+The typical use of pdfe\*(TX is with a pregenerated formats for which
+PDF output has been enabled. The
+.B pdfetex
+command uses the equivalent of the plain e-\*(TX format, and the
+.B pdfelatex
+command uses the equivalent of the e-\*(LX format.
+To generate formats, use the
+.B -ini
+switch.
+.PP
+The
+.B pdfeinitex
+and
+.B pdfevirtex
+commands are pdfe\*(TX's analogues to the
+.B einitex
+and
+.B evirtex
+commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the
+.B pdfetex
+executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all.
+.PP
+In
+.I PDF
+mode, pdfe\*(TX can natively handle the
+.IR PDF ,
+.IR JPG ,
+and
+.I PNG
+graphics formats.
+pdfe\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of
+of the other \*(TX programs in the
+.I web2c
+implementation.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of pdfe\*(TX understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.BI -fmt \ format
+.rb
+Use
+.I format
+as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
+pdfe\*(TX was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -enc
+.rb
+Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in
+combination with
+.BR -ini .
+For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see
+.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html .
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error
+.rb
+Print error messages in the form
+.I file:line:error
+which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
+.TP
+.B -no-file-line-error
+.rb
+Disable printing error messages in the
+.I file:line:error
+style.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error-style
+.rb
+This is the old name of the
+.B -file-line-error
+option.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -ini
+.rb
+Start in
+.I INI
+mode, which is used to dump formats. The
+.I INI
+mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and
+basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required.
+.TP
+.BI -interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+\ecommands.
+.TP
+.B -ipc
+.rb
+Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output file.
+Whether this option is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.B -ipc-start
+.rb
+As
+.BR -ipc ,
+and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
+is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.BI -jobname \ name
+.rb
+Use
+.I name
+for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
+.TP
+.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI -mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.B -mltex
+.rb
+Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with
+.BR -ini .
+.TP
+.BI -no-mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI -output-comment \ string
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, use
+.I string
+for the
+.I DVI
+file comment instead of the date. This option is ignored
+in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.BI -output-format \ format
+.rb
+Set the output format mode, where
+.I format
+must be either
+.I pdf
+or
+.IR dvi .
+This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by pdfe\*(TX.
+.TP
+.B -parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name or a
+.B -translate-file
+option.
+.TP
+.B -no-parse-first-line
+.rb
+Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file.
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B -recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder.
+This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output
+in a file with extension
+.IR .fls .
+.TP
+.B -shell-escape
+.rb
+Enable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct. The
+.I command
+can be any shell command. This construct is normally
+disallowed for security reasons.
+.TP
+.B -no-shell-escape
+.rb
+Disable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct, even if it is enabled in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file.
+.TP
+.B -src-specials
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials into the
+.I DVI
+file.
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -src-specials \ where
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials in certain placed of the
+.I DVI
+file.
+.I where
+is a comma-separated value list:
+.IR cr ,
+.IR display ,
+.IR hbox ,
+.IR math ,
+.IR par ,
+.IR parent ,
+or
+.IR vbox .
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Use the
+.I tcxname
+translation table to set the mapping of input characters and
+re-mapping of output characters.
+.TP
+.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Like
+.B -translate-file
+except that a
+.I %&
+line can overrule this setting.
+.TP
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
+The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+One caveat: In most pdfe\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
+give directly to pdfe\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
+expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
+\*(MF, do not have this problem.
+.PP
+.TP
+TEXMFOUTPUT
+Normally, pdfe\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If
+any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
+directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
+There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+.I pdfetex paper
+and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
+the value
+.IR /tmp ,
+pdfe\*(TX attempts to create
+.I /tmp/paper.log
+(and
+.IR /tmp/paper.pdf ,
+if any output is produced.)
+.TP
+TEXINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I \einput
+and
+.I \eopenin
+files.
+This should probably start with ``.'', so
+that user files are found before system files. An empty path
+component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
+current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
+.TP
+TEXFORMATS
+Search path for format files.
+.TP
+TEXPOOL
+search path for
+.B pdfetex
+internal strings.
+.TP
+TEXEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+.BR vi ,
+is set when pdfe\*(TX is compiled.
+.TP
+TFMFONTS
+Search path for font metric
+.RI ( .tfm )
+files.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I pdfetex.pool
+Text file containing pdfe\*(TX's internal strings.
+.TP
+.I pdftex.map
+Filename mapping definitions.
+.TP
+.I *.tfm
+Metric files for pdfe\*(TX's fonts.
+.TP
+.I *.fmt
+Predigested pdfe\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files.
+.br
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+This version of pdfe\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions.
+In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
+extent with the definition of pdfe\*(TX. When such extensions are
+enabled, the banner printed when pdfe\*(TX starts is changed to print
+.B pdfeTeXk
+instead of
+.BR pdfeTeX .
+.PP
+This version of pdfe\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
+dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
+but when it does the generated
+.I DVI
+file will be invalid. Whether a generated
+.I PDF
+file would be usable is unknown.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+pdfe\*(TX is available for a large variety of machine architectures
+and operation systems.
+pdfe\*(TX is part of all major \*(TX distributions.
+.P
+Information on how to get pdfe\*(TX and related information
+is available at the
+.BI "http://tug.org" \ TUG
+website.
+The most recent version of pdfe\*(TX is available for anonymous
+ftp at the
+.B http://www.pdftex.de/tex/pdftex/
+.IR "pdfe\*(TX development site" .
+.P
+The following pdfe\*(TX related mailing list is available:
+.BR pdftex@tug.org .
+This is a majordomo list;
+to subscribe send a message containing
+.I subscribe pdftex
+to
+.BR majordomo@tug.org .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1),
+.BR etex (1),
+.BR pdftex (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+The primary authors of pdf\*(TX are Han The Thanh, Petr Sojka, and
+Jiri Zlatuska.
+.PP
+\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth,
+who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs.
+It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and
+at Cornell by Pavel Curtis.
+The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that
+generated by the \*(WB to C system
+.RB ( web2c ),
+originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan.
+.PP
+The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-en.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-en.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e28b87d88e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-en.1
@@ -0,0 +1,458 @@
+.TH PDFETEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.3"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+pdfetex, pdfeinitex, pdfevirtex \- PDF output from e-TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pdfetex
+.RI [ options ]
+.RI [ commands ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+pdfe\*(TX is a version of e-\*(TX that can create
+.I PDF
+files as well as
+.I DVI
+files.
+.PP
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, pdfe\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement of the e-\*(TX
+engine.
+.PP
+The typical use of pdfe\*(TX is with a pregenerated formats for which
+PDF output has been enabled. The
+.B pdfetex
+command uses the equivalent of the plain e-\*(TX format, and the
+.B pdfelatex
+command uses the equivalent of the e-\*(LX format.
+To generate formats, use the
+.B -ini
+switch.
+.PP
+The
+.B pdfeinitex
+and
+.B pdfevirtex
+commands are pdfe\*(TX's analogues to the
+.B einitex
+and
+.B evirtex
+commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the
+.B pdfetex
+executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all.
+.PP
+In
+.I PDF
+mode, pdfe\*(TX can natively handle the
+.IR PDF ,
+.IR JPG ,
+and
+.I PNG
+graphics formats.
+pdfe\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of
+of the other \*(TX programs in the
+.I web2c
+implementation.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of pdfe\*(TX understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.BI -fmt \ format
+.rb
+Use
+.I format
+as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
+pdfe\*(TX was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -enc
+.rb
+Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in
+combination with
+.BR -ini .
+For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see
+.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html .
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error
+.rb
+Print error messages in the form
+.I file:line:error
+which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
+.TP
+.B -no-file-line-error
+.rb
+Disable printing error messages in the
+.I file:line:error
+style.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error-style
+.rb
+This is the old name of the
+.B -file-line-error
+option.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -ini
+.rb
+Start in
+.I INI
+mode, which is used to dump formats. The
+.I INI
+mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and
+basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required.
+.TP
+.BI -interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+\ecommands.
+.TP
+.B -ipc
+.rb
+Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output file.
+Whether this option is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.B -ipc-start
+.rb
+As
+.BR -ipc ,
+and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
+is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.BI -jobname \ name
+.rb
+Use
+.I name
+for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
+.TP
+.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI -mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.B -mltex
+.rb
+Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with
+.BR -ini .
+.TP
+.BI -no-mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI -output-comment \ string
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, use
+.I string
+for the
+.I DVI
+file comment instead of the date. This option is ignored
+in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.BI -output-format \ format
+.rb
+Set the output format mode, where
+.I format
+must be either
+.I pdf
+or
+.IR dvi .
+This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by pdfe\*(TX.
+.TP
+.B -parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name or a
+.B -translate-file
+option.
+.TP
+.B -no-parse-first-line
+.rb
+Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file.
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B -recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder.
+This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output
+in a file with extension
+.IR .fls .
+.TP
+.B -shell-escape
+.rb
+Enable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct. The
+.I command
+can be any shell command. This construct is normally
+disallowed for security reasons.
+.TP
+.B -no-shell-escape
+.rb
+Disable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct, even if it is enabled in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file.
+.TP
+.B -src-specials
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials into the
+.I DVI
+file.
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -src-specials \ where
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials in certain placed of the
+.I DVI
+file.
+.I where
+is a comma-separated value list:
+.IR cr ,
+.IR display ,
+.IR hbox ,
+.IR math ,
+.IR par ,
+.IR parent ,
+or
+.IR vbox .
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Use the
+.I tcxname
+translation table to set the mapping of input characters and
+re-mapping of output characters.
+.TP
+.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Like
+.B -translate-file
+except that a
+.I %&
+line can overrule this setting.
+.TP
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
+The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+One caveat: In most pdfe\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
+give directly to pdfe\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
+expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
+\*(MF, do not have this problem.
+.PP
+.TP
+TEXMFOUTPUT
+Normally, pdfe\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If
+any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
+directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
+There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+.I pdfetex paper
+and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
+the value
+.IR /tmp ,
+pdfe\*(TX attempts to create
+.I /tmp/paper.log
+(and
+.IR /tmp/paper.pdf ,
+if any output is produced.)
+.TP
+TEXINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I \einput
+and
+.I \eopenin
+files.
+This should probably start with ``.'', so
+that user files are found before system files. An empty path
+component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
+current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
+.TP
+TEXFORMATS
+Search path for format files.
+.TP
+TEXPOOL
+search path for
+.B pdfetex
+internal strings.
+.TP
+TEXEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+.BR vi ,
+is set when pdfe\*(TX is compiled.
+.TP
+TFMFONTS
+Search path for font metric
+.RI ( .tfm )
+files.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I pdfetex.pool
+Text file containing pdfe\*(TX's internal strings.
+.TP
+.I pdftex.map
+Filename mapping definitions.
+.TP
+.I *.tfm
+Metric files for pdfe\*(TX's fonts.
+.TP
+.I *.fmt
+Predigested pdfe\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files.
+.br
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+This version of pdfe\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions.
+In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
+extent with the definition of pdfe\*(TX. When such extensions are
+enabled, the banner printed when pdfe\*(TX starts is changed to print
+.B pdfeTeXk
+instead of
+.BR pdfeTeX .
+.PP
+This version of pdfe\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
+dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
+but when it does the generated
+.I DVI
+file will be invalid. Whether a generated
+.I PDF
+file would be usable is unknown.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+pdfe\*(TX is available for a large variety of machine architectures
+and operation systems.
+pdfe\*(TX is part of all major \*(TX distributions.
+.P
+Information on how to get pdfe\*(TX and related information
+is available at the
+.BI "http://tug.org" \ TUG
+website.
+The most recent version of pdfe\*(TX is available for anonymous
+ftp at the
+.B http://www.pdftex.de/tex/pdftex/
+.IR "pdfe\*(TX development site" .
+.P
+The following pdfe\*(TX related mailing list is available:
+.BR pdftex@tug.org .
+This is a majordomo list;
+to subscribe send a message containing
+.I subscribe pdftex
+to
+.BR majordomo@tug.org .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1),
+.BR etex (1),
+.BR pdftex (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+The primary authors of pdf\*(TX are Han The Thanh, Petr Sojka, and
+Jiri Zlatuska.
+.PP
+\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth,
+who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs.
+It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and
+at Cornell by Pavel Curtis.
+The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that
+generated by the \*(WB to C system
+.RB ( web2c ),
+originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan.
+.PP
+The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-nl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-nl.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e28b87d88e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cont-nl.1
@@ -0,0 +1,458 @@
+.TH PDFETEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.3"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+pdfetex, pdfeinitex, pdfevirtex \- PDF output from e-TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pdfetex
+.RI [ options ]
+.RI [ commands ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+pdfe\*(TX is a version of e-\*(TX that can create
+.I PDF
+files as well as
+.I DVI
+files.
+.PP
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, pdfe\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement of the e-\*(TX
+engine.
+.PP
+The typical use of pdfe\*(TX is with a pregenerated formats for which
+PDF output has been enabled. The
+.B pdfetex
+command uses the equivalent of the plain e-\*(TX format, and the
+.B pdfelatex
+command uses the equivalent of the e-\*(LX format.
+To generate formats, use the
+.B -ini
+switch.
+.PP
+The
+.B pdfeinitex
+and
+.B pdfevirtex
+commands are pdfe\*(TX's analogues to the
+.B einitex
+and
+.B evirtex
+commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the
+.B pdfetex
+executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all.
+.PP
+In
+.I PDF
+mode, pdfe\*(TX can natively handle the
+.IR PDF ,
+.IR JPG ,
+and
+.I PNG
+graphics formats.
+pdfe\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of
+of the other \*(TX programs in the
+.I web2c
+implementation.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of pdfe\*(TX understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.BI -fmt \ format
+.rb
+Use
+.I format
+as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
+pdfe\*(TX was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -enc
+.rb
+Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in
+combination with
+.BR -ini .
+For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see
+.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html .
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error
+.rb
+Print error messages in the form
+.I file:line:error
+which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
+.TP
+.B -no-file-line-error
+.rb
+Disable printing error messages in the
+.I file:line:error
+style.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error-style
+.rb
+This is the old name of the
+.B -file-line-error
+option.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -ini
+.rb
+Start in
+.I INI
+mode, which is used to dump formats. The
+.I INI
+mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and
+basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required.
+.TP
+.BI -interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+\ecommands.
+.TP
+.B -ipc
+.rb
+Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output file.
+Whether this option is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.B -ipc-start
+.rb
+As
+.BR -ipc ,
+and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
+is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.BI -jobname \ name
+.rb
+Use
+.I name
+for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
+.TP
+.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI -mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.B -mltex
+.rb
+Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with
+.BR -ini .
+.TP
+.BI -no-mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI -output-comment \ string
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, use
+.I string
+for the
+.I DVI
+file comment instead of the date. This option is ignored
+in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.BI -output-format \ format
+.rb
+Set the output format mode, where
+.I format
+must be either
+.I pdf
+or
+.IR dvi .
+This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by pdfe\*(TX.
+.TP
+.B -parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name or a
+.B -translate-file
+option.
+.TP
+.B -no-parse-first-line
+.rb
+Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file.
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B -recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder.
+This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output
+in a file with extension
+.IR .fls .
+.TP
+.B -shell-escape
+.rb
+Enable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct. The
+.I command
+can be any shell command. This construct is normally
+disallowed for security reasons.
+.TP
+.B -no-shell-escape
+.rb
+Disable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct, even if it is enabled in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file.
+.TP
+.B -src-specials
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials into the
+.I DVI
+file.
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -src-specials \ where
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials in certain placed of the
+.I DVI
+file.
+.I where
+is a comma-separated value list:
+.IR cr ,
+.IR display ,
+.IR hbox ,
+.IR math ,
+.IR par ,
+.IR parent ,
+or
+.IR vbox .
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Use the
+.I tcxname
+translation table to set the mapping of input characters and
+re-mapping of output characters.
+.TP
+.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Like
+.B -translate-file
+except that a
+.I %&
+line can overrule this setting.
+.TP
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
+The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+One caveat: In most pdfe\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
+give directly to pdfe\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
+expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
+\*(MF, do not have this problem.
+.PP
+.TP
+TEXMFOUTPUT
+Normally, pdfe\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If
+any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
+directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
+There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+.I pdfetex paper
+and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
+the value
+.IR /tmp ,
+pdfe\*(TX attempts to create
+.I /tmp/paper.log
+(and
+.IR /tmp/paper.pdf ,
+if any output is produced.)
+.TP
+TEXINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I \einput
+and
+.I \eopenin
+files.
+This should probably start with ``.'', so
+that user files are found before system files. An empty path
+component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
+current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
+.TP
+TEXFORMATS
+Search path for format files.
+.TP
+TEXPOOL
+search path for
+.B pdfetex
+internal strings.
+.TP
+TEXEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+.BR vi ,
+is set when pdfe\*(TX is compiled.
+.TP
+TFMFONTS
+Search path for font metric
+.RI ( .tfm )
+files.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I pdfetex.pool
+Text file containing pdfe\*(TX's internal strings.
+.TP
+.I pdftex.map
+Filename mapping definitions.
+.TP
+.I *.tfm
+Metric files for pdfe\*(TX's fonts.
+.TP
+.I *.fmt
+Predigested pdfe\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files.
+.br
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+This version of pdfe\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions.
+In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
+extent with the definition of pdfe\*(TX. When such extensions are
+enabled, the banner printed when pdfe\*(TX starts is changed to print
+.B pdfeTeXk
+instead of
+.BR pdfeTeX .
+.PP
+This version of pdfe\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
+dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
+but when it does the generated
+.I DVI
+file will be invalid. Whether a generated
+.I PDF
+file would be usable is unknown.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+pdfe\*(TX is available for a large variety of machine architectures
+and operation systems.
+pdfe\*(TX is part of all major \*(TX distributions.
+.P
+Information on how to get pdfe\*(TX and related information
+is available at the
+.BI "http://tug.org" \ TUG
+website.
+The most recent version of pdfe\*(TX is available for anonymous
+ftp at the
+.B http://www.pdftex.de/tex/pdftex/
+.IR "pdfe\*(TX development site" .
+.P
+The following pdfe\*(TX related mailing list is available:
+.BR pdftex@tug.org .
+This is a majordomo list;
+to subscribe send a message containing
+.I subscribe pdftex
+to
+.BR majordomo@tug.org .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1),
+.BR etex (1),
+.BR pdftex (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+The primary authors of pdf\*(TX are Han The Thanh, Petr Sojka, and
+Jiri Zlatuska.
+.PP
+\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth,
+who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs.
+It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and
+at Cornell by Pavel Curtis.
+The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that
+generated by the \*(WB to C system
+.RB ( web2c ),
+originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan.
+.PP
+The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..36112227c2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+cweb.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8058d364e5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+.TH CTIE 1 20/04/2003
+.SH NAME
+ctie \- merge or apply CWEB change files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B ctie
+.B \-c|\-m
+.I outputfile masterfile changefile...
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.I CTIE
+program is used to process multiple change files used with the CWEB
+system for literate programming. The CWEB programs allow one to apply
+patches to a source file (the
+.IR masterfile )
+by means of a single change file.
+.I CTIE
+can be used to either merge up to 32 change files into a single one or
+to apply the changes to the
+.I masterfile
+in order to create a new master file. Output of either the new change
+file or the patched master file goes into
+.IR outputfile .
+Any include files (indicated using the CWEB
+.I @i
+command) are fully expanded during
+.I CTIE
+processing, which means that the change files are able to modify the
+contents of any included files. Also, if this program has been
+compiled using the
+.I kpathsea
+library, then files are searched for using the
+.I CWEBINPUTS
+environment variable, as described in the
+.I kpathsea
+documentation.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-c
+Create a single change file from the given
+.IR changefiles .
+.TP
+.B \-m
+Create a new master file by applying the given
+.IR changefiles .
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR cweb (1),
+.IR ctiedoc.tex ,
+.BR tie (1),
+.BR web (1).
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+Julian Gilbey, jdg@debian.org. The original TIE program was by Klaus
+Guntermann, TH Darmstadt, Institut f. Theoretische Informatik. The
+TIE man page was by Joachim Schnitter, TH Darmstadt, Phys. Chemie I,
+and was modified for CTIE by Julian Gilbey.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..36112227c2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+cweb.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..617f92379b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+.TH CWEB 1 "19 December 2004" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.
+.SH NAME
+ctangle, cweave \- translate CWEB to C and/or TeX
+.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.na
+.B ctangle
+[
+.B \-bhp
+] [
+.B +s
+] webfile[.w] [changefile[.ch]] [outputfile[.c]]
+.br
+.B cweave
+[
+.B \-befhpx
+] [
+.B +s
+] webfile[.w] [changefile[.ch]] [outputfile[.tex]]
+.ad
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.I ctangle
+program converts a CWEB
+source document into a C\ program that may be compiled in the usual way.
+The output file includes #line specifications so that debugging can be
+done in terms of the CWEB source file.
+.PP
+The
+.I cweave
+program converts the same CWEB file into a TeX file that may be
+formatted and printed in the usual way.
+It takes appropriate care of typographic details like page
+layout and the use of indentation, italics, boldface, etc., and it supplies
+extensive cross-index information that it gathers automatically.
+.PP
+CWEB allows you to prepare a single
+document containing all the information that is needed both to produce
+a compilable C\ program and to produce a well-formatted document
+describing the program in as much detail as the writer may desire.
+The user of CWEB ought to be familiar with TeX as well as\ C.
+.PP
+The command line should have one, two, or three names on it.
+The first is taken as the CWEB file (and .w is added if there is no
+extension).
+If that file cannot be opened, the extension .web is tried instead.
+(But .w is recommended, since .web usually implies Pascal.)
+If there is a second name, it is a change file (and .ch is added if there is
+no extension).
+The change file overrides parts of the WEB file,
+as described in the documentation.
+If there is a third name, it overrides
+the default name of the output file, which is ordinarily the same as
+the name of the input file (but on the current directory) with the
+extension .c or .tex.
+.PP
+Options in the command line may be either turned off with\ \-
+(if they are on by default) or turned on with\ + (if they are off by
+default).
+In fact, the options are processed from left to right,
+so a sequence like -f\ +f corresponds to +f (which is the default).
+.PP
+The
+.B \-b
+option suppresses the banner line that normally appears on your terminal
+when ctangle or cweave begins.
+The
+.B \-h
+option suppresses the happy message that normally appears if the processing
+was successful.
+The
+.B \-p
+option suppresses progress reports (starred module numbers) as the processing
+takes place.
+If you say -bhp, you get nothing but error messages.
+.PP
+The
+.B +s
+option prints statistics about memory usage at the end of a run
+(assuming that the programs have been compiled with the -DSTAT switch).
+.PP
+There are three other options applicable to
+.I cweave
+only:
+.B \-f
+means do not force a newline after every statement in the formatted output.
+.B \-e
+inhibits the enclosure of C\ material formatted by
+.I cweave
+in brackets
+\ePB{...}.
+Such brackets are normally inserted so that special hooks
+can be used by
+.I cweb-latex
+and similar programs.
+.B \-x
+means omit the index and table of contents.
+.
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I cwebmac.tex
+TeX macros used by cweave output.
+.TP
+.I cwebman.tex
+The user manual.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.TP
+.I Literate Programming
+by D. E. Knuth
+.TP
+.I Weaving a Program
+by Wayne Sewell
+.TP
+.I The CWEB System of Structured Documentation
+by Donald E. Knuth and Silvio Levy (hardcopy version of cwebman.tex
+and the source code listings)
+.TP
+tex(1), cc(1)
+.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Don Knuth wrote WEB for TeX and Pascal.
+Silvio Levy designed and developed CWEB
+by adapting the WEB conventions to\ C and by recoding everything in CWEB.
+Knuth began using CWEB and made further refinements.
+Many other helpers are acknowledged in the CWEB manual.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..93e71005746
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+.TH DETEX 1L "12 August 1993" "Purdue University"
+.SH NAME
+detex \- a filter to strip \fITeX\fP commands from a .tex file.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B detex
+[ \fB\-clnstw\fR ] [ \fB\-e\fI environment-list\fR ] [ \fIfilename\fR[.tex] ... ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Detex
+(Version 2.6)
+reads each file in sequence, removes all comments and
+.I TeX
+control sequences
+and writes the remainder on the standard output.
+All text in math mode and display mode is removed.
+By default,
+.I detex
+follows \\input commands.
+If a file cannot be opened, a warning message is
+printed and the command is ignored.
+If the
+.B \-n
+option is used, no \\input or \\include commands will be processed.
+This allows single file processing.
+If no input file is given on the command line,
+.I detex
+reads from standard input.
+.PP
+If the magic sequence ``\\begin{document}'' appears in the text,
+.I detex
+assumes it is dealing with
+.I LaTeX
+source and
+.I detex
+recognizes additional constructs used in
+.IR LaTeX .
+These include the \\include and \\includeonly commands.
+The
+.B \-l
+option can be used to force
+.I LaTeX
+mode and the
+.B \-t
+option can be used to force
+.I TeX
+mode regardless of input content.
+.PP
+Text in various environment modes of
+.I LaTeX
+is ignored. The default modes are array, eqnarray, equation, figure,
+mathmatica, picture, table and verbatim. The
+.B \-e
+option can be used to specify a comma separated
+.I environment-list
+of environments to ignore. The list replaces the defaults so specifying an
+empty list effectively causes no environments to be ignored.
+.PP
+The
+.B \-c
+option can be used in
+.I LaTeX
+mode to have detex echo the arguments to \\cite,
+\\ref, and \\pageref macros. This can be useful when sending the output to
+a style checker.
+.PP
+.I Detex
+assumes the standard character classes are being used for
+.IR TeX .
+.I Detex
+allows white space between control sequences
+and magic characters like `{' when recognizing things like
+.I LaTeX
+environments.
+.PP
+If the
+.B \-w
+flag is given, the output is a word list, one `word' (string of two or more
+letters and apostrophes beginning with a letter)
+per line, and all other characters ignored.
+Without \fB\-w\fR the output follows the original,
+with the deletions mentioned above. Newline characters are
+preserved where possible
+so that the lines of output match the input as closely as possible.
+.PP
+The TEXINPUTS environment variable is used to find \\input and \\include
+files. Like \fITeX\fP, it interprets a leading or trailing `:' as the default
+TEXINPUTS. It does \fInot\fP support the `//' directory expansion magic sequence.
+.PP
+Detex now handles the basic \fITeX\fP ligatures as a special case, replacing the
+ligatures with acceptable charater substitutes. This eliminates
+spelling errors introduced by merely removing them. The ligatures are
+\\aa, \\ae, \\oe, \\ss, \\o, \\l (and their upper-case
+equivalents). The special "dotless" characters \\i and \\j are also
+replaced with i and j respectively.
+.PP
+Note that previous versions of
+.I detex
+would replace control sequences with a space character to prevent words
+from running together.
+However, this caused accents in the middle of words to break words, generating
+"spelling errors" that were not desirable.
+Therefore, the new version merely removes these accents.
+The old functionality can be essentially duplicated by using the
+.B \-s
+option.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+tex(1L)
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+Nesting of \\input is allowed but the number of opened files must not
+exceed the system's limit on the number of simultaneously opened files.
+.I Detex
+ignores unrecognized option characters after printing a warning message.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Daniel Trinkle, Computer Science Department, Purdue University
+.SH BUGS
+.I Detex
+is not a complete
+.I TeX
+interpreter, so it can be confused by some constructs.
+Most errors result in too much rather than too little output.
+.PP
+Running \fILaTeX\fR
+source without a ``\\begin{document}''
+through \fIdetex\fR may produce
+errors.
+.PP
+Suggestions for improvements are (mildly) encouraged.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dmp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dmp.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..69f54d4040b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dmp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+.TH DMP 1 "4 January 1998" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+dmp \- translate Troff output to low-level MetaPost input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dmp
+.RI [ option ]
+.I ditrofffile
+.RI [ mpxfile ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B dmp
+program generates \*(MP source code from the
+.IR ditrofffile .
+The generated code is written in
+.I mpxfile
+if it is specified, and to standard output otherwise.
+.PP
+.B dmp
+is typically called from scripts like
+.BR makempx ,
+not from the command line.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B dmp
+accepts the following options:
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR mpost (1),
+.BR makempx (1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d3b4726d2b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+.\" ====================================================================
+.\" @Troff-man-file{
+.\" author = "Nelson H. F. Beebe and Geoffrey R. D. Tobin",
+.\" version = "0.6.0",
+.\" date = "08 March 1995",
+.\" time = "19:57:00 GMT +11",
+.\" filename = "dt2dv.man",
+.\" address = "Center for Scientific Computing
+.\" Department of Mathematics
+.\" University of Utah
+.\" Salt Lake City, UT 84112
+.\" USA",
+.\" telephone = "+1 801 581 5254",
+.\" FAX = "+1 801 581 4148",
+.\" checksum = "03708 156 634 4989",
+.\" email = "beebe@math.utah.edu (Internet)",
+.\" codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+.\" keywords = "DVI, TeX",
+.\" supported = "no",
+.\" docstring = "This file contains the UNIX manual pages
+.\" for the dt2dv utility, a program for
+.\" converting a DTL text representation of a TeX
+.\" DVI file, usually produced by the companion
+.\" dv2dt utility, back to a binary DVI file.
+.\"
+.\" The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+.\" checksum as the first value, followed by the
+.\" equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+.\" count) utility output of lines, words, and
+.\" characters. This is produced by Robert
+.\" Solovay's checksum utility.",
+.\" }
+.\" ====================================================================
+.if t .ds Te T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X
+.if n .ds Te TeX
+.TH DT2DV 1 "08 March 1995" "Version 0.6.0"
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH NAME
+dt2dv \- convert a DTL text representation of a TeX DVI file to a binary DVI file
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dt2dv
+.RB [ \-debug ]
+.RB [ \-group ]
+.RB [ \-si ]
+.RB [ \-so ]
+.I [input-DTL-file]
+.I [output-DVI-file]
+.PP
+In the absence of the
+.B \-si
+and
+.B \-so
+options,
+both file arguments are
+.IR required
+in the order
+.B input-DTL-file output-DVI-file .
+But also see the OPTIONS section below.
+No default file extensions are supplied.
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B dt2dv
+converts a text representation of a \*(Te\& DVI
+file, usually produced by the companion
+.BR dv2dt (1)
+utility, back to a binary DVI file. DTL
+.RI ( "DVI Text Language" )
+files can be edited, with care, and then restored
+to DVI form for processing by any \*(Te\& DVI
+driver program. In DTL files, font directory names
+and font names are preceded by a length field,
+which must be updated if the names are modified.
+.PP
+.BR dvitype (1)
+can also display a textual representation of DVI
+files, but in some implementations at least, it
+cannot be used in batch mode, and its output is
+not well-suited for conversion back to a DVI file.
+.PP
+The format of \*(Te\& DVI files is fully described
+in
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR "\*(Te\&: The Program" ,
+Addison-Wesley (1986), ISBN 0-201-13437-3, as well
+as in the
+.BR dvitype (1)
+literate program source code. Brief descriptions
+of the DTL and DVI formats are given in
+.BR dv2dt (1).
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.\"-----------------------------------------------
+.TP \w'\-debug'u+3n
+.B \-debug
+Turn on detailed debugging output.
+.\"-----------------------------------------------
+.TP
+.B \-group
+Expect each DTL command to be in parentheses.
+.\"-----------------------------------------------
+.TP
+.B \-si
+Read all DTL commands from standard input.
+.\"-----------------------------------------------
+.TP
+.B \-so
+Write all DVI commands to standard output.
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR dv2dt (1),
+.BR dvitype (1),
+.BR tex (1).
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP \w'\fI*.dvi\fP'u+3n
+.I *.dvi
+binary \*(Te\& DVI file.
+.TP
+.I *.dtl
+text representation of a \*(Te\& DVI file in
+.I "DVI Text Language"
+format.
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH AUTHOR
+.B dt2dv
+and
+.BR dv2dt (1)
+were written by
+.RS
+.nf
+Geoffrey Tobin
+Department of Electronic Engineering
+La Trobe University
+Bundoora, Victoria 3083
+Australia
+Tel: +61 3 479 3736
+FAX: +61 3 479 3025
+Email: <G.Tobin@ee.latrobe.edu.au>
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+These manual pages were written primarily by
+.RS
+.nf
+Nelson H. F. Beebe, Ph.D.
+Center for Scientific Computing
+Department of Mathematics
+University of Utah
+Salt Lake City, UT 84112
+Tel: +1 801 581 5254
+FAX: +1 801 581 4148
+Email: <beebe@math.utah.edu>
+.fi
+.RE
+.\"==============================[The End]==============================
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..79f6368b80e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1
@@ -0,0 +1,715 @@
+.\" ====================================================================
+.\" @Troff-man-file{
+.\" author = "Nelson H. F. Beebe and Geoffrey Tobin",
+.\" version = "0.6.0",
+.\" date = "08 March 1995",
+.\" time = "19:52:00 GMT +11",
+.\" filename = "dv2dt.man",
+.\" address = "Center for Scientific Computing
+.\" Department of Mathematics
+.\" University of Utah
+.\" Salt Lake City, UT 84112
+.\" USA",
+.\" telephone = "+1 801 581 5254",
+.\" FAX = "+1 801 581 4148",
+.\" checksum = "32328 715 2191 12898",
+.\" email = "beebe@math.utah.edu (Internet)",
+.\" codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+.\" keywords = "DVI, TeX",
+.\" supported = "no",
+.\" docstring = "This file contains the UNIX manual pages
+.\" for the dv2dt utility, a program for
+.\" converting a binary TeX DVI file to an
+.\" editable text representation in DTL (DVI Text
+.\" Language). The companion dt2dv utility can
+.\" convert the output DTL file back to a binary
+.\" DVI file.
+.\"
+.\" The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+.\" checksum as the first value, followed by the
+.\" equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+.\" count) utility output of lines, words, and
+.\" characters. This is produced by Robert
+.\" Solovay's checksum utility.",
+.\" }
+.\" ====================================================================
+.if t .ds Te T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X
+.if n .ds Te TeX
+.if t .ds Xe X\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'T
+.if n .ds Xe XeT
+.TH DV2DT 1 "08 March 1995" "Version 0.6.0"
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH NAME
+dv2dt \- convert a binary TeX DVI file to DTL text representation
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dv2dt
+.I input-DVI-file
+.I output-DTL-file
+.PP
+If the filenames are omitted, then
+.I stdin
+and
+.I stdout
+are assumed.
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B dv2dt
+converts a binary \*(Te\& DVI file to an editable
+text file in DTL
+.RI ( "DVI Text Language" )
+format. The companion
+.BR dt2dv (1)
+utility can convert the DTL file back to a binary
+DVI file.
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH "DVI COMMAND DESCRIPTION"
+\*(Te\& DVI files contain a compact binary
+description of typeset pages, as a stream of
+operation code bytes, each immediately followed by
+zero or more parameter bytes. The format of DVI
+files is fully described in Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR "\*(Te\&: The Program" ,
+Addison-Wesley (1986), ISBN 0-201-13437-3, as well
+as in the
+.BR dvitype (1)
+literate program source code.
+.PP
+For convenience, we provide a summary of DVI
+commands here. In the following list, operation
+code bytes are given as unsigned decimal values,
+followed by their symbolic names (not present in
+the DVI file), and a short description. A
+designation like
+.I b[+n]
+means that the operation code byte is followed by
+a parameter
+.I b
+which uses
+.I n
+bytes, and is signed. Without the plus sign, the
+parameter is unsigned. Signed integer parameter
+values are always represented in two's complement
+arithmetic, which is the system followed by most
+computers manufactured today, including all
+personal computers and workstations.
+.if n .TP \w'\fI128_set1__c[1]\fP'u+3n
+.if t .TP \w'\fI243_fnt_def1__k[1]_c[4]_s[4]_d[4]_a[1]_l[1]_n[a+l]\fP'u+3n
+.I "0 set_char_0"
+Set character 0 from current font.
+.TP
+.I .\|.\|.
+.TP
+.I "127 set_char_127"
+Set character 127 from current font.
+.TP
+.I "128 set1 c[1]"
+Set 1-byte unsigned character (uchar) number
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.I "129 set2 c[2]"
+Set 2-byte uchar number
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.I "130 set3 c[3]"
+Set 3-byte uchar number
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.I "131 set4 c[+4]"
+Set 4-byte signed character (schar) number
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.I "132 set_rule a[+4] b[+4]"
+Set rule, height
+.IR a ,
+width
+.IR b .
+.TP
+.I "133 put1 c[1]"
+Put 1-byte uchar
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.I "134 put2 c[2]"
+Put 2-byte uchar
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.I "135 put3 c[3]"
+Put 3-byte uchar
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.I "136 put4 c[+4]"
+Put 4-byte schar
+.IR c .
+.TP
+.I "137 put_rule a[+4] b[+4]"
+Put rule, height
+.IR a ,
+width
+.IR b .
+.TP
+.I "138 nop"
+Do nothing.
+.TP
+.I "139 bop c0[+4] .\|.\|. c9[+4] p[+4]"
+Beginning of page. The parameters
+.I "c0 .\|.\|. c9"
+are the \*(Te\& page counters, the contents of
+\*(Te\& count registers
+.IR "\ecount0 .\|.\|. \ecount9" .
+The parameter
+.I p
+is the byte offset from the beginning of the DVI
+file of the previous
+.I bop
+operation code byte. The first such command in
+the file has
+.IR "p = \-1" .
+.TP
+.I "140 eop"
+End of page.
+.TP
+.I "141 push"
+Push
+.RI ( h,v,w,x,y,z )
+onto stack.
+.TP
+.I "142 pop"
+Pop
+.RI ( h,v,w,x,y,z )
+from stack.
+.TP
+.I "143 right1 b[+1]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units.
+.TP
+.I "144 right2 b[+2]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units.
+.TP
+.I "145 right3 b[+3]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units.
+.TP
+.I "146 right4 b[+4]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units.
+.TP
+.I "147 w0"
+Move right
+.I w
+units.
+.TP
+.I "148 w1 b[+1]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units, and set
+.IR "w = b" .
+.TP
+.I "149 w2 b[+2]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units, and set
+.IR "w = b" .
+.TP
+.I "150 w3 b[+3]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units, and set
+.IR "w = b" .
+.TP
+.I "151 w4 b[+4]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units, and set
+.IR "w = b" .
+.TP
+.I "152 x0"
+Move right
+.I x
+units.
+.TP
+.I "153 x1 b[+1]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units, and set
+.IR "x = b" .
+.TP
+.I "154 x2 b[+2]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units, and set
+.IR "x = b" .
+.TP
+.I "155 x3 b[+3]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units, and set
+.IR "x = b" .
+.TP
+.I "156 x4 b[+4]"
+Move right
+.I b
+units, and set
+.IR "x = b" .
+.TP
+.I "157 down1 a[+1]"
+Move down
+.I a
+units.
+.TP
+.I "158 down2 a[+2]"
+Move down
+.I a
+units.
+.TP
+.I "159 down3 a[+3]"
+Move down
+.I a
+units.
+.TP
+.I "160 down4 a[+4]"
+Move down
+.I a
+units.
+.TP
+.I "161 y0"
+Move right
+.I y
+units.
+.TP
+.I "162 y1 a[+1]"
+Move right
+.I a
+units, and set
+.IR "y = a" .
+.TP
+.I "163 y2 a[+2]"
+Move right
+.I a
+units, and set
+.IR "y = a" .
+.TP
+.I "164 y3 a[+3]"
+Move right
+.I a
+units, and set
+.IR "y = a" .
+.TP
+.I "165 y4 a[+4]"
+Move right
+.I a
+units, and set
+.IR "y = a" .
+.TP
+.I "166 z0"
+Move right
+.I z
+units.
+.TP
+.I "167 z1 a[+1]"
+Move right
+.I a
+units, and set
+.IR "z = a" .
+.TP
+.I "168 z2 a[+2]"
+Move right
+.I a
+units, and set
+.IR "z = a" .
+.TP
+.I "169 z3 a[+3]"
+Move right
+.I a
+units, and set
+.IR "z = a" .
+.TP
+.I "170 z4 a[+4]"
+Move right
+.I a
+units, and set
+.IR "z = a" .
+.TP
+.I "171 fnt_num_0"
+Set current font number
+.IR "(f) = 0" .
+.TP
+.I .\|.\|.
+.TP
+.I "234 fnt_num_63"
+Set
+.IR "f = 63" .
+.TP
+.I "235 fnt1 k[1]"
+Set
+.IR "f = k" .
+.TP
+.I "236 fnt2 k[2]"
+Set
+.IR "f = k" .
+.TP
+.I "237 fnt3 k[3]"
+Set
+.IR "f = k" .
+.TP
+.I "238 fnt4 k[+4]"
+Set
+.IR "f = k" .
+.TP
+.I "239 xxx1 k[1] x[k]"
+Special string
+.I x
+with
+.I k
+bytes.
+.TP
+.I "240 xxx2 k[2] x[k]"
+Special string
+.I x
+with
+.I k
+bytes.
+.TP
+.I "241 xxx3 k[3] x[k]"
+Special string
+.I x
+with
+.I k
+bytes.
+.TP
+.I "242 xxx4 k[4] x[k]"
+Special string
+.I x
+with (unsigned)
+.I k
+bytes.
+.TP
+.I "243 fnt_def1 k[1] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]"
+Define font
+.IR k .
+The parameters are:
+.RS
+.TP \w'\fIm\fP'u+3n
+.I c
+Checksum for TFM file.
+.TP
+.I s
+Scale factor, in DVI units.
+.TP
+.I d
+Design size, in DVI units.
+.TP
+.I a
+Length of the ``area'' or directory.
+.TP
+.I l
+Length of the font name.
+.TP
+.I n
+Area and font name string(s).
+.RE
+.TP
+.I "244 fnt_def2 k[2] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]"
+Define font
+.IR k .
+.TP
+.I "245 fnt_def3 k[3] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]"
+Define font
+.IR k .
+.TP
+.I "246 fnt_def4 k[+4] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]"
+Define font
+.IR k .
+.TP
+.I "247 pre i[1] num[4] den[4] mag[4] k[1] x[k]"
+Begin preamble. The parameters are:
+.RS
+.TP \w'\fInum\fP'u+3n
+.I i
+DVI format. Standard \*(Te\& has
+.IR "ID = 2" ,
+and \*(Te\&-\*(Xe\& has
+.IR "ID = 3" .
+.TP
+.I num
+Numerator of 100 nm / DVI unit.
+.TP
+.I den
+Denominator of 100 nm / DVI unit.
+.TP
+.I mag
+1000 * magnification.
+.TP
+.I k
+Comment length.
+.TP
+.I x
+Comment string.
+.RE
+.TP
+.I "248 post p[4] num[4] den[4] mag[4] l[4] u[4] s[2] t[2]"
+Begin postamble. The parameters are:
+.RS
+.TP \w'\fInum\fP'u+3n
+.I p
+Pointer to final bop.
+.TP
+.I "num, den, mag"
+Duplicates of values in preamble.
+.TP
+.I l
+Height-plus-depth of tallest page, in DVI units.
+.TP
+.I u
+Width of widest page, in DVI units.
+.TP
+.I s
+Maximum stack depth needed to process this DVI file.
+.TP
+.I t
+Total number of pages
+.RI ( bop
+commands) present.
+.RE
+.TP
+.I "249 post_post q[4] i[1] 223 .\|.\|. 223"
+End postamble. The parameters are:
+.RS
+.TP \w'\fI223\fP'u+3n
+.I q
+Byte offset from the beginning of the DVI file to
+the
+.I post
+command that started the postamble.
+.TP
+.I i
+DVI format ID, as in the preamble.
+.TP
+.I
+223
+At least four
+.I 223
+bytes.
+.RE
+.TP
+.I "250"
+Undefined.
+.TP
+.I .\|.\|.
+.TP
+.I "255"
+Undefined.
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH "DTL COMMAND DESCRIPTION"
+A DTL file contains one line per command, with a
+limit of 1024 characters per line. Each command
+contains a symbolic operation name, followed by
+zero or more parameter values. The parameter
+value descriptions are not repeated here; they can
+be found in the previous section.
+.TP \w'\fIw0,_w1,_w2,_w3,_w4\fP'u+3n
+variety <variety-name>
+This command specifies the name of the DTL file
+type; it has no DVI file equivalent.
+.TP
+.I (text)
+Series of set_char commands, for printable ASCII text.
+.TP
+.I \e(
+Literal ASCII left parenthesis in (text).
+.TP
+.I \e)
+Literal ASCII right parenthesis in (text).
+.TP
+.I \e\e
+Literal ASCII backslash in (text).
+.TP
+.I \e"
+Literal ASCII double quote in (text).
+.TP
+.I \eXY
+Set_char for character with hexadecimal code XY,
+not in parentheses, but by itself for readability.
+.TP
+.I "s1, s2, s2, s3"
+Set, with (1,2,3,4)-byte charcodes.
+.TP
+.I sr
+.IR set_rule .
+.TP
+.I "p1, p2, p2, p3"
+Put, with (1,2,3,4)-byte charcodes.
+.TP
+.I pr
+.IR put_rule .
+.TP
+.I nop
+.I nop
+(do nothing).
+.TP
+.I bop
+.I bop
+(beginning of page).
+.TP
+.I eop
+.I eop
+(end of page).
+.TP
+.I [
+Push.
+.TP
+.I ]
+Pop.
+.TP
+.I "r1, r2, r3, r4"
+Right, with (1,2,3,4)-byte argument.
+.TP
+.I "w0, w1, w2, w3, w4"
+As in DVI.
+.TP
+.I "x0, x1, x2, x3, x4"
+As in DVI.
+.TP
+.I "d1, d2, d3, d4"
+Down, with (1,2,3,4)-byte argument.
+.TP
+.I "y0, y1, y2, y3, y4"
+As in DVI.
+.TP
+.I "z0, z1, z2, z3, z4"
+As in DVI.
+.TP
+.I fn
+.I fnt_num
+(set current font to font number in 0 to 63).
+.TP
+.I "f1, f2, f3, f4"
+.I fnt
+(set current font to (1,2,3,4)-byte font number).
+.TP
+.I special
+.I xxx
+(special commands with (1,2,3,4)-byte string length).
+.TP
+.I fd
+.I fnt_def
+(assign a number to a named font).
+.TP
+.I pre
+Preamble.
+.TP
+.I post
+.I post
+(begin postamble).
+.TP
+.I post_post
+.I post_post
+(end postamble).
+.TP
+.I opcode
+Undefined DVI command (250 to 255).
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH "SAMPLE DTL FILE"
+The following 2-line \*(Te\& file
+.RS
+.nf
+Hello.
+\ebye
+.fi
+.RE
+when processed with the commands
+.RS
+.nf
+tex hello.tex
+dv2dt hello.dvi hello.dtl
+.fi
+.RE
+produces this DTL file:
+.RS
+.nf
+variety sequences-6
+pre 2 25400000 473628672 1000 27 ' TeX output 1995.03.02:2334'
+bop 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1
+[
+d3 -917504
+]
+d4 42152922
+[
+d4 -41497562
+[
+r3 1310720
+fd1 0 11374260171 655360 655360 0 5 '' 'cmr10'
+fn0
+(Hello.)
+]
+]
+d3 1572864
+[
+r4 15229091
+(1)
+]
+eop
+post 42 25400000 473628672 1000 43725786 30785863 2 1
+fd1 0 11374260171 655360 655360 0 5 'cmr10'
+post_post 152 2 223 223 223 223
+.fi
+.RE
+The command
+.RS
+.nf
+dt2dv hello.dtl hello.dvi
+.fi
+.RE
+will reconstruct the original DVI file.
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR dt2dv (1),
+.BR dvitype (1),
+.BR tex (1).
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP \w'\fI*.dvi\fP'u+3n
+.I *.dvi
+binary \*(Te\& DVI file.
+.TP
+.I *.dtl
+text representation of a \*(Te\& DVI file in
+.I "DVI Text Language"
+format.
+.\"======================================================================
+.SH AUTHOR
+.B dv2dt
+and
+.BR dt2dv (1)
+were written by
+.RS
+.nf
+Geoffrey Tobin
+Department of Electronic Engineering
+La Trobe University
+Bundoora, Victoria 3083
+Australia
+Tel: +61 3 479 3736
+FAX: +61 3 479 3025
+Email: <G.Tobin@ee.latrobe.edu.au>
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+These manual pages were primarily written by
+.RS
+.nf
+Nelson H. F. Beebe, Ph.D.
+Center for Scientific Computing
+Department of Mathematics
+University of Utah
+Salt Lake City, UT 84112
+Tel: +1 801 581 5254
+FAX: +1 801 581 4148
+Email: <beebe@math.utah.edu>
+.fi
+.RE
+.\"==============================[The End]==============================
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f7c436d6e33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+.TH DVI2FAX 1 "October 30, 1999"
+.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt <jrv@vanzandt.mv.com> -*- nroff -*-
+.SH NAME
+dvi2fax \- convert a TeX DVI file to G3 fax format
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBdvi2fax\fP [\fB-hi\fP|\fB-lo\fP] \fIfile\fP[.dvi] [\fIoptions for dvips\fP]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBdvi2fax\fP uses \fBdvips\fP(1) to convert a TeX DVI file to PostScript,
+then \fBgs\fP(1) to convert the PostScript to G3 fax file format.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.LP
+.B -hi
+use high fax resolution (204x196 dpi) (default).
+.LP
+.B -lo
+use low fax resolution (204x98).
+.PP
+\fBdvips\fP options can follow the file name.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+Example: dvi2fax foo -l 2
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBdvips\fP(1), \fBgs\fP(1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..168a073373d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+.TH DVI2TTY Local "7 June 1986"
+.SH NAME
+dvi2tty \- preview a dvi\-file on an ordinary ascii terminal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dvi2tty
+[ options ] dvi\-file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I dvi2tty
+converts a TeX DVI\-file to a format that is apprporiate for terminals
+and lineprinters. The program is intended to be used for
+preliminary proofreading of TeX-ed documents.
+By default the output is directed to the terminal,
+possibly through a pager (depending on how the program was installed),
+but it can be directed to a file or a pipe.
+.PP
+The output leaves much to be desired, but is still
+usefull if you want to avoid walking to the
+laserprinter (or whatever) for each iteration of your
+document.
+.br
+Since
+.I dvi2tty
+produces output for terminals and lineprinters the
+representation of documents is naturally quite primitive.
+Fontchanges are totally ignored, which implies that
+special symbols, such as mathematical symbols, get mapped into the
+characters at the corresponding positions in the "standard" fonts.
+.PP
+If the width of the output text requires more columns than fits
+in one line (c.f. the \-w option) it is broken into several lines by
+.I dvi2tty
+although they will be printed as one line on regular TeX output
+devices (e.g. laserprinters). To show that a broken line is really
+just one logical line an asterisk (``*'') in the last position
+means that the logical line is continued on the next physical
+line output by
+.I dvi2tty.
+Such a continuation line is started with a a space and an asterisk
+in the first two columns.
+.PP
+Options may be specified in the environment variable DVI2TTY.
+Any option on the commandline, conflicting with one in the
+environment, will override the one from the environment.
+.PP
+.B Options:
+.PP
+.TP
+.B \-o file
+Write output to file ``file''.
+.TP
+.B \-p list
+Print the pages chosen by list.
+Numbers refer to TeX\-page numbers (known as \\count0).
+An example of format for list is ``1,3:6,8''
+to choose pages 1, 3 through 6 and 8.
+Negative numbers can be used exactly as in TeX,
+e g \-1 comes before \-4 as in ``\-p-1:-4,17''.
+.TP
+.B \-P list
+Like \-p except that page numbers refer to
+the sequential ordering of the pages in the dvi\-file.
+Negative numbers don't make a lot of sense here...
+.TP
+.B \-w n
+Specify terminal width
+.I n.
+Legal range 16\-132.
+Default is 80. If your terminal has the
+ability to display in 132 columns it might
+be a good idea to use \-w132 and toggle the
+terminal into this mode as output will
+probably look somewhat better.
+.TP
+.B \-q
+Don't pipe the output through a pager.
+This may be the default on some systems
+(depending on the whims of the SA installing the program).
+.TP
+.B \-f
+Pipe through a pager, $PAGER if defined, or whatever your SA compiled
+in (often ``more''). This may be the default, but it is still okay
+to redirect output with ``>'', the pager will not be used if output
+is not going to a terminal.
+.TP
+.B \-F
+Specify the pager program to be used.
+This overides the $PAGER and the default pager.
+.TP
+.B \-Fprog
+Use ``prog'' as program to pipe output into. Can be used to choose an
+alternate pager (e g ``-Fless'').
+.TP
+.B \-l
+Mark pagebreaks with the two-character sequence ``^L''. The default is
+to mark them with a formfeed character.
+.TP
+.B \-u
+Don't make any attempts to find special Scandinavian characters.
+If such characters are in the text they will map to ``a'' and ``o''.
+This is probably the default outside of Scandinavia. (The SA made
+the decision when the program was installed.)
+.TP
+.B \-s
+Try to find the special Scandinavian characters that on most (?)
+terminals in Scandinavia are mapped to ``{|}[\\]''.
+This can be the default, and output from files not containing these
+special characters will be identical regardless of this option.
+.SH FILES
+/usr/ucb/more \ \ \ \
+probably the default pager.
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+PAGER \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \
+the pager to use.
+.br
+DVI2TTY \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \
+can be set to hold commandline options.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+TeX, dvi2ps
+.SH AUTHOR
+Svante Lindahl, Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm
+.br
+Improved C version: Marcel Mol
+.br
+{seismo, mcvax}!enea!ttds!zap
+.br
+marcel@duteca.UUCP
+.SH BUGS
+Blanks between words get lost quite easy. This is less
+likely if you are using a wider output than the default 80.
+.PP
+Only one file may be specified on the commandline.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dd0bce06108
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+.TH DVIBOOK 1
+.SH NAME
+dvibook \- rearrange pages in DVI file into signatures
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dvibook
+[
+.B \-q
+] [
+.B \-s\fI<num>
+] [
+.B \-i
+.I infile
+] [
+.B \-o
+.I outfile
+]
+[
+.I infile
+[
+.I outfile
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Dvibook
+rearranges pages from a DVI file produced by TeX into ``signatures'' for
+printing books or booklets, creating a new DVI file
+usable by any of the TeX conversion programs.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-s
+option selects the size of signature which will be used. The signature size is
+the number of sides which will be folded and bound together; the number given
+should be a multiple of four. The default is to use one signature for the
+whole file. Extra blank sides will be added if the file does not contain a
+multiple of four pages.
+.PP
+Dvibook normally prints the page numbers of the pages rearranged; the
+.I \-q
+option suppresses this.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Angus Duggan, from dviselect(1), by
+Chris Torek, University of Maryland
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+dviconcat(1), dviselect(1), latex(1), tex(1)
+.br
+.I "MC-TeX User's Guide"
+.br
+.I "The TeXbook"
+.SH BUGS
+.I Dvibook
+does not adjust the parameters in the postamble; however, since these
+values are normally used only to size certain structures in the output
+conversion programs, and the parameters never need to be adjusted upward,
+this has not proven to be a problem.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9267446095a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+.TH DVICONCAT 1
+.SH NAME
+dviconcat \- concatenate DVI files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dviconcat
+[
+.B \-m
+.I magnification
+] [
+.B \-o
+.I outfile
+]
+.I "list of files"
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Dviconcat
+concatenates the named
+.IR file s
+(or standard input, if no file names are given)
+onto the standard output
+or the given
+.IR outfile ,
+creating a new DVI file
+usable by any of the TeX conversion programs,
+or even by
+.I dviconcat
+itself.
+.PP
+The magnification of the output file
+is the same as that of the first input file
+unless the
+.B \-m
+option is given.
+When
+.I dviconcat
+changes the magnification of any input file,
+it prints a warning to this effect.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Chris Torek, University of Maryland
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+dviselect(1), latex(1), tex(1)
+.br
+.I "MC-TeX User's Guide"
+.SH BUGS
+The program should be called
+.IR dvicat ,
+but that name was taken (for the driver for the C/A/T typesetter).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cd62db37463
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+.TH DVICOPY 1 TeX "24 January 1999" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.SH NAME
+dvicopy \- produce modified copy of DVI file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dvicopy
+.RI [ options ]
+.RI [ infile\ [ outfile ]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+.B dvicopy
+reads a DVI file, expands any references to virtual fonts to base
+fonts, and writes the resulting DVI file. Thus you can use virtual
+fonts even if your DVI processor does not support them, by passing the
+documents through
+.B dvicopy
+first.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+dviselect(1)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e9906a6e874
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+.TH DVIDVI L "March 1994"
+.SH NAME
+.PP
+dvidvi \- selects and/or re-arranges pages in a TeX dvi file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.PP
+dvidvi [param] infile outfile
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.SS Copyright
+dvidvi 1.0, Copyright (C) 1988-91, Radical Eye Software
+.SS Introduction
+.PP
+The dvidvi program converts a dvi file into another dvi file, with perhaps
+certain changes.
+.br
+.SS Parameters
+.PP
+-f n page n is first page selected
+.br
+-l n page n is last page selected
+.in +10
+.ti -10
+-n n select at most n pages. Notice that n is the number of pages
+selected, independently of the number of pages actually
+contained in a sheet
+.ti -10
+-i { n1..n2 | n1 }[,...]
+.br
+include pages (ranges allowed). When this option is
+used, ONLY the specified pages are selected. However,
+we can exclude from these pages with the option -x
+.ti -10
+-x { n1..n2 | n1 }[,...]
+.br
+exclude pages (ranges allowed)
+.ti -10
+-q work in quiet mode, that is do not print in the screen
+messages of how the work is being done.
+.ti -10
+-r reverse the order of the pages.
+.PP
+The page numbers for the above options -f -l -i and -x can be specified
+in different ways.
+.in +4
+.ti -4
+1) If a number n is given, it is interpreted as the n'th page from the
+beginning of the .dvi file. Of course, this number is independent of the
+page number assigned by TeX.
+.ti -4
+2) TeX page numbers are those who are actually written in the page;
+these page numbers can be modified, for example, by using the TeX commands
+\\pagenumbering, \\setcounter{page}{n}, and \\addtocounter{page}{n}.
+A TeX page number can be specified by preceding the number n with the
+character @. Thus, if you specify -f @25 -l @30 you select the pages
+between 25 and 30, these numbers being those assigned by TeX.
+.ti -4
+3) However, several pages can have the same TeX page number in a .dvi file.
+For example, the introductory pages in a book are numbered i, ii, and so on
+until the first chapter begins and then, the pages are numbered 1, 2, etc.
+In this case, the pages numbered i and 1 in the .dvi file have the same TeX
+page number. If you want to select for example the second occurrence of the
+page numbered 1, you can specify a page number as (@2)1. Thus @1 is equivalent
+to (@1)1. For example, if you specify -f (@2)1 -l(@2)10 you select the pages
+between 1 and 10 of the first chapter, not the introductory pages between
+i and x.
+.PP
+There is another parameter that tells dvidvi how you want to change page
+layout and specifications. This is the -m parameter.
+.in +4
+.ti -4
+* The number preceding the colon is the modulo value. Everything will be
+done in chunks of pages this big. If there is no colon, than the default
+value is assumed to be one. The last chunk of pages is padded with as many
+blank pages as necessary.
+.ti -4
+* Following the colon is a comma-separated list of page numbers. These
+page numbers are with respect to the current chunk of pages, and must lie
+in the range zero to the modulo value less one. If a negative sign
+precedes the number, then the page is taken from the mirror chunk; if there
+are m chunks, then the mirror chunk of chunk n is the chunk numbered m-n-1.
+Put simply, it is the chunk numbered the same, only from the end. This can
+be used to reverse pages. If no number is given, the page number defaults
+to 1.
+.ti -4
+* Following each page number is an optional offset value in parenthesis,
+which consists of a pair of comma-separated dimensions. Each dimension is
+a decimal number with an optional unit of measure. The default unit of
+measure is inches, or the last unit of measure used. All units are in true
+dimensions. Allowable units of measure are the same that TeX allows: in,
+mm, cm, pt, pc, dd, and cc.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.PP
+.in +10
+.ti -10
+-m - Reverses the order of the pages. This time, both the modulo and the
+page number are defaulted.
+.ti -10
+-m 2:0 Selects the first, third, fifth, etc. pages from the file. Print
+this one after printing the next, taking the paper out of the
+feed tray and reinserting it into the paper feed.
+.ti -10
+-m 2:-1 Selects the second, fourth, etc. pages, and writes them in reverse
+order.
+.ti -10
+-m 4:-1,2(4.25in,0in)
+.ti -10
+-m 4:-3,0(4.25in,0in)
+.br
+Useful for printing a little booklet, four pages to a sheet,
+double-sided, for stapling in the middle. Print the first one,
+put the stack back into the printer upside down, and print the
+second. The `in' specifications are superfluous.
+.ti -10
+-m ,(1pt,1)
+.br
+Scare your system administrator! Actually, things are so blurry with this
+option, you may want to send enemies letters printed like this. *Long*
+letters.
+.ti -10
+-m 4:0(5.5in,4.25),3(0,4.25)
+.ti -10
+-m 4:1(0in,4.25),2(5.5,4.25)
+.br
+Print a four-page card on one sheet. Print the first, rotate the paper 180
+degrees and feed it again. (PostScript people can do funny tricks with
+PostScript so this isn't necessary.)
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cd88772978a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+.TH DVIHP 1 "October 30, 1999"
+.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt <jrv@vanzandt.mv.com> -*- nroff -*-
+.SH NAME
+dvihp \- convert a TeX DVI file to Hewlett-Packard PCL
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBdvihp\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fIdvifile\fP[.dvi]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBdvihp\fP translates the given \fIdvifile\fP to Hewlett-Packard PCL
+using \fBdvicopy\fP(1) then $DVILJ (dvilj4 by default).
+.P
+In the absence of other options, pipe the PCL to $SPOOL (lpr by default).
+.SH OPTIONS
+Options are recognized from dvips where possible:
+.IP \fB-A\fP
+print odd pages
+.IP \fB-B\fP
+print even pages
+.IP "\fB-d\fP \fIn\fP"
+set debug bits to \fIn\fP (see documentation)
+.IP "\fB-D\fP \fIn\fP"
+set resolution to \fIn\fP
+.IP \fB-f\fP
+run as filter
+.IP "\fB-l\fP \fIn\fP"
+don't print pages after \fIn\fP
+.IP \fB-m\fP
+manual feed
+.IP "\fB-n\fP \fIn\fP"
+print \fIn\fP pages
+.IP "\fB-O\fP \fIa\fP,\fIb\fP"
+set/change paper offset to \fIa\fP,\fIb\fP mm.
+.IP "\fB-o\fP \fIs\fP"
+output to \fIs\fP instead of spooling
+.IP "\fB-p\fP \fIn\fP"
+don't print pages before \fIn\fP.
+.IP \fB-Ps\fP
+pass directly to lpr.
+.IP \fB-v\fP
+verbose operation.
+.IP "\fB-x\fP \fIn\fP"
+set magnification to \fIn\fP.
+.IP \fB--help\fP
+write usage summary.
+.P
+Other options are passed to the dvilj program.
+.SH BUGS
+Email bug reports to tex-k@mail.tug.org.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBdvicopy\fP(1), \fBdvilj4\fP(1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..40de4732e83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1
@@ -0,0 +1,275 @@
+.TH DVILJK 1 "10 June 1996"
+.ad b
+.SH NAME
+dvilj4, dvilj4l, dvilj2p, dvilj \- convert a TeX DVI file to PCL, for HP LaserJet printers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\f3dvilj\f1
+[\f3\-\-D\f2number\f1]
+[\f3\-c\f2copies\f1]
+[\f3\-d\f2mode\f1]
+[\f3\-D\f1]
+[\f3\-E\f1]
+[\f3\-e\f2outputfile\f1]
+[\f3\-f\f2frompage\f1]
+[\f3\-g\f1]
+[\f3\-h\f2headerfile\f1]
+[\f3\-l\f1]
+[\f3\-M\f2flag\f1]
+[\f3\-m\f2mag\f1]
+[\f3\-p\f2pages\f1]
+[\f3\-q\f1]
+[\f3\-r\f1]
+[\f3\-t\f2topage\f1]
+[\f3\-s\f2pagesize\f1]
+[\f3\-v\f1]
+[\f3\-V\f2mode\f1]
+[\f3\-w\f1]
+[\f3\-x\f2xoff(mm)\f1]
+[\f3\-y\f2yoff(mm)\f1]
+[\f3\-X\f2xoff(dots)\f1]
+[\f3\-Y\f2yoff(dots)\f1]
+[\f3\-z\f1]
+[\f3\-\f1]
+[\f2filename\f1]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Dvilj and siblings convert TeX-output .dvi files into PCL (the
+Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) commands suitable for printing
+on a HP LaserJet+, HP LaserJet IIP (using dvilj2p), HP LaserJet 4 (using
+dvilj4), and fully compatible printers.
+.PP
+Dvilj4 also provides support for the builtin Intellifont and TrueType
+fonts; TFM and VF files are provided in the distribution.
+Virtual fonts are not supported directly by Dvilj, so you must run
+.BR dvicopy (1)
+first, or otherwise expand the virtual fonts
+.PP
+All programs are generated from one source file dvi2xx.c.
+They are usually called via a shell script or as a line printer
+filter. One such script, dvihp, is included in the distribution. It
+provides command-line options similar to those of dvips(1).
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP \w'-Dnumber'u+2n
+\f3--D\f2number\f1
+Debug according to the bits of \f2number\f1; see the Kpathsea manual for
+values. Also turns on general verbosity.
+.TP
+\f3-c\f2number\f1
+print each page \f2number\f1 times (including original)
+.TP
+\f3-d\f2number\f1
+print in duplex mode. The option -d\f21\f1 means long edge binding,
+-d\f22\f1 stands for short edge binding. This option is only
+selectable from \fIdvilj2p\fP, and is known to work on the LaserJet IId,
+LaserJet IIId, and LaserJet 4.
+.TP
+\f3-D\f1[-]
+Double-sided printing - see below; -D\f21\f1 prints odd sides only,
+-D\f22\f1 is for even pages, a trailing \f2-\f1 suppresses printing of
+empty padding pages.
+.TP
+\f3-E\f1
+Switch printer into econo mode (dvilj4 only).
+.TP
+\f3-e\f2outfile\f1
+Send output to \f2outfile\f1 instead of the basename of dvi file
+extended with `.lj'.
+If \f2outfile\f1 is `-' (as in `-e-') the output is directed
+to standard output and can be directly piped into a spooler.
+.TP
+\f3-f\f2pagenum\f1
+Print pages with TeX page numbers greater than or equal to \f2pagenum\f1.
+.TP
+\f3-g\f1
+``go'' mode: do not reset printer at start of job.
+.TP
+\f3-h\f2headerfile\f1
+Copy \f2headerfile\f1 to output before translation of the DVI file.
+Used to send arbitrary commands to the laserprinter.
+.TP
+\f3-l\f1
+print output in landscape mode; supported
+only by dvilj2p and dvilj4.
+.TP
+\f3-M\f2flag\f1
+Do (not) call mktexpk to generate fonts on demand. \f3-M\f21\f1 and
+\f3-M\f1 are equivalent. \f3-M\f20\f1 enables invoking mktexpk. (This
+is the same as dvips.) The default behavior (i.e., if no
+\f3-M\f1 option is given) is chosen at compile-time; as distributed,
+mktexpk is enabled. \f3-M\f1 is only valid if
+dvi2xx was compiled with support for mktexpk.
+.TP
+\f3-m\f2magnification\f1
+Specify the magnification to use. The following are available:
+.br
+\f3-m#\f2usermag\f1 e.g., \f3#900\f1
+.br
+\f3-m0\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1000\f1
+.br
+\f3-mh\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1095\f1
+.br
+\f3-m1\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1200\f1
+.br
+\f3-mq\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1250\f1
+.br
+\f3-m2\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1440\f1
+.br
+\f3-m3\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#1728\f1
+.br
+\f3-m4\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#2074\f1
+.br
+\f3-m5\f1 equivalent to \f3-m#2488\f1
+.TP
+\f3-p\f2pagecount\f1
+print \f2pagecount\f1 pages after the starting page.
+.TP
+\f3-q\f1
+Quiet operation: omit final statistics, etc.
+.TP
+\f3-r\f1
+toggle page reversal; by default, pages are reversed.
+.TP
+\f3-s\f2pagesize \f1
+Specify the page size:
+.br
+\f3-s1\f1: executive (7.25in x 10.5in)
+.br
+\f3-s2\f1: letter (8.5in x 11in)
+.br
+\f3-s3\f1: legal (8.5in x 14in)
+.br
+\f3-s26\f1: A4 (210mm x 297mm)
+.br
+\f3-s80\f1: monarch (3.875in x 7.5in)
+.br
+\f3-s81\f1: commercial-10 (4.125in x 9.5in)
+.br
+\f3-s90\f1: international DL (110mm x 220mm)
+.br
+\f3-s91\f1: international C5 (162mm x 229mm)
+.br
+All values are from the LJ II technical reference manual.
+If the -s commandline option is omitted, no clipping is performed
+at the bottom of the page.
+.TP
+\f3-t\f2pagenum\f1
+Print pages with TeX page numbers less than or equal to \f2pagenum\f1.
+.TP
+\f3-v\f1
+Verbose mode: list fonts used, etc.
+.TP
+\f3-V\f2mode\f1
+compatibility mode. Use \f2K\f1 for Kyocera, \f2B\f1 for Brother,
+\f26\f1 for LJ6 printers.
+.TP
+\f3-w\f1
+Omit warnings.
+.TP
+\f3-x\f2offset\f1
+global x-offset in mm on output page
+relative to 1 inch/1 inch origin
+.TP
+\f3-y\f2offset\f1
+global y-offset in mm on output page
+relative to 1 inch/1 inch origin
+.TP
+\f3-X\f2offset\f1
+global x-offset in dots on output page
+(overrides 1 inch/1 inch origin)
+.TP
+\f3-Y\f2offset\f1
+global y-offset in dots on output page
+(overrides 1 inch/1 inch origin)
+.TP
+\f3-z\f1
+print a test page with the page counter at end of job
+.TP
+\f3-\f1
+Take input from standard input (must be seekable), write to standard output.
+.PP
+If no arguments are specified a brief usage message is displayed.
+.SH \especial COMMANDS
+TeX `\especial' commands that are implemented:
+.TP \w'\f3\especial{hpfile=<filename>}\f1'u+2n
+\f3\especial{file=<filename>}\f1
+copy specified file to the printer; either vector- or bitmap-graphics PMP
+commands
+.TP
+\f3\especial{hpfile=<filename>}\f1
+Same as `file'.
+.TP 0
+others:
+There are a few other special commands implented for the LJ-series,
+which should only be used in connection with the distributed style
+files (e.g., graybox.sty). They may change in forthcoming versions.
+.PP
+You can include Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files in the PCL files output
+by dvilj if you convert them to PCL first. The distribution includes a
+script `epspcl' to do this (using Ghostscript, so your Ghostscript must
+have the necessary LaserJet driver(s) compiled in).
+.SH DOUBLE PAGE PRINTING
+The command line option -D causes the printer to print
+in doublepage mode, that is, roughly speaking, printing first
+the even pages and then the odd pages of a document.
+If -D is used to print both even and odd pages (-D is used
+without the optional \f21\f1 or \f22\f1)
+the following will happen after
+half of the pages is printed:
+\f3LJ:\f1
+the printer stops, shows message "FEED" and switches
+on manual feed led. The printer continues when either
+the printed pages are fed into the manual page feeder,
+or the operator pushes the continue button (after placing first
+the printed pages into the paper tray).
+.PP
+If -D1 was specified only odd pages will be printed, -D2 can be used
+for even pages. A trailing `-' (as in -D-, -D1- or -D2-) supresses
+printing of empty pages which are generated for padding otherwise.
+.PP
+The driver allows the -D option for both print-directions (front-to-back
+or back-to-front printing). It tries to be clever in certain cases:
+when a document has an odd number of pages it inserts in the
+right place an empty page
+when a document starts with page 0 the driver inserts an empty
+page after the 0-page
+when a piece of a document is printed that starts with
+an even page-number it prints this page at the backside
+of the first page to ensure that the odd sides are always
+on the frontside. The 0-page is treated like an odd page.
+.PP
+The doubleside option works for all LJs, not only for the
+new D model with does doubleside-printing (actually, I don't
+know whether it makes much sense on the new LJ II D at all).
+.PP
+Caveat on the doubleside-option: When it is used frequently
+or on very large files, it might become necessary to clean
+the printer much more frequently.
+.PP
+The command line option -pX can be used to abort printing
+after the output of X pages (can lead to strange results together
+with -D). I personally dislike this option. The secure way of
+printing a part of a document is using -f (from) and -t (to).
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+Dviljk uses the same environment variables and algorithms for finding
+font files as TeX and its friends do. See the documentation for the
+Kpathsea library for details. (Repeating it here is too cumbersome.)
+.PP
+DVILJFONTS, if set, overrides all other font paths.
+.PP
+DVILJMAKEPK, if set, overrides `mktexpk' as the name of the command to
+execute to create a PK file if one isn't found.
+.PP
+The DVILJSIZES variable may be set to indicate which sizes of fonts are
+available. It should consist of a list of numbers separated by colons. If
+the list begins with a colon, the system default sizes are used, as well.
+Sizes are expressed in dots per inch; decimals may be used for ``pxl'' files:
+for example, a 300 dots per inch file magnified by half a step comes out to
+1643 dots per five inches, which should be encoded as 328.6. \fIdvilj\fR
+tries the actual size of the font before trying any of the given sizes.
+.PP
+KPATHSEA_DEBUG: Trace Kpathsea lookups; set to -1 for complete tracing.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Gustaf Neumann, Wirtschaftsuniversitaet Wien
+.br
+neumann@wu-wien.ac.at
+.PP
+dviljk changes by kb@mail.tug.org; email bug reports to tex\-k@mail.tug.org.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..67bb7d80a78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+dvilj.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..67bb7d80a78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+dvilj.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..67bb7d80a78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+dvilj.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..67bb7d80a78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+dvilj.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..674a15790a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,322 @@
+.de EX
+.sp
+.in +5
+.nf
+.ft CW
+..
+.de EE
+.in -5
+.ft R
+.sp
+.fi
+..
+.TH dvipdfm 1 5/28/2001
+.SH NAME
+dvipdfm \- Produce PDF files directly from DVI files
+
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dvipdfm
+.RI [ options ]
+.IR file [.dvi]
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The program
+.B dvipdfm
+generates a
+.SM PDF
+file from a
+.SM DVI
+file.
+.SM DVI
+files are the output format
+produced by TeX.
+Output from
+.B groff
+can be converted to
+.SM DVI
+format
+using
+.BR grodvi .
+
+The program
+.B dvipdfm
+recognizes several commonly used
+.BR \especial
+commands, which are extensions to the
+.SM DVI
+format.
+Specifically, it understands
+color specials, papersize specials,
+tpic specials (which allow it to be used with
+.BR pic ),
+hypertex specials, and some PostScript
+specials. These extensions allow documents
+to contain color, figures, and hyperlinks.
+The program tries to mimic
+the behavior of
+.B dvips
+so that many
+macro packages produced for use with
+.B dvips
+will work with
+.B dvipdfm.
+Dvipdfm understands its own specific
+.B \especial
+commands to allow access to PDF features
+such as annotations and bookmarks.
+For more details, consult the
+.I "Dvipdfm User's Manual,"
+which is distributed with
+.B dvipdfm.
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^c
+Ignore color
+.BR \especials .
+The
+.B \-\^c
+toggles a flag that disables color
+.B \especial
+processing.
+Unless changed in the configuration file,
+that flag is off, and color
+.BR \especial "s"
+are interpreted normally.
+The
+.B \-\^c
+option may be used to produce a black and white document
+from a document containing color TeX
+.B \especial
+commands.
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^d
+Remove thumbnail images after including them.
+(See the
+.B \-\^t
+option for more information.)
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^e
+Toggle partial font embedding flag. If partial
+font embedding is off, embedded fonts are
+.I fully
+embedded.
+The default, if not changed in the configuration file,
+is to embed only those glyphs actually used in the document.
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^f map_file
+Set the name of the font map file to
+.IR map_file .
+The format of the font map file
+is documented in the
+.IR "Dvipdfm User's Manual" .
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^l
+Select landscape mode. In other words, exchange the
+.I x
+and
+.I y
+dimensions of the paper.
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^m " mag"
+Magnify the input document by
+.IR mag .
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^o " name"
+Generate PDF output file having the name
+.IR name .
+By default, the name of the output
+file is
+.IR file .pdf.
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^p " paper"
+Select the papersize by name (e.g.,
+.BR letter ", " legal ", " ledger ", " tabloid ", " a3 ", " a4 ", or " a5
+)
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^r " size"
+Set resolution of bitmapped fonts to
+.B size
+dots per inch. Bitmapped fonts are generated
+by the Kpathsea library, which uses MetaFont. Bitmapped
+fonts are included as type 3 fonts in the PDF output file.
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^s " page_specifications"
+Select the pages of the
+.SM DVI
+file to be converted.
+The
+.I page_specifications
+consists of a comma separated list of
+.I page_ranges:
+
+.EX
+.IR "page_specifications := page_specification" "[," page_specifications "]"
+.EE
+
+where
+
+.EX
+.IR "page_specification := single_page" | page_range
+
+.IR "page_range := " [ first_page ]\^\-\^[ last_page ]
+.EE
+
+An empty
+.I first_page
+is implied to be the first page of the
+.SM DVI
+file.
+An empty
+.I last_page
+is treated as the last page of the
+.SM DVI
+file.
+
+Examples:
+.RS
+.TP 5
+.B "\-\^s 1,3,5"
+includes pages 1, 3, and 5;
+.TP 5
+.B "\-\^s \-"
+includes all pages;
+.TP 5
+.B "\-\^s \-,\-"
+includes two copies of all pages in the
+.SM DVI
+file;
+and
+.TP 5
+.B "\-\^s 1\-10"
+includes the first ten pages of the
+.SM DVI
+file.
+.RE
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^t
+Search for thumbnail images of each page
+in the directory named by the
+.B TMPDIR
+environment variable.
+The thumbnail images must be named in a specific format.
+They must have the same base name
+as the
+.SM DVI
+file and they must have the page number as the extension
+to the file name. Dvipdfm does not
+generate the thumbnails itself, but it is distributed with a wrapper
+program named
+.B dvipdft
+that does so.
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^v
+Increase verbosity.
+Results of the
+.B \-\^v
+option are cumulative (e.g.,
+.B \-\^vv
+) increases the verbosity by two increments.
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^x x_offset
+Set the left margin to
+.IR x_offset .
+The default left margin is
+.BR 1.0in .
+The dimension may be specified in any units understood by TeX (e.g.,
+.BR bpt ", " pt ", " in ", " cm
+)
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^y y_offset
+Set the top margin to
+.IR y_offset .
+The default top margin is
+.BR 1.0in .
+The dimension may be specified in any units understood by TeX (e.g.,
+.BR bpt ", " pt ", " in ", " cm
+)
+
+.TP 5
+.B \-\^z compression_level
+Set the compression level to
+.IR compression_level .
+Compressions levels range from 0 (no compression) to
+9 (maximum compression) and correspond to the values understood by zlib.
+
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+
+.B Dvipdfm
+uses the
+.B kpathsea
+library for locating the files that it opens. Hence,
+the environment variables documented in the
+.I Kpathsea library
+documentation influence
+.B dvipdfm.
+
+Dvipdfm also reads the following environment variables:
+
+.TP 5
+TMP
+The directory to search for thumbnail images of each page.
+
+.SH FILES
+The precise location of the following files is determined by the
+.I Kpathsea library
+configuration. The location may be determined by using kpsewhich, e.g.,
+.nf
+.B kpsewhich \-progname=dvipdfm \-format='other text files' config
+.fi
+
+.TP 5
+.I config
+Startup options
+
+.TP 5
+.I t1fonts.map
+The default font map file (this name may be changed in the config file).
+
+.TP 5
+.I *.tfm
+TeX font metrics
+
+.TP 5
+.I *.vf
+TeX virtual font files
+
+.TP 5
+.I *.pfb
+PostScript Type 1 font files
+
+.TP 5
+.I
+texmf.cnf
+The Kpathsea library configuration file.
+The location of this file may be found by typing
+.nf
+.B kpsewhich texmf.cnf
+.fi
+
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex "(1), " dvips "(1), " groff "(1), " grodvi "(1), " pic "(1), "
+and the
+.I "Kpathsea library"
+info documentation.
+
+.SH AUTHOR
+Mark A. Wicks <mwicks@kettering.edu>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..803db249e4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+.TH "dvipdft" "1" "May 2004" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+dvipdft \- create thumbnail images for use with dvipdfm
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBdvipdft\fP [ \fI DVIPDFM-OPTIONS\fP \&.\&.\&. ] \fI filename.dvi\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBdvipdft\fP creates thumbnail pictures of the pages in your file
+and subsequently runs dvipdfm to create a PDF file with these
+thumbnails.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.HP
+All options are simply handed on to dvipdfm
+.HP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IP
+\fBdvipdfm\fP(1)
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBdvipdft\fP was written by Mark A. Wicks and Thomas Esser.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by Frank Küster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch>,
+for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by others without
+contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the manual page
+are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this manual page
+should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a0862bd5abe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1
@@ -0,0 +1,483 @@
+.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
+.\"
+.\" Standard preamble:
+.\" ========================================================================
+.de Sh \" Subsection heading
+.br
+.if t .Sp
+.ne 5
+.PP
+\fB\\$1\fR
+.PP
+..
+.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
+.if t .sp .5v
+.if n .sp
+..
+.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
+.ft CW
+.nf
+.ne \\$1
+..
+.de Ve \" End verbatim text
+.ft R
+.fi
+..
+.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
+.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
+.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
+.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
+.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
+.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
+.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
+.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
+.ie n \{\
+. ds -- \(*W-
+. ds PI pi
+. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
+. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
+. ds L" ""
+. ds R" ""
+. ds C` ""
+. ds C' ""
+'br\}
+.el\{\
+. ds -- \|\(em\|
+. ds PI \(*p
+. ds L" ``
+. ds R" ''
+'br\}
+.\"
+.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
+.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
+.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
+.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
+.if \nF \{\
+. de IX
+. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
+..
+. nr % 0
+. rr F
+.\}
+.\"
+.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
+.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
+.hy 0
+.if n .na
+.\"
+.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
+.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
+. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
+.if n \{\
+. ds #H 0
+. ds #V .8m
+. ds #F .3m
+. ds #[ \f1
+. ds #] \fP
+.\}
+.if t \{\
+. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
+. ds #V .6m
+. ds #F 0
+. ds #[ \&
+. ds #] \&
+.\}
+. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
+.if n \{\
+. ds ' \&
+. ds ` \&
+. ds ^ \&
+. ds , \&
+. ds ~ ~
+. ds /
+.\}
+.if t \{\
+. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
+. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
+. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
+. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
+. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
+. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
+.\}
+. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
+.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
+.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
+.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
+.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
+.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
+.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
+.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
+.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
+.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
+. \" corrections for vroff
+.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
+.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
+. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
+.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
+\{\
+. ds : e
+. ds 8 ss
+. ds o a
+. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
+. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
+. ds th \o'bp'
+. ds Th \o'LP'
+. ds ae ae
+. ds Ae AE
+.\}
+.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
+.\" ========================================================================
+.\"
+.IX Title "DVIPNG 1"
+.TH DVIPNG 1 "2005-04-04" "dvipng 1.6" "User commands"
+.SH "NAME"
+dvipng \- A DVI\-to\-PNG translator
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
+dvipng [options] filename
+.PP
+dvipng [options] [filename] \-
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
+This program makes \s-1PNG\s0 and/or \s-1GIF\s0 graphics from \s-1DVI\s0 files as obtained
+from TeX and its relatives.
+.PP
+If \s-1GIF\s0 support is enabled, \s-1GIF\s0 output is chosen by using the
+\&\fBdvigif\fR binary or with the \fB\-\-gif\fR option.
+.PP
+The benefits of \fBdvipng\fR/\fBdvigif\fR include
+.IP "\(bu" 4
+Speed. It is a very fast bitmap-rendering code for \s-1DVI\s0 files. On a
+fairly low-end laptop, it takes less than a second to generate 150
+one-formula images. This makes dvipng suitable for generating large
+amounts of images on\-the\-fly, as needed in preview\-latex, WeBWorK and
+others.
+.IP "\(bu" 4
+It does not read the postamble, so it can be started before TeX
+finishes. There is a \-\-follow switch that makes dvipng wait at \s-1EOF\s0 for
+further output, unless it finds the \s-1POST\s0 marker that indicates the end
+of the \s-1DVI\s0.
+.IP "\(bu" 4
+Interactive query of options. dvipng can read options interactively
+through stdin, and all options are usable. It is even possible to change
+the input file through this interface.
+.IP "\(bu" 4
+Supports \s-1PK\s0, \s-1VF\s0, PostScript Type1, and TrueType fonts, color specials
+and simple PostScript inclusion specials.
+.IP "\(bu" 4
+and more...
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.IX Header "OPTIONS"
+Many of the parameterless options listed here can be turned off by
+suffixing the option with a zero (\fB0\fR); for instance, to turn off
+page reversal, use \fB\-r0\fR. Such options are marked with a trailing
+\&\fB*\fR.
+.IP "\fB\-\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-"
+Read additional options from standard input after processing the command
+line.
+.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--help"
+Print a usage message and exit.
+.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--version"
+Print the version number and exit.
+.IP "\fB\-bd\fR \fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-bd num"
+.PD 0
+.IP "\fB\-bd\fR \fIcolor_spec\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-bd color_spec"
+.IP "\fB\-bd '\fR\fInum\fR\fB \fR\fIcolor_spec\fR\fB'\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-bd 'num color_spec'"
+.PD
+Set the pixel width of the transparent border (default 0). Using this
+option will make the image edges transparent, but it only affects pixels
+with the background color. Giving a \fIcolor_spec\fR will set the
+fallback color, to be used in viewers that cannot handle transparency
+(the default is the background color). The color spec should be in
+TeX color \especial syntax, e.g., 'rgb 1.0 0.0 0.0'. Setting the
+fallback color makes the default border width 1 px.
+.IP "\fB\-\-bdpi\fR \fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--bdpi num"
+Set the base (Metafont) resolution, both horizontal and vertical, to
+\&\fInum\fR dpi (dots per inch). This option is necessary when manually
+selecting Metafont mode with the \-\-mode option (see below).
+.IP "\fB\-bg\fR \fIcolor_spec\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-bg color_spec"
+Choose background color for the images. This option will be ignored if
+there is a background color \especial in the \s-1DVI\s0. The color spec should
+be in TeX color \especial syntax, e.g., 'rgb 1.0 0.0 0.0'. You can
+also specify 'Transparent' or 'transparent' which will give you a
+transparent background with the normal background as a fallback color. A
+capitalized 'Transparent' will give a full-alpha transparency, while an
+all-lowercase 'transparent' will give a simple fully transparent
+background with non-transparent antialiased pixels. The latter would be
+suitable for viewers who cannot cope with a true alpha channel. \s-1GIF\s0
+images do not support full alpha transparency, so in case of \s-1GIF\s0 output,
+both variants will use the latter behaviour.
+.IP "\fB\-d\fR \fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-d num"
+Set the debug flags, showing what dvipng (thinks it) is doing. This will
+work unless dvipng has been compiled without the \fB\s-1DEBUG\s0\fR option
+(not recommended). Set the flags as you need them, use \fB\-d \-1\fR as
+the first option for maximum output.
+.IP "\fB\-D\fR \fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-D num"
+Set the output resolution, both horizontal and vertical, to \fInum\fR
+dpi (dots per inch).
+.Sp
+One may want to adjust this to fit a certain text font size (e.g., on
+a web page), and for a text font height of \fIfont_px\fR pixels (in
+Mozilla) the correct formula is
+.Sp
+.Vb 1
+\& <dpi> = <font_px> * 72.27 / 10 [px * TeXpt/in / TeXpt]
+.Ve
+.Sp
+The last division by ten is due to the standard font height 10pt in
+your document, if you use 12pt, divide by 12. Unfortunately, some
+proprietary browsers have font height in pt (points), not pixels. You
+have to rescale that to pixels, using the screen resolution (default
+is usually 96 dpi) which means the formula is
+.Sp
+.Vb 1
+\& <font_px> = <font_pt> * 96 / 72 [pt * px/in / (pt/in)]
+.Ve
+.Sp
+On some high-res screens, the value is instead 120 dpi. Good luck!
+.IP "\fB\-\-depth*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--depth*"
+Report the depth of the image. This only works reliably when the
+LaTeX style \fBpreview.sty\fR from preview-latex is used. It
+reports the number of pixels from the bottom of the image to the
+baseline of the image. This can be used for vertical positioning of the
+image in, e.g., web documents, where one would use (Cascading
+StyleSheets 1)
+.Sp
+.Vb 1
+\& <IMG SRC="<filename.png>" STYLE="vertical\-align: \-<depth>px">
+.Ve
+.Sp
+The depth is a negative offset in this case, so the minus sign is
+necessary, and the unit is pixels (px).
+.IP "\fB\-\-dvinum*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--dvinum*"
+Set this option to make the output page number be the TeX page
+numbers rather than the physical page number. See the \fB\-o\fR switch.
+.IP "\fB\-fg\fR \fIcolor_spec\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-fg color_spec"
+Choose foreground color for the images. This option will be ignored if
+there is a foreground color \especial in the \s-1DVI\s0. The color spec should
+be in TeX color \especial syntax, e.g., 'rgb 1.0 0.0 0.0'.
+.IP "\fB\-\-follow*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--follow*"
+Enable follow mode. One of the benefits of dvipng is that it does not
+read the postamble, so it can be started before TeX finishes. This
+switch makes dvipng wait at \s-1EOF\s0 for further output, unless it finds the
+\&\s-1POST\s0 marker that indicates the end of the \s-1DVI\s0. This is similar to
+\&\fBtail \-f\fR but for DVI-to-PNG conversion.
+.IP "\fB\-\-freetype*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--freetype*"
+Enable/disable FreeType font rendering (default on). This option is
+available if the FreeType2 font library was present at compilation time.
+If this is the case, dvipng will have direct support for PostScript
+Type1 and TrueType fonts internally, rather than using \fBgsftopk\fR
+for rendering the fonts. If you have PostScript versions of Computer
+Modern installed, there will be no need to generate bitmapped variants
+on disk of these. Then, you can render images at different (and unusual)
+resolutions without cluttering the disk with lots of bitmapped fonts.
+Note that if you have both FreeType and T1lib on your system, FreeType
+will be preferred by dvipng. If you for some reason would want to use
+T1lib rendering, use this option.
+.IP "\fB\-\-gamma\fR \fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--gamma num"
+Control the interpolation of colors in the greyscale anti-aliasing
+color palette. Default value is 1.0. For 0 < \fInum\fR < 1, the
+fonts will be lighter (more like the background), and for \fInum\fR >
+1, the fonts will be darker (more like the foreground).
+.IP "\fB\-\-gif*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--gif*"
+The images are output in the \s-1GIF\s0 format, if \s-1GIF\s0 support is
+enabled. This is the default for the \fBdvigif\fR binary, which only
+will be available when \s-1GIF\s0 support is enabled. See also the
+\&\fB\-\-png\fR option.
+.IP "\fB\-\-height*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--height*"
+Report the height of the image. This only works reliably when the
+LaTeX style \fBpreview.sty\fR from preview-latex is used. It
+reports the number of pixels from the top of the image to the
+baseline of the image. The total height of the image is obtained as the
+sum of the values reported from \-\-height and the \-\-depth.
+.IP "\fB\-l [=]\fR\fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-l [=]num"
+The last page printed will be the first one numbered \fInum\fR. Default
+is the last page in the document. If \fInum\fR is prefixed by an equals
+sign, then it (and the argument to the \fB\-p\fR option, if specified)
+is treated as a physical (absolute) page number, rather than a value to
+compare with the TeX \fB\ecount0\fR values stored in the \s-1DVI\s0 file.
+Thus, using \fB\-l =9\fR will end with the ninth page of the document,
+no matter what the pages are actually numbered.
+.IP "\fB\-\-mode\fR \fImode\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--mode mode"
+Use \fImode\fR as the Metafont device name for the \s-1PK\s0 fonts (both for
+path searching and font generation). This needs to be augmented with the
+base device resolution, given with the \fB\-\-bdpi\fR option. See the
+file <\fBftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/modes.mf\fR> for a list of resolutions and
+mode names for most devices.
+.IP "\fB\-M*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-M*"
+Turns off automatic \s-1PK\s0 font generation (\fImktexpk\fR). This will have
+no effect when using PostScript fonts, since no \s-1PK\s0 font generation will
+be done anyway.
+.IP "\fB\-\-noghostscript*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--noghostscript*"
+This switch prohibits the internal call to GhostScript for displaying
+PostScript specials. \fB\-\-noghostscript0\fR turns the call back on.
+.IP "\fB\-\-nogssafer*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--nogssafer*"
+Normally, if GhostScript is used to render PostScript specials, the
+GhostScript interpreter is run with the option \fB\-dSAFER\fR. The
+\&\fB\-nogssafer\fR option runs GhostScript without \fB\-dSAFER\fR. The
+\&\fB\-dSAFER\fR option in Ghostscript disables PostScript operators such
+as deletefile, to prevent possibly malicious PostScript programs from
+having any effect.
+.IP "\fB\-o\fR \fIname\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-o name"
+Send output to the file \fIname\fR. A single occurrence of \fB%d\fR or
+\&\fB%01d\fR, ..., \fB%09d\fR will be exchanged for the physical
+page number (this can be changed, see the \fB\-\-dvinum\fR switch). The
+default output filename is \fIfile\fR\fB%d.png\fR where the input \s-1DVI\s0
+file was \fIfile\fR\fB.dvi\fR.
+.IP "\fB\-O\fR \fIx\-offset\fR\fB,\fR\fIy\-offset\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-O x-offset,y-offset"
+Move the origin by \fIx\-offset\fR,\fIy\-offset\fR, a comma-separated
+pair of dimensions such as \fB.1in,\-.3cm\fR.
+The origin of the page is shifted from the default position
+(of one inch down, one inch to the right from the upper left corner of
+the paper) by this amount.
+.IP "\fB\-p [=]\fR\fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-p [=]num"
+The first page printed will be the first one numbered \fInum\fR. Default
+is the first page in the document. If \fInum\fR is prefixed by an
+equals sign, then it (and the argument to the \fB\-l\fR option, if
+specified) is treated as a physical (absolute) page number, rather than
+a value to compare with the TeX \fB\ecount0\fR values stored in the
+\&\s-1DVI\s0 file. Thus, using \fB\-p =3\fR will start with the third page of
+the document, no matter what the pages are actually numbered.
+.IP "\fB\-\-picky*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--picky*"
+No images are output when a warning occurs. Normally, dvipng will
+output an image in spite of a warning, but there may be something
+missing in this image. One reason to use this option would be if you
+have a more complete but slower fallback converter. Mainly, this is
+useful for failed figure inclusion and unknown \especial occurrences,
+but warnings will also occur for missing or unknown color specs and
+missing \s-1PK\s0 fonts.
+.IP "\fB\-\-png*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--png*"
+The images are output in the \s-1PNG\s0 format. This is the default for the
+\&\fBdvipng\fR binary. See also the \fB\-\-gif\fR option.
+.IP "\fB\-pp\fR \fIfirstpage\fR\fB\-\fR\fIlastpage\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-pp firstpage-lastpage"
+Print pages \fIfirstpage\fR through \fIlastpage\fR; but not quite
+equivalent to \fB\-p\fR \fIfirstpage\fR \fB\-l\fR \fIlastpage\fR. For example,
+when rendering a book, there may be several instances of a page in the
+\&\s-1DVI\s0 file (one in \f(CW\*(C`\efrontmatter\*(C'\fR, one in \f(CW\*(C`\emainmatter\*(C'\fR, and one
+in \f(CW\*(C`\ebackmatter\*(C'\fR). In case of several pages matching, \fB\-pp\fR
+\&\fIfirstpage\fR\fB\-\fR\fIlastpage\fR will render \fIall\fR pages that
+matches the specified range, while \fB\-p\fR \fIfirstpage\fR \fB\-l\fR
+\&\fIlastpage\fR will render the pages from the \fIfirst\fR occurrence
+of \fIfirstpage\fR to the \fIfirst\fR occurrence of \fIlastpage\fR.
+This is the (undocumented) behaviour of dvips. In dvipng you can give
+both kinds of options, in which case you get all pages that matches the
+range in \fB\-pp\fR between the pages from \fB\-p\fR to \fB\-l\fR. Also
+multiple \fB\-pp\fR options accumulate, unlike \fB\-p\fR and \fB\-l\fR.
+The \fB\-\fR separator can also be \fB:\fR. Note that \fB\-pp \-1\fR
+will be interpreted as \*(L"all pages up to and including 1\*(R", if you want a
+page numbered \-1 (only the table of contents, say) put \fB\-pp \-1\-\-1\fR,
+or more readable, \fB\-pp \-1:\-1\fR.
+.IP "\fB\-q*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-q*"
+Run quietly. Don't chatter about pages converted, etc. to standard
+output; report no warnings (only errors) to standard error.
+.IP "\fB\-Q\fR \fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-Q num"
+Set the quality to \fInum\fR. That is, choose the number of antialiasing
+levels for \s-1PK\s0 and T1lib rendering to be \fInum\fR*\fInum\fR. The default
+value is 4 which gives 16 levels of antialiasing for antialiased fonts
+from these two. If FreeType is available, its rendering is unaffected by
+this option.
+.IP "\fB\-r*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-r*"
+Toggle output of pages in reverse/forward order. By default, the first
+page in the \s-1DVI\s0 is output first.
+.IP "\fB\-T\fR \fIimage_size\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-T image_size"
+Set the image size to \fIimage_size\fR which can be either of
+\&\fBbbox\fR, \fBtight\fR, or a comma-separated pair of dimensions
+\&\fIhsize\fR,\fIvsize\fR such as \fB.1in,.3cm\fR. The default is
+\&\fBbbox\fR which produces a \s-1PNG\s0 that includes all ink put on the page
+and in addition the \s-1DVI\s0 origin, located 1in from the top and 1in from
+the left edge of the paper. This usually gives whitespace above and to
+the left in the produced image. The value \fBtight\fR will make dvipng
+only include all ink put on the page, producing neat images.
+This option overrides any papersize special in the \s-1DVI\s0 file.
+.IP "\fB\-\-t1lib*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--t1lib*"
+Enable/disable T1lib font rendering (default on). This option is
+available if the T1lib font library was present at compilation time. If
+this is the case, dvipng will have direct support for PostScript Type1
+fonts internally, rather than using \fBgsftopk\fR for rendering the
+fonts. If you have PostScript versions of Computer Modern installed,
+there will be no need to generate bitmapped variants on disk of these.
+Then, you can render images at different (and unusual) resolutions
+without cluttering the disk with lots of bitmapped fonts. Note that if
+you have both FreeType and T1lib on your system FreeType will be
+preferred by dvipng, and if you for some reason rather want to use
+T1lib, give the option \fB\-\-freetype0\fR (see above).
+.IP "\fB\-\-truecolor*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "--truecolor*"
+On systems with a fairly new \fBlibgd\fR, one can choose to generate
+truecolor output. This will not be necessary in general unless you
+include truecolor images via a PostScript special (i.e., the
+\&\fBgraphics\fR or \fBgraphicx\fR package). It will lead to longer
+execution time, mostly because more data is written to disk.
+.IP "\fB\-v*\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-v*"
+Enable verbose operation. This will currently indicate what fonts is
+used, in addition to the usual output.
+.IP "\fB\-x\fR \fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-x num"
+Set the x magnification ratio to \fInum\fR/1000. Overrides
+the magnification specified in the \s-1DVI\s0 file. Must be between 10 and
+100000. It is recommended that you use standard magstep values (1095,
+1200, 1440, 1728, 2074, 2488, 2986, and so on) to help reduce the total
+number of \s-1PK\s0 files generated. \fInum\fR may be a real number, not an
+integer, for increased precision.
+.IP "\fB\-z\fR \fInum\fR" 4
+.IX Item "-z num"
+Set the \s-1PNG\s0 compression level to \fInum\fR. This option is enabled if
+your \fBlibgd\fR is new enough. The default compression level is 1,
+which selects maximum speed at the price of slightly larger PNGs. For an
+older \fBlibgd\fR, the hard-soldered value 5 is used. The include file
+\&\fBpng.h\fR says
+``Currently, valid values range from 0 \- 9, corresponding directly to
+the zlib compression levels 0 \- 9 (0 \- no compression, 9 \- \*(L"maximal\*(R"
+compression). Note that tests have shown that zlib compression levels
+3\-6 usually perform as well as level 9 for \s-1PNG\s0 images, and do
+considerably fewer calculations. In the future, these values may not
+correspond directly to the zlib compression levels.''
+.SH "NOTES"
+.IX Header "NOTES"
+The full manual is accessible in the info format, on most systems by typing
+.PP
+.Vb 1
+\& info dvipng
+.Ve
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.IX Header "COPYRIGHT"
+This program is released under the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License, see the
+\&\s-1COPYING\s0 file in the dvipng distribution or
+<\fBhttp://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html\fR>.
+.PP
+Copyright (c) 2002\-2005 Jan\-Ake Larsson
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1ff6e3f0e64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1
@@ -0,0 +1,517 @@
+.TH DVIPS 1 "27 May 2004"
+.SH NAME
+dvips \- convert a TeX DVI file to PostScript
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dvips
+[
+.I options
+]
+.IR file [\fB.dvi\fP]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+THIS MAN PAGE IS OBSOLETE!
+See the Texinfo documentation instead.
+You can read it either in Emacs or with the standalone
+.B info
+program which comes with the GNU texinfo distribution as
+prep.ai.mit.edu:pub/gnu/texinfo*.tar.gz.
+.PP
+The program
+.B dvips
+takes a DVI file
+.IR file [\fB.dvi\fP]
+produced by TeX (or by some other processor such as GFtoDVI) and
+converts it to PostScript, normally sending the result directly to the
+(laser)printer. The DVI file may be specified without the
+.B .dvi
+extension. Fonts used may either be resident in the printer or defined
+as bitmaps in PK files, or a `virtual' combination of both. If the
+.B mktexpk
+program is installed,
+.B dvips
+will automatically invoke METAFONT to generate fonts that don't already
+exist.
+.PP
+For more information, see the Texinfo manual
+.IR dvips.texi ,
+which should be installed somewhere on your system, hopefully accessible
+through the standard Info tree.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B -a
+Conserve memory by making three passes over the .dvi file instead of two
+and only loading those characters actually used. Generally only useful
+on machines with a very limited amount of memory, like some PCs.
+.TP
+.B -A
+Print only odd pages (TeX pages, not sequence pages).
+.TP
+.B -b num
+Generate
+.I num
+copies of each page, but duplicating the page body rather than using the
+.I #numcopies
+option. This can be useful in conjunction with a header file setting
+.I \ebop-hook
+to do color separations or other neat tricks.
+.TP
+.B -B
+Print only even pages (TeX pages, not sequence pages).
+.TP
+.B -c num
+Generate
+.I num
+copies of every page. Default is 1. (For collated copies, see the
+.I -C
+option below.)
+.TP
+.B -C num
+Create
+.I num
+copies, but collated (by replicating the data in the PostScript file).
+Slower than the
+.I -c
+option, but easier on the hands, and faster than resubmitting the same
+PostScript file multiple times.
+.TP
+.B -d num
+Set the debug flags. This is intended only for emergencies or for
+unusual fact-finding expeditions; it will work only if
+.B dvips
+has been compiled with the DEBUG option. If nonzero, prints additional
+information on standard error. The number is taken as a set of
+independent bits. The meaning of each bit follows. 1=specials;
+2=paths; 4=fonts; 8=pages; 16=headers; 32=font compression; 64=files;
+128=memory; 256=Kpathsea stat(2) calls; 512=Kpathsea hash table lookups;
+1024=Kpathsea path element expansion; 2048=Kpathsea searches. To trace
+everything having to do with file searching and opening, use 3650 (2048
++ 1024 + 512 + 64 + 2). To track all classes, you can use `-1' (output
+is extremely voluminous).
+.TP
+.B -D num
+Set the resolution in dpi (dots per inch) to
+.IR num .
+This affects the choice of bitmap fonts that are loaded and also the
+positioning of letters in resident PostScript fonts. Must be between 10
+and 10000. This affects both the horizontal and vertical resolution.
+If a high resolution (something greater than 400 dpi, say) is selected,
+the
+.I -Z
+flag should probably also be used.
+.TP
+.B -e num
+Make sure that each character is placed at most this many pixels from
+its `true' resolution-independent position on the page. The default
+value of this parameter is resolution dependent. Allowing individual
+characters to `drift' from their correctly rounded positions by a few
+pixels, while regaining the true position at the beginning of each new
+word, improves the spacing of letters in words.
+.TP
+.B -E
+makes
+.B dvips
+attempt to generate an EPSF file with a tight bounding box. This only
+works on one-page files, and it only looks at marks made by characters
+and rules, not by any included graphics. In addition, it gets the glyph
+metrics from the
+.I tfm
+file, so characters that lie outside their enclosing
+.I tfm
+box may confuse it. In addition, the bounding box might be a bit too
+loose if the character glyph has significant left or right side
+bearings. Nonetheless, this option works well for creating small EPSF
+files for equations or tables or the like. (Note, of course, that
+.B dvips
+output is resolution dependent and thus does not make very good EPSF
+files, especially if the images are to be scaled; use these EPSF files
+with a great deal of care.)
+.TP
+.B -f
+Run as a filter. Read the
+.I .dvi
+file from standard input and write the PostScript to standard output.
+The standard input must be seekable, so it cannot be a pipe. If you
+must use a pipe, write a shell script that copies the pipe output to a
+temporary file and then points
+.B dvips
+at this file. This option also disables the automatic reading of the
+.I PRINTER
+environment variable, and turns off the automatic sending of control D
+if it was turned on with the
+.I -F
+option or in the configuration file; use
+.I -F
+after this option if you want both.
+.TP
+.B -F
+Causes Control-D (ASCII code 4) to be appended as the very last
+character of the PostScript file. This is useful when
+.B dvips
+is driving the printer directly instead of working through a spooler,
+as is common on extremely small systems. NOTE! DO NOT USE THIS OPTION!
+.TP
+.B -G
+Causes
+.B dvips
+to shift non-printing characters to higher-numbered positions.
+This may be useful sometimes.
+.TP
+.B -h name
+Prepend file
+.I name
+as an additional header file. (However, if the name is simply `-'
+suppress all header files from the output.) This header file gets added
+to the PostScript
+.IR userdict .
+.TP
+.B -i
+Make each section be a separate file. Under certain circumstances,
+.B dvips
+will split the document up into `sections' to be processed
+independently; this is most often done for memory reasons. Using this
+option tells
+.B dvips
+to place each section into a separate file; the new file names are
+created replacing the suffix of the supplied output file name by a
+three-digit sequence number. This option is most often used in
+conjunction with the
+.I -S
+option which sets the maximum section length in pages. For instance,
+some phototypesetters cannot print more than ten or so consecutive pages
+before running out of steam; these options can be used to automatically
+split a book into ten-page sections, each to its own file.
+.TP
+.B -j
+Download only needed characters from Type 1 fonts. This is the
+default in the current release. Some debugging flags trace this operation.
+You can also control partial downloading on a per-font basis, via the
+.B psfonts.map
+file.
+.TP
+.B -k
+Print crop marks. This option increases the paper size (which should be
+specified, either with a paper size special or with the
+.I -T
+option) by a half inch in each dimension. It translates each page by a
+quarter inch and draws cross-style crop marks. It is mostly useful with
+typesetters that can set the page size automatically.
+.TP
+.B -K
+This option causes comments in included PostScript graphics, font files,
+and headers to be removed. This is sometimes necessary to get around
+bugs in spoolers or PostScript post-processing programs. Specifically,
+the %%Page comments, when left in, often cause difficulties. Use of
+this flag can cause some included graphics to fail, since the PostScript
+header macros from some software packages read portions of the input
+stream line by line, searching for a particular comment. This option
+has been turned off by default because PostScript previewers and
+spoolers have been getting better.
+.TP
+.B -l num
+The last page printed will be the first one numbered
+.I num
+Default is the last page in the document. If the
+.I num
+is prefixed by an equals sign, then it (and any argument to the
+.I -p
+option) is treated as a sequence number, rather than a value to compare
+with
+.I \ecount0
+values. Thus, using
+.I -l =9
+will end with the ninth page of the document, no matter what the pages
+are actually numbered.
+.TP
+.B -m
+Specify manual feed for printer.
+.TP
+.B -mode mode
+Use
+.I mode
+as the Metafont device name for path searching and font
+generation. This overrides any value from configuration files. With
+the default paths, explicitly specifying the mode also makes the program
+assume the fonts are in a subdirectory named
+.IR mode .
+.TP
+.B -M
+Turns off the automatic font generation facility. If any fonts are
+missing, commands to generate the fonts are appended to the file
+.I missfont.log
+in the current directory; this file can then be executed and deleted to
+create the missing fonts.
+.TP
+.B -n num
+At most
+.I num
+pages will be printed. Default is 100000.
+.TP
+.B -N
+Turns off structured comments; this might be necessary on some systems
+that try to interpret PostScript comments in weird ways, or on some
+PostScript printers. Old versions of TranScript in particular cannot
+handle modern Encapsulated PostScript.
+.TP
+.B -noomega
+This will disable the use of Omega extensions when interpreting DVI files.
+By default, the additional opcodes
+.I 129
+and
+.I 134
+are recognized by dvips as Omega extensions and interpreted as requests to
+set 2-byte characters. The only drawback is that the virtual font array will
+(at least temporarily) require 65536 positions instead of the default 256
+positions, i.e. the memory requirements of dvips will be slightly larger. If
+you find this unacceptable or encounter another problem with the Omega
+extensions, you can switch this extension off by using
+.B -noomega
+(but please do send a bug report if you find such problems - see the bug
+address in the
+.B AUTHORS
+section below).
+.TP
+.B -o name
+The output will be sent to file
+.I name
+If no file name is given, the default name is
+.I file.ps
+where the .dvi file was called
+.IR file.dvi ;
+if this option isn't given, any default in the configuration file is
+used. If the first character of the supplied output file name is an
+exclamation mark, then the remainder will be used as an argument to
+.IR popen ;
+thus, specifying
+.I !lpr
+as the output file will automatically queue the file for printing.
+This option also disables the automatic reading of the
+.I PRINTER
+environment variable, and turns off the automatic sending of control D
+if it was turned on with the
+.I -F
+option or in the configuration file; use
+.I -F
+after this option if you want both.
+.TP
+.B -O offset
+Move the origin by a certain amount. The
+.I offset
+is a comma-separated pair of dimensions, such as
+.I .1in,-.3cm
+(in the same syntax used in the
+.I papersize
+special). The origin of the page is shifted from the
+default position (of one inch down, one inch to the right from the upper
+left corner of the paper) by this amount.
+.TP
+.B -p num
+The first page printed will be the first one numbered
+.IR num .
+Default is the first page in the document. If the
+.I num
+is prefixed by an equals sign, then it (and any argument to the
+.I -l
+option) is treated as a sequence number, rather than a value to compare
+with
+.I \ecount0
+values. Thus, using
+.I -p =3
+will start with the third page of the document, no matter what the pages
+are actually numbered.
+.TP
+.B -pp pagelist
+A comma-separated list of pages and ranges (a-b) may be given, which
+will be interpreted as
+.I \ecount0
+values. Pages not specified will not be printed. Multiple
+.B -pp
+options may be specified or all pages and page ranges can be
+specified with one
+.B -pp
+option.
+.TP
+.B -P printername
+Sets up the output for the appropriate printer. This is implemented by
+reading in
+.I config.printername
+, which can then set the output pipe (as in,
+.I !lpr -Pprintername
+as well as the font paths and any other
+.I config.ps
+defaults for that printer only. Note that
+.I config.ps
+is read before
+.I config.printername
+In addition, another file called
+.I ~/.dvipsrc
+is searched for immediately after
+.IR config.ps ;
+this file is intended for user defaults. If no
+.I -P
+command is given, the environment variable
+.I PRINTER
+is checked. If that variable exists, and a corresponding configuration
+file exists, that configuration file is read in.
+.TP
+.B -q
+Run in quiet mode. Don't chatter about pages converted, etc.; report
+nothing but errors to standard error.
+.TP
+.B -r
+Stack pages in reverse order. Normally, page 1 will be printed first.
+.TP
+.B -R
+Run in secure mode. This means that ``backtick'' commands from a
+.I \especial{}
+or
+.I \epsffile{}
+macro in the (La)TeX source like
+.I \especial{psfile="`zcat foo.ps.Z"}
+or
+.I \epsffile[72 72 540 720]{"`zcat screendump.ps.gz"}
+are not executed.
+.TP
+.B -s
+Causes the entire global output to be enclosed in a save/restore pair.
+This causes the file to not be truly conformant, and is thus not
+recommended, but is useful if you are driving the printer directly and
+don't care too much about the portability of the output.
+.TP
+.B -S num
+Set the maximum number of pages in each `section'. This option is most
+commonly used with the
+.I -i
+option; see that documentation above for more information.
+.TP
+.B -t papertype
+This sets the paper type to
+.IR papertype .
+The
+.I papertype
+should be defined in one of the configuration files, along with the
+appropriate code to select it. (Currently known types include
+.BR letter ,
+.BR legal ,
+.BR ledger ,
+.BR a4 ,
+.BR a3 ).
+You can also specify
+.BR -t " " landscape ,
+which rotates a document by 90 degrees. To rotate a document whose size
+is not letter, you can use the
+.I -t
+option twice, once for the page size, and once for landscape.
+You should not use any
+.I -t
+option when the DVI file already contains a
+.I papersize
+special, as is done by some LaTeX packages, notably hyperref.sty.
+
+The upper left corner of each page in the
+.I .dvi
+file is placed one inch from the left and one inch from the top. Use of
+this option is highly dependent on the configuration file. Note that
+executing the
+.B letter
+or
+.B a4
+or other PostScript operators cause the document to be nonconforming and
+can cause it not to print on certain printers, so the paper size should
+not execute such an operator if at all possible.
+.TP
+.B -T papersize
+Set the paper size to the given pair of dimensions. This option takes
+its arguments in the same style as
+.IR -O .
+It overrides any paper size special in the dvi file.
+.TP
+.B -u psmapfile
+Set
+.I psmapfile
+to be the file that dvips uses for looking up PostScript font aliases. If
+.I psmapfile
+begins with a
+.B +
+character, then the rest of the name is used as the name of the map file,
+and the map file is appended to the list of map files (instead of replacing
+the list). In either case, if
+.I psmapfile
+has no extension, then
+.B .map
+is added at the end.
+.TP
+.B -U
+Disable a PostScript virtual memory saving optimization that stores the
+character metric information in the same string that is used to store
+the bitmap information. This is only necessary when driving the Xerox
+4045 PostScript interpreter. It is caused by a bug in that interpreter
+that results in `garbage' on the bottom of each character. Not
+recommended unless you must drive this printer.
+.TP
+.B -v
+Print the
+.B dvips
+version number and exit.
+.TP
+.B -V
+Download non-resident PostScript fonts as bitmaps. This requires use of
+`gsftopk' or `pstopk' or some other such program(s) in order to generate
+the required bitmap fonts; these programs are supplied with
+.BR dvips .
+.TP
+.B -x num
+Set the
+magnification ratio to
+.IR num /1000.
+Overrides the magnification specified in the .dvi file. Must be
+between 10 and 100000. Instead of an integer,
+.I num
+may be a real number for increased precision.
+.TP
+.B -X num
+Set the horizontal resolution in dots per inch to
+.IR num .
+.TP
+.B -y num
+Set the
+magnification ratio to
+.IR num /1000
+times the magnification specified in the .dvi file.
+See
+.B -x
+above.
+.TP
+.B -Y num
+Set the vertical resolution in dots per inch to
+.IR num .
+.TP
+.B -z
+Pass
+.B html
+hyperdvi specials through to the output for eventual
+distillation into PDF. This is not enabled by default to avoid
+including the header files unnecessarily, and use of temporary files in
+creating the output.
+.TP
+.B -Z
+Causes bitmapped fonts to be compressed before they are downloaded,
+thereby reducing the size of the PostScript font-downloading
+information. Especially useful at high resolutions or when very large
+fonts are used. Will slow down printing somewhat, especially on early
+68000-based PostScript printers.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+mf(1), afm2tfm(1), tex(1), latex(1), lpr(1),
+.IR dvips.texi .
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+Dvipsk uses the same environment variables and algorithms for finding
+font files as TeX and its friends do. See the documentation for the
+Kpathsea library for details. (Repeating it here is too cumbersome.)
+.PP
+KPATHSEA_DEBUG: Trace Kpathsea lookups; set to -1 for complete tracing.
+.PP
+PRINTER: see above.
+.SH NOTES
+PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Tomas Rokicki <rokicki@cs.stanford.edu>; extended to virtual fonts
+by Don Knuth. Path searching and configuration modifications by
+kb@mail.tug.org.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f76e58087a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.TH dvired 1 "09/94" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.SH NAME
+dvired \- print dvi-files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dvired
+[
+.B options
+]
+.B file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I dvired
+behaves like
+.IR dvips ,
+except for the fact that two logical pages are put onto each physical
+sheet of paper.
+
+For
+.IR options ,
+see
+.IR dvips (1).
+This program only interprets the following options:
+
+.I \-o file
+\- redirect output into
+.I file.
+
+.I \-P printer
+\- direct output to
+.I printer.
+
+.I \-f
+\- direct output to stdout.
+
+Any other option is passed directly to
+.IR dvips .
+
+.SH EXAMPLES
+It is assumed that the PRINTER-variable is set.
+
+.B dvired \-Plw foo
+\- send output to printer
+.IR lw .
+.br
+.B dvired \-o foo.ps foo
+\- send output to file
+.IR foo.ps .
+.br
+.B dvired \-pp4-7 foo
+\- send 4 pages (reduced onto 2 sheets) of
+.I foo
+to the printer.
+.br
+.B dvired foo \-f | ghostview \-
+\- preview output with ghostview.
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR dvips (1)
+.SH BUGS
+.I dvired
+is fixed on A4 paper size. If you want to use it with other paper, you have
+to change the settings within the source.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Thomas Esser <te@dbs.uni-hannover.de>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..814f102308a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+.TH DVISELECT 1
+.SH NAME
+dviselect \- extract pages from DVI files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dviselect
+[
+.B \-s
+] [
+.B \-i
+.I infile
+] [
+.B \-o
+.I outfile
+]
+.I "list of pages"
+[
+.I infile
+[
+.I outfile
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Dviselect
+selects pages from a DVI file produced by TeX,
+creating a new DVI file
+usable by any of the TeX conversion programs,
+or even by
+.I dviselect
+itself.
+.PP
+A
+.I range
+is a string of the form
+.IR even ,
+.IR odd ,
+or
+.I first:last
+where both
+.I first
+and
+.I last
+are optional numeric strings, with negative numbers indicated by
+a leading underscore character ``_''. If both
+.I first
+and
+.I last
+are omitted, the colon may also be omitted, or may be replaced
+with an asterisk ``*''. A
+.I page range
+is a list of ranges separated by periods. A
+.I "list of pages"
+is described by a set of page ranges separated by commas and/or white space.
+.PP
+.I Dviselect
+actually looks at the ten
+.I count
+variables that TeX writes; the first of these (\ecount0) is the
+page number, with \ecount1 through \ecount9 having varied uses
+depending on which macro packages are in use. (Typically \ecount1
+might be a chapter or section number.) A page is included in
+.IR dviselect 's
+output if all its \ecount values match any one of the ranges
+listed on the command line. For example, the command
+``dviselect *.1,35:''
+might select everything in chapter 1, as well as pages 35 and up.
+``dviselect 10:30'' would select pages 10 through 30 (inclusive).
+``:43'' means everything up to and including page 43 (including
+negative-numbered pages).
+To get all even-numbered pages, use ``even'';
+to get all odd-numbered pages, use ``odd''.
+If a Table of Contents has negative page numbers, ``:_1'' will select it.
+Note that ``*'' must be quoted from the shell;
+the empty string is more convenient to use, if harder to read.
+.PP
+Instead of \ecount values,
+.I dviselect
+can also select by ``absolute page number'', where the first page
+is page 1, the second page 2, and so forth. Absolute page numbers
+are indicated by a leading equal sign ``=''. Ranges of absolute
+pages are also allowed: ``dviselect =3:7'' will extract the third
+through seventh pages. Dot separators are not legal in absolute
+ranges, and there are no negative absolute page numbers.
+Even/odd specifiers, however, are legal;
+``dviselect =even'' selects every other page,
+starting with the second.
+.PP
+More precisely, an asterisk or an empty string implies no limit;
+an equal sign means absolute page number rather than \ecounts;
+a leading colon means everything up to and including the given page; a
+trailing colon means everything from the given page on;
+the word ``even'' means only even values shall be accepted;
+the word ``odd'' means only odd values shall be accepted; and
+a period indicates that the next \ecount should be examined.
+If fewer than 10 ranges are specified, the remaining \ecounts
+are left unrestricted (that is, ``1:5'' and ``1:5.*'' are equivalent).
+A single number \fIn\fP is treated as if it were the range \fIn:n\fP.
+An arbitrary number of page selectors may be given, separated by commas
+or whitespace; a page is selected if any of the selectors matches
+its \ecounts or absolute page number.
+.PP
+Dviselect normally prints the page numbers of the pages selected; the
+.I \-s
+option suppresses this.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Chris Torek, University of Maryland
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+dviconcat(1), latex(1), tex(1)
+.br
+.I "MC-TeX User's Guide"
+.br
+.I "The TeXbook"
+.SH BUGS
+A leading ``-'' ought to be allowed for negative numbers, but it
+is currently used as a synonym for ``:'', for backwards compatibility.
+.PP
+Section or subsection selection will sometimes fail, for the DVI
+file lists only the \ecount values that were active when the page
+ended. Clever macro packages can alleviate this by making use of
+other ``free'' \ecount registers. Chapters normally begin on new
+pages, and do not suffer from this particular problem.
+.PP
+The heuristic that decides which arguments are page selectors
+and which are file names is often wrong.
+Using shell redirection or the \-i and \-o options is safest.
+.PP
+.I Dviselect
+does not adjust the parameters in the postamble; however, since these
+values are normally used only to size certain structures in the output
+conversion programs, and the parameters never need to be adjusted upward,
+this has not proven to be a problem.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..549b5a5e8c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+.TH DVITODVI 1
+.SH NAME
+dvitodvi \- rearrange pages in a DVI file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dvitodvi
+[
+.B \-q
+] [
+.B \-i
+.I infile
+] [
+.B \-o
+.I outfile
+]
+[
+.B \-w\fIwidth\fR
+]
+[
+.B \-h\fIheight\fR
+]
+.I pagespecs
+[
+.I infile
+[
+.I outfile
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Dvitodvi
+rearranges pages from a DVI file, creating a new DVI file.
+.I Dvitodvi
+can be used to perform a large number of arbitrary re-arrangements of
+Documents, including arranging for printing 2-up, 4-up, booklets, reversing,
+selecting front or back sides of documents, scaling, etc.
+.PP
+.I pagespecs
+follow the syntax:
+.RS
+.TP 12
+.I pagespecs
+.I = [modulo:][mag@]specs
+.TP
+.I specs
+.I = spec[+specs][,specs]
+.TP
+.I spec
+.I = [-]pageno[(xoff,yoff)]
+.RE
+.sp
+.I modulo
+is the number of pages in each block. The value of
+.I modulo
+should be greater than 0; the default value is 1.
+The optional
+.I mag
+parameter adjusts the file's magnification by the magnification specified. The
+magnification and modulo can be specified in reverse order if desired.
+.I specs
+are the page specifications for the pages in each block. The value of the
+.I pageno
+in each
+.I spec
+should be between 0 (for the first page in the block) and \fImodulo\fR-1
+(for the last page in each block) inclusive.
+The optional dimensions
+.I xoff
+and
+.I yoff
+shift the page by the specified (positive) amount.
+.I xoff
+and
+.I yoff
+are in PostScript's points, but may be followed by the units
+.B "cm"
+or
+.B "in"
+to convert to centimetres or inches, or the flag
+.B "w"
+or
+.B "h"
+to specify as a multiple of the width or height.
+If the optional minus sign is specified, the page is relative to the end of
+the document, instead of the start.
+
+If page \fIspec\fRs are separated by
+.B \+
+the pages will be merged into one page; if they are separated by
+.B \,
+they will be on separate pages.
+If there is only one page specification, with
+.I pageno
+zero, the \fIpageno\fR may be omitted.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-w
+option gives the width which is used by the
+.B "w"
+dimension specifier, and the
+.I \-h
+option gives the height which is used by the
+.B "h"
+dimension specifier. These dimensions are also used (after scaling) to set the
+clipping path for each page.
+.PP
+Dvitodvi normally prints the page numbers of the pages re-arranged; the
+.I \-q
+option suppresses this.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+This section contains some sample re-arrangements. To put two pages on one
+sheet (of landscaped A3 paper), the pagespec to use is:
+.sp
+.ce
+2:0+1(21cm,0)
+.sp
+To reduce an A3 page to A4 size, the pagespec to use is:
+.sp
+.ce
+700@(-.3in,-.3in)
+.sp
+To select all of the odd pages in reverse order, use:
+.sp
+.ce
+2:-0
+.sp
+.SH AUTHOR
+Angus Duggan, from dviselect(1), by
+Chris Torek, University of Maryland
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+dviconcat(1), dvibook(1), dviselect(1), latex(1), tex(1)
+.br
+.I "MC-TeX User's Guide"
+.br
+.I "The TeXbook"
+.SH BUGS
+.I Dvitodvi
+does not adjust some of the parameters in the postamble. This may be a problem
+if these values are used to size certain structures in the output
+conversion programs.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a6b74030943
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+.TH DVITOMP 1 "October 30, 1999"
+.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt <jrv@vanzandt.mv.com> -*- nroff -*-
+.SH NAME
+dvitomp \- convert a TeX DVI file to a MetaPost MPXFILE
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBdvitomp\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fIdvifile\fP[.dvi] [\fImpxfile\fP[.mpx]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBdvitomp\fP translates the given \fIdvifile\fP to a MetaPost
+MPXFILE. The default \fImpxfile\fP is the basename of \fIdvifile\fP
+extended with ".mpx".
+.SH OPTIONS
+.IP \fB-help\fP
+write usage summary and exit.
+.IP \fB-version\fP
+output version information and exit.
+.SH BUGS
+Email bug reports to tex-k@mail.tug.org.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a68e4f34ec3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+.TH DVITYPE 1 "19 December 1994" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+dvitype \- translate a dvi file for humans
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dvitype
+.I dvi_name[.dvi]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B dvitype
+program translates a DVI (DeVice Independent) file output by (for example)
+.BR tex (1)
+or
+.BR gftodvi (1),
+to a file that humans can read. It also serves as a DVI file-validating
+program (i.e., if
+.B dvitype
+can read it, it's correct) and as an example of a DVI-reading
+program for future device drivers.
+.PP
+The output file can include all commands, just the important
+ones, or none at all (in which case only errors are reported).
+A subinterval of pages may be selected for transliteration; the
+magnification and resolution of the ``output device'' may be
+changed; and so on. All options are specified with an on-line dialog.
+.PP
+The
+.I .dvi
+extension is supplied if omitted from
+.IR dvi_name .
+The output goes to
+.IR stdout .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+The environment variable TEXFONTS is used to search for the TFM files
+used in the DVI file. See
+.BR tex (1)
+for the details of the searching.
+If TEXFONTS is not set, it uses the system default.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR gftype (1),
+.BR pktype (1).
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR \*(OXware .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+The interactive dialog should be replaced by command-line options, as
+with
+.BR gftype .
+.SH AUTHORS
+Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as part of the
+.I \*(OXware
+technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group.
+Howard Trickey and Pavel Curtis originally ported it to Unix.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b102568b53a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+.TH "e2pall" "1" "August 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+e2pall \- convert all EPS files in a LaTeX document to PDF
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBe2pall\fP \fITEXFILE\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBe2pall\fP searches through \fITEXFILE\fP for \eincludegraphics
+commands to find the base names of image files\&. When it finds one,
+\fBe2pall\fP runs \fBepstopdf\fP(1) to create a PDF file from the EPS
+file\&.
+.PP
+\fBe2pall\fP will check to be sure that an existing PDF file is
+up-to-date with the EPS file, and will not run \fBepstopdf\fP(1) if
+the PDF file is newer than the EPS file\&.
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+.IP ""
+Seems to be broken
+.IP ""
+Cannot handle \einput{\fIfilename\fP} or
+\eincludegraphics{\fIfilename\fP} split over more than one
+line
+.IP ""
+Must be run from same directory as the LaTeX file
+.IP ""
+Does not look down $TEXINPUTS
+.IP ""
+Cannot handle documents that use \einclude commands
+.IP ""
+Assumes \fIall\fP files included with \eincludegraphics are EPS
+files
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBepstopdf\fP(1)
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBe2pall\fP was written by Jody Klymak <jklymak@apl\&.washington\&.edu> and published in a posting to
+the <pdftex@tug\&.org> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
+.PP
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1a44ed97e20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+.TH "ebb" "1" "May 2004" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+ebb \- extract a bounding box from JPEG, PNG, and PDF files
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBebb\fP [ \fI -v\fP | \fI-b\fP ] \fI graphic_file\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBebb\fP extracts the bounding box from JPEG, PNG, and PDF files
+(with lower- or uppercase extensions) and writes it into a file with
+the extension \fB.bb\fP, together with some header information. These
+files can then be used by \fBdvipdfm\fP or other programs.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.HP
+\fB\-v\fR : be verbose
+.HP
+\fB\-b\fR : Write .bb file in binary mode (has no effect on Linux and
+other systems conforming to POSIX).
+.HP
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBebb\fP was written by Mark A. Wicks.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by Frank Küster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch>,
+for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used and modified by
+others without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in
+the manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary
+author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ec798867b6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+.TH EPLAIN 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+eplain \- extended plain TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B eplain
+[ first-line ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+.B eplain
+is an extension of plain \*(TX described in the book
+.IR "\*(OX for the Impatient" .
+It adds these features (among others) to plain \*(TX:
+.TP \w'\(bu'u+2n
+\(bu
+left-justified displays
+.TP
+\(bu
+double-column output
+.TP
+\(bu
+tables of contents
+.TP
+\(bu
+.I \ehrule
+and
+.I \evrule
+with a different default than 0.4pt
+.TP
+\(bu
+time of day
+.TP
+\(bu
+verbatim file listing
+.TP
+\(bu
+generalized footnotes
+.TP
+\(bu
+blank and black boxes
+.TP
+\(bu
+citations using \*(BX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.I eplain/doc/eplain.texi
+\*(TXable documentation of
+.B etex
+macros in
+.B texinfo
+format.
+.TP
+.I eplain.info*
+Online GNU Emacs
+.BR info (1)
+files produced from
+.IR eplain.texi .
+.PP
+The complete
+.I eplain
+distribution is available via anonymous ftp to the Internet host
+.I ftp.cs.umb.edu
+from the file
+.I pub/tex/eplain.tar.Z
+which is linked to another file containing the most recent version of
+the package. Major \*(TX archive sites should also have it.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR emacs (1),
+.BR info (1),
+.BR initex (1),
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR xinfo (1).
+.br
+Karl Berry,
+.IR eplain ,
+TUGboat 11(4), 571--572, 1990.
+.br
+Paul W. Abrahams with Karl Berry and Kathryn A. Hargreaves,
+.IR "\*(OX for the Impatient" ,
+Addison-Wesley, 1990, ISBN 0-201-51375-7.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f708df244e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+.TH EPSFFIT 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+epsffit \- fit encapsulated PostScript file (EPSF) into constrained size
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B epsffit
+[
+.B \-c
+] [
+.B \-r
+] [
+.B \-a
+] [
+.B \-m
+] [
+.B \-s
+]
+.I "llx lly urx ury"
+[
+.B infile
+[
+.B outfile
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Epsffit
+fits an EPSF file (encapsulated PostScript) to a given bounding box.
+The coordinates of the box are given by \fB(llx,lly)\fR for the lower
+left, and \fB(urx,ury)\fR for the upper right, in PostScript units (points).
+.PP
+If no input or output files are specified,
+.I epsffit
+read from the standard input and writes to the standard output.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.IP \fB\-c\fP 1i
+Center the image in the given bounding box.
+.IP \fB\-r\fP 1i
+Rotate the image by 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
+.IP \fB\-a\fP 1i
+Adjust the aspect ratio to fit the bounding box. The default is to preserve
+the aspect ratio.
+.IP \fB\-m\fP 1i
+Rotates the image to maximise the size if it would fit the specified bounding
+box better.
+.IP \fB\-s\fP 1i
+Add a \fIshowpage\fP at the end of the file to force the image to print.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..451e5a3ca1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+.TH EPSTOPDF 1 "October 30, 1999"
+.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt <jrv@vanzandt.mv.com> -*- nroff -*-
+.SH NAME
+epstopdf \- convert an EPS file to PDF
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBepstopdf\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fIepsfile\fP
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBepstopdf\fP transforms the Encapsulated PostScript file
+\fIepsfile\fP so that it is guaranteed to start at the 0,0 coordinate,
+and it sets a page size exactly corresponding to the BoundingBox.
+This means that when Ghostscript renders it, the result needs no
+cropping, and the PDF MediaBox is correct. The result is piped to
+Ghostscript and a PDF version written.
+.P
+If the bounding box is not right, of course, you have problems...
+.SH OPTIONS
+.IP "\fB--outfile\fP=\fIfile\fP"
+write result to \fIfile\fP instead of standard output.
+.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBfilter\fP"
+read standard input (default: --nofilter).
+.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBgs\fP"
+run ghostscript (default: --gs).
+.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBcompress\fP"
+use compression (default: --compress).
+.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBhires\fP"
+scan HiresBoundingBox (default: --nohires).
+.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBexact\fP"
+scan ExactBoundingBox (default: --noexact).
+.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBdebug\fP"
+debug informations (default: --nodebug).
+.IP "\fB--help\fP
+print usage
+.SH EXAMPLE
+Examples for producing "test.pdf":
+.nf
+
+epstopdf test.eps
+produce postscript | epstopdf --filter >test.pdf
+produce postscript | epstopdf -f -d -o=test.pdf
+
+.fi
+Example: look for HiresBoundingBox and produce corrected PostScript:
+.nf
+
+epstopdf -d --nogs -hires test.ps>testcorr.ps
+.fi
+.SH BUGS
+The only thing I have not allowed for is the case of
+"%%BoundingBox: (atend)", which is more complicated.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+\fBgs\fP(1).
+.SH AUTHOR
+Sebastian Rahtz, for Elsevier Science.
+Now with extra tricks from Hans Hagen's texutil.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..16277a606cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,429 @@
+.TH ETEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+etex, einitex, evirtex \- extended TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B etex
+.RI [ options ]
+[\fB&\fR \fIformat\fR ]
+[ \fIfile\fR | \fB\e\fR \fIcommands\fR ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Run the e-\*(TX typesetter on
+.IR file ,
+usually creating
+.IR file.dvi .
+If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it.
+Instead of a filename, a set of e-\*(TX commands can be given, the first
+of which must start with a backslash.
+With a
+.BI & format
+argument e-\*(TX uses a different set of precompiled commands,
+contained in
+.IR format.fmt ;
+it is usually better to use the
+.B -fmt
+.I format
+option instead.
+.PP
+e-\*(TX is the first concrete result of an international research &
+development project, the NTS Project, which was established under the
+aegis of DANTE e.V. during 1992. The aims of the project are to
+perpetuate and develop the spirit and philosophy of \*(TX, whilst
+respecting Knuth's wish that \*(TX should remain frozen.
+.PP
+e-\*(TX can be used in two different modes: in
+.I compatibility mode
+it is supposed to be completely interchangable with standard \*(TX.
+In
+.I extended mode
+several new primitives are added that facilitate (among other things)
+bidirectional typesetting.
+.PP
+An extended mode format is generated by prefixing the name of the
+source file for the format with an asterisk (*). Such formats are
+often prefixed with an `e', hence
+.B etex
+as the extended version of
+.B tex
+and
+.B elatex
+as the extended version of
+.BR latex .
+However,
+.B eplain
+is an exception to this rule.
+.PP
+The
+.B einitex
+and
+.B evirtex
+commands are e-\*(TX's analogues to the
+.B initex
+and
+.B virtex
+commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the
+.B etex
+executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all.
+.PP
+e-\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of
+the other \*(TX programs in the
+.I web2c
+implementation.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of e-\*(TX understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.BI -fmt \ format
+.rb
+Use
+.I format
+as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
+e-\*(TX was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -enc
+.rb
+Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in
+combination with
+.BR -ini .
+For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see
+.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html .
+.TP
+.B -etex
+.rb
+Enable the e-\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in
+combination with
+.BR -ini .
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error
+.rb
+Print error messages in the form
+.I file:line:error
+which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
+.TP
+.B -no-file-line-error
+.rb
+Disable printing error messages in the
+.I file:line:error
+style.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error-style
+.rb
+This is the old name of the
+.B -file-line-error
+option.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -ini
+.rb
+Start in
+.I INI
+mode, which is used to dump formats. The
+.I INI
+mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and
+basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required.
+.TP
+.BI -interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+\ecommands.
+.TP
+.B -ipc
+.rb
+Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether
+this option is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.B -ipc-start
+.rb
+As
+.BR -ipc ,
+and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
+is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.BI -jobname \ name
+.rb
+Use
+.I name
+for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
+.TP
+.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI -mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.B -mltex
+.rb
+Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with
+.BR -ini .
+.TP
+.BI -no-mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI -output-comment \ string
+.rb
+Use
+.I string
+for the
+.I DVI
+file comment instead of the date.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.B -parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name or a
+.B -translate-file
+option.
+.TP
+.B -no-parse-first-line
+.rb
+Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file.
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B -recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened
+for input and output in a file with extension
+.IR .fls .
+.TP
+.B -shell-escape
+.rb
+Enable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct. The
+.I command
+can be any shell command. This construct is normally
+disallowed for security reasons.
+.TP
+.B -no-shell-escape
+.rb
+Disable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct, even if it is enabled in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file.
+.TP
+.B -src-specials
+.rb
+Insert source specials into the
+.I DVI
+file.
+.TP
+.BI -src-specials \ where
+.rb
+Insert source specials in certain placed of the
+.I DVI
+file.
+.I where
+is a comma-separated value list:
+.IR cr ,
+.IR display ,
+.IR hbox ,
+.IR math ,
+.IR par ,
+.IR parent ,
+or
+.IR vbox .
+.TP
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Use the
+.I tcxname
+translation table to set the mapping of input characters and
+re-mapping of output characters.
+.TP
+.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Like
+.B -translate-file
+except that a
+.I %&
+line can overrule this setting.
+.TP
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
+The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+One caveat: In most e-\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
+give directly to e-\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
+expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
+\*(MF, do not have this problem.
+.PP
+.TP
+TEXMFOUTPUT
+Normally, e-\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If
+any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
+directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
+There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+.I etex paper
+and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
+the value
+.IR /tmp ,
+e-\*(TX attempts to create
+.I /tmp/paper.log
+(and
+.IR /tmp/paper.dvi ,
+if any output is produced.)
+.TP
+TEXINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I \einput
+and
+.I \eopenin
+files.
+This should probably start with ``.'', so
+that user files are found before system files. An empty path
+component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
+current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
+.TP
+TEXFORMATS
+Search path for format files.
+.TP
+TEXPOOL
+search path for
+.B etex
+internal strings.
+.TP
+TEXEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+.BR vi ,
+is set when e-\*(TX is compiled.
+.TP
+TFMFONTS
+Search path for font metric
+.RI ( .tfm )
+files.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I etex.pool
+Text file containing e-\*(TX's internal strings.
+.TP
+.I texfonts.map
+Filename mapping definitions.
+.TP
+.I *.tfm
+Metric files for e-\*(TX's fonts.
+.TP
+.I *.fmt
+Predigested e-\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files.
+.br
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NOTES
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of e-\*(TX can be found in the info
+manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+This version of e-\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions.
+In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
+extent with the definition of e-\*(TX. When such extensions are
+enabled, the banner printed when e-\*(TX starts is changed to print
+.B e-TeXk
+instead of
+.BR e-TeX .
+.PP
+This version of e-\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
+dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
+but when it does the generated
+.I DVI
+file will be invalid.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+e-\*(TX was developed by Peter Breitenlohner (and the NTS team).
+.PP
+\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth,
+who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs.
+It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and
+at Cornell by Pavel Curtis.
+The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that
+generated by the \*(WB to C system
+.RB ( web2c ),
+originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan.
+.PP
+The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8bc5a66cc78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+.\" man page for bg5conv
+.
+.TH EXTCONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0"
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.
+.\" and here the same for \LaTeX
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \
+.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX
+.\}
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.
+.\" \LaTeXe
+.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be
+.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font)
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v'
+.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v'
+.\}
+.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e
+.
+.\" a typewriter font
+.if t \{\
+.de C
+\fC\\$1\fP\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.if n \{\
+.de C
+\\$1\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== end of macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.
+.
+.SH NAME
+extconv \- convert a TeX document in either Big\ 5+ or GBK encoding into
+`preprocessed' form.
+.
+.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B extconv
+<
+.I infile
+>
+.I outfile
+.
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Big\ 5+ and GBK encodings use the characters
+.C { ,
+.C } ,
+and
+.C \e
+which have special meanings in \*(TX
+documents.
+.PP
+After processing a \*(LE
+document which contains such characters with
+.B \%extconv
+you need not care about these special characters.
+.PP
+This filter is part of the
+.B CJK
+macro package for \*(LE.
+.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR bg5conv (1),
+.BR \%sjisconv (1),
+.BR \%cefconv (1),
+.BR cef5conv (1),
+.BR \%cefsconv (1),
+.br
+the
+.B CJK
+documentation files.
+.
+.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Werner Lemberg
+.C <wl@gnu.org>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..86252b6b5b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+.TH EXTRACTRES 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+extractres \- filter to extract resources from a PostScript document
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B extractres
+[
+.B \-m
+] <
+.I document.ps
+>
+.I output.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Extractres
+extracts resources (fonts, procsets, patterns, files, etc) appearing in a
+PostScript document, and puts appropriate
+.I %%IncludeResource
+comments in the document prologue. The extracted resources are written to
+files with the same name as the resource, and an appropriate extension. The
+pipeline
+.sp
+.ce
+extractres file.ps | includeres >out.ps
+.sp
+will move all resources appearing in a document to the document prologue,
+removing redundant copies. The output file can then be put through page
+re-arrangement filters such as
+.I psnup
+or
+.I pstops
+safely.
+.PP
+The
+.B \-m
+option combines the resources of the same name into one file; this must be
+used for some programs which download fonts a bit at a time.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH BUGS
+.I extractres
+does not alter the
+.I %%DocumentSuppliedResources
+comments.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fdf2tex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fdf2tex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d306652f34a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fdf2tex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+.TH FDF2TEX "1" "May 2004" "teTeX " "ConTeXt"
+.SH NAME
+fdf2tex \- Convert PDF formular data (FDF) into something (Con)TeX(t) can
+handle
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+\fBfdf2tex\fP \fIinfile\fP [ \fIoutfile\fP ]
+.PP
+\fBfdf2tan\fP \fIinfile\fP
+.PP
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+Converts PDF formular data (FDF) into something (Con)TeX(t) can
+handle. These commands are usually called indirectly during ConTeXt
+file processing.
+.HP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+Probably none - all errors are in this manpage
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBtexexec\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+The TeXExec manual, \fImtexexec\&.pdf\fP\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.IP
+This manual page was written by Frank Küster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch>,
+for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used and modified by
+others without contacting the author\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..35f0e0593c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+.TH FIXDLSRPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixdlsrps \- filter to fix DviLaser/PS documents to work with PSUtils
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixdlsrps
+<
+.I dvilaser.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixdlsrps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript generated from the DviLaser/PS driver so
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0f031b2d763
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+.TH FIXFMPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixfmps \- filter to fix Framemaker documents so PSUtils work
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixfmps
+<
+.I Framemaker.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixfmps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript from Framemaker so
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixmacps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixmacps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..97efc859999
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixmacps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+.TH FIXMACPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixmacps \- filter to fix Macintosh documents with saner version of md
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixmacps
+<
+.I Macintosh.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixmacps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript generated from a Macintosh PC
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH FILES
+md68_0.ps, md71_0.ps - sanitised versions of the md
+prologue.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3945b7ad193
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+.TH FIXPSDITPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixpsditps \- filter to fix Transcript psdit documents so PSUtils work
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixpsditps
+<
+.I psdit.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixpsditps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript from Transcript's psdit program so
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ead4f0bcf14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+.TH FIXPSPPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixpspps \- filter to fix PSPrint PostScript so PSUtils work
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixpspps
+<
+.I PSPrint.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixpspps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript from PSPrint so
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a3fcec62ae2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+.TH FIXSCRIBEPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixscribeps \- filter to fix Scribe documents so PSUtils work
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixscribeps
+<
+.I Scribe.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixscribeps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript from Scribe so
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c65bb070fba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+.TH FIXTPPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixtpps \- filter to fix Tpscript documents to work with PSUtils
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixtpps
+<
+.I Tpscript.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixtpps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript generated from the Troff Tpscript driver so
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..31e71500cf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+.TH FIXWFWPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixwfwps \- filter to fix Word for Windows documents so PSUtils work
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixwfwps
+<
+.I WordforWindows.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixwfwps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript from Word for Windows so
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..61052fc68f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+.TH FIXWPPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixwpps \- filter to fix WP documents so PSUtils work
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixwpps
+<
+.I WordPerfect.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixwpps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript from WordPerfect 5.0 and 5.1 so
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ed58e11f94b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+.TH FIXWWPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+fixwwps \- filter to fix Windows Write documents so PSUtils work
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B fixwwps
+<
+.I WinWrite.ps
+>
+.I Fixed.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Fixwwps
+is a
+.I perl
+filter which "fixes" PostScript from Windows Write so
+that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's
+.B psutils
+package.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..240dee18655
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+fmtutil.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dfb96086a74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+.TH "fmtutil" "8" "February 2005" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+fmtutil \- utility for maintaining TeX format files
+.PP
+fmtutil-sys \- utility for maintaining TeX format files system\-wide
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBfmtutil\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP
+.PP
+\fBfmtutil-sys\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBfmtutil\fP is used to create or recreate format and hyphenation
+files or show information about format files\&.
+.PP
+\fICOMMAND\fP is one of:
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--all\fP"
+recreate all format files
+.IP "\fB--byfmt\fP \fIformatname\fP"
+(re)create the format for
+format \fIformatname\fP
+.IP "\fB--byhyphen\fP \fIhyphenfile\fP"
+(re)create formats that
+depend on the hyphenation file
+\fIhyphenfile\fP
+.IP "\fB--help\fP"
+print a summary of commands and options
+.IP "\fB--missing\fP"
+create any missing format files
+.IP "\fB--showhyphen\fP \fIformatname\fP"
+print the name of the
+hyphenation file for the format
+\fIformatname\fP
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--cnffile\fP \fIfile\fP"
+specify the configuration
+\fIfile\fP \fBfmtutil\fP should use
+.IP "\fB--dolinks\fP"
+(not implemented, just for compatibility)
+.IP "\fB--fmtdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP"
+set the destination
+directory for format files generated by
+\fBfmtutil\fP to \fIdirectory\fP
+.IP "\fB--force\fP"
+(not implemented, just for compatibility)
+.IP "\fB--quiet\fP"
+(not implemented, just for compatibility)
+.IP "\fB--test\fP"
+(not implemented, just for compatibility)
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+.IP "\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP"
+default configuration file
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBkpsewhich\fP(1)
+.PP
+Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/>
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBfmtutil\fP was written by Thomas Esser
+<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> and is Copyright 1998 Thomas
+Esser\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system and later slightly adapted for the teTeX 3 release\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b907280d90d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+.TH "fontinst" "1" "May 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+fontinst \- utility to run TeX as fontinst
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBfontinst\fP \fIpackage\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBfontinst\fP runs \fBtex\fP(1) with the \fB--progname\fP flag set to
+pretend to be the program fontinst (affecting Karl Berry paths)\&.
+.PP
+Typing
+.PP
+\f(CWfontinst fontinst\&.sty\fP
+.PP
+will start \fBtex\fP(1) and give the user an interactive prompt
+(\f(CW*\fP) where fontinst commands can be typed (such as
+\f(CW\elatinfamily{ptm}{}\ebye\fP)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBtex\fP(1)
+.PP
+The fontinst manual, \fIfontinst\&.tex\fP\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://tug\&.org/applications/fontinst/>
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to tex-fonts@tug\&.org (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+Thomas Esser
+<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de>
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..33da5ca88ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+.TH GETAFM 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+getafm \- create an AFM file for a PostScript font.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B getafm
+.I FontName
+>
+.I output.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Getafm
+generates a PostScript file which prints an AFM file for a font to the
+printer's output channel. The output of
+.I getafm
+should be sent to a printer, or to GhostScript. For example,
+.sp
+.ce
+getafm Times-Roman | gsnd - >Times-Roman.afm
+.sp
+.SH AUTHOR
+Robert Joop (rj@rainbow.in-berlin.de), Angus Duggan
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH BUGS
+Kerning information is not generated by
+.I getafm;
+it is best to use original AFM files if possible.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getnonfreefonts.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getnonfreefonts.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c7506d616d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getnonfreefonts.1
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+.TH getnonfreefonts 1 "October 2005" "TeXLive" "TeXLive"
+.SH NAME
+getnonfreefonts \- download and install fonts which cannot be
+distributed on a CD
+.LP
+getnonfreefonts-sys \- download and install fonts system\-wide which
+cannot be distributed on a CD
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B getnonfreefonts
+.RI
+[options] [font]
+.LP
+.B getnonfreefonts-sys
+.RI
+[options] [font]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some font suppliers provided fonts which can be used freely but they
+disallow that money is charged for the distribution. Hence, for
+distributions on CD or DVD it is usually impossible to include
+these fonts.
+
+.BI getnonfreefonts
+is a script which downloads and installs these fonts. Actually, it
+first downloads the program
+.BI getfont
+from CTAN which is then executed.
+.BI getfont
+does the real work. It will be updated occasionally to support more
+fonts.
+
+.BI getnonfreefonts
+and
+.BI getnonfreefonts-sys
+are identical except that
+.BI getnonfreefonts
+installs files to
+.RI $TEXMFHOME
+while
+.BI getnonfreefonts-sys
+installs files to
+.RI $TEXMFLOCAL
+\.
+
+.BI getfont
+will not be installed permanently on your system. It only
+exists while
+.BI getnonfreefonts
+is running.
+.BI getnonfreefonts
+passes all arguments to
+.BI getfont.
+
+If a font is specified, only this font will be installed, otherwise
+all supported fonts will be installed.
+
+To get a list of supported fonts, run
+.BI getnonfreefonts
+.BI --lsfonts
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+Only the options evaluated by
+.BI getnonfreefonts
+are described here. Run
+.BI getnonfreefonts
+.BI --help
+to get a complete list.
+
+.TP
+.B --ctan=<CTAN-node>
+.rg
+.B <CTAN-node>
+can be either
+.B
+de
+for ftp://ftp.dante.de (Hamburg, Germany),
+.B
+uk
+for ftp://tex.ac.uk (Cambridge, UK),
+or
+.B us
+for ftp://ctan.tug.org (Colchester, VT, US)
+
+The default is ftp://tex.ac.uk.
+
+.TP
+.B --afm
+.rg
+Install AFM files as well. They are not installed by default. You do
+not need them if you don't know what they are good for.
+
+.TP
+.B -n, --noinstall
+.rg
+Do not install anything. Useful to check whether fonts are available
+which are not installed yet.
+
+
+.TP
+.B --shell
+.rg
+Run
+.BI getnonfreefonts
+in a shell.
+.BI getfont
+can be called directly and will exist on your system until you leave
+the shell. If your internet connection is very slow, you can save some time.
+Run
+.BI getfont --help
+first.
+
+
+.TP
+.B -h, --help
+.rg
+Get a complete list of options. This list will be more complete and
+more up-to-date than this manual page.
+
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+If the environt variable
+.BI CTAN
+is set to
+.B ftp://<CTAN-node>
+then this will be the default. The argument is an URL.
+
+.BI Example:
+If your
+.BI ~/.profile
+contains the line
+.BI CTAN=ftp://ftp.dante.de
+then this will be the default.
+If you are at a university which mirrors CTAN, you can set
+.BI CTAN
+to this mirror. It will work only if the mirror has the same
+directory structure as CTAN, i.e if the directory
+.BI tex-archive
+is not omitted.
+
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+.B getnonfreefonts --help
+.rg
+Display all options and a list of supported fonts. Note that the
+program
+.B getfont
+is installed temporarily and executed. You get more information than
+this manual page can provide.
+
+.TP
+.B getnonfreefonts
+.rg
+Install all supported fonts which are not installed yet.
+
+.TP
+.B getnonfreefonts utopia
+.rg
+Install Adobe Utopia if it is not installed yet.
+
+.TP
+.B getnonfreefonts --force --afm utopia
+.rg
+Install Adobe Utopia and the corresponding AFM files even if Utopia is
+already installed.
+
+.TP
+.B getnonfreefonts --noinstall
+.rg
+No fonts will be installed. Instead you are told which fonts are
+available and which of them are already installed.
+
+.TP
+.B getnonfreefonts --shell
+.rg
+No fonts are installed. You'll get an interactive shell where you can
+invoke
+.BI getfont
+manually. Run
+.B getfont --help
+first.
+
+
+.SH BUGS
+Please send bug reports to Reinhard Kotucha <reinhard.kotucha@web.de>.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ae7f4c0e3b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+.TH GFTODVI 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+gftodvi \- make proof sheets from generic font files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B gftodvi
+[
+.BI \-overflow-label-offset =real
+]
+[
+.B \-verbose
+]
+[
+.I gf_file_name
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B gftodvi
+program converts a generic font
+.RI ( gf )
+file output by, for example,
+.BR mf (1),
+to a device independent (DVI) file (that can then be typeset using the same
+software that has already been written for \*(TX). The characters in the
+.I gf
+file will appear one per page, with labels, titles, and annotations
+as specified in Appendix H (Hardcopy Proofs) of
+.IR "The \*(MFbook" .
+.PP
+.B gftodvi
+uses other fonts in addition to the main
+.I gf
+file.
+A `gray' font is used to typeset the
+pixels that actually make up the character. (We wouldn't
+want all the pixels to be simply black, since then labels,
+key points, and other information would be lost.) A `title' font
+is used for the information at the top of the page. A `label' font
+is used for the labels on key points of the figure. A `slant'
+font is used to typeset diagonal lines, which
+otherwise have to be simulated using horizontal and vertical rules.
+The default gray, title, and label fonts are
+.IR gray ,
+.IR cmr8 ,
+and
+.IR cmtt10 ,
+respectively; there is no default slant font.
+.PP
+To change the default fonts, you can give
+.BR special
+commands in your
+\*(MF source file, or you can change the fonts online. An online dialog
+ensues if you end the
+.I gf_file_name
+with a `/'. For example,
+.br
+.ti +2
+gftodvi cmr10.300gf/
+.br
+.ti +2
+Special font substitution: grayfont black
+.br
+.ti +2
+OK; any more? grayfontarea /home/art/don/
+.br
+.ti +2
+OK; any more? slantfont /home/fonts/slantimagen6
+.br
+.ti +2
+OK; any more? <RET>
+.br
+will use
+.I /home/art/don/black
+as the `gray' font and
+.I /home/fonts/slantimagen6
+as the `slant' font (this name indicates
+a font for lines with slope 1/6 at the resolution of an Imagen printer).
+.PP
+The
+.I gf_file_name
+on the command line must be complete. (The program prompts
+you for it if you don't give it.) Because
+the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make
+sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or
+DVI-reading software. The output file name defaults to the same
+root as the
+.I gf
+file, with the
+.I dvi
+extension added. For example, the input file
+.I cmr10.2602gf
+would become
+.IR cmr10.dvi .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+The argument to
+.B \-overflow-label-offset
+specifies the distance from the right edge of the character
+bounding box at which the overflow equations (if any) are typeset.
+The value is given in \*(TX points. The default is a little over two
+inches.
+.PP
+Without the
+.B \-verbose
+option,
+.B gftodvi
+operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on
+.IR stdout .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.B gftodvi
+looks for
+.I gf_file_name
+using the
+environment variable GFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable
+TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default.
+.PP
+See
+.BR tex (1)
+for the details of the searching.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.I {gray.tfm,.\|.\|.}
+The default fonts.
+.TP
+.I {gray.mf,.\|.\|.}
+The \*(MF sources.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1).
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.I "The \*(MFbook"
+(Volume C of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4.
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth et al.,
+.IR \*(MFware .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as part of the
+.I \*(MFware
+technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group.
+Paul Richards ported it to Unix.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..38b2d1084d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+.TH GFTOPK 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+gftopk \- convert generic font files to packed font files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B gftopk
+[
+.B \-v
+]
+.I gf_file_name
+[
+.I pk_file_name
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B gftopk
+program converts a generic font file output by, for example,
+.BR mf (1),
+to a
+packed font file for use by DVI-reading programs. Packed
+font files
+.RI ( pk " files)"
+are much smaller than the corresponding
+.I gf
+files,
+so they are generally the font format of choice.
+.PP
+The
+.I gf_file_name
+on the command line must be complete. Because
+the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make
+sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or
+DVI-reading software. The
+.I pk_file_name
+defaults to the same (stripped) name as
+.IR gf_file_name ,
+and it is placed in the current
+working directory with the
+.I pk
+suffix replacing
+.IR gf .
+For example, the input file
+.I cmr10.300gf
+would become
+.IR cmr10.300pk .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+Unless the
+.B \-v
+switch is given,
+.B gftopk
+operates silently. With
+.BR \-v ,
+the version number of the program and statistics about the
+packing are output to
+.IR stdout .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.B gftopk
+looks for
+.I gf_file_name
+first in the current directory. If it is not present there, it uses the
+environment variable GFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable
+TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default.
+.PP
+See
+.BR tex (1)
+for the details of the searching.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR gftype (1),
+.BR pktogf (1),
+.BR pktype (1).
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth et al.,
+.IR \*(MFware .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Tomas Rokicki wrote the program. It was published as
+part of the
+.I \*(MFware
+technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group.
+Paul Richards originally ported it to Unix.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..41a203badd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+.TH GFTYPE 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+gftype \- translate a generic font file for humans to read
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B gftype
+[
+.B \-i
+]
+[
+.B \-m
+]
+.I gf_file_name
+[
+.I output_file_name
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B gftype
+program
+translates a
+.I gf
+(generic font) file output by, for example,
+.BR mf (1),
+to a file that humans can read.
+It also serves as a
+.I gf
+file-validating
+program (i.e., if
+.B gftype
+can read it, it's correct) and as an example of a
+.IR gf -reading
+program for other software that wants to read
+.I gf
+files.
+.PP
+The
+.I gf_file_name
+on the command line must be complete. Because
+the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make
+sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or
+DVI-reading software. If no
+.I output_file_name
+is specified, the output goes to
+.IR stdout .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+The output file includes
+bitmap images of the characters, if
+.B \-i
+is given on the command line, and a symbolic listing of the
+.I gf
+commands, if
+.B \-m
+is specified.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.B gftype
+looks for
+.I gf_file_name
+using the
+environment variable GFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable
+TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR dvitype (1),
+.BR pktype (1).
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth et al.,
+.IR \*(MFware .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+David Fuchs and Don Knuth wrote the program. It was published as
+part of the
+.I \*(MFware
+technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group.
+Paul Richards originally ported it to Unix.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cbbafa8e609
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1
@@ -0,0 +1,301 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1993-1998 Paul Vojta
+.\"
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
+.\" of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
+.\" deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
+.\" rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+.\" sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
+.\"
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
+.\" all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+.\" FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
+.\" PAUL VOJTA BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
+.\" IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
+.\" CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+
+.\" small and boldface (not all -man's provide it)
+.de SB
+\&\fB\s-1\&\\$1 \\$2\s0\fR
+..
+.TH GSFTOPK 1 "28 November 1998"
+.SH NAME
+gsftopk \- render a ghostscript font in TeX pk form
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B gsftopk
+[\-i \fIpath\fP]
+[\-q]
+[\-t]
+[\-\-debug=\fIn\fP]
+[\-\-dosnames]
+[\-\-interpreter=\fIpath\fP]
+[\-\-mapline=\fIline\fP]
+[\-\-mapfile=\fIfile\fP]
+[\-\-quiet]
+[\-\-test]
+[\-\-help]
+[\-\-version]
+.I font
+.I dpi
+.SH ARGUMENTS
+.IP \fIfont\fP \w'\fIfont\fP'u+2m
+Name of the font to be created.
+.IP \fIdpi\fP
+Desired resolution of the font to be created, in dots per inch. This may
+be a real number.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B gsftopk
+is a program which calls up the ghostscript program
+.BR gs (1)
+to render a given font at a given resolution. It packs the resulting
+characters into the
+.B pk
+file format and writes them to a file whose name is formed from the font
+name and the resolution (rounded to the nearest integer). The font may
+be in any format acceptable to Ghostscript, including
+.RI . pfa ,
+.RI . pfb ,
+.RI . gsf ,
+and
+.RI . ttf
+files.
+.PP
+This program should normally be called by a script, such as
+.BR mktexpk ,
+to create fonts on demand.
+.PP
+.B gsftopk
+obtains the character widths from the
+.RI . tfm
+file, which must exist in the standard search path. It also must be
+able to find the font in a map file (such as
+.BR psfonts.map ),
+formatted as in
+.BR dvips (1)),
+unless the
+.B \-\-mapline
+option is used. The set of map files is given by the
+.B \-\-mapfile
+option, or in the files
+.BR config.ps ,
+.BR $HOME/.dvipsrc ,
+and
+.B config.gsftopk
+(as would be used by
+.BR "dvips -Pgsftopk" ).
+.PP
+The following
+.B pk
+"specials" are added at the end of the output file, to provide an internal
+check on the contents of the file:
+"\fBjobname=\fP\fIfont\fP",
+"\fBmag=1\fP",
+"\fBmode=modeless\fP", and
+"\fBpixels_per_inch=\fP\fIdpi\fP".
+This is in accordance with the TeX Directory Standard (TDS).
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-\-debug=\fIn\fP
+Set the
+.B Kpathsea
+debug flags according to the integer
+.IR n .
+.TP
+.B \-\-dosnames
+Use a name of the form
+.IB font .pk
+instead of
+.IB font . dpi pk\fR.\fP
+.TP
+.B \-h\fR,\fP \-\-help
+Print a brief help synopsis and exit.
+.TP
+.B \-i \fIpath\fP\fR,\fP \-\-interpreter=\fIpath\fP
+Use
+.I path
+as the Ghostscript interpreter.
+.TP
+.B \-\-mapfile=\fIfile\fP
+Use
+.I file
+to look for the map information for
+.IR font .
+This should be the full name of the file (in other words, no path searching
+algorithms are applied).
+.TP
+.B \-\-mapline=\fIline\fP
+Use
+.I line
+instead of looking for an entry in a map file.
+The first word of
+.I line
+must match
+.IR font .
+.TP
+.B \-q\fR,\fP \-\-quiet
+Operate quietly; i.e., without writing any messages to the standard output.
+.TP
+.B \-t\fR,\fP \-\-test
+Test run: return zero status if the font can be found in the map file(s),
+and nonzero status if it cannot. If this option is specified, then the
+.I dpi
+argument is optional (since the font will not be generated).
+.TP
+.B \-v\fR,\fP \-\-version
+Print the version number and exit.
+.SH ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+.IP \fBDVIPSRC\fP \w'\fBGSFTOPKHEADERS\fP'u+2m
+Name of file to read instead of
+.BR $HOME/.dvipsrc .
+This should be the full name of the file (in other words, no path searching
+algorithms are applied).
+.IP \fBGSFTOPKFONTS\fP
+See
+.SB TFMFONTS.
+.IP \fBGSFTOPKHEADERS\fP
+See
+.SB TEXPSHEADERS.
+.IP \fBPSHEADERS\fP
+See
+.SB TEXPSHEADERS.
+.IP \fBTEXCONFIG\fP
+Colon-separated list of paths to search for map files.
+An extra colon in the list will include the
+compiled-in default paths at that point. A double slash will enable recursive
+subdirectory searching at that point in the path.
+.IP \fBTFMFONTS\fP
+Colon-separated list of paths to search for the
+.RI . tfm
+file associated with the font. Double slashes and extra colons behave as with
+.SB TEXCONFIG.
+This information may also be supplied by using the environment variables
+.SB TFMFONTS
+or
+.SB GSFTOPKFONTS.
+These environment variables are checked in the order
+.SB GSFTOPKFONTS,
+.SB TFMFONTS,
+.SB TFMFONTS;
+the first one (if any) having a value is used.
+.IP \fBTEXPSHEADERS\fP
+Colon-separated list of paths to search for the Ghostscript driver file
+.B render.ps
+and for any PostScript header or font files
+.RI (. enc ,
+.RI . pfa ,
+.RI . pfb ,
+.RI . gsf ,
+or
+.RI . ttf
+files). Double slashes and extra colons behave as with
+.SB TEXCONFIG.
+This information may also be supplied by using the environment variables
+.SB PSHEADERS
+or
+.SB GSFTOPKHEADERS.
+These environment variables are checked in the order
+.SB GSFTOPKHEADERS,
+.SB TEXPSHEADERS,
+.SB PSHEADERS;
+the first one (if any) having a value is used.
+.IP \fBTFMFONTS\fP
+See
+.SB TFMFONTS.
+.SH CONFIGURATION
+In order to determine the set of map files to be used and the path for
+finding PostScript files,
+.B gsftopk
+reads, in order, the files
+.BR config.ps ,
+.BR .dvipsrc ,
+and
+.BR config.gsftopk .
+The files
+.B config.ps
+and
+.B config.gsftopk
+are searched for using the environment variable
+.SB TEXCONFIG,
+the
+.B Kpathsea
+configuration file,
+or the compiled-in default paths. The file
+.B .dvipsrc
+is searched for in the user's home directory.
+.PP
+These files are in the same format as for
+.B dvips
+(as well as being in the same locations). The entries used by
+.B gsftopk
+are as follows.
+.TP
+.RI "H " path
+Indicates that the Ghostscript driver file
+.B render.ps
+and the PostScript header and font files are to be searched for using
+.IR path .
+.TP
+.RI "p " file
+Indicates that the list of map files is to be erased and replaced by
+.IR file .
+.TP
+.RI "p +" file
+Indicates that
+.I file
+is to be added to the list of map files.
+.PP
+All other entries are ignored.
+.PP
+This is similar to the handling of these options when running
+.BR "dvips -Pgsftopk" .
+For more details, see the
+.B Kpathsea
+manual.
+.SH BUGS
+.B gsftopk
+sometimes has trouble with fonts with very complicated characters
+(such as the Seal of the University of California). This is because
+.B gsftopk
+uses the
+.B charpath
+operator to determine the bounding box of each character. If the character
+is too complicated, then old versions of Ghostscript fail, causing
+.B gsftopk
+to terminate with an error message
+.IP
+.B "Call to gs stopped by signal 10"
+.LP
+(The number may vary from system to system; it corresponds to a bus error
+or a segmentation fault.) The best way to fix this bug is to install a
+current version of ghostscript. As an alternative,
+.B gsftopk
+can be instructed to use the bounding box provided with the font (if one
+exists) instead of finding a bounding box for each character. To do this,
+include the string
+.IP
+.B /usefontbbox true def
+.LP
+in the font map file;
+.IR e.g. ,
+.IP
+.B ucseal """/usefontbbox true def"""
+.LP
+This will not affect use of the font by
+.BR dvips .
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.BR gs (1),
+.BR gftopk (1),
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR xdvi (1),
+.BR dvips (1)
+.SH AUTHOR
+Written by Paul Vojta. This program was inspired by Karl Berry's
+.BR gsrenderfont .
+.SH MODIFICATIONS
+Modified by Yves Arrouye to use Karl Berry's
+.B Kpathsea
+library.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gzip.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gzip.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6fa79862bfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gzip.1
@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
+.PU
+.TH GZIP 1 local
+.SH NAME
+gzip, gunzip, zcat \- compress or expand files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.ll +8
+.B gzip
+.RB [ " \-acdfhlLnNrtvV19 " ]
+.RB [ \-S\ suffix ]
+[
+.I "name \&..."
+]
+.ll -8
+.br
+.B gunzip
+.RB [ " \-acfhlLnNrtvV " ]
+.RB [ \-S\ suffix ]
+[
+.I "name \&..."
+]
+.br
+.B zcat
+.RB [ " \-fhLV " ]
+[
+.I "name \&..."
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Gzip
+reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77).
+Whenever possible,
+each file is replaced by one with the extension
+.B "\&.gz,"
+while keeping the same ownership modes, access and modification times.
+(The default extension is
+.B "\-gz"
+for VMS,
+.B "z"
+for MSDOS, OS/2 FAT, Windows NT FAT and Atari.)
+If no files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is
+compressed to the standard output.
+.I Gzip
+will only attempt to compress regular files.
+In particular, it will ignore symbolic links.
+.PP
+If the compressed file name is too long for its file system,
+.I gzip
+truncates it.
+.I Gzip
+attempts to truncate only the parts of the file name longer than 3 characters.
+(A part is delimited by dots.) If the name consists of small parts only,
+the longest parts are truncated. For example, if file names are limited
+to 14 characters, gzip.msdos.exe is compressed to gzi.msd.exe.gz.
+Names are not truncated on systems which do not have a limit on file name
+length.
+.PP
+By default,
+.I gzip
+keeps the original file name and timestamp in the compressed file. These
+are used when decompressing the file with the
+.B \-N
+option. This is useful when the compressed file name was truncated or
+when the time stamp was not preserved after a file transfer.
+.PP
+Compressed files can be restored to their original form using
+.I gzip -d
+or
+.I gunzip
+or
+.I zcat.
+If the original name saved in the compressed file is not suitable for its
+file system, a new name is constructed from the original one to make it
+legal.
+.PP
+.I gunzip
+takes a list of files on its command line and replaces each
+file whose name ends with .gz, -gz, .z, -z, _z or .Z
+and which begins with the correct magic number with an uncompressed
+file without the original extension.
+.I gunzip
+also recognizes the special extensions
+.B "\&.tgz"
+and
+.B "\&.taz"
+as shorthands for
+.B "\&.tar.gz"
+and
+.B "\&.tar.Z"
+respectively.
+When compressing,
+.I gzip
+uses the
+.B "\&.tgz"
+extension if necessary instead of truncating a file with a
+.B "\&.tar"
+extension.
+.PP
+.I gunzip
+can currently decompress files created by
+.I gzip, zip, compress, compress -H
+or
+.I pack.
+The detection of the input format is automatic. When using
+the first two formats,
+.I gunzip
+checks a 32 bit CRC. For
+.I pack, gunzip
+checks the uncompressed length. The standard
+.I compress
+format was not designed to allow consistency checks. However
+.I gunzip
+is sometimes able to detect a bad .Z file. If you get an error
+when uncompressing a .Z file, do not assume that the .Z file is
+correct simply because the standard
+.I uncompress
+does not complain. This generally means that the standard
+.I uncompress
+does not check its input, and happily generates garbage output.
+The SCO compress -H format (lzh compression method) does not include a CRC
+but also allows some consistency checks.
+.PP
+Files created by
+.I zip
+can be uncompressed by gzip only if they have a single member compressed
+with the 'deflation' method. This feature is only intended to help
+conversion of tar.zip files to the tar.gz format. To extract zip files
+with several members, use
+.I unzip
+instead of
+.I gunzip.
+.PP
+.I zcat
+is identical to
+.I gunzip
+.B \-c.
+(On some systems,
+.I zcat
+may be installed as
+.I gzcat
+to preserve the original link to
+.I compress.)
+.I zcat
+uncompresses either a list of files on the command line or its
+standard input and writes the uncompressed data on standard output.
+.I zcat
+will uncompress files that have the correct magic number whether
+they have a
+.B "\&.gz"
+suffix or not.
+.PP
+.I Gzip
+uses the Lempel-Ziv algorithm used in
+.I zip
+and PKZIP.
+The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of the
+input and the distribution of common substrings.
+Typically, text such as source code or English
+is reduced by 60\-70%.
+Compression is generally much better than that achieved by
+LZW (as used in
+.IR compress ),
+Huffman coding (as used in
+.IR pack ),
+or adaptive Huffman coding
+.RI ( compact ).
+.PP
+Compression is always performed, even if the compressed file is
+slightly larger than the original. The worst case expansion is
+a few bytes for the gzip file header, plus 5 bytes every 32K block,
+or an expansion ratio of 0.015% for large files. Note that the actual
+number of used disk blocks almost never increases.
+.I gzip
+preserves the mode, ownership and timestamps of files when compressing
+or decompressing.
+
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-a --ascii
+Ascii text mode: convert end-of-lines using local conventions. This option
+is supported only on some non-Unix systems. For MSDOS, CR LF is converted
+to LF when compressing, and LF is converted to CR LF when decompressing.
+.TP
+.B \-c --stdout --to-stdout
+Write output on standard output; keep original files unchanged.
+If there are several input files, the output consists of a sequence of
+independently compressed members. To obtain better compression,
+concatenate all input files before compressing them.
+.TP
+.B \-d --decompress --uncompress
+Decompress.
+.TP
+.B \-f --force
+Force compression or decompression even if the file has multiple links
+or the corresponding file already exists, or if the compressed data
+is read from or written to a terminal. If the input data is not in
+a format recognized by
+.I gzip,
+and if the option --stdout is also given, copy the input data without change
+to the standard ouput: let
+.I zcat
+behave as
+.I cat.
+If
+.B \-f
+is not given,
+and when not running in the background,
+.I gzip
+prompts to verify whether an existing file should be overwritten.
+.TP
+.B \-h --help
+Display a help screen and quit.
+.TP
+.B \-l --list
+For each compressed file, list the following fields:
+
+ compressed size: size of the compressed file
+ uncompressed size: size of the uncompressed file
+ ratio: compression ratio (0.0% if unknown)
+ uncompressed_name: name of the uncompressed file
+
+The uncompressed size is given as -1 for files not in gzip format,
+such as compressed .Z files. To get the uncompressed size for such a file,
+you can use:
+
+ zcat file.Z | wc -c
+
+In combination with the --verbose option, the following fields are also
+displayed:
+
+ method: compression method
+ crc: the 32-bit CRC of the uncompressed data
+ date & time: time stamp for the uncompressed file
+
+The compression methods currently supported are deflate, compress, lzh
+(SCO compress -H) and pack. The crc is given as ffffffff for a file
+not in gzip format.
+
+With --name, the uncompressed name, date and time are
+those stored within the compress file if present.
+
+With --verbose, the size totals and compression ratio for all files
+is also displayed, unless some sizes are unknown. With --quiet,
+the title and totals lines are not displayed.
+.TP
+.B \-L --license
+Display the
+.I gzip
+license and quit.
+.TP
+.B \-n --no-name
+When compressing, do not save the original file name and time stamp by
+default. (The original name is always saved if the name had to be
+truncated.) When decompressing, do not restore the original file name
+if present (remove only the
+.I gzip
+suffix from the compressed file name) and do not restore the original
+time stamp if present (copy it from the compressed file). This option
+is the default when decompressing.
+.TP
+.B \-N --name
+When compressing, always save the original file name and time stamp; this
+is the default. When decompressing, restore the original file name and
+time stamp if present. This option is useful on systems which have
+a limit on file name length or when the time stamp has been lost after
+a file transfer.
+.TP
+.B \-q --quiet
+Suppress all warnings.
+.TP
+.B \-r --recursive
+Travel the directory structure recursively. If any of the file names
+specified on the command line are directories,
+.I gzip
+will descend into the directory and compress all the files it finds there
+(or decompress them in the case of
+.I gunzip
+).
+.TP
+.B \-S .suf --suffix .suf
+Use suffix .suf instead of .gz. Any suffix can be given, but suffixes
+other than .z and .gz should be avoided to avoid confusion when files
+are transferred to other systems. A null suffix forces gunzip to try
+decompression on all given files regardless of suffix, as in:
+
+ gunzip -S "" * (*.* for MSDOS)
+
+Previous versions of gzip used
+the .z suffix. This was changed to avoid a conflict with
+.IR pack "(1)".
+.TP
+.B \-t --test
+Test. Check the compressed file integrity.
+.TP
+.B \-v --verbose
+Verbose. Display the name and percentage reduction for each file compressed
+or decompressed.
+.TP
+.B \-V --version
+Version. Display the version number and compilation options then quit.
+.TP
+.B \-# --fast --best
+Regulate the speed of compression using the specified digit
+.IR # ,
+where
+.B \-1
+or
+.B \-\-fast
+indicates the fastest compression method (less compression)
+and
+.B \-9
+or
+.B \-\-best
+indicates the slowest compression method (best compression).
+The default compression level is
+.BR \-6
+(that is, biased towards high compression at expense of speed).
+.SH "ADVANCED USAGE"
+Multiple compressed files can be concatenated. In this case,
+.I gunzip
+will extract all members at once. For example:
+
+ gzip -c file1 > foo.gz
+ gzip -c file2 >> foo.gz
+
+Then
+ gunzip -c foo
+
+is equivalent to
+
+ cat file1 file2
+
+In case of damage to one member of a .gz file, other members can
+still be recovered (if the damaged member is removed). However,
+you can get better compression by compressing all members at once:
+
+ cat file1 file2 | gzip > foo.gz
+
+compresses better than
+
+ gzip -c file1 file2 > foo.gz
+
+If you want to recompress concatenated files to get better compression, do:
+
+ gzip -cd old.gz | gzip > new.gz
+
+If a compressed file consists of several members, the uncompressed
+size and CRC reported by the --list option applies to the last member
+only. If you need the uncompressed size for all members, you can use:
+
+ gzip -cd file.gz | wc -c
+
+If you wish to create a single archive file with multiple members so
+that members can later be extracted independently, use an archiver
+such as tar or zip. GNU tar supports the -z option to invoke gzip
+transparently. gzip is designed as a complement to tar, not as a
+replacement.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
+The environment variable
+.B GZIP
+can hold a set of default options for
+.I gzip.
+These options are interpreted first and can be overwritten by
+explicit command line parameters. For example:
+ for sh: GZIP="-8v --name"; export GZIP
+ for csh: setenv GZIP "-8v --name"
+ for MSDOS: set GZIP=-8v --name
+
+On Vax/VMS, the name of the environment variable is GZIP_OPT, to
+avoid a conflict with the symbol set for invocation of the program.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+znew(1), zcmp(1), zmore(1), zforce(1), gzexe(1), zip(1), unzip(1), compress(1),
+pack(1), compact(1)
+.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
+Exit status is normally 0;
+if an error occurs, exit status is 1. If a warning occurs, exit status is 2.
+.PP
+Usage: gzip [-cdfhlLnNrtvV19] [-S suffix] [file ...]
+.in +8
+Invalid options were specified on the command line.
+.in -8
+.IR file :
+not in gzip format
+.in +8
+The file specified to
+.I gunzip
+has not been compressed.
+.in -8
+.IR file:
+Corrupt input. Use zcat to recover some data.
+.in +8
+The compressed file has been damaged. The data up to the point of failure
+can be recovered using
+.in +8
+zcat file > recover
+.in -16
+.IR file :
+compressed with
+.I xx
+bits, can only handle
+.I yy
+bits
+.in +8
+.I File
+was compressed (using LZW) by a program that could deal with
+more
+.I bits
+than the decompress code on this machine.
+Recompress the file with gzip, which compresses better and uses
+less memory.
+.in -8
+.IR file :
+already has .gz suffix -- no change
+.in +8
+The file is assumed to be already compressed.
+Rename the file and try again.
+.in -8
+.I file
+already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)?
+.in +8
+Respond "y" if you want the output file to be replaced; "n" if not.
+.in -8
+gunzip: corrupt input
+.in +8
+A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means that the input file has
+been corrupted.
+.in -8
+.I "xx.x%"
+.in +8
+Percentage of the input saved by compression.
+(Relevant only for
+.BR \-v
+and
+.BR \-l \.)
+.in -8
+-- not a regular file or directory: ignored
+.in +8
+When the input file is not a regular file or directory,
+(e.g. a symbolic link, socket, FIFO, device file), it is
+left unaltered.
+.in -8
+-- has
+.I xx
+other links: unchanged
+.in +8
+The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See
+.IR ln "(1)"
+for more information. Use the
+.B \-f
+flag to force compression of multiply-linked files.
+.in -8
+.SH CAVEATS
+When writing compressed data to a tape, it is generally necessary to
+pad the output with zeroes up to a block boundary. When the data is
+read and the whole block is passed to
+.I gunzip
+for decompression,
+.I gunzip
+detects that there is extra trailing garbage after the compressed data
+and emits a warning by default. You have to use the --quiet option to
+suppress the warning. This option can be set in the
+.B GZIP
+environment variable as in:
+ for sh: GZIP="-q" tar -xfz --block-compress /dev/rst0
+ for csh: (setenv GZIP -q; tar -xfz --block-compr /dev/rst0
+
+In the above example, gzip is invoked implicitly by the -z option of
+GNU tar. Make sure that the same block size (-b option of tar) is used
+for reading and writing compressed data on tapes. (This example
+assumes you are using the GNU version of tar.)
+.SH BUGS
+The --list option reports incorrect sizes if they exceed 2 gigabytes.
+The --list option reports sizes as -1 and crc as ffffffff if the
+compressed file is on a non seekable media.
+
+In some rare cases, the --best option gives worse compression than
+the default compression level (-6). On some highly redundant files,
+.I compress
+compresses better than
+.I gzip.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f36ae3c7cea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,736 @@
+.\" man page for hbf2gf
+.
+.TH HBF2GF 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0"
+.SH NAME
+hbf2gf \- convert a CJK bitmap font into subfonts usable by TeX and Omega.
+.
+.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.na
+.nh
+.B hbf2gf
+.RB [ -q ]
+.IR \%configuration-file [ .cfg ]
+.br
+.B hbf2gf
+'in +\n(.ku
+.RB [ -q ]
+.RB [ -p ]
+.RB [ -g ]
+.RB [ -n ]
+.I \%subfont-name \%x-resolution
+.RI [ \%y-scale \ | \ \%y-resolution ]
+.br
+.in
+.B hbf2gf
+.B -t
+.RB [ -q ]
+.I \%subfont-name
+.br
+.B "hbf2gf --version"
+|
+.B --help
+.ad
+.hy
+.
+.
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\h'-0.1667m'\v'0.20v'E\v'-0.20v'\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.
+.\" and here the same for \LaTeX
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \
+.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX
+.\}
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.
+.\" \LaTeXe
+.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be
+.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font)
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v'
+.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v'
+.\}
+.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e
+.
+.\" a definition for \Delta
+.if t .ds DE \(*D
+.if n .ds DE Delta_
+.
+.\" a typewriter font
+.if t \{\
+.de C
+\fC\\$1\fP\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.if n \{\
+.de C
+\\$1\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.
+.\" an addition to .TP to allow two labels for the same item
+.de TQ
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+..
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== end of macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+CJK bitmap fonts can't be directly used with \*(TX
+because the number of characters in such fonts exceeds\ 256, the limit of a
+\*(TX
+font.
+Thus it is necessary to split these fonts into subfonts, and this is
+exactly what
+.B hbf2gf
+does.
+.PP
+As the name says,
+.B hbf2gf
+uses CJK fonts in a certain format which is called
+.B Hanzi Bitmap Font
+.RB ( HBF )
+format.
+It simply consists of the CJK bitmap file(s) and a text file in a format
+very similar to the BDF format of the X\ Window System which describes the
+bitmap font files: the encoding, the size, etc.
+The produced
+.C GF
+files can then be converted with
+.B gftopk
+into standard
+.C PK
+files.
+.PP
+.B hbf2gf
+can be called in three modes:
+.
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.B hbf2gf
+.RB [ -q ]
+.IR configuration-file [ .cfg ]
+.PP
+.in +5m
+This call normally creates a set of
+.C GF
+files, one
+.C PL
+file, and a batch file which must be executed after
+.B hbf2gf
+has finished.
+This script will then call
+.B gftopk
+to convert all
+.C GF
+files into
+.C PK
+files, and it will call
+.B pltotf
+to convert the
+.C PL
+file into a
+.C TFM
+file.
+Finally it will copy the
+.C TFM
+file so that each
+.C PK
+file has its
+.C TFM
+file (which are all identical).
+.PP
+.in +5m
+If
+.B ofm_file
+is set to `yes' in the configuration file,
+.C OFM
+and
+.C OVF
+files will be created too.
+.
+.PP
+.in +5m
+.B -q
+makes
+.B hbf2gf
+quiet.
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.na
+.nh
+.B hbf2gf
+'in +\n(.ku
+.RB [ -q ]
+.RB [ -p ]
+.RB [ -g ]
+.RB [ -n ]
+.I \%subfont-name \%x-resolution
+.RI [ \%y-scale \ | \ \%y-resolution ]
+.ad
+.hy
+.PP
+.in +5m
+This mode is intended for use with
+.B \%mktexpk
+and its derivates.
+Only one
+.C GF
+file together with a
+.C PL
+file for the given subfont will be computed, taking the horizontal
+resolution and a vertical scaling factor (if the value is smaller than\ 10)
+resp. the vertical resolution (otherwise) from the command line, ignoring
+the
+.B nmb_fonts
+parameter of the configuration file.
+The last two characters (which are interpreted as the subfont number) are
+stripped to get the name for the configuration file (which must end with
+`\c
+.C \&.cfg ').
+No job file will be created.
+If option
+.B -p
+is set, no
+.C PL
+file is created.
+If
+.B -g
+is set, no
+.C GF
+file is created.
+The extension can be controlled with
+.BR -n ;
+if set, the extension is `\c
+.C \&.gf ',
+otherwise `\c
+.C \&. <\c
+.IR resolution >\c
+.C gf '.
+.B -q
+makes
+.B hbf2gf
+quiet.
+.
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.na
+.nh
+.B hbf2gf
+'in +\n(.ku
+.B -t
+.RB [ -q ]
+.I \%subfont-name
+.ad
+.hy
+.PP
+.in +5m
+This mode is intended for use with scripts like
+.BR \%mktexpk ;
+it tests whether the specified subfont name leads to an
+.B hbf2gf
+configuration file.
+It returns 0 on success and prints out the name of that configuration file
+(provided the
+.B -q
+switch isn't set).
+This test isn't a thorough one; it only removes the last two characters
+and checks whether a configuration file with that name exists.
+.PP
+See the next section for more details about configuration files.
+.PP
+Specifying the option
+.B --version
+returns the current version of
+.B hbf2gf
+and the used file search library (e.g.\ \c
+.BR kpathsea ).
+Usage information is shown with the
+.B --help
+parameter.
+.
+.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION FILE"
+Here a sample configuration file (\c
+.C gsfs14.cfg )
+for a 56\(mu56 Chinese font in GB encoding; note that all information
+about the font is in the
+.C jfs56.hbf
+file.
+See the
+.B "FILE SEARCHING"
+section how HBF fonts and
+.B hbf2gf
+configuration files are found.
+See the
+.B AVAILABILITY
+section where to get CJK fonts together with its
+.C HBF
+files:
+.PP
+.if t \fC
+.nf
+ hbf_header jfs56.hbf
+ mag_x 1
+ threshold 128
+ comment jianti fansongti 56x56 pixel font
+
+ design_size 14.4
+
+ y_offset -13
+
+ nmb_files -1
+
+ output_name gsfs14
+
+ checksum 123456789
+
+ dpi_x 300
+
+ pk_files no
+ tfm_files yes
+
+ coding codingscheme GuoBiao encoded TeX text
+
+ pk_directory $HBF_TARGET/pk/modeless/gb2312/gsfs14/
+ tfm_directory $HBF_TARGET/tfm/gb2312/gsfs14/
+.fi
+.if t \fP
+.PP
+A configuration file is a plain text file consisting of keywords and its
+arguments.
+A keyword must start a line, otherwise the whole line will be ignored.
+If the word starting a line is not a keyword, the line will be ignored too.
+Empty lines will also be skipped.
+The search for keywords is case insensitive; in contrast, the arguments will
+be taken exactly as given (except `yes' and `no' which can be written with
+uppercase or lowercase letters).
+Each keyword has one argument which must be separated by whitespace (blanks
+or tabs) from the keyword and must be on the same line.
+Each line must not be longer than 256 characters.
+.PP
+You can use environment variables in the configuration file.
+The escape character starting an environment variable in the configuration
+file is always `\c
+.C $ ',
+even for operating systems like DOS which has other conventions.
+.B hbf2gf
+recognizes only environment variable names which start with a letter or an
+underscore, followed by alphanumeric characters or underscores.
+You can surround the variable with braces to indicate where the variable
+name ends, for example
+.C ${FOO} .
+To get a dollar sign you must write `\c
+.C $$ '.
+The expansion of environment variables in hbf2gf itself (without the help of
+either kpathsea, emtexdir, or MiKTeX searching routines) is very limited;
+this feature has been carried over from previous versions.
+It can't expand variables set in texmf.cnf; it also can't handle more than
+one directory as the variable's value.
+.B Don't use it except for the `pk_directory' and `tfm_directory'
+.B parameters!
+.PP
+This is the list of all necessary keywords:
+.TP
+.B hbf_header
+The HBF header file name of the input font(s).
+.B hbf2gf
+uses the given searching mechanism (kpathsea, emtexdir, or MiKTeX) to locate
+this file.
+.TP
+.B output_name
+The name stem of the output files.
+A running two digit decimal number starting with `\c
+.C 01 '
+will be appended.
+For Unicode fonts see the keyword
+.B unicode
+below.
+This value is in almost all cases identical to the name of the configuration
+file.
+.PP
+And now all optional keywords:
+.TP
+.B x_offset
+Increases the character width.
+Will be applied on both sides; default for non-rotated glyphs is the value
+given in the HBF header
+.RB ( HBF_BITMAP_BOUNDING_BOX )
+scaled to
+.B design_size
+(in pixels).
+.TP
+.B y_offset
+Shifts all characters up or down; default for non-rotated glyphs is the value
+given in the HBF header
+.RB ( HBF_BITMAP_BOUNDING_BOX )
+scaled to
+.B design_size
+(in pixels).
+.TP
+.B design_size
+The design size (in points) of the font.
+.B x_offset
+and
+.B y_offset
+refer to this size.
+Default is\ 10.0.
+.TP
+.B slant
+The slant of the font (given as \*(DEx\ /\ \*(DEy).
+Only values in the range 0\ \(<=\ \fBslant\fP\ \(<=\ 1 are allowed.
+Default is\ 0.0.
+.TP
+.B rotation
+If set to `yes', all glyphs will be rotated 90\ degrees counter-clockwise.
+The default offsets as given in the HBF header will be ignored (and set
+to\ 0).
+Default is `no'.
+.TP
+.B mag_x
+.TQ
+.B mag_y
+Scaling values of the characters to reach design size.
+If only one magnification is given, x and y values are assumed to be equal.
+Default is \fBmag_x\fP\ =\ \fBmag_y\fP\ =\ 1.0.
+.PP
+.TP
+.B threshold
+A value between 1 and\ 254 defining a threshold for converting the internal
+graymap into the output bitmap; lower values cut more pixels.
+Default value is\ 128.
+.PP
+.TP
+.B comment
+A comment describing the font; default is none.
+.PP
+.TP
+.B nmb_fonts
+The number of subfonts to create.
+Default value is -1 for creating all fonts.
+.TP
+.B unicode
+If `yes', a two digit hexadecimal number will be used as a running number,
+starting with the value of the first byte of the first code range.
+Default is `no'.
+.TP
+.B min_char
+The minimum value of the encoding.
+You should set this value to get correct subfile offsets if it is not
+identical to the lowest character code in the HBF file.
+.PP
+.TP
+.B dpi_x
+.TQ
+.B dpi_y
+The horizontal and vertical resolution (in dpi) of the printer.
+If only one resolution is given, x and y values are assumed to be equal.
+Default is\ 300.
+.TP
+.B checksum
+A checksum to identify the
+.C GF
+files with the appropriate
+.C TFM
+files.
+The default value of this unsigned 32bit integer is\ 0.
+.TP
+.B coding
+A comment describing the coding scheme; default is none.
+.PP
+.TP
+.B pk_directory
+The destination directory of the
+.C PK
+files; default: none.
+Attention!
+The batch file will not check whether this directory exists.
+.TP
+.B tfm_directory
+The destination directory of the
+.C TFM
+files; default: none.
+Attention!
+The batch file will not check whether this directory exists.
+.TP
+.B pk_files
+Whether to create
+.C PK
+files or not; default is `yes'.
+.TP
+.B tfm_files
+Whether to create
+.C TFM
+files or not; default is `yes'.
+.TP
+.B ofm_file
+Whether to create an
+.C OPL
+file or not; default is `no'.
+The batch file will then use
+.B ovp2ovf
+of the Omega distribution to convert it into an
+.C OFM
+and an
+.C OVF
+file.
+The
+.C OPL
+file simply maps all subfonts back to a single Omega font.
+.TP
+.B long_extension
+If `yes',
+.C PK
+files will include the resolution in the extension (e.g.
+.C gsso1201.300pk ).
+This affects the batch file only (default is `yes').
+.TP
+.B rm_command
+The shell command to remove files; default: `rm'.
+.TP
+.B cp_command
+The shell command to copy files; default: `cp'.
+.TP
+.B job_extension
+The extension of the batch file which calls
+.B gftopk
+and
+.B pltotf
+to convert the
+.C GF
+and the
+.C PL
+files into
+.C PK
+and
+.C TFM
+files respectively; default is none.
+.
+.
+.SH "FILE SEARCHING"
+.B hbf2gf
+uses either the
+.BR kpathsea ,
+.BR emtexdir ,
+or
+.B MiKTeX
+library for searching files
+.RB ( emtexdir
+will work only on operating systems which have an MS-DOSish background,
+i.e., MS-DOS, OS/2, Windows;
+.B MiKTeX
+is for Win32 systems).
+.
+.SS kpathsea
+Please note that older versions of
+.B kpathsea
+(<3.2) have no special means to seach for program related files.
+Additionally, versions older than 3.3 have no default path for miscellaneous
+fonts, thus we use the paths for PostScript related stuff if necessary for
+fonts resp. configuration files.
+The actual version of kpathsea is displayed on screen if you call
+.B hbf2gf
+.BR --version .
+.PP
+Here is a table of the file type and the corresponding
+.B kpathsea
+variables.
+.PP
+Version\ 3.3 and newer (this won't change again in the future!):
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+.br
+.C "\&.hbf MISCFONTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.cfg HBF2GFINPUTS"
+.PP
+Version\ 3.2:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+.br
+.C "\&.hbf T1FONTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.cfg HBF2GFINPUTS"
+.PP
+And here the same for pre-3.2-versions of
+.B kpathsea:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+.br
+.C "\&.hbf T1FONTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.cfg TEXCONFIG"
+.PP
+Finally, the same for versions\ \(<=2.6:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+.br
+.C "\&.hbf DVIPSHEADERS"
+.br
+.C "\&.cfg TEXCONFIG"
+.PP
+Please consult the info files of
+.B kpathsea
+for details on these variables.
+The decision which naming scheme to use for variables will be done during
+compilation.
+.PP
+You should set the
+.C TEXMFCNF
+variable to the directory where your
+.C texmf.cnf
+configuration file resides.
+.PP
+Here is the proper command to find out to which value a
+.B kpathsea
+variable is set (we use
+.C MISCFONTS
+as an example).
+This is especially useful if a variable isn't set in
+.C texmf.cnf
+or in the environment, thus pointing to the default value which is
+hard-coded into the
+.B kpathsea
+library.
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C "kpsewhich -progname=hbf2gf -expand-var='$MISCFONTS'"
+.PP
+We select the program name also since it is possible to specify
+variables which are searched only for a certain program -- in our
+example it would be
+.C MISCFONTS.hbf2gf .
+.PP
+A similar but not identical method is to say
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C "kpsewhich -progname=hbf2gf -show-path='misc fonts'"
+.PP
+[A full list of format types can be obtained by saying `\c
+.C "kpsewhich --help" '
+on the command line prompt.]
+This is exactly the how
+.B hbf2gf
+searches for files; the disadvantage is that all variables are expanded
+which can cause very long strings.
+.
+.SS emtexdir
+.PP
+Here the list of suffixes and its related environment variables to be set in
+.C autoexec.bat
+(resp. in
+.C config.sys
+for OS/2):
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+.br
+.C "\&.hbf HBFONTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.cfg HBFCFG"
+.PP
+If one of the variables isn't set, a warning message is emitted.
+The current directory will always be searched.
+As usual, one exclamation mark appended to a directory path causes
+subdirectories one level deep to be searched, two exclamation marks causes
+all subdirectories to be searched.
+Example:
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C HBFONTS=c:\\\\fonts\\\\hbf!!;d:\\\\myfonts\\\\hbf!
+.PP
+Constructions like `\c
+.C c:\\\\fonts!!\\\\hbf '
+aren't possible.
+.
+.SS MikTeX
+.PP
+Please consult the documentation files of
+.B MiKTeX
+for more details.
+.
+.
+.SH LIMITATIONS
+The x and y output size must not exceed
+.BR MAX_CHAR_SIZE ,
+which is defined at compile time; its default value is 1023\ (pixel).
+.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR ttf2pk (1)
+.PP
+.C hbf2gf.w :
+'in +\n(.ku
+this is the source code written in
+.B CWEB
+which can be converted into a pretty-printed \*(TX
+document using
+.BR cweave .
+The CJK package also contains a preformatted
+.C hbf2gf.dvi
+file.
+.PP
+the
+.B CJK
+documentation files (\c
+.C hbf2gf.txt ).
+.PP
+the
+.B Hanzi Bitmap File
+.RB ( HBF )
+standard version\ 1.3; available at
+.C ftp.ifcss.org
+.PP
+the Omega documentation available at
+.C ftp.ens.fr
+and the CTAN hosts and mirrors.
+.
+.
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.C *.cfg
+The
+.B hbf2gf
+configuration scripts
+.TP
+.C *.hbf
+HBF header files which describe fixed-width bitmap fonts.
+Note that the bitmap font name(s) themselves as specified in the header files
+are irrelevant for
+.BR hbf2gf .
+.
+.
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+.B hbf2gf
+is part of the CJK macro package for \*(LE
+available at the CTAN hosts and its mirrors.
+.PP
+CJK fonts together with HBF header files can be found at
+.C ftp.ifcss.org
+and its mirrors.
+.
+.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Werner Lemberg
+.C <wl@gnu.org>
+.br
+Ross Paterson (the HBF API)
+.C <ross@soi.city.ac.uk>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..eb1eb04f27a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+.TH INCLUDERES 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+includeres \- filter to include resources in a PostScript document
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B includeres
+<
+.I document.ps
+>
+.I output.ps
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Includeres
+includes resources (fonts, procsets, patterns, files, etc) in place of
+.I %%IncludeResource
+comments in a PostScript document. The resources are searched for in the
+current directory and the system default directory under the resource name,
+and with an appropriate extension.
+The pipeline
+.sp
+.ce
+extractres file.ps | includeres >out.ps
+.sp
+will move all resources appearing in a document to the document prologue,
+removing redundant copies. The output file can then be put through page
+re-arrangement filters such as
+.I psnup
+or
+.I pstops
+safely.
+.SH FILES
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH BUGS
+.I includeres
+does not alter the
+.I %%DocumentNeededResources
+comments.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/info.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/info.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..39ca1d32ac3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/info.1
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.34.
+.TH INFO "1" "December 2004" "info 4.8" "User Commands"
+.SH NAME
+info \- read Info documents
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B info
+[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIMENU-ITEM\fR...]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Read documentation in Info format.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+\fB\-\-apropos\fR=\fISTRING\fR
+look up STRING in all indices of all manuals.
+.TP
+\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-directory\fR=\fIDIR\fR
+add DIR to INFOPATH.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-dribble\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR
+remember user keystrokes in FILENAME.
+.TP
+\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-file\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR
+specify Info file to visit.
+.TP
+\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
+display this help and exit.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-index\-search\fR=\fISTRING\fR
+go to node pointed by index entry STRING.
+.TP
+\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-node\fR=\fINODENAME\fR
+specify nodes in first visited Info file.
+.TP
+\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR
+output selected nodes to FILENAME.
+.TP
+\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-raw\-escapes\fR
+output "raw" ANSI escapes (default).
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-raw\-escapes\fR
+output escapes as literal text.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-restore\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR
+read initial keystrokes from FILENAME.
+.TP
+\fB\-O\fR, \fB\-\-show\-options\fR, \fB\-\-usage\fR
+go to command\-line options node.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-subnodes\fR
+recursively output menu items.
+.TP
+\fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-where\fR, \fB\-\-location\fR
+print physical location of Info file.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-vi\-keys\fR
+use vi\-like and less\-like key bindings.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-version\fR
+display version information and exit.
+.PP
+The first non\-option argument, if present, is the menu entry to start from;
+it is searched for in all `dir' files along INFOPATH.
+If it is not present, info merges all `dir' files and shows the result.
+Any remaining arguments are treated as the names of menu
+items relative to the initial node visited.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+info
+show top\-level dir menu
+.TP
+info emacs
+start at emacs node from top\-level dir
+.TP
+info emacs buffers
+start at buffers node within emacs manual
+.TP
+info \fB\-\-show\-options\fR emacs
+start at node with emacs' command line options
+.TP
+info \fB\-f\fR ./foo.info
+show file ./foo.info, not searching dir
+.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
+Email bug reports to bug\-texinfo@gnu.org,
+general questions and discussion to help\-texinfo@gnu.org.
+Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Copyright \(co 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
+under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
+For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/infokey.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/infokey.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fb8f4634f40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/infokey.1
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.34.
+.TH INFOKEY "1" "December 2004" "infokey 4.8" "User Commands"
+.SH NAME
+infokey \- compile customizations for Info
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B infokey
+[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIINPUT-FILE\fR]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Compile infokey source file to infokey file. Reads INPUT\-FILE (default
+$HOME/.infokey) and writes compiled key file to (by default) $HOME/.info.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+\fB\-\-output\fR FILE
+output to FILE instead of $HOME/.info
+.TP
+\fB\-\-help\fR
+display this help and exit.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-version\fR
+display version information and exit.
+.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
+Email bug reports to bug\-texinfo@gnu.org,
+general questions and discussion to help\-texinfo@gnu.org.
+Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
+under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
+For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The full documentation for
+.B infokey
+is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
+.B info
+and
+.B infokey
+programs are properly installed at your site, the command
+.IP
+.B info infokey
+.PP
+should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-info.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-info.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..004d5d0f97d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-info.1
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.34.
+.TH INSTALL-INFO "1" "December 2004" "install-info 4.8" "User Commands"
+.SH NAME
+install-info \- update info/dir entries
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B install-info
+[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIINFO-FILE \fR[\fIDIR-FILE\fR]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Install or delete dir entries from INFO\-FILE in the Info directory file
+DIR\-FILE.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+\fB\-\-delete\fR
+delete existing entries for INFO\-FILE from DIR\-FILE;
+don't insert any new entries.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-dir\-file\fR=\fINAME\fR
+specify file name of Info directory file.
+This is equivalent to using the DIR\-FILE argument.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-entry\fR=\fITEXT\fR
+insert TEXT as an Info directory entry.
+TEXT should have the form of an Info menu item line
+plus zero or more extra lines starting with whitespace.
+If you specify more than one entry, they are all added.
+If you don't specify any entries, they are determined
+from information in the Info file itself.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-help\fR
+display this help and exit.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-info\-file\fR=\fIFILE\fR
+specify Info file to install in the directory.
+This is equivalent to using the INFO\-FILE argument.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-info\-dir\fR=\fIDIR\fR
+same as \fB\-\-dir\-file\fR=\fIDIR\fR/dir.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-item\fR=\fITEXT\fR
+same as \fB\-\-entry\fR TEXT.
+An Info directory entry is actually a menu item.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-quiet\fR
+suppress warnings.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-remove\fR
+same as \fB\-\-delete\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-section\fR=\fISEC\fR
+put this file's entries in section SEC of the directory.
+If you specify more than one section, all the entries
+are added in each of the sections.
+If you don't specify any sections, they are determined
+from information in the Info file itself.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-version\fR
+display version information and exit.
+.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
+Email bug reports to bug\-texinfo@gnu.org,
+general questions and discussion to help\-texinfo@gnu.org.
+Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Copyright \(co 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
+under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
+For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The full documentation for
+.B install-info
+is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
+.B info
+and
+.B install-info
+programs are properly installed at your site, the command
+.IP
+.B info install-info
+.PP
+should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3ef9af6b2aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.TH KPSEACCESS 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+kpseaccess \- determine whether a file can be accessed
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B kpseaccess
+.I [-rwx]
+.I file
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Exit successfully if
+.I file
+can be accessed with the specified mode.
+The mode is one or more letters of
+.IR rwx ,
+where
+.I r
+is for readable,
+.I w
+is for writable, and
+.I x
+is for executable.
+.PP
+The difference between
+.B kpseaccess
+and
+.B test
+is that the latter looks at the permission bits, while the former
+checks using the
+.BR access (2)
+system call. This makes a difference when file systems have been
+mounted read-only.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B kpseaccess
+accepts the following additional options:
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR access (2)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..007e1178459
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+kpsetool.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3a2e65ea0dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+.TH KPSEREADLINK 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+kpsereadlink \- print contents of symbolic link
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B kpsereadlink
+.I file
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If
+.I file
+is a symbolic link, print its contents (what it links to), and exit
+successfully. Exit with a failure otherwise.
+.PP
+On systems that do not support symbolic links,
+.B kpsereadlink
+will always fail.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B kpsereadlink
+accepts the following additional options:
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR readlink (2)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5d4c7a2a54c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+.TH KPSESTAT 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+kpsestat \- compute octal mode from mode of existing file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B kpsestat
+.I mode
+.I file
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B kpsestat
+prints the octal permission of
+.I file
+modified according to
+.I mode
+on standard output. The
+.I mode
+parameter accepts a subset of the symbolic permissions accepted by
+.BR chmod (1).
+Use
+.I =
+as the mode to obtain the unchanged permissions.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B kpsestat
+accepts the following additional options:
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR chmod (1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..addd9b08344
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+.TH "kpsetool" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+kpsetool \- script to make teTeX-style \fBkpsetool\fP,
+\fBkpsexpand\fP, and \fBkpsepath\fP available
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBkpsetool \fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP
+.PP
+\fBkpsexpand\fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fISTRING\fP
+.PP
+\fBkpsepath\fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIPATHTYPE\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBkpsetool\fP is a Bourne shell script that makes a teTeX-style
+\fBkpsetool\fP, \fBkpsexpand\fP, and \fBkpsepath\fP available\&.
+\fBkpsetool\fP uses \fBweb2c\fP\'s (new) \fBkpsexpand\fP binary, so the
+syntax for \fBkpsexpand\fP is incompatible with teTeX\'s as of version
+0\&.4\&.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB-m\fP \fImode\fP"
+set Metafont mode
+.IP "\fB-n\fP \fIprogname\fP"
+pretend to be \fIprogname\fP to kpathsea
+.IP "\fB-p\fP"
+act like \fBkpsepath\fP(1)
+.IP "\fB-v\fP"
+act like \fBkpsexpand\fP(1)
+.IP "\fB-w\fP"
+act like \fBkpsewhich\fP(1)
+.PP
+.SH "USAGE"
+.PP
+\fIPATHTYPE\fP can be
+.PP
+.IP "\fBbase\fP"
+Metafont memory dump
+.IP "\fBbib\fP"
+BibTeX bibliography source
+.IP "\fBbst\fP"
+BibTeX style files
+.IP "\fBcnf\fP"
+Kpathsea runtime configuration files
+.IP "\fBdvips_config\fP"
+dvips config files
+.IP "\fBdvips_header\fP"
+dvips header files
+.IP "\fBfmt\fP"
+TeX memory dump
+.IP "\fBgf\fP"
+generic font bitmap
+.IP "\fBmem\fP"
+MetaPost memory dump
+.IP "\fBmf\fP"
+Metafont source
+.IP "\fBmfpool\fP"
+Metafont program strings
+.IP "\fBmp\fP"
+MetaPost source
+.IP "\fBmppool\fP"
+MetaPost program strings
+.IP "\fBmpsupport\fP"
+MetaPost support files
+.IP "\fBpict\fP"
+Other kinds of figures
+.IP "\fBpk\fP"
+packed bitmap font
+.IP "\fBtex\fP"
+TeX source
+.IP "\fBtexpool\fP"
+TeX program strings
+.IP "\fBtfm\fP"
+TeX font metrics
+.IP "\fBtroff_font\fP"
+troff fonts
+.IP "\fBvf\fP"
+virtual font
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBkpsewhich\fP(1)
+.PP
+\fIKpathsea: A library for path searching\fP (info or DVI file)
+.PP
+Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/>
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBkpsetool\fP was written by Thomas Esser
+<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> in March, 1997\&. \fBkpsetool\fP
+is in the public domain\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..76700ed33fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+.TH "kpsewhere" "1" "March 2004" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+kpsewhere \- Expanding \fBkpsewhich\fP to separately iterate over each
+texmf tree listed in $TEXMF.
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBkpsewhere \fP [ \fIkpsewhich-OPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBkpsewhere\fP is an extension to \fBkpsewhich\fP (as \fBwhere\fP is
+for \fBwhich\fP in tcsh). The intention is to provide a way to check
+for conflicts/shadowed files. It will, however, only find \fBone\fP
+file per TEXMF tree.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB-h|--help\fP"
+show a short help message
+.IP "\fB\&*\fP"
+all other options are directly handed to kpsewhich
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBkpsewhich\fP(1)
+.PP
+\fIKpathsea: A library for path searching\fP (info or DVI file)
+.PP
+Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/>
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBkpsewhere\fP was written by Hans Fredrik Nordhaug
+<hans\&.fredrik@nordhaug\&.no>, additions by
+Thomas Esser
+<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de>, in 2003 and 2004\&. \fBkpsewhere\fP
+is in the public domain\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by Frank Küster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch>,
+for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It is also in the public domain
+and may be used and changed by others without contacting the author\&.
+Any mistakes or omissions in the manual page are my fault; inquiries
+about or corrections to this manual page should be directed to me (and
+not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..86ac0357676
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+.TH KPSEWHICH 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+kpsewhich \- standalone path lookup and and expansion for kpathsea
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B kpsewhich
+.RI [ options ]
+.RI [ filenames ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" .
+.PP
+.B kpsewhich
+is used as a standalone front-end of the kpathsea library that can be
+used to examine variables and find files. When the
+.B -format
+option is not given, the search path used when looking for a file is
+inferred from the name given, by looking for a known extension. If
+no known extension is found, the search path for \*(TX source files is
+used.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B kpsewhich
+accepts the following options:
+.TP
+.BI -debug \ num
+.rb
+Set debugging flags.
+.TP
+.BI -D \ num
+.rb
+Use a base resolution of
+.IR num ;
+the default, set by the installer, is typically 600.
+.TP
+.BI -dpi \ num
+As
+.BR -D.
+.TP
+.BI -engine \ string
+.rb
+Set
+.I $engine
+in the environment, which is used in some search paths.
+.TP
+.BI -expand-braces \ string
+.rb
+Print variable and brace expansion of
+.IR string .
+.TP
+.BI -expand-path \ string
+.rb
+Print complete path expansion of
+.IR string .
+.TP
+.BI -expand-var \ string
+.rb
+Print variable expansion of
+.IR string .
+.TP
+.BI -format \ name
+.rb
+Use file type
+.IR name .
+See the info manual for a list of valid names, or use the
+.B -help
+option to print the list.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -interactive
+.rb
+Ask for additional filenames to look up.
+.TP
+.BI -mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+enable
+.RI mktex fmt
+generation.
+.RI ( fmt =pk/mf/tex/tfm)
+.TP
+.BI -mode \ string
+.rb
+Set device name for
+.I $MAKETEX_MODE
+to
+.IR string ;
+no default.
+.TP
+.B -must-exist
+.rb
+Search the disk as well as ls-R if necessary.
+.TP
+.BI -no-mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+disable
+.RI mktex fmt
+generation.
+.RI ( fmt =pk/mf/tex/tfm)
+.TP
+.BI -path \ string
+Search in the path
+.IR string .
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ string
+.rb
+Set program name to
+.IR string .
+.\" .TP
+.\" .BI -separator \ string
+.\" .rb
+.\" .I string
+.\" separates components in
+.\" .B -path
+.\" output; default is
+.\" .I :
+.\" on UNIX systems.
+.TP
+.BI -show-path \ name
+.rb
+Output search path for file type
+.IR name .
+See the info manual for a list of valid names, or use the
+.B -help
+option to print the list.
+.TP
+.BI -var-value \ variable
+.rb
+Print the expansion of
+.IR variable .
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR mktexlsr (1),
+.BR mktexmf (1),
+.BR mktexpk (1),
+.BR mktextfm (1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..007e1178459
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+kpsetool.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9679e294e60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+.TH "LaCheck" "1" "10/26/05" "Release 1.26"
+.SH NAME
+lacheck - A consistency checker for LaTeX documents.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B lacheck
+.I filename
+[
+.I .tex
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+LaCheck is a general purpose consistency checker for LaTeX documents.
+It reads a LaTeX document and displays warning messages, if it finds
+bad sequences. It should be noted, that the badness is
+.I very
+subjective. LaCheck is designed to help find common mistakes in LaTeX
+documents, especially those made by beginners.
+.LP
+The things checked are:
+.LP
+Mismatched groups (braces), environments and math mode
+delimiters. When a mismatch is found, line numbers for
+.I "both"
+start and end of the mismatch is given. The error messages comes in
+pairs, one for the end match and one for the beginning, marked with
+\`<-\' and \`->\' respectively.
+.LP
+Bad spacing including missing a \`\\ \' after an abbreviation, missing
+an \`\\@\' before a punctuation mark in a paragraph that is ended by
+an capital letter, double spaces like \` \~\', bad usage of ellipsis
+(like using ... instead of \\ldots, or using \\ldots where \\cdots
+should be used), missing \~ before a \\cite or \\ref commands, space
+before footnotes, italic corrections before comma, point, or italic
+text, italic correction after normal text, missing italic correction
+when switching from italic to normal text, and double italic
+correction.
+.LP
+Badly placed punctuation marks around end of math mode
+delimiters. This is, punctuation placed right after display math end
+or punctuation placed right before text math end. Sequences of
+whitespace followed by punctuation marks are also caught.
+.LP
+Bad use of quotation characters, i.e. constructs like "\'word" or
+"word\`" are warned about, tabs in verbatim environments are caught,
+certain TeX primitives are frowned upon, attempts to give font
+specifiers arguments such as \\em{text} are noted, and use of @ in
+LaTeX macros are reported.
+.LP
+LaCheck will read files that are input using \\input or \\include.
+Files with suffix \`.sty\' are omitted, as they probably will cause
+LaCheck to crash.
+.LP
+LaCheck may be invoked from within Emacs(1) using compile:
+
+To run:
+.B "M-x compile RET lacheck RET"
+, and then
+.B "C-x `"
+to parse the messages
+
+.SH OUTPUT
+The output is UNIX-error like, and may be parsed using Emacs(1)
+compile mode. Here is a sample:
+
+.PD 0
+lacheck compiler
+.TP
+"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 34: missing \`\\\\\\\\ \' after "etc."
+.TP
+"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 179: double space at " ~"
+.TP
+"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 186: <- unmatched "}"
+.TP
+"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 181: -> unmatched "$$"
+.PD 1
+.LP
+A control space \`\\ \' should be inserted at line 34, to prevent an
+end-of-sentence space.
+Also, at line 179, the first space of the sequence " ~" should
+probably be deleted.
+The last two lines is an example, where the user mistyped, and
+probably inserted an extra "}" somewhere.
+
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+Some special cases should be explained. In cases where a sentence ends
+with something that LaCheck thinks is an abbreviation an missing \`\\
+\' error may also occur, if the following sentence begins with a
+lowercase letter.
+.LP
+A mismatch error may cause more to follow, due to the chosen
+algorithm. In such cases just correct the
+.I "first"
+error and run LaCheck again
+.LP
+Braces, environments and math mode must be balanced within a file.
+.LP
+LaCheck may be confused by unmatched stuff placed inside verbatim-like
+environments called something else than exactly \`verbatim\'.
+.SH FILES
+lacheck
+.SH SEE ALSO
+tex(1), emacs(1), latex(1)
+.SH BUGS
+LaCheck gets confused by advanced macros, is fooled by simple macros,
+can't figure out if you use a non-standard way to switch italic on or
+off, does not like TeX at all, does not provide any options to turn
+off specific warnings, and is at best a crude approximation.
+.LP
+Ideas for improvements and bug reports are very welcome. Such
+should be directed to the maintainers, their email address is
+<auc-tex_mgr@sunsite.auc.dk>.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Kresten Krab Thorup with modifications by Per Abrahamsen.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lambda.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lambda.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..29d0bbb1c10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lambda.1
@@ -0,0 +1,292 @@
+.TH OMEGA 1 "27 December 1997" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+omega, iniomega, viromega \- extended unicode TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B omega
+.RI [ options ]
+[\fB&\fR \fIformat\fR ]
+[ \fIfile\fR | \fB\e\fR \fIcommands\fR ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Run the Omega typesetter on
+.IR file ,
+usually creating
+.IR file.dvi .
+If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it.
+Instead of a filename, a set of Omega commands can be given, the first
+of which must start with a backslash.
+With a
+.BI & format
+argument Omega uses a different set of precompiled commands,
+contained in
+.IR format.fmt ;
+it is usually better to use the
+.B -fmt
+.I format
+option instead.
+.PP
+Omega is a version of the \*(TX program modified for multilingual
+typesetting. It uses unicode, and has additional primitives for
+(among other things) bidirectional typesetting.
+.PP
+The
+.B iniomega
+and
+.B viromega
+commands are Omega's analogues to the
+.B initex
+and
+.B virtex
+commands. In this installation, they are symlinks to the
+.B omega
+executable.
+.PP
+Omega's command line options are similar to those of \*(TX.
+.PP
+Omega is experimental software.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of Omega understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.BI --oft \ format
+.rb
+Use
+.I format
+as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
+Omega was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --ini
+.rb
+Be
+.BR iniomega ,
+for dumping formats; this is implicitly true if the program is called
+as
+.BR iniomega .
+.TP
+.BI --interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+\ecommands.
+.TP
+.B --ipc
+.rb
+Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether
+this option is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.B --ipc-start
+.rb
+As
+.BR --ipc ,
+and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
+is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.BI --kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI --maketex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be one of
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI --no-maketex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be one of
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI --output-comment \ string
+.rb
+Use
+.I string
+for the DVI file comment instead of the date.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.B --parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name.
+.TP
+.BI --progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B --recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened
+for input and output in a file with extension
+.IR .ofl .
+(This option is always on.)
+.TP
+.B --shell-escape
+.rb
+Enable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct. The
+.I command
+can be any Bourne shell command. This construct is normally
+disallowed for security reasons.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
+The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+One caveat: In most Omega formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
+give directly to Omega, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
+expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
+\*(MF, do not have this problem.
+.PP
+.TP
+TEXMFOUTPUT
+Normally, Omega puts its output files in the current directory. If
+any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
+directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
+There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+.I tex paper
+and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
+the value
+.IR /tmp ,
+Omega attempts to create
+.I /tmp/paper.log
+(and
+.IR /tmp/paper.dvi ,
+if any output is produced.)
+.TP
+TEXINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I \einput
+and
+.I \eopenin
+files.
+This should probably start with ``.'', so
+that user files are found before system files. An empty path
+component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
+current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
+.TP
+TEXEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+.BR vi ,
+is set when Omega is compiled.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I omega.pool
+Encoded text of Omega's messages.
+.TP
+.I *.oft
+Predigested Omega format (.\|oft) files.
+.br
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NOTES
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of Omega can be found in the info
+manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+This version of Omega implements a number of optional extensions.
+In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
+extent with the definition of Omega. When such extensions are
+enabled, the banner printed when Omega starts is changed to print
+.B Omegak
+instead of
+.BR Omega .
+.PP
+This version of Omega fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
+dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
+but when it does the generated
+.I DVI
+file will be invalid.
+.PP
+The
+.I DVI
+files produced by Omega may use extensions which make them incompatible
+with most software designed to handle
+.I DVI
+files. In order to print or preview them, you should use
+.B odvips
+to generate a PostScript file.
+.PP
+Omega is experimental software, and if you are an active user it is
+strongly recommended that you subscribe to the Omega mailing list.
+Visit the Omega website
+.B http://omega.cse.unsw.edu.au
+for information on how to subscribe.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1),
+.RB odvips (1),
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice and Yannis Haralambous.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..89d63058631
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+.TH LATEX 1 "29 March 1999" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+latex, elatex, lambda, pdflatex \- structured text formatting and typesetting
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B latex
+[ first line ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The \*(LX language is described in the book
+.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" .
+\*(LX is a \*(TX macro package, not a modification to the \*(TX source
+program, so all the capabilities described in
+.BR tex (1)
+are present.
+.PP
+The \*(LX macros encourage writers to think about the content of their
+documents, rather than the form. The ideal, very difficult to realize, is to
+have no formatting commands (like ``switch to italic'' or ``skip 2
+picas'') in the document at all; instead, everything is done
+by specific markup instructions: ``emphasize'', ``start a section''.
+.PP
+The primary source of documentation for \*(LX is the \*(LX manual
+referenced below, and the local guide in the file
+.I local-guide.tex
+or
+.I local.tex
+or some such.
+.PP
+.B elatex
+is the e-\*(TX extended mode version of \*(LX format.
+.PP
+.B lambda
+is the Omega version of the \*(LX format.
+.PP
+.B pdflatex
+is the pdf\*(TX version of the \*(LX format.
+.PP
+On some systems
+.B latex209
+and
+.B slitex
+are available for compatibility with older versions of \*(LX. These
+should not be used for new texts.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR amslatex (1),
+.BR amstex (1),
+.BR tex (1),
+.br
+Leslie Lamport,
+.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" ,
+Addison-Wesley, 1985, ISBN 0-201-15790-X.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8d9f2d4a261
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+.\" e
+.TH MAG 1 UMFT
+.de EX
+.sp
+.in +5
+.nf
+.ft CW
+..
+.de EE
+.in -5
+.ft R
+.sp
+.fi
+..
+.SH NAME
+mag \- computes fontsizes and magsteps
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B
+mag
+[-\fBR\fIdpi\fP\fP] magstep . . .
+
+.B
+mag
+[-\fBr\fP] [-\fBR\fP\fIdpi\fP] fontsize . . .
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+This tool calculates fontsizes given magsteps. TeXfonts are provided as
+true sized fonts or as magnifications. The fontsize of a true sized
+font equals the resolution of the printer (ex. 300). The fontsize
+of a font magnified $n$ \fImagsteps\fP equals:
+.EQ
+1.2 sup{n} times 300
+delim off
+.EN
+rounded to its nearest integer value. Fontnames for TeX fonts normally
+consists of the name (\fIcmr\fP), pointsize (\fI10\fP), type (\fIpk\fP)
+and fontsize (\fI360\fP), for example: \fIcmr10.360pk\fP.
+
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The result of \fImag -R240 -2 0 0.5 1\fP will be:
+.EX
+167 240 263 288
+.EE
+
+The inverse function is computed with the \fI-r\fP option. The result of
+\fImag -r -R240 167 240 263 288\fP
+will be the fontsteps:
+.EX
+-2 0 0.5 1
+.EE
+
+The UNIX shells allow command substitution. One can write:
+.EX
+mag -r -R240 `mag -R240 -2 0 0.5 1`
+.EE
+
+.SH DATE
+18 December, 1989
+
+.SH AUTHOR
+.nf
+Piet Tutelaers
+University of Technology Eindhoven
+<rcpt@urc.tue.nl>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1404df6cf74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,1203 @@
+.if t .ds LX L\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\\s-2A\\s+2\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds TX T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ds Ts T\s-2RAN\s+2S\s-2CRIPT\s+2
+.if t .ds Uc \fIU\\h'-0.12m'C\\v'0.27m'\\h'-.23m'S\\h'-0.11m'F\\v'-0.27m'\fP
+.if n .ds Uc UCSF
+.ds Et \\f(boE\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'-0.20v'T\\v'0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'T\\fP
+.TH MAKEINDEX 1L "10 December 1991"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+makeindex \- a general purpose, formatter-independent index processor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B makeindex
+.BR [ \-c ]
+.BR [ \-g ]
+.BR [ \-i ]
+.BR [ \-l ]
+.BR [ \-o
+.IR ind ]
+.BR [ \-p
+.IR num ]
+.BR [ \-q ]
+.BR [ \-r ]
+.BR [ \-s
+.IR sfile ]
+.BR [ \-t
+.IR log ]
+.BR [ \-L ]
+.BR [ \-T ]
+.BI [ idx0
+.I idx1
+.IR idx2 .\|.\|.]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The program
+.I makeindex
+is a general purpose hierarchical index generator; it accepts one or
+more input files (often produced by a text formatter such as \*(TX
+.RI ( tex (1L))
+or
+.IR troff (1),
+sorts the entries, and produces an output file which can be formatted.
+The index can have up to three levels (0, 1, and 2) of subitem nesting.
+The way in which words are flagged for indexing within the main document
+is specific to the formatter used;
+.I makeindex
+does
+.I not
+automate the process of selecting these words. As the output index
+is hierarchical,
+.I makeindex
+can be considered complimentary to the
+.IR awk (1)-based
+.IR make.index (1L)
+system of Bentley and Kernighan, which is specific to
+.IR troff (1),
+generates non-hierarchical indices, and employs a much simpler syntax
+for indicating index entries. For illustration of use with
+.I troff
+and
+.IR \*(TX ,
+see the section \s-2EXAMPLES\s+2 below.
+.LP
+The formats of the input and output files are
+specified in a style file; by default, input is assumed to be a
+.I \&.idx
+file, as generated by \*(LX.
+.LP
+Unless specified explicitly, the base name of the first input file
+.RI ( idx0 )
+is used to determine the names of other files. For each input file
+name specified, a file of that name is sought. If this file is not
+found and the file name has no extension, the extension
+.I \&.idx
+is appended. If no file with this name is found,
+.I makeindex
+aborts.
+.LP
+If exactly one input file was given and no explicit style file was
+specified using
+.BR \-s ,
+.I makeindex
+uses a file with the extension
+.I \&.mst
+as default style file (when present).
+.LP
+For important notes on how to select index keywords, see the document
+by Lamport cited below. As an issue separate from selecting index
+keywords, a systematic mechanism for placing index terms in a document
+is suggested in
+.IR "Index Preparation and Processing" ,
+a paper cited below.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP 10
+.B \-c
+Compress intermediate blanks (ignoring leading and trailing blanks and
+tabs). By default, blanks in the index key are retained.
+.TP 10
+.B \-g
+Employ German word ordering in the index, in accord with rules set forth
+in DIN 5007. By default,
+.I makeindex
+employs a word ordering in which precedence is: symbols, numbers,
+uppercase letters, lowercase letters. The sequence in German word
+ordering is: symbols, lowercase letters, uppercase letters, numbers.
+Additionally, this option enables
+.I makeindex
+to recognize the German \*(TX-commands {"a, "o, "u and "s} as {ae, oe,
+ue and ss} during the sorting of the entries. The quote character
+must be redefined in a style file (for example, redefine quote
+as '+'). If the quote character is not redefined,
+.I makeindex
+will produce an error message and abort.
+.TP 10
+.B \-i
+Take input from
+.IR stdin .
+When this option is specified and
+.B \-o
+is not, output is written to
+.IR stdout .
+.TP 10
+.B \-l
+Letter ordering; by default, word ordering is used (see
+the \s-2ORDERING\s+2 section).
+.TP 10
+.BI \-o " ind"
+Employ
+.I ind
+as the output index file. By default, the file name
+is created by appending the extension
+.I .ind
+to the base name of
+the first input file
+.RI ( idx0 ).
+.TP 10
+.BI \-p " num"
+Set the starting page number of the output index file to be
+.I num
+(useful when the index file is to be formatted separately). The
+argument
+.I num
+may be numerical or one of the following:
+.RS
+.TP 10
+.I any
+The starting page is the last source page number plus 1.
+.TP
+.I odd
+The starting page is the first odd page following the last source page
+number.
+.TP
+.I even
+The starting page is the first even page following the last source
+page number.
+.RE
+.IP
+The last source page is obtained by searching backward in the log file
+for the first instance of a number included within paired square
+brackets
+.RB ( [ .\|.\|. ] ).
+If a page number is missing or the log file is not found, no attempt
+will be made to set the starting page number. The source log file
+name is determined by appending the extension
+.I \&.log
+to the base name of the first input file
+.RI ( idx0 ).
+.TP 10
+.B \-q
+Quiet mode; send no messages to
+.IR stderr .
+By default, progress
+and error messages are sent to
+.I stderr
+as well as to the
+transcript file.
+.TP 10
+.B \-r
+Disable implicit page range formation; page ranges must be created by
+using explicit range operators; see \s-2SPECIAL EFFECTS\s+2 below. By
+default, three or more successive pages are automatically abbreviated
+as a range (e.g. 1\(em5).
+.TP 10
+.BR \-s " sty"
+Employ
+.I sty
+as the style file (no default). The environment
+variable \s-2INDEXSTYLE\s+2 defines the path where the style file
+should be found.
+.TP 10
+.BR \-t " log"
+Employ
+.I log
+as the transcript file. By default, the file name is
+created by appending the extension
+.I .ilg
+to the base name of the
+first input file
+.RI ( idx0 ).
+.TP 10
+.BR \-L
+sort based on locale settings. Not available on all systems.
+.TP 10
+.BR \-T
+special support for Thai documents. Not available on all systems.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "STYLE FILE"
+The style file informs
+.I makeindex
+about the format of the
+.I \&.idx
+input files and the intended format of the final output file; examples
+appear below. This file can reside anywhere in the path defined by
+the environment variable \s-2INDEXSTYLE\s+2. The style file contains
+a list of
+.RI < specifier , " attribute" >
+pairs. There are two types of specifiers: input and output.
+Pairs do not have to appear in any particular order.
+A line begun by `%' is a comment. In the following list of
+specifiers and arguments, <string> is an arbitrary string delimited by
+double quotes (".\|.\|."), <char> is a single letter embraced by
+single quotes ('.\|.\|.'), and <number> is a nonnegative integer.
+The maximum length of a <string> is 2048. A literal backslash or
+quote must be escaped (by a backslash). Anything not specified in the
+style file will be assigned a default value, which is shown at the
+head of the rightmost column.
+.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------
+.SS "INPUT STYLE SPECIFIERS"
+.TP 25
+.BR actual " <char>"
+\'@\'
+.RS
+Symbol indicating that the next entry is to appear in the output file.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR arg_close " <char>"
+\'}\'
+.RS
+Closing delimiter for the index entry argument.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR arg_open " <char>"
+\'{\'
+.RS
+Opening delimiter for the index entry argument.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR encap " <char>"
+\'|\'
+.RS
+Symbol indicating that the rest of the argument list
+is to be used as the encapsulating command for the page number.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR escape " <char>"
+\'\\\\\'
+.RS
+Symbol which escapes the following letter, unless its preceding letter
+is
+.BR escape .
+Note:
+.B quote
+is used to escape the letter which immediately follows it, but if it is
+preceded by
+.BR escape ,
+it is treated as a ordinary character. These two symbols
+.I must
+be distinct.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR keyword " <string>"
+"\\\\indexentry"
+.RS
+Command which tells
+.I makeindex
+that its argument is an index entry.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR level " <char>"
+\'!\'
+.RS
+Delimiter denoting a new level of subitem.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR quote " <char>"
+\'"\'
+.RS
+Note:
+.B quote
+is used to escape the letter which immediately follows it, but if it is
+preceded by
+.BR escape ,
+it is treated as a ordinary character. These two symbols
+.I must
+be distinct.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR range_close " <char>"
+\')\'
+.RS
+Closing delimiter indicating the end of an explicit page range.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR range_open " <char>"
+\'(\'
+.RS
+Opening delimiter indicating the beginning of an explicit page range.
+.RE
+.\"---------------------------------------------------------------------
+.SS "OUTPUT STYLE SPECIFIERS"
+.TP 25
+.BR preamble " <string>"
+"\\\\begin{theindex}\\n"
+.RS
+Preamble of output file.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR postamble " <string>"
+"\\n\\n\\\\end{theindex}\\n"
+.RS
+Postamble of output file.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR setpage_prefix " <string>"
+"\\n \\\\setcounter{page}{"
+.RS
+Prefix of command which sets the starting page number.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR setpage_suffix " <string>"
+"}\\n"
+.RS
+Suffix of command which sets the starting page number.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR group_skip " <string>"
+"\\n\\n \\\\indexspace\\n"
+.RS
+Vertical space to be inserted before a new group begins.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR headings_flag " <string>"
+0
+.RS
+Flag indicating treatment of new group headers, which are inserted
+when before a new group (symbols, numbers, and the 26 letters):
+positive values cause an uppercase letter to be inserted between
+prefix and suffix, and negative values cause a lowercase letter to be
+inserted (default is 0, which produces no header).
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR heading_prefix " <string>"
+""
+.RS
+Header prefix to be inserted before a new letter begins.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR symhead_positive " <string>"
+"Symbols"
+.RS
+Heading for symbols to be inserted if
+.B headings_flag
+is positive.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR symhead_negative " <string>"
+"symbols"
+.RS
+Heading for symbols to be inserted if
+.B headings_flag
+is negative.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR numhead_positive " <string>"
+"Numbers"
+.RS
+Heading for numbers to be inserted if
+.B headings_flag
+is positive.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR numhead_negative " <string>"
+"numbers"
+.RS
+Heading for numbers to be inserted if
+.B headings_flag
+is negative.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR item_0 " <string>"
+"\\n \\\\item "
+.RS
+Command to be inserted between two primary (level 0) items.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR item_1 " <string>"
+"\\n \\\\subitem "
+.RS
+Command to be inserted between two secondary (level 1) items.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR item_2 " <string>"
+"\\n \\\\subsubitem "
+.RS
+Command to be inserted between two level 2 items.
+.RE
+.TP
+.B item_01 " <string>"
+"\\n \\\\subitem "
+.RS
+Command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1 item.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR item_x1 " <string>"
+"\\n \\\\subitem "
+.RS
+Command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1 item,
+where the level 0 item does not have associated page numbers.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR item_12 " <string>"
+"\\n \\\\subsubitem "
+.RS
+Command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2 item.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR item_x2 " <string>"
+"\\n \\\\subsubitem "
+.RS
+Command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2 item,
+where the level 1 item does not have associated page numbers.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR delim_0 " <string>"
+", "
+.RS
+Delimiter to be inserted between a level 0 key and its first page number
+(default: comma followed by a blank).
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR delim_1 " <string>"
+", "
+.RS
+Delimiter to be inserted between a level 1 key and its first page number
+(default: comma followed by a blank).
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR delim_2 " <string>"
+", "
+.RS
+Delimiter to be inserted between a level 2 key and its first page number
+(default: comma followed by a blank).
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR delim_n " <string>"
+", "
+.RS
+Delimiter to be inserted between two page numbers for the same key
+in any level (default: comma followed by a blank).
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR delim_r " <string>"
+"--"
+.RS
+Delimiter to be inserted between the starting and ending page numbers
+of a range.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR delim_t " <string>"
+""
+.RS
+Delimiter to be inserted at the end of a page list. This delimiter
+has no effect on entries which have no associated page list.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR encap_prefix " <string>"
+"\\\\"
+.RS
+First part of prefix for the command which encapsulates the page number.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR encap_infix " <string>"
+"{"
+.RS
+Second part of prefix for the command which encapsulates the page
+number.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR encap_suffix " <string>"
+"}".
+.RS
+Suffix for the command which encapsulates the page number.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR line_max " <number>"
+72
+.RS
+Maximum length of a line in the output, beyond which a line wraps.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR indent_space " <string>"
+"\\t\\t"
+.RS
+Space to be inserted in front of a wrapped line (default: two tabs).
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR indent_length " <number>"
+16
+.RS
+Length of
+.B indent_space
+(default: 16, equivalent to 2 tabs).
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR suffix_2p " <string>"
+""
+.RS
+Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page number of
+a two page list. When present, it overrides
+.BR delim_r .
+Example: "f.".
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR suffix_3p " <string>"
+""
+.RS
+Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page number of
+a three page list. When present, it overrides
+.B delim_r
+and
+.BR suffix_mp .
+Example: "ff.".
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR suffix_mp " <string>"
+""
+.RS
+Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page number of
+a multiple page list (three or more pages). When present, it overrides
+.BR delim_r .
+Example: "f.".
+.RE
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.\"---------------------------------------------------------------------
+.SS "\*(TX EXAMPLE"
+The following example shows a style file called
+.IR book.ist ,
+which defines an index for a book which can be formatted independently
+of the main source:
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fCpreamble
+"\\\\documentstyle[12pt]{book}
+\\\\begin{document}
+\\\\begin{theindex}
+{\\\\small\\n"
+postamble
+"\\n\\n}
+\\\\end{theindex}
+\\\\end{document}\\n\fP"
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+Assuming that a particular book style requires the index (as well as any
+chapters) to start from an odd page number, and that the input file is
+named
+.IR foo.idx ,
+the following command line produces output in file
+.IR footmp.ind :
+.LP
+.RS
+\fCmakeindex \-s book.ist \-o footmp.ind \-p odd foo\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+Here a non-default output file name is used to avoid clobbering the
+output for the book itself (presumably
+.IR foo.dvi ,
+which would have been the default name for the index output file!).
+.\"---------------------------------------------------------------------
+.SS "TROFF EXAMPLE"
+A sample control file for creating an index, which we will assume
+resides in the file
+.IR sample.ist :
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\&\fCkeyword "IX:"
+\&preamble
+\&".\\\\\\" start of index output
+\&\\".\\\\\\" enter two column mode
+\&.2C
+\&.SH
+\&.ce
+\&INDEX
+\&.XS
+\&INDEX
+\&.XE
+\&.R
+\&.ps 9p
+\&.vs 11p
+\&.sp
+\&.de I1
+\&.ti 0.25i
+\&..
+\&.de I2
+\&.ti 0.5i
+\&.."
+\&postamble "\\n.\\\\\\" end of index output"
+\&setpage_prefix "\\n.nr % "
+\&setpage_suffix ""
+\&group_skip "\\n.sp 1.0"
+\&headings_flag 1
+\&heading_prefix "\\n.IS\\n"
+\&heading_suffix "\\n.IE"
+\&item_0 "\\n.br\\n"
+\&item_1 "\\n.I1\\n"
+\&item_2 "\\n.I2\\n"
+\&item_01 "\\n.I1\\n"
+\&item_x1 "\\n.I1\\n"
+\&item_12 "\\n.I2\\n"
+\&item_x2 "\\n.I2\\n"
+\&delim_0 ", "
+\&delim_1 ", "
+\&delim_2 ", "
+\&delim_r "-"
+\&delim_t "."
+\&encap_prefix "\\\\fB"
+\&encap_infix ""
+\&encap_suffix "\\\\fP"
+\&indent_space ""
+\&indent_length 0\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+The local macro package may require modification, as in this example
+of an extension to the
+.B \-ms
+macros (note that at some sites, this macro should
+.I replace
+a pre-existing macro of the same name):
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\&.\" IX - index words to stderr
+\&.de IX
+\&.ie '\\\\n(.z'' .tm IX: \\\\$1 \\\\$2 \\\\$3 \\\\$4 \\\\$5 \\\\$6 \\\\$7 \\\\$8 \\\\$9 {\\\\n(PN}
+\&.el \\\\!.IX \\\\$1 \\\\$2 \\\\$3 \\\\$4 \\\\$5 \\\\$6 \\\\$7 \\\\$8 \\\\$9 {\\\\n(PN}
+\&..\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+(note that the string {\fC\\\\n(PN\fP} is separated from the rest of the
+line by a tab.
+If your local macro package does not contain this extension,
+just include those lines at the beginning of your file.
+Here is a simple
+.IR troff (1)
+input file, which we will assume is named
+.IR sample.txt :
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\&This is a sample file to test the \\fImakeindex\\fP(1L)
+\&program, and see
+\&.IX {indexing!programs!C language}
+\&.IX {makeindex@\\fImakeindex\\fP(1L)}
+\&.bp
+\&.rs
+\&.IX {Knuth}
+\&.IX {typesetting!computer-aided}
+\&how well it functions in the \\fItroff\\fP(1) environment.\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+Note that index entries are indicated by the
+.B .IX
+macro, which
+causes the following text to be written to
+.I stdout
+along with the
+current page number.
+.\"---------------------------------------------------------------------
+.SS "CREATING THE INDEX FILE IN THE BOURNE SHELL"
+To create an input file for
+.IR makeindex ,
+.B "in the Bourne shell"
+environment, do the equivalent at your site of the command:
+.LP
+.nf
+\fCpsroff -ms -Tpsc -t sample.txt > /dev/null 2> sample.tmp\fP
+.fi
+.LP
+Some sites will require
+.I ditroff
+instead of
+.IR psroff .
+To filter out any genuine error messages, invoke
+.IR grep (1):
+.LP
+.RS
+\fCgrep '^IX: ' sample.tmp > sample.idx\fP
+.RE
+.\"---------------------------------------------------------------------
+.SS "CREATING THE INDEX FILE USING \*(Uc ENHANCED TROFF/\*(Ts"
+With \*(Uc Enhanced troff/\*(Ts, the
+.B \-I
+option of
+.IR psroff (1L)
+can produce both formatter output and an index file:
+.LP
+.RS
+\fCpsroff -ms -I sample.inp -Tpsc sample.txt\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+If it is wished to suppress the formatter output:
+.RS
+.LP
+.nf
+\fCpsroff -ms -I sample.inp -Tpsc -t sample.txt > /dev/null\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.\"---------------------------------------------------------------------
+.SS "COMPLETING THE INDEX"
+Any of the above procedures leaves the input for
+.I makeindex
+in
+.IR sample.inp .
+The next step is to invoke
+.IR makeindex :
+.LP
+.RS
+\fCmakeindex -s sample.ist sample.idx\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+This leaves
+.IR troff (1)-ready
+output in the file
+.IR sample.ind .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "ORDERING"
+By default,
+.I makeindex
+assumes
+.IR "word ordering" ;
+if the
+.B \-l
+option is in effect,
+.I "letter ordering"
+is used. In word ordering, a blank precedes any letter in the
+alphabet, whereas in letter ordering, it does not count at all. This
+is illustrated by the following example:
+.LP
+.RS
+\fIword order letter order\fP
+.br
+sea lion seal
+.br
+seal sea lion
+.RE
+.LP
+Numbers are always sorted in numeric order. For instance,
+.LP
+.RS
+9 (nine), 123
+.br
+10 (ten), see Derek, Bo
+.RE
+.LP
+Letters are first sorted without regard to case; when words are
+identical, the uppercase version precedes its lowercase counterpart.
+.LP
+A special symbol is defined here to be any character not appearing in
+the union of digits and the English alphabetic characters. Patterns
+starting with special symbols precede numbers, which precede patterns
+starting with letters. As a special case, a string starting with a
+digit but mixed with non-digits is considered to be a pattern starting
+with a special character.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SPECIAL EFFECTS"
+Entries such as
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\\indexentry{alpha}{1}
+\\indexentry{alpha!beta}{3}
+\\indexentry{alpha!beta!gamma}{10}\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+in the input file will be converted to
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\\item alpha, 1
+\0\0\0\\subitem beta, 3
+\0\0\0\0\0\0\\subsubitem gamma, 10\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+in the output index file.
+Notice that the
+.B level
+symbol (`!') is used above to delimit
+hierarchical levels.
+.LP
+It is possible to make an item appear in a designated form by
+using the
+.B actual
+(`@') operator. For instance,
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\indexentry{alpha@{\\it alpha\\/}}{1}\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+will become
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\item {\\it alpha\\/}, 1\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+after processing. The pattern preceding `@' is
+used as sort key, whereas the one following it is written to the
+output file. Note that two appearances of the same key, one with and
+one without the
+.B actual
+operator, are regarded as
+.I distinct
+entries.
+.LP
+The item, subitem, and subsubitem fields may have individual sort keys:
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\\indexentry{aa@{\\it aa\\/}!bb@{\\it bb\\/}!cc@{\\it cc\\/}}{1}\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+This will be converted to
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\\item {\\it aa}, 1
+\0\0\0\\subitem {\\it bb}, 3
+\0\0\0\0\0\0\\subsubitem {\\it cc}, 10\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+It is possible to encapsulate a page number with a designated
+command using the
+.B encap
+(`|') operator:
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\indexentry{alpha|bold}{1}\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+will be converted to
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\item alpha, \\bold{1}\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+where, with a suitable definition for \*(TX, \fC\\bold{n}\fP
+will expand to \fC{\\bf n}\fP.
+In this example, the three output attributes associated with page
+encapsulation
+.BR encap_prefix ,
+.BR encap_infix ,
+and
+.BR encap_suffix ,
+correspond to backslash, left brace, and right brace, respectively.
+This mechanism allows page numbers to be set in different fonts. For
+example, the page where the definition of a keyword appears can be in
+one font, the location of a primary example can be in another font,
+and other appearances in yet a third font.
+.LP
+The
+.B encap
+operator can also be used to create cross references in
+the index:
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\indexentry{alpha|see{beta}}{1}\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+will become
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\item alpha, \\see{beta}{1}\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+in the output file, where
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\see{beta}{1}\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+will expand to
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC{\\it see\\/} beta\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+Note that in a cross reference like this the page number disappears.
+.LP
+A pair of
+.B encap
+concatenated with
+.B range_open
+(`|(') and
+.B range_close
+(`|)') creates an explicit page range:
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(}{1}
+\\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+will become
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\item alpha, 1\(em5\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+Intermediate pages indexed by the same key will be merged into the
+range implicitly. This is especially useful when an entire section
+about a particular subject is to be indexed, in which case only the
+range opening and closing operators need to be inserted at the
+beginning and end of the section. Explicit page range formation can
+also include an extra command to set the page range in a designated
+font:
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(bold}{1}
+\\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+will become
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\item alpha, \\bold{1--5}\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+Several potential problems are worth mentioning. First, entries like
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(}{1}
+\\indexentry{alpha|bold}{3}
+\\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+will be interpreted as
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\item alpha, \\bold{3}, 1--5\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+but with a warning message in the transcript about encountering an
+inconsistent page encapsulator.
+An explicit range beginning in a Roman page number and ending
+in Arabic is also considered an error. In this instance, (if
+possible) the range is broken into two subranges, one in Roman and the
+other in Arabic. For instance,
+.LP
+.RS
+.nf
+\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(}{i}
+\\indexentry{alpha}{iv}
+\\indexentry{alpha}{3}
+\\indexentry{alpha|)}{7}\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.LP
+will be turned into
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\item alpha, i--iv, 3--7\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+with a warning message in the transcript file complaining about an
+illegal range formation.
+.LP
+Finally, every special symbol mentioned in this section may be
+escaped by the
+.B quote
+operator (`"'). Thus
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\indexentry{alpha"@beta}{1}\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+will actually become
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\item alpha@beta, 1\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+as a result of executing
+.IR makeindex .
+The quoting power of
+.B quote
+is eliminated if it is immediately preceded
+by
+.B escape
+(`\\'). For example,
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\indexentry{f\\"ur}{1}\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+becomes
+.LP
+.RS
+\fC\\item f\\"ur, 1\fP
+.RE
+.LP
+which represents an umlaut-accented `u' to the \*(TX family of
+processors.
+.PP
+From version 2.11 of
+.IR makeindex ,
+the
+.B quote
+operator may quote
+.I any
+character in the range 1 .\|.\|. 255. Character 0 is excluded because
+it is used internally in the
+.I makeindex
+source code as a string terminator. With this change, sort keys can
+be created for all eight-bit characters except 0. The sorting order
+is
+.RS
+.nf
+
+punctuation characters (in ASCII order),
+digits,
+control characters (1 .\|.\|. 31),
+space (32),
+letters (ignoring case),
+characters 127 .\|.\|. 255.
+
+.fi
+.RE
+Here is an example showing the indexing of all printable ASCII
+characters other than letters and digits, assuming the default
+\*(TX format. For convenience, the page number references are
+the corresponding ASCII ordinal values.
+.RS
+.nf
+
+\fC\\indexentry{" @" (space)}{32}
+\\indexentry{"!@"! (exclamation point)}{33}
+\\indexentry{""@"" (quotation mark)}{34}
+\\indexentry{"#@"\\# (sharp sign)}{35}
+\\indexentry{"$@"\\$ (dollar sign)}{36}
+\\indexentry{"%@"\\% (percent sign)}{37}
+\\indexentry{"&@"\\& (ampersand)}{38}
+\\indexentry{"<@"$<$ (left angle bracket)}{60}
+\\indexentry{"=@"= (equals)}{61}
+\\indexentry{">@"$>$ (right angle bracket)}{62}
+\\indexentry{"?@"? (query)}{63}
+\\indexentry{"@@"@ (at sign)}{64}
+\\indexentry{"[@"[ (left square bracket)}{91}
+\\indexentry{"\\@"\\verb=\\= (backslash)}{92}
+\\indexentry{"]@"] (right square bracket)}{93}
+\\indexentry{"^@"\\verb=^= (caret)}{94}
+\\indexentry{"_@"\\verb=_= (underscore)}{95}
+\\indexentry{"`@"\\verb=~= (grave accent)}{96}
+\\indexentry{"{@"\\"{ (left brace)}{123}
+\\indexentry{"|@"\\verb="|= (vertical bar)}{124}
+\\indexentry{"}@"\\"} (right brace)}{125}
+\\indexentry{"~@"\\verb=~= (tilde)}{126}\fP
+
+.fi
+.RE
+Characters in the actual fields following the `@' character which
+have special significance to \*(TX must be represented as control
+sequences, or as math mode characters. Note particularly how the
+entries for the at sign, left and right braces, and the vertical
+bar, are coded. The index file output by
+.I makeindex
+for this example looks like this:
+.RS
+.nf
+
+\fC\\begin{theindex}
+
+ \\item ! (exclamation point), 33
+ \\item " (quotation mark), 34
+ \\item \\# (sharp sign), 35
+ \\item \\$ (dollar sign), 36
+ \\item \\% (percent sign), 37
+ \\item \\& (ampersand), 38
+ \\item $<$ (left angle bracket), 60
+ \\item = (equals), 61
+ \\item $>$ (right angle bracket), 62
+ \\item ? (query), 63
+ \\item @ (at sign), 64
+ \\item [ (left square bracket), 91
+ \\item \\verb=\\= (backslash), 92
+ \\item ] (right square bracket), 93
+ \\item \\verb=^= (caret), 94
+ \\item \\verb=_= (underscore), 95
+ \\item \\verb=~= (grave accent), 96
+ \\item \\{ (left brace), 123
+ \\item \\verb=|= (vertical bar), 124
+ \\item \\} (right brace), 125
+ \\item \\verb=~= (tilde), 126
+
+ \\indexspace
+
+ \\item (space), 32
+
+\\end{theindex}\fP
+.fi
+.RE
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "FILES"
+.TP 2.2i
+.I makeindex
+executable file
+.TP
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/plain/misc/idxmac.tex
+\*(TX macro file used by
+.I makeindex
+.TP
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/latex/base/makeidx.sty
+\*(TX macro file used by
+.I makeindex
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+ditroff(1L),
+latex(1L),
+make.index (1L),
+qsort(3),
+tex(1L),
+troff(1L)
+.LP
+.IR "\*(Uc Enhanced troff/\*(Ts \(em An Overview" ,
+R. P. C. Rodgers and Conrad Huang, LSMB Technical Report 90-2,
+UCSF School of Pharmacy, San Francisco, 1990.
+.LP
+.IR "Index Preparation and Processing" ,
+Pehong Chen and Michael A. Harrison,
+.IR "Software: Practice and Experience" ,
+.BR 19 (9),
+897\(en915,
+September 1988.
+.LP
+.IR "Automating Index Preparation" ,
+Pehong Chen and Michael A. Harrison. Technical Report 87/347,
+Computer Science Division, University of California, Berkeley, 1987
+(a \*(LX document supplied with
+.IR makeindex ).
+.LP
+.IR "MakeIndex: An Index Processor for \*(LX" ,
+Leslie Lamport, February 1987 (a \*(LX document supplied
+with
+.IR makeindex ).
+.LP
+.IR "Tools for Printing Indices" ,
+Jon L. Bentley and Brian W. Kernighan,
+.IR "Electronic Publishing \(em Origination, Dissemination, and Design" ,
+1(1), 3\(en18, June 1988 (also available as: Computing Science
+Technical Report No. 128,
+AT&T Bell Laboratories, Murray Hill, NJ 07974, 1986).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+Pehong Chen, Chen & Harrison International Systems, Inc.
+Palo Alto, California, USA <chen@renoir.berkeley.edu>.
+.br
+Manual page extensively revised and corrected, and
+.IR troff (1)
+examples created by Rick P. C. Rodgers, UCSF School
+of Pharmacy <rodgers@cca.ucsf.edu>.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
+Leslie Lamport contributed significantly to the design.
+Michael Harrison provided valuable comments and suggestions.
+Nelson Beebe improved on the portable version, and maintains the
+source distribution for the \*(TX Users Group.
+Andreas Brosig contributed to the German word ordering.
+The modification to the
+.B \-ms
+macros was derived from a method proposed by Ravi Sethi of AT&T
+Bell Laboratories.
+The
+.I LOG
+and
+.I CONTRIB
+files in the
+.I makeindex
+source distribution record other contributions.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeinfo.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeinfo.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7b46491e0a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeinfo.1
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.34.
+.TH MAKEINFO "1" "December 2004" "makeinfo 4.8" "User Commands"
+.SH NAME
+makeinfo \- translate Texinfo documents
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B makeinfo
+[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fITEXINFO-FILE\fR...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Translate Texinfo source documentation to various other formats, by default
+Info files suitable for reading online with Emacs or standalone GNU Info.
+.SS "General options:"
+.TP
+\fB\-\-error\-limit\fR=\fINUM\fR
+quit after NUM errors (default 100).
+.TP
+\fB\-\-force\fR
+preserve output even if errors.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-help\fR
+display this help and exit.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-validate\fR
+suppress node cross\-reference validation.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-warn\fR
+suppress warnings (but not errors).
+.TP
+\fB\-\-reference\-limit\fR=\fINUM\fR
+warn about at most NUM references (default 1000).
+.TP
+\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
+explain what is being done.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-version\fR
+display version information and exit.
+.SS "Output format selection (default is to produce Info):"
+.TP
+\fB\-\-docbook\fR
+output Docbook XML rather than Info.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-html\fR
+output HTML rather than Info.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-xml\fR
+output Texinfo XML rather than Info.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-plaintext\fR
+output plain text rather than Info.
+.SS "General output options:"
+.TP
+\fB\-E\fR, \fB\-\-macro\-expand\fR FILE
+output macro\-expanded source to FILE.
+ignoring any @setfilename.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-headers\fR
+suppress node separators, Node: lines, and menus
+from Info output (thus producing plain text)
+or from HTML (thus producing shorter output);
+also, write to standard output by default.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-split\fR
+suppress splitting of Info or HTML output,
+generate only one output file.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-number\-sections\fR
+output chapter and sectioning numbers.
+.TP
+\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR=\fIFILE\fR
+output to FILE (directory if split HTML),
+.SS "Options for Info and plain text:"
+.TP
+\fB\-\-enable\-encoding\fR
+output accented and special characters in
+Info output based on @documentencoding.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-fill\-column\fR=\fINUM\fR
+break Info lines at NUM characters (default 72).
+.TP
+\fB\-\-footnote\-style\fR=\fISTYLE\fR
+output footnotes in Info according to STYLE:
+`separate' to put them in their own node;
+`end' to put them at the end of the node
+.IP
+in which they are defined (default).
+.TP
+\fB\-\-paragraph\-indent\fR=\fIVAL\fR
+indent Info paragraphs by VAL spaces (default 3).
+If VAL is `none', do not indent; if VAL is
+`asis', preserve existing indentation.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-split\-size\fR=\fINUM\fR
+split Info files at size NUM (default 300000).
+.SS "Options for HTML:"
+.TP
+\fB\-\-css\-include\fR=\fIFILE\fR
+include FILE in HTML <style> output;
+read stdin if FILE is \-.
+.SS "Options for XML and Docbook:"
+.TP
+\fB\-\-output\-indent\fR=\fIVAL\fR
+indent XML elements by VAL spaces (default 2).
+If VAL is 0, ignorable whitespace is dropped.
+.SS "Input file options:"
+.TP
+\fB\-\-commands\-in\-node\-names\fR
+allow @ commands in node names.
+.TP
+\fB\-D\fR VAR
+define the variable VAR, as with @set.
+.TP
+\fB\-I\fR DIR
+append DIR to the @include search path.
+.TP
+\fB\-P\fR DIR
+prepend DIR to the @include search path.
+.TP
+\fB\-U\fR VAR
+undefine the variable VAR, as with @clear.
+.SS "Conditional processing in input:"
+.TP
+\fB\-\-ifdocbook\fR
+process @ifdocbook and @docbook even if
+not generating Docbook.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-ifhtml\fR
+process @ifhtml and @html even if not generating HTML.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-ifinfo\fR
+process @ifinfo even if not generating Info.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-ifplaintext\fR
+process @ifplaintext even if not generating plain text.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-iftex\fR
+process @iftex and @tex; implies \fB\-\-no\-split\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-ifxml\fR
+process @ifxml and @xml.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-ifdocbook\fR
+do not process @ifdocbook and @docbook text.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-ifhtml\fR
+do not process @ifhtml and @html text.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-ifinfo\fR
+do not process @ifinfo text.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-ifplaintext\fR
+do not process @ifplaintext text.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-iftex\fR
+do not process @iftex and @tex text.
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-ifxml\fR
+do not process @ifxml and @xml text.
+.IP
+Also, for the \fB\-\-no\-ifFORMAT\fR options, do process @ifnotFORMAT text.
+.IP
+The defaults for the @if... conditionals depend on the output format:
+if generating HTML, \fB\-\-ifhtml\fR is on and the others are off;
+if generating Info, \fB\-\-ifinfo\fR is on and the others are off;
+if generating plain text, \fB\-\-ifplaintext\fR is on and the others are off;
+if generating XML, \fB\-\-ifxml\fR is on and the others are off.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TP
+makeinfo foo.texi
+write Info to foo's @setfilename
+.TP
+makeinfo \fB\-\-html\fR foo.texi
+write HTML to @setfilename
+.TP
+makeinfo \fB\-\-xml\fR foo.texi
+write Texinfo XML to @setfilename
+.TP
+makeinfo \fB\-\-docbook\fR foo.texi
+write DocBook XML to @setfilename
+.TP
+makeinfo \fB\-\-no\-headers\fR foo.texi
+write plain text to standard output
+.IP
+makeinfo \fB\-\-html\fR \fB\-\-no\-headers\fR foo.texi write html without node lines, menus
+makeinfo \fB\-\-number\-sections\fR foo.texi write Info with numbered sections
+makeinfo \fB\-\-no\-split\fR foo.texi write one Info file however big
+.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
+Email bug reports to bug\-texinfo@gnu.org,
+general questions and discussion to help\-texinfo@gnu.org.
+Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Copyright \(co 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
+under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
+For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The full documentation for
+.B makeinfo
+is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
+.B info
+and
+.B makeinfo
+programs are properly installed at your site, the command
+.IP
+.B info makeinfo
+.PP
+should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempx.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempx.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fe968665fb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempx.1
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+.TH MAKEMPX 1 "4 January 1998" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+makempx \- typeset labels in MetaPost pictures with TeX or Troff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B makempx
+.RI [ --tex | --troff ]
+.I mpfile mpxfile
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+If
+.I mpxfile
+is older than
+.IR mpfile ,
+translate the labels from the \*(MP input file
+.I mpfile
+to low-level commands in
+.IR MPXFILE ,
+by running
+.BR "mpto -tex" ,
+.BR tex ,
+and
+.B dvitomp
+by default; or, if
+.B -troff
+is specified,
+.BR "mpto -troff" ,
+.BR "eqn -d\e$\e$ | troff -Tpost" ,
+and
+.BR dmp .
+.PP
+The current directory is used for writing temporary files. Errors are
+left in
+.IR mpxerr.{tex,log,dvi} .
+.PP
+If the file named in
+.I $MPTEXPRE
+(mptexpre.tex by default) exists, it is prepended to the output in tex
+mode.
+.PP
+.B makempx
+is typically called by
+.BR mpost ,
+not from the command line.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B makempx
+accepts the following options:
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --tex
+.rb
+Assume input file contains \*(TX commands.
+.TP
+.B --troff
+.rb
+Assume input file contains Troff commands.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR mpost (1),
+.BR mpto (1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempy.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..02cae248c54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makempy.1
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+.TH makempy "1" "May 2004" "teTeX " "ConTeXt"
+.SH NAME
+makempy \- Helper script for conversion of (PDF or PostScript) text to
+\fBMetapost\fP graphics
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+\fBmakempy\fP \fIfilenam\fP
+.PP
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+\fBmakempy\fP takes \fBMetapost\fP output files (*\&.mpo) and
+translates them to *\&.mpy files. In order to include text as a
+graphic into a file typeset with (Con)TeX(t), you extract the text
+from Postscript of PDF files using \fBpdftops\fP and \fBpstoedit\fP,
+creating a Metapost input file.
+.PP
+This file can then be processed by \fBmakempy\fP. The \fBmakempy\fP
+script does its work without user intervention. When it deduces that
+there are no changes, it will not run at all, otherwise it will report
+its steps and/or encountered error.
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--help\fP"
+returns some basic help information
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--silent\fP"
+don t report status messages
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--force\fP"
+always process the file (no checksum test)
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--noclean\fP"
+don t remove temporary files when finished
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--acrobat\fP"
+use ACROBAT for conversion (only unix)
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--pdftops\fP"
+use PDFTOPS for conversion
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--ghostscript\fP"
+use GHOSTSCRIPT for conversion
+.IP
+.SH "VARIABLES"
+.PP
+When set, the environment variables GS and GS_PROG will be used to
+identify GHOSTSCRIPT. If needed, the names of the other programs that
+are used can be set with PDFTOPS, ACROREAD and PSTOEDIT.
+.HP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBtexexec\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+The makempy manual, \fImmakempy\&.pdf\fP\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.IP
+This manual page was written by Frank Küster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch>,
+for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used and modified by
+others without contacting the author\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..48261aa3d6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+mf.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9909f89db14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,501 @@
+.\" t
+.TH MF 1 "10 November 2001" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if n .ds WB Web
+.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+mf, mf-nowin, inimf, virmf \- Metafont, a language for font and logo design
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mf
+.RI [ options ]
+.RI [ commands ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\*(MF reads the program in the specified files
+and outputs font rasters (in
+.I gf
+format) and font metrics (in
+.I tfm
+format). The \*(MF
+language is described in
+.IR "The \*(MF\^book" .
+.PP
+Like
+\*(TX, \*(MF
+is normally used with a large body of precompiled macros, and font generation
+in particular requires the support of several macro files. This
+version of \*(MF looks at its command line to see what name it was
+called under. Both
+.B inimf
+and
+.B virmf
+are symlinks to the
+.B mf
+executable. When called as
+.BR inimf
+(or when the
+.B -ini
+option is given) it can be used to precompile macros into a
+.I .base
+file. When called as
+.B virmf
+it will use the
+.I plain
+base. When called under any other name, \*(MF will use that name as
+the name of the base to use. For example, when called as
+.B mf
+the
+.I mf
+base is used, which is identical to the
+.I plain
+base. Other bases than
+.I plain
+are rarely used.
+.PP
+The
+.I commands
+given on the command line to the \*(MF program are passed to it as the
+first input line. (But it is often easier to type extended arguments
+as the first input line, since UNIX shells tend to gobble up or
+misinterpret \*(MF's favorite symbols, like semicolons, unless you
+quote them.) As described in
+.IR "The \*(MF\^book" ,
+that first line should begin with a filename, a
+.RI \e controlsequence ,
+or a
+.IR &basename .
+.PP
+The normal usage is to say
+.IP
+\fBmf\ \fP '\\\|mode=<printengine>\^;\^ [\^mag=magstep(\fI\^n\fP\^)\^;\^]' input\ \^\fI font \fP
+.PP
+to start processing
+.IR font.mf .
+The single quotes are the best way of keeping the Unix
+shell from misinterpreting the semicolons and
+from removing the \\ character, which is needed here to
+keep \*(MF from thinking that you want to produce a font called
+.IR mode .
+(Or you can just say
+.I mf
+and give the other stuff on the next line, without quotes.) Other
+control sequences, such as
+.I batchmode
+(for silent operation) can also appear.
+The name
+.I font
+will be the ``jobname'', and is used in forming
+output file names.
+If \*(MF doesn't get a file name in the first line,
+the jobname is
+.IR mfput .
+The default extension,
+.IR .mf ,
+can be overridden by specifying an extension explicitly.
+.PP
+A log of error messages goes into the file \fIjobname\fP\fB\^.\^\fP\fIlog\fP.
+The output files are \fIjobname\fP\fB\^.\^\fP\fItfm\fP and
+\fIjobname\fP\fB\^.\^\fP\fI<\fP\^number\^\fI>gf\fP, where <number> depends on
+the resolution and magnification of the font. The
+.I mode
+in this
+example is shown generically as <printengine>, a symbolic term for which
+the name of an actual device or, most commonly, the name
+.I localfont
+(see below) must
+be substituted. If the mode is not specified or is not valid for your
+site, \*(MF will default to
+.I proof
+mode which produces
+large character images for use in font design and refinement. Proof
+mode can be recognized by the suffix
+.I .2602gf
+after the jobname. Examples of proof mode output can be found
+in
+.I "Computer Modern Typefaces"
+(Volume E of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ).
+The system of
+.I magsteps
+is identical to the system used by
+\*(TX,
+with values generally in the range 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0 and 5.0.
+A listing of
+.I gf
+numbers for 118-dpi, 240-dpi and 300-dpi fonts
+is shown below.
+.TS
+tab(:);
+c c c c
+l l l l.
+MAGSTEP:118 dpi:240 dpi:300 dpi
+mag=magstep(0):118:240:300
+mag=magstep(0.5):129:263:329
+mag=magstep(1):142:288:360
+mag=magstep(2):170:346:432
+mag=magstep(3):204:415:518
+mag=magstep(4):245:498:622
+mag=magstep(5):294:597:746
+.TE
+.PP
+Magnification can also be specified not as a magstep but as an
+arbitrary value, such as 1.315, to create special character sizes.
+.PP
+Before font production can begin, it is necessary to set up the
+appropriate base files. The minimum set of components for font
+production for a given print-engine is the
+.I plain.mf
+macro file
+and the local
+.I mode_def
+file. The macros in
+.I plain.mf
+can be
+studied in an appendix to the
+.IR "\*(MF\^book" ;
+they were developed by Donald E. Knuth, and this file should never be
+altered except when it is officially upgraded.
+Each
+.I mode_def
+specification helps adapt fonts to a particular print-engine.
+There is a regular discussion of
+.IR mode_def s
+in
+.IR TUGboat ,
+the journal of the
+\*(TX
+Users Group.
+The local ones in use on this computer should be in
+.IR modes.mf .
+.PP
+The
+.I e
+response to \*(MF\|'s error-recovery mode invokes the
+system default
+editor at the erroneous line of the source file.
+There is an environment variable, MFEDIT,
+that overrides the default editor.
+It should contain a string with "%s" indicating where the
+filename goes and "%d" indicating where the decimal linenumber (if any) goes.
+For example, an MFEDIT string for the
+.B vi
+editor can be set with the
+.B csh
+command
+.RS
+\fIsetenv MFEDIT "vi +%d %s"\fP
+.RE
+.PP
+A convenient file in the library is
+.IR null.mf ,
+containing nothing.
+When
+.B mf
+can't find the file it thinks you want to input, it keeps
+asking you for another file name; responding `null' gets you out
+of the loop if you don't want to input anything.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "ONLINE GRAPHICS OUTPUT"
+\*(MF can use most modern displays, so you can see its output
+without printing. Chapter 23 of
+.I "The \*(MF\^book"
+describes what you can do. This implementation of \*(MF uses
+environment variables to determine which display device you want to use.
+First it looks for a variable MFTERM, and then for TERM.
+If it can't find either, you get no online output. Otherwise, the value
+of the variable determines the device to use:
+.BR hp2627 ,
+.B sun
+(for old SunView),
+.BR tek ,
+.B uniterm
+(for an Atari ST Tek 4014 emulator),
+.B xterm
+(for either X10 or X11).
+Some of these devices may not be supported in all \*(MF
+executables; the choice is made at compilation time.
+.PP
+On some systems, there are two \*(MF binaries,
+.B mf
+and
+.BR mf-nowin .
+On those systems the
+.B mf
+binary supports graphics, while the
+.B mf-nowin
+binary does not. The
+.B mf-nowin
+binary is used by scripts like
+.B mktexpk
+where graphics support is a nuisance rather than something helpful.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of \*(MF understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.BI -base \ base
+.rb
+Use
+.I base
+as the name of the base to be used, instead of the name by which
+\*(MF was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error
+.rb
+Print error messages in the form
+.I file:line:error
+which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
+.TP
+.B -no-file-line-error
+.rb
+Disable printing error messages in the
+.I file:line:error
+style.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error-style
+.rb
+This is the old name of the
+.B -file-line-error
+option.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -ini
+.rb
+Be
+.BR inimf ,
+for dumping bases; this is implicitly true if the program is called
+as
+.BR inimf .
+.TP
+.BI -interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+commands.
+.TP
+.BI -jobname \ name
+.rb
+Use
+.I name
+for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
+.TP
+.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI -maketex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be
+.IR mf .
+.TP
+.BI -no-maketex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be
+.IR mf .
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.B -parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name or a
+.B -translate-file
+option.
+.TP
+.B -no-parse-first-line
+.rb
+Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file.
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B -recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened
+for input and output in a file with extension
+.IR .fls .
+.TP
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Use the
+.I tcxname
+translation table.
+.TP
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for the details of how the environment variables are use when
+searching. The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+If the environment variable
+TEXMFOUTPUT is set, \*(MF attempts to put its output
+files in it, if they cannot be put in the current directory. Again, see
+.BR tex (1).
+.TP
+MFINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I input
+and
+.I openin
+files.
+.TP
+MFEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor.
+.TP
+MFTERM
+Determines the online graphics display. If MFTERM is not set,
+and DISPLAY is set, the Metafont window support for X is used.
+(DISPLAY must be set to a valid X server specification, as usual.)
+If neither MFTERM nor DISPLAY is set, TERM is used to guess the window
+support to use.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "FONT UTILITIES"
+A number of utility programs are available.
+The following is a partial list of available utilities and their purpose.
+Consult your local \*(MF guru for details.
+.br
+.TP \w'gftodvi'u+2n
+.B gftopk
+Takes a
+.I gf
+file and produces a more tightly packed
+.I pk
+font file.
+.TP
+.B gftodvi
+Produces proof sheets for fonts.
+.TP
+.B gftype
+Displays the contents of a
+.I gf
+file in mnemonics and/or images.
+.TP
+.B pktype
+Mnemonically displays the contents of a
+.I pk
+file.
+.TP
+.B mft
+Formats a source file as shown in
+.IR "Computer Modern Typefaces" .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "FILES"
+.TP
+.I "mf.pool"
+Encoded text of \*(MF's messages.
+.TP
+.I *.base
+Predigested \*(MF base files.
+.TP
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/metafont/base/plain.mf
+The standard base.
+.TP
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/metafont/misc/modes.mf
+The file of
+.IR mode_def s
+for your site's various printers
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NOTES
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(MF can be found in the info manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+On January 4, 1986 the ``final'' bug in \*(MF was discovered
+and removed. If an error still lurks in the code, Donald E. Knuth promises to
+pay a finder's fee which doubles every year to the first person who finds
+it. Happy hunting.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SUGGESTED READING"
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.I "The \*(MF\^book"
+(Volume C of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4.
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.I "\*(MF:\^ The Program"
+(Volume D of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13438-1.
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.I Computer Modern Typefaces
+(Volume E of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13446-2.
+.br
+.I TUGboat
+(the journal of the \*(TX Users Group).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH COMMENTS
+Warning: ``Type design can be hazardous to your other interests.
+Once you get hooked, you will develop intense feelings about letterforms;
+the medium will intrude on the messages that you read.
+And you will perpetually be thinking of improvements to the fonts that
+you see everywhere, especially those of your own design.''
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR gftopk (1),
+.BR gftodvi (1),
+.BR gftype (1),
+.BR mft (1),
+.BR pltotf (1),
+.BR tftopl (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+\*(MF was designed by Donald E. Knuth, who implemented it
+using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs. It was originally
+ported to Unix by Paul Richards at the University of Illinois at
+Urbana-Champaign. This page was mostly written by Pierre MacKay.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..db552fa1c4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.1
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+.TH MFT 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+mft \- translate Metafont code to TeX code for prettyprinting
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mft
+.I mf_file_name[.mf]
+[
+[
+.B \-c
+]
+or
+[
+.I change_file_name[.ch]
+]
+]
+[
+[
+.B \-s
+]
+or
+[
+.I style_file_name[.mft]
+]
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B mft
+program creates a \*(TX file from a \*(MF program.
+It takes appropriate care of typographic details like page
+layout and the use of indentation, italics, boldface, etc., as illustrated
+in the book
+.IR "Computer Modern Typefaces" .
+Special conventions in \*(MF comments allow you to control things that
+would not otherwise come out right; section 1 of the MFT source program
+in the
+.I \*(MFware
+report explains these rules.
+.PP
+The command line has one required file name and two optional file names.
+The required
+one is a \*(MF source file; there is also an optional change file
+(which works just as the change files to
+.BR tangle (1)
+and
+.BR weave (1)
+do)
+and an optional style file (which is prepended to everything).
+.PP
+A file name that doesn't contain a dot is always given an extension,
+either
+.I .mf
+(\*(MF) or
+.I .ch
+(change) or
+.I .mft
+(style). If no style file is specified, the style file
+.I plain.mft
+is automatically used. The
+.I change_file_name
+is not searched for using any paths. The
+.I .mf
+file is searched for using the MFINPUTS environment variable if you
+have set it, or else the system default. The style file is searched
+for using the TEXINPUTS environment variable. See
+.BR tex (1)
+for the details of the searching.
+.PP
+The output \*(TX file name is formed by using
+.I .tex
+in place of the extension of
+.IR mf_file_name .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+Specify command-line options
+.B \-c
+to suppress the reading of a change file, and
+.B \-s
+to suppress the reading of a style file.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.I mftmac.tex
+\*(TX macros used by
+.B mft
+output.
+.TP
+.I plain.mft
+Default style file.
+.TP
+.I cmbase.mft
+Style file for Computer Modern.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR mf (1),
+.BR weave (1).
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.I Computer Modern Typefaces
+(Volume E of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13446-2.
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth et al.,
+.IR \*(MFware .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Donald E. Knuth wrote the program, and he ported it to Unix with the help of
+Pierre MacKay and the Unix port of
+.B weave
+by Howard Trickey and Pavel Curtis.
+The program is published in the
+.I \*(MFware
+technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..503b70020fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+.TH "mkindex" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+mkindex \- script to process LaTeX index and glossary files
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBmkindex\fP \fIBASENAME\fP[\&.idx] \&.\&.\&.
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBmkindex\fP runs \fBmakeindex\fP(1) on any index
+(\f(CW\&.idx\fP) or glossary (\f(CW\&.glo\fP) files created by TeXing the file
+\fI\fIBASENAME\fP\&.tex\fP\&.
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.IP "\fIgind\&.ist\fP"
+MakeIndex index style file
+.IP
+.IP "\fIgglo\&.ist\fP"
+MakeIndex glossary style file
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBmakeindex\fP(1)
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@informatik\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+Written by Thomas Esser
+<te@informatik\&.uni-hannover\&.de>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c35c967225e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+.TH "mkocp" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+mkocp \- frontend to \fBotp2ocp\fP(1)
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBmkocp\fP \fIOTPFILE\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBmkocp\fP is used to create or recreate Omega Compiled Process files
+(binary) from Omega Translation Process (text) files\&.
+.PP
+Omega Translation Processes are used to translate one character set to
+another and to choose between characters with one or more
+context-sensitive variants\&. OTPs could also be used to change the
+case or hyphenation of text\&.
+.PP
+OTPs are defined in text files, and compiled into binary code (OCPs)
+using \fBmkocp\fP (this script) or directly with \fBotp2ocp\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.IP "\fIOTPFILE\fP"
+An Omega Typesetting Process filter file\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBomega\fP(1), \fBotp2ocp\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/>
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBmkocp\fP is part of Omega\&. The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice
+<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous
+<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9c38a4301a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+.TH "mkofm" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+mkofm \- front end to \fBmktextfm\fP(1)
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBmkofm\fP \fIARGS\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBmkofm\fP takes all \fIARGS\fP and passes them to
+\fBmktextfm\fP(1)\&. For more information about appropriate
+arguments, see \fBmktextfm\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBmktextfm\fP(1)
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+Author unknown\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..240dee18655
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+fmtutil.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ececa268140
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.1
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+.TH MKTEXLSR 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+mktexlsr \- create ls-R databases
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mktexlsr
+.RI [ directories ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" .
+.PP
+.B mktexlsr
+is used to generate the ls-R databases used by the kpathsea library.
+It will create them for the specified directories, or for a default
+list if no directories are specified.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B mktexlsr
+accepts the following options:
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..502a41ac325
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+.TH MKTEXMF 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+mktexmf \- create a Metafont source file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mktexmf
+.I font
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" .
+.PP
+.B mktexmf
+is used to generate the \*(MF source file for
+.IR font ,
+if possible. For example,
+.I ecrm1200
+or
+.IR cmr11 .
+.PP
+The name of the generated file is printed on standard output.
+.PP
+.B mktexmf
+is typically called by other programs, rather than from the command
+line.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B mktexmf
+accepts the following options:
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR mktexpk (1),
+.BR mktextfm (1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..99a5a71cd3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.1
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+.TH MKTEXPK 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+mktexpk \- create a PK file for a font
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mktexpk
+.RI [ options ]
+.I font
+.RI [ redirect ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" .
+.PP
+.B mktexpk
+is used to generate a
+.I pk
+file from the \*(MF source files or type1 sources for
+.IR font ,
+if possible.
+.PP
+If
+.I redirect
+is given, it must be string of the form
+.I >&n
+where
+.I n
+is the number of the file descriptor which is to receive, instead of
+standard output, the name of the generated file.
+.PP
+.B mktexpk
+is typically called by other programs, rather than from the command
+line.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B mktexpk
+accepts the following options:
+.TP
+.BI --bdpi \ num
+Set the base device resolution.
+.rb
+.TP
+.BI --dpi \ num
+Generate the font at resolution
+.IR num .
+.rb
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.BI --mag \ mag
+The \*(MF magnification that corresponds to the combination of
+.I bdpi
+and
+.I dpi
+that has been specified.
+.rb
+.TP
+.BI --mfmode \ mode
+The \*(MF mode to use.
+.rb
+.TP
+.BI --destdir \ dir
+A directory name. If the directory is absolute, it is used as-is.
+Otherwise, it is appended to the root destination directory set in the
+script.
+.rb
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+If the
+.I mode
+is not specified,
+.B mktexpk
+tries to determine it from
+.IR bdpi .
+The manner in which this is done is primitive. Since
+.I bpdi
+doesn't provide sufficient information to uniquely determine a
+.I mode
+it is strongly recommended that it be specified explicitly.
+.PP
+If the
+.I mode
+and
+.I bpdi
+don't match, the
+.I mode
+is discarded.
+.PP
+The
+.I dpi
+parameter is redundant, but is not checked for consistency. Worse,
+the program will fail if the wrong
+.I dpi
+is specified.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR mktexmf (1),
+.BR mktextfm (1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e8566899004
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+.TH MKTEXTFM 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+mktextfm \- create a TFM file for a font
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mktextfm
+.RI [options]
+.I font
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" .
+.PP
+.B mktextfm
+is used to generate a
+.I tfm
+file from the \*(MF source files for
+.IR font ,
+if possible. If
+.I destdir
+is given, the generated file will be installed there, otherwise a
+(rather complicated) heuristic is used.
+.PP
+The name of the generated file is printed on standard output.
+.PP
+.B mktextfm
+is typically called by other programs, rather than from the command
+line.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B mktextfm
+accepts the following options:
+.TP
+.BI --destdir \ dir
+.rb
+A directory name. If the directory is absolute, it is used as-is.
+Otherwise, it is appended to the root destination directory set in the
+script.
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR mktexmf (1),
+.BR mktexpk (1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a837a4fa3c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+.\" -*-nroff-*-
+.ds V 2.34
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.ds E " \-\-
+.if t .ds E \(em
+.de OP
+.BR "\\$1" "\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6"
+..
+.de OA
+.IR "\fB\\$1\& \|\fI\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6"
+..
+.de OY
+.BI "\\$1\fR=" "\\$2\fR, " "\\$3\& " "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6"
+..
+.de OL
+.BI "\\$1\fR=" "\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6"
+..
+.de Sp
+.if n .sp
+.if t .sp 0.4
+..
+.de Es
+.Sp
+.RS 5
+.nf
+..
+.de Ee
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+..
+.TH MMAFM 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+mmafm \- creates AFM font metrics for multiple master fonts
+'
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mmafm
+\%[OPTIONS...]
+.I font
+'
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B Mmafm
+creates AFM font metrics for PostScript multiple master fonts by
+interpolation. You pass it an AMFM file (multiple master font metrics) and
+options specifying the design point you want, and it writes the resulting
+AFM file to the standard output.
+.PP
+Each
+.I font
+argument is either the filename of an AFM or AMFM font metrics file, or a
+PostScript font name. If you give a font name,
+.B mmafm
+will look up the actual font metrics file using the PSRESOURCEPATH
+environment variable. This colon-separated path is searched for `PSres.upr'
+files, an Adobe method for indexing PostScript resources.
+.PP
+You can also give the name of a multiple master font instance, like
+`MinionMM_367_400_12_'.
+.B Mmafm
+will parse the font name and create that instance for you. `PSres.upr'
+files must be set up for this to work.
+.PP
+Any multiple master font should be distributed with a single AMFM file and
+several AFM files (one for each master). For Myriad, for example, the AMFM
+file is MyriadMM.amfm and the AFM files are MyriadMM-LightCn.afm,
+MyriadMM-LightSemiEx.afm, MyriadMM-BlackCn.afm, and
+MyriadMM-BlackSemiEx.afm.
+.B Mmafm
+needs to find all these files to function. For fonts in the Adobe type
+library, you can download the necessary files from
+<http://www.lcdf.org/type>; look for the mm-metrics package.
+.PP
+You must always supply the AMFM file (or its font name) on the command
+line, but
+.B mmafm
+will look for any required AFM files you don't supply yourself. It tries
+the PSRESOURCEPATH environment variable, and also looks for files named
+`\fIFontName\fR.afm' or `\fIFontName\fR.AFM' in the directory that
+contained the AMFM file. (The Myriad filenames given above fit this
+pattern.)
+.PP
+.B Mmafm
+supports fonts with intermediate masters, like Adobe Jenson and Kepler. If
+your PSRESOURCEPATH environment variable is set up, it will handle these
+fonts automatically. Otherwise, you must first run
+.RB ` "mmpfb \-\-amcp\-info" '
+on the font outline files to create auxiliary AMCP files for these fonts.
+Each AMCP file should be in the same directory as its corresponding AMFM
+file and should have the same root filename, but with a `.amcp' extension
+instead of `.amfm'. See
+.M mmpfb 1
+for more information.
+'
+'
+.SH EXAMPLE
+'
+.nf
+% mmafm \-\-weight=400 \-\-width=600 MyriadMM.amfm > MyriadMM_400_600_.afm
+.fi
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+Long options may be abbreviated to their unique prefixes.
+'
+.TP 5
+.OY \-\-output file \-o file
+Send output to
+.I file
+instead of standard output.
+'
+.TP
+.OY \-\-weight N \-w N
+Set the weight axis to
+.IR N .
+'
+.TP
+.OY \-\-width N \-W N
+Set the width axis to
+.IR N .
+'
+.TP
+.OY \-\-optical\-size N \-O N
+Set the optical size axis to
+.IR N .
+'
+.TP
+.OL \-\-style N
+Set the style axis to
+.IR N .
+.TP
+\fB\-\-1\fR=\fIN\fR (\fB\-\-2\fR=\fIN\fR, \fB\-\-3\fR=\fIN\fR, \fB\-\-4\fR=\fIN\fR)
+Set the first (second, third, fourth) axis to
+.IR N .
+'
+.TP
+.OY \-\-precision N \-p N
+Round output numbers so they have at most
+.I N
+digits after the decimal point. Smaller numbers are less precise; `\fB\-p
+\fR0' rounds all numbers to integers. The default precision is 3.
+'
+.TP
+.OY \-\-min\-kern N \-k N
+Only output kerning pairs whose absolute value is
+.IR N
+or larger. Smaller minimum kerns make kerning more precise and the output
+AFM file bigger. The default minimum kern is 2.0.
+'
+.SH TROUBLESHOOTING
+.PP
+Some programs, such as TeX's
+.BR fontinst ,
+can choke on AFM files that include fractional numbers. Therefore, if you
+have trouble with an AFM file, try rerunning
+.B mmafm
+with the
+.OP \-\-precision=0
+option.
+'
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.M mmpfb 1
+'
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.TP 5
+\fIFont\fR requires intermediate master conversion programs
+You haven't yet created an AMCP file for \fIFont\fR.
+'
+.SH AUTHOR
+.na
+Eddie Kohler, kohler@icir.org
+.br
+http://www.pdos.lcs.mit.edu/~eddietwo/
+.PP
+The latest version is available from:
+.br
+http://www.lcdf.org/type/
+.br
+AMFM and AFM files for Adobe Type Library fonts are also available at that
+URL.
+.PP
+Thanks to Melissa O'Neill <oneill@cs.sfu.ca> for suggestions and patient
+debugging.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..23bac8dd967
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.1
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+.\" -*-nroff-*-
+.ds V 2.34
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.ds E " \-\-
+.if t .ds E \(em
+.de OP
+.BR "\\$1" "\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6"
+..
+.de OA
+.IR "\fB\\$1\& \|\fI\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6"
+..
+.de OY
+.BI "\\$1\fR=" "\\$2\fR, " "\\$3\& " "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6"
+..
+.de OL
+.BI "\\$1\fR=" "\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6"
+..
+.de Sp
+.if n .sp
+.if t .sp 0.4
+..
+.TH MMPFB 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+mmpfb \- creates single-master fonts from multiple master fonts
+'
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mmpfb
+\%[OPTIONS...]
+.I font
+'
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B Mmpfb
+creates a normal, single-master PostScript font from a multiple master font
+by interpolation. You pass it a PFB or PFA font and options specifying the
+design point you want; it writes the resulting PFB or PFA font to the
+standard output.
+.PP
+The fonts
+.B mmpfb
+creates are interpolated at a low level to remove multiple master
+instructions from individual characters. Therefore, they can be used by
+programs that don't normally understand multiple master fonts, like
+.BR ps2pk (1).
+.PP
+.B Mmpfb
+supports fonts with intermediate masters, like Adobe Jenson and Kepler. It
+can also create AMCP (Adobe Multiple Master Conversion Program) files for
+use by
+.M mmafm 1 ;
+see
+.B \-\-amcp\-info
+below.
+.PP
+The
+.I font
+argument is either the name of a PFA or PFB font file, or a PostScript font
+name. If you give a font name,
+.B mmpfb
+will find the actual outline file using the PSRESOURCEPATH environment
+variable. This colon-separated path is searched for `PSres.upr' files, an
+Adobe method for indexing PostScript resources.
+.PP
+You can also give the name of a multiple
+master font instance, like `MinionMM_367_400_12_'.
+.B Mmpfb
+will parse the font name and create that instance for you. `PSres.upr'
+files must be set up for this to work.
+'
+'
+.SH EXAMPLE
+'
+.nf
+% mmpfb \-\-weight=400 \-\-width=600 MyriadMM.pfb > MyriadMM_400_600_.pfb
+.fi
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+Long options may be abbreviated to their unique prefixes.
+'
+.TP 5
+.OY \-\-output file \-o file
+'
+Send output to
+.I file
+instead of standard output.
+'
+.TP
+.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b
+'
+Output a PFB font. This is the default.
+'
+.TP
+.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a
+'
+Output a PFA font.
+'
+.TP
+.OP \-\-amcp\-info
+'
+Do not create a font; instead, output an AMCP file for use by
+.M mmafm 1 .
+A message is printed if the font doesn't have intermediate masters, in
+which case no AMCP file is necessary.
+'
+.TP
+.OY \-\-weight N \-w N
+'
+Set the weight axis to
+.IR N .
+'
+.TP
+.OY \-\-width N \-W N
+'
+Set the width axis to
+.IR N .
+'
+.TP
+.OY \-\-optical\-size N \-O N
+'
+Set the optical size axis to
+.IR N .
+'
+.TP
+.OL \-\-style N
+'
+Set the style axis to
+.IR N .
+.TP
+\fB\-\-1\fR=\fIN\fR (\fB\-\-2\fR=\fIN\fR, \fB\-\-3\fR=\fIN\fR, \fB\-\-4\fR=\fIN\fR)
+'
+Set the first (second, third, fourth) axis to
+.IR N .
+'
+.TP
+.OY \-\-precision N \-p N
+'
+Set the output precision to
+.IR N .
+Higher values mean the control points in the output font will be more
+exactly aligned; lower values (1 or 2) create smaller output font
+files, and are close enough for most purposes. A precision of
+.IR N
+means that each point will be within
+.RI 1/ N
+font units of the exact interpolated value. (A font unit is generally
+1/7200 inch for a 10-point font.) The default is 5.
+'
+.TP
+.OL \-\-subrs N
+'
+Limit the output font to at most
+.IR N
+subroutines. 256 is a good value for
+.IR N .
+'
+.TP
+.BR \-\-no\-minimize
+'
+Do not minimize the output font definition. By default,
+.B mmpfb
+removes extra PostScript code and dictionary definitions from the font.
+Supply the
+.B \-\-no\-minimize
+option to avoid this behavior.
+'
+.SH TROUBLESHOOTING
+.LP
+The "IBM" Type 1 font interpreter shipped as part of the X font server and
+.B ps2pk
+(among others) is inappropriately strict about PostScript code embedded in
+a font. The
+.B \-\-minimize
+option (now the default) fixes this problem.
+.LP
+Some versions of Adobe Acrobat Distiller may report "Warning: unable to
+embed font X. Invalid character outline data" when distilling an instance
+generated by
+.BR mmpfb .
+This is due to a limitation in the number of font subroutines Distiller can
+accept. (Multiple master fonts, and the single-master fonts generated by
+.BR mmpfb ,
+tend to have a lot of subroutines.) Try limiting the number of subroutines
+in the generated font with the
+.OP \-\-subrs
+option.
+'
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.M mmafm 1
+'
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+.TP 5
+reducing \fIfont\fR to minimum number of subroutines (\fIN\fR)
+You tried to reduce the number of subroutines to less than \fIN\fR using
+the
+.OP \-\-subrs
+option, but the font needs at least \fIN\fR to function. The output font
+will have \fIN\fR subroutines.
+'
+.SH AUTHOR
+.na
+Eddie Kohler, kohler@icir.org
+.br
+http://www.pdos.lcs.mit.edu/~eddietwo/
+.PP
+The latest version is available from:
+.br
+http://www.lcdf.org/type/
+.PP
+Thanks to Melissa O'Neill <oneill@cs.sfu.ca> for suggestions and patient
+debugging.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b784a64df5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.1
@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
+.TH MPOST 1 "10 November 2001" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if n .ds WB Web
+.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+mpost, inimpost, virmpost \- MetaPost, a system for drawing pictures
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mpost
+.RI [ options ]
+.RI [ commands ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\*(MP interprets the \*(MP language and produces PostScript
+pictures. The \*(MP language is similar to Knuth's \*(MF
+with additional features for including
+.BR tex (1)
+or
+.BR troff (1)
+commands and accessing features of PostScript not found in \*(MF.
+.PP
+Like \*(TX and \*(MF, \*(MP is normally used with a large body of
+precompiled macros. This version of \*(MP looks at its command line
+to see what name it was called under. Both
+.B inimpost
+and
+.B virmpost
+are symlinks to the
+.B mpost
+executable. When called as
+.BR inimpost
+(or when the
+.B -ini
+option is given) it can be used to precompile macros into a
+.I .mem
+file. When called as
+.B virmpost
+it will use the
+.I plain
+mem. When called under any other name, \*(MP will use that name as
+the name of the mem to use. For example, when called as
+.B mpost
+the
+.I mpost
+mem is used, which is identical to the
+.I plain
+mem. Other mems than
+.I plain
+are rarely used.
+.PP
+The
+.I commands
+given on the command line to the \*(MP program are passed to it as the
+first input line. (But it is often easier to type extended arguments
+as the first input line, since UNIX shells tend to gobble up or
+misinterpret \*(MP's favorite symbols, like semicolons, unless you
+quote them.) The first line should begin with a filename, a
+.RI \e controlsequence ,
+or a
+.IR &memname .
+.PP
+The normal usage is to say
+.I mpost figs
+to process the file
+.IR figs.mp .
+The basename of
+.I figs
+becomes the ``jobname'',
+and is used in forming output file names. If no file is named, the
+jobname becomes
+.IR mpout .
+The default extension,
+.IR .mp ,
+can be overridden by specifying an extension explicitly.
+.PP
+There is normally one output file for each picture generated,
+and the output files are named \fIjobname\fP\fB\^.\^\fP\fInnn\fP,
+where \fInnn\fP
+is a number passed to the
+.I beginfig
+macro. The output file name
+can also be \fIjobname\fP\fB\^.\^\fP\fIps\fP
+if this number is negative.
+.PP
+The output files can be used as figures in a \*(TX document by including
+.ce
+.BI "\especial{psfile=" jobname.nnn }
+in the \*(TX document. Alternatively, one can
+.B \einput epsf.tex
+and then use the macro
+.ce
+.BI "\eepsfbox{" jobname.nnn }
+to produce a box of the appropriate size containing the figure.
+.TP
+.BI btex " TeX commands " etex
+This causes
+.I mpost
+to generate a \*(MP picture expression that corresponds to the
+\*(TX commands. If the \*(TX commands generate
+more than one line of text, it must be in a
+.I \evbox
+or a minipage environment.
+.TP
+.BI verbatimtex " TeX commands " etex
+This is ignored by
+.I mpost
+except that the \*(TX commands are passed on to \*(TX. When using \*(LX
+instead of \*(TX the input file must start with a
+.I verbatimtex
+block that gives the
+.I \edocumentstyle
+and
+.I "\ebegin{document}"
+commands. You can use the `%&' construct in the first verbatimtex
+block to ensure that the correct \*(TX format is used to process the
+commands.
+.PP
+Since most \*(TX fonts have to be downloaded as bitmaps, the
+.I btex
+feature works best when the output of
+.I mpost
+is to be included in a \*(TX document so that
+.BR dvips (1)
+can download the fonts. For self-contained PostScript output that can be
+used directly or included in a
+.I troff
+document, start your \*(MP input file with the command
+.I "prologues:=1"
+and stick to standard PostScript fonts. \*(TX and \*(MP use the names in the
+third column of the file
+.IR trfonts.map ,
+which can be found in the directories with support files for \*(MP.
+.PP
+\*(MP output can be included in a
+.I troff
+document via the
+.I "-m pictures"
+macro package. In this case
+.I mpost
+should be invoked with the
+.B -T
+flag so that the commands between
+.I btex
+and
+.I etex
+or between
+.I verbatimtex
+and
+.I etex
+are interpreted as
+.I troff
+instead of \*(TX. (This automatically sets
+.I "prologues:=1"
+).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of \*(MP understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error
+.rb
+Print error messages in the form
+.I file:line:error
+which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
+.TP
+.B -no-file-line-error
+.rb
+Disable printing error messages in the
+.I file:line:error
+style.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error-style
+.rb
+This is the old name of the
+.B -file-line-error
+option.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -ini
+.rb
+Be
+.BR inimpost ,
+for dumping bases; this is implicitly true if the program is called
+as
+.BR inimpost .
+.TP
+.BI -interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+commands.
+.TP
+.BI -jobname \ name
+.rb
+Use
+.I name
+for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
+.TP
+.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI -mem \ mem
+.rb
+Use
+.I mem
+as the name of the mem to be used, instead of the name by which
+\*(MP was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.B -parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name or a
+.B -translate-file
+option.
+.TP
+.B -no-parse-first-line
+.rb
+Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file.
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B -recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened
+for input and output in a file with extension
+.IR .fls .
+.TP
+.B -T
+.rb
+Produce TROFF output.
+.TP
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Use the
+.I tcxname
+translation table.
+.TP
+.B -troff
+.rb
+As
+.BR -T .
+.TP
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for the details of how the environment variables are use when
+searching. The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+If the environment variable
+TEXMFOUTPUT is set, \*(MP attempts to put its output
+files in it, if they cannot be put in the current directory.
+.PP
+Here is a list of the environment variables affect the behavior of
+.IR mpost :
+.TP
+.TP
+MPINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I input
+files.
+.TP
+MFINPUTS
+Auxiliary search path for
+.I input
+files with
+.I .mf
+extensions.
+.TP
+MPSUPPORT
+Directory for various tables for handling included
+.I tex
+and
+.IR troff .
+.TP
+MPXCOMMAND
+The name of a shell script that converts embedded typesetting commands
+to a form that \*(MP understands. Defaults:
+.I makempx
+for
+.I tex
+and
+.I troffmpx
+for
+.IR troff .
+.TP
+TEX
+The version of \*(TX \- or \*(LX \- to use when processing
+.I btex
+and
+.I verbatimtex
+commands. Default
+.IR tex .
+This version of \*(MP allows you to use a `%&format' line instead.
+.TP
+TROFF
+The
+.I troff
+pipeline for
+.I btex
+and
+.I verbatimtex
+commands. Default
+.I eqn -d\e$\e$ | troff
+.TP
+MPEDIT
+A command template for invoking an editor.
+.PP
+A
+.I .mem
+file is a binary file that permits fast loading of macro packages.
+.I mpost
+reads the default
+.I plain.mem
+unless another
+.I .mem
+file is specified at the start of the first line with an
+.I &
+just before it. There is also an
+.I mfplain.mem
+that simulates plain \*(MF so that
+.I mpost
+can read
+.I .mf
+fonts. (Plain \*(MF is described in
+.IR "The \*(MF\^book" ).
+.PP
+Experts can create
+.I .mem
+files be invoking
+.I inimpost
+and giving macro definitions followed by a
+.I dump
+command.
+.PP
+The \*(MP language is similar to \*(MF, but the manual
+.I A User's Manual for \*(MP
+assumes no knowledge of \*(MF. \*(MP does not have bitmap
+output commands or \*(MF's online display mechanism.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.I mpost.pool
+Encoded text of \*(MP's messages.
+.TP
+.I *.mem
+Predigested \*(MP mem files.
+.TP
+.I plain.mp
+The standard mem file.
+.TP
+.I mfplain.mp
+The \*(MF-compatible mem file. This is loaded when
+.I virmp
+is invoked via a symbolic link as
+.IR mfmp .
+.TP
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/metapost/base/*.mp
+The standard \*(MP macros included in the original distribution.
+.TP
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/metapost/support/*
+Various tables for handling included
+.I tex
+and
+.IR troff .
+.TP
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/metapost/support/trfonts.map
+Table of corresponding font names for
+.I troff
+and PostScript.
+.TP
+.I psfonts.map
+Table of corresponding font names for
+.I tex
+and PostScript.
+.TP
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/doc/metapost/examples.mp
+The source file for a few sample figures
+that are part of a \*(LX document
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/doc/metapost/mpintro.tex
+that describes the \*(MP system
+in a little more detail.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NOTES
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(MP can be found in the info manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SUGGESTED READING"
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.I "The \*(MF\^book"
+(Volume C of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4.
+.br
+John D. Hobby,
+.IR "A User's Manual for \*(MP" ,
+CSTR 162, AT&T Bell Labs,
+.br
+John D. Hobby,
+.IR "Drawing Graphs with \*(MP" ,
+CSTR 164, AT&T Bell Labs,
+.br
+.I TUGboat
+(the journal of the \*(TX Users Group).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1),
+.BR dvips (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+\*(MP was designed by John D. Hobby, incorporating algorithms from
+\*(MF by Donald E. Knuth. It was originally implemented on Unix,
+incorporating system-dependent routines from
+.BR web2c ,
+while not relying on it except for the actual \*(WB-to-C translator.
+.PP
+Ulrik Vieth adapted \*(MP to take advantage of the advanced path
+searching features in more recent versions of
+.B web2c
+and worked towards fully integrating \*(MP into the canonical Unix
+\*(TX distribution. He also updated and extended this manual page.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH TRIVIA
+Unlike \*(TX and \*(MF, \*(MP originally didn't use any fancy logo.
+John Hobby says he prefers the spelling ``MetaPost'', yet Don Knuth
+has updated the \*(MF
+.I logo.mf
+font to be able to typeset a proper \*(MP logo similar to the \*(MF
+logo. Feel free to use whatever you think is more appropriate!
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpto.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpto.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8c7e5fe58fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpto.1
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+.TH MPTO 1 "4 January 1998" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MP MetaPost
+.if t .ds MP MetaPost
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+mpto \- extract labels in MetaPost pictures for typesetting
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B mpto
+.RI [ -tex | -troff ]
+.I mpfile
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+Strip
+.I btex..etex
+and
+.I verbatimtex...etex
+parts from \*(MP input file
+.IR mpfile ,
+converting to either \*(TX or Troff (\*(TX by default). The generated
+code is dumped on standard output.
+.PP
+.B mpto
+is typically called by
+.BR makempx ,
+not from the command line.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B mpto
+accepts the following options:
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -tex
+.rb
+Assume input file contains \*(TX commands.
+.TP
+.B -troff
+.rb
+Assume input file contains Troff commands.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR mpost (1),
+.BR makempx (1).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/newer.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/newer.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0a5b1c2f375
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/newer.1
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+.TH NEWER 1 "21 June 2005" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+newer \- compare file modification times
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B newer
+.RI [ option ]
+.I src1
+[
+.I src2 ... srcN
+]
+.I target
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Exit successfully if files
+.I src1 ... srcN
+exist and at least one of them is not older than
+.IR target .
+Also exit successfully if
+.I target
+doesn't exist.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+.B newer
+accepts the following options:
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --quiet, -q
+.rb
+Do not print any output, including error messages.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.TP
+.B --verbose, -v
+.rb
+List missing source files. This is the default.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..84bac04a557
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+dvicopy.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvips.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvips.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..bb895a1c4e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvips.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+dvips.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..d077e7784b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+dvitype.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..adc4de3ec3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.1
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+.TH "ofm2opl" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+ofm2opl \- convert Omega and TeX font-metric files to
+property-list files
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBofm2opl\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIOFMNAME\fP[\&.ofm] [
+\fIOPLFILE\fP[\&.opl] ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBofm2opl\fP translates a binary Omega Font Metrics file,
+\fIOFMNAME\fP, into a human-readable property-list form\&. The
+program writes to standard output (by default) or to a file specified
+as \fIOPLFILE\fP\&.
+.PP
+The program also works with TeX TFM files, producing TeX PL files\&.
+(\fBofm2opl\fP is based on the WEB source code for \fBtftopl\fP(1)\&.)
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP
+.IP "\fB-charcode-format=\fP\fITYPE\fP"
+output character codes
+according to \fITYPE\fP,
+which can be either `hex\&'
+or `ascii\&'\&. Default is
+`hex\&'\&. ascii specifes all
+ASCII letters and digits;
+hex gets you everything
+else\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB-help\fP"
+display a brief summary of syntax and options
+.IP "\fB-verbose\fP"
+display progress reports
+.IP "\fB-version\fP"
+output version information and exit
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+.IP "\fIOFMNAME\fP"
+an Omega Font Metric file
+.IP "\fIOPLFILE\fP"
+an Omega Property List file
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. You may also want to
+check to see if the same bug is present in \fBpltotf\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBomega\fP(1), \fBopl2ofm\fP(1), \fBpltotf\fP(1),
+\fBtftopl\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/>
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+According to the WEB documentation:
+.PP
+.RS
+The first \fBTFtoPL\fP program was designed by Leo Guibas in the
+summer of 1978\&. Contributions by Frank Liang, Doug Wyatt, and Lyle
+Ramshaw also had a significant effect on the evolution of the present
+code\&.
+.PP
+Extensions for an enhanced ligature mechanism were added by D\&.E\&. Knuth
+in 1989\&.
+.PP
+Extensions to handle extended font metric files (``OFM\&'\&') were added
+by John Plaice in December 1995 and January 1996, resulting in the new
+program \fBOFM2OPL\fP\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice
+<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous
+<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/omega.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/omega.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..29d0bbb1c10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/omega.1
@@ -0,0 +1,292 @@
+.TH OMEGA 1 "27 December 1997" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+omega, iniomega, viromega \- extended unicode TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B omega
+.RI [ options ]
+[\fB&\fR \fIformat\fR ]
+[ \fIfile\fR | \fB\e\fR \fIcommands\fR ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Run the Omega typesetter on
+.IR file ,
+usually creating
+.IR file.dvi .
+If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it.
+Instead of a filename, a set of Omega commands can be given, the first
+of which must start with a backslash.
+With a
+.BI & format
+argument Omega uses a different set of precompiled commands,
+contained in
+.IR format.fmt ;
+it is usually better to use the
+.B -fmt
+.I format
+option instead.
+.PP
+Omega is a version of the \*(TX program modified for multilingual
+typesetting. It uses unicode, and has additional primitives for
+(among other things) bidirectional typesetting.
+.PP
+The
+.B iniomega
+and
+.B viromega
+commands are Omega's analogues to the
+.B initex
+and
+.B virtex
+commands. In this installation, they are symlinks to the
+.B omega
+executable.
+.PP
+Omega's command line options are similar to those of \*(TX.
+.PP
+Omega is experimental software.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of Omega understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.BI --oft \ format
+.rb
+Use
+.I format
+as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
+Omega was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B --ini
+.rb
+Be
+.BR iniomega ,
+for dumping formats; this is implicitly true if the program is called
+as
+.BR iniomega .
+.TP
+.BI --interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+\ecommands.
+.TP
+.B --ipc
+.rb
+Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether
+this option is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.B --ipc-start
+.rb
+As
+.BR --ipc ,
+and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
+is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.BI --kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI --maketex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be one of
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI --no-maketex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be one of
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI --output-comment \ string
+.rb
+Use
+.I string
+for the DVI file comment instead of the date.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.B --parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name.
+.TP
+.BI --progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B --recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened
+for input and output in a file with extension
+.IR .ofl .
+(This option is always on.)
+.TP
+.B --shell-escape
+.rb
+Enable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct. The
+.I command
+can be any Bourne shell command. This construct is normally
+disallowed for security reasons.
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
+The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+One caveat: In most Omega formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
+give directly to Omega, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
+expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
+\*(MF, do not have this problem.
+.PP
+.TP
+TEXMFOUTPUT
+Normally, Omega puts its output files in the current directory. If
+any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
+directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
+There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+.I tex paper
+and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
+the value
+.IR /tmp ,
+Omega attempts to create
+.I /tmp/paper.log
+(and
+.IR /tmp/paper.dvi ,
+if any output is produced.)
+.TP
+TEXINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I \einput
+and
+.I \eopenin
+files.
+This should probably start with ``.'', so
+that user files are found before system files. An empty path
+component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
+current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
+.TP
+TEXEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+.BR vi ,
+is set when Omega is compiled.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I omega.pool
+Encoded text of Omega's messages.
+.TP
+.I *.oft
+Predigested Omega format (.\|oft) files.
+.br
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NOTES
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of Omega can be found in the info
+manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+This version of Omega implements a number of optional extensions.
+In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
+extent with the definition of Omega. When such extensions are
+enabled, the banner printed when Omega starts is changed to print
+.B Omegak
+instead of
+.BR Omega .
+.PP
+This version of Omega fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
+dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
+but when it does the generated
+.I DVI
+file will be invalid.
+.PP
+The
+.I DVI
+files produced by Omega may use extensions which make them incompatible
+with most software designed to handle
+.I DVI
+files. In order to print or preview them, you should use
+.B odvips
+to generate a PostScript file.
+.PP
+Omega is experimental software, and if you are an active user it is
+strongly recommended that you subscribe to the Omega mailing list.
+Visit the Omega website
+.B http://omega.cse.unsw.edu.au
+for information on how to subscribe.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1),
+.RB odvips (1),
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice and Yannis Haralambous.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..425ff8e0adc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+.TH "opl2ofm" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+opl2ofm \- convert Omega and TeX property-list files to
+font-metric files
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBopl2ofm\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIOPLFILE\fP[\&.opl] [
+\fIOFMFILE\fP[\&.ofm] ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBopl2ofm\fP translates a property-list format file, \fIOPLFILE\fP,
+into the binary Omega Font Metric format\&. The program writes to
+standard output (by default) or to a file specified as
+\fIOFMFILE\fP\&.
+.PP
+The program also works with TeX PL files, producing TeX TFM files\&.
+(\fBopl2ofm\fP is based on the WEB source code for \fBpltotf\fP(1)\&.)
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP
+.IP "\fB-help\fP"
+display a brief summary of syntax and options
+.IP "\fB-verbose\fP"
+display progress reports
+.IP "\fB-version\fP"
+output version information and exit
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. You should also
+check to see if the bug is present in \fBpltotf\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBomega\fP(1), \fBofm2opl\fP(1), \fBpltotf\fP(1),
+\fBtftopl\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/>
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+According to the WEB documentation:
+.PP
+.RS
+The first \fBPLtoTF\fP program was designed by Leo Guibas in the
+summer of 1978\&. Contributions by Frank Liang, Doug Wyatt, and Lyle
+Ramshaw also had a significant effect on the evolution of the present
+code\&.
+.PP
+Extensions for an enhanced ligature mechanism were added by D\&.E\&. Knuth
+in 1989\&.
+.PP
+Extensions to handle extended font metric files (``OFM\&'\&') were added
+by John Plaice in December 1995 and January 1996, resulting in the new
+program \fBOPL2OFM\fP\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice
+<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous
+<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e0bbcd10886
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.1
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+'\"t
+.ds V 2.34
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.de Sp
+.if n .sp
+.if t .sp 0.4
+..
+.TH OTFINFO 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+otfinfo \- report information about OpenType fonts
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B otfinfo
+\%[\fB-sfzpg\fR]
+\%[\fIFILE...\fR]
+'
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.BR Otfinfo
+reports information about the named OpenType font
+.IR FILE s
+(or standard input, if no
+.IR FILE s
+are given). Results are printed to standard output. Each line is prefaced
+with the relevant
+.I FILE
+if more than one
+.I FILE
+was supplied.
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+With long options, you need type only as many characters as will make the
+option unique.
+.SS Query options
+.PD 0
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BR \-s ", " \-\-scripts
+Print supported scripts and language systems. The scripts are printed one
+per line, with human-readable descriptions; for example:
+.nf
+ cyrl Cyrillic
+ grek Greek
+ latn Latin
+ latn.TUR Latin/Turkish
+.fi
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-f ", " \-\-features
+Print GSUB and GPOS features supported by the selected script (see the
+.B \-\-script
+option below). The scripts are printed one per line, with human-readable
+descriptions; for example:
+.nf
+ aalt Access All Alternates
+ c2sc Small Capitals From Capitals
+ case Case-Sensitive Forms
+ cpsp Capital Spacing
+ \&...
+ zero Slashed Zero
+.fi
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-z ", " \-\-optical\-size
+Print optical size information. For example:
+.nf
+ design size 11 pt, size range (8.4 pt, 13 pt], subfamily ID 11, subfamily name Semibold Italic
+.fi
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-p ", " \-\-postscript\-name
+Print each font's PostScript name. For example:
+.nf
+ MinionPro-SemiboldItCapt
+.fi
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-g ", " \-\-glyphs
+Print the name of every glyph in each font, one per line. For example:
+.nf
+ \&.notdef
+ space
+ exclam
+ \&...
+ ncommaaccent.end
+ lje.alt
+.fi
+Works for PostScript-flavored OpenType fonts only.
+'
+.PD
+'
+'
+.SS Miscellaneous options
+'
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-script= "script\fR[.\fIlang\fR]"
+Select the script system
+.I script
+and language system
+.IR lang
+used to look up features by
+.BR \-\-features .
+Examples include "latn" (Latin script), "grek" (Greek script), and "yi.YIC"
+(Yi script with classic characters). If
+.I lang
+is not specified, otfinfo will use the default language system for that
+script. Defaults to "latn".
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-V ", " \-\-verbose
+Write progress messages to standard error.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet
+Do not generate any error messages.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-h ", " \-\-help
+Print usage information and exit.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-version
+Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit.
+.PD
+'
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M otftotfm 1
+.LP
+.IR "OpenType Specification" ,
+Version 1.4
+'
+.SH AUTHOR
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a5450d3e290
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,1473 @@
+'\"t
+.ds V 2.34
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.de Sp
+.if n .sp
+.if t .sp 0.4
+..
+.de BUP
+.IP \(bu 3n
+..
+.TH OTFTOTFM 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+otftotfm \- create TeX font metrics from PostScript OpenType fonts
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B otftotfm
+\%[\fB\-a\fR]
+\%[\fBoptions\fR]
+\%\fIfontfile\fR.otf [\fItexname\fR]
+'
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.BR Otftotfm
+creates the font metric and encoding files required to use an OpenType font
+with TeX. You supply an OpenType ".otf" font file, a base ".enc" encoding,
+and a TeX name "\fItexname\fR" for the resulting font, and say which
+OpenType features should be turned on. Then
+.B otftotfm
+generates and installs the corresponding TeX-related metric files
+(".tfm" TeX font metrics, ".vf" virtual fonts, and ".enc"
+encoding files). It only works on PostScript-flavored OpenType fonts.
+.LP
+The easiest way to use
+.B otftotfm
+is with the
+.B \-a
+option; see Automatic Mode below. Without
+.BR \-a ,
+.B otftotfm
+writes all its output files to the current directory.
+.LP
+After running "\fBotftotfm\fR \fIfontfile\fR.otf \fItexname\fR" and
+installing the results (manually or with
+.BR \-a ),
+you can use the OpenType font in plain TeX with a command like this:
+.Sp
+.nf
+ \efont\emyfont=\fItexname\fR at 10pt
+ {\emyfont This text uses the OpenType font.}
+.fi
+.Sp
+LaTeX users will generally make a ".fd" input file so that commands like
+"\erenewcommand{\ermdefault}{TeXName}" work correctly. See the EXAMPLE
+section for more; check the DIAGNOSTICS and FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
+sections if you have trouble.
+'
+.SS "OpenType Features"
+.LP
+OpenType fonts support optional
+.I features
+that change their appearance. Use the
+.B \-f
+option to turn on selected features. For example, "\fB\-f\fRsmcp" replaces
+lower-case letters with the corresponding small capitals, in fonts that
+support this.
+'
+.PP
+You'll generally provide at least the "\fB\-f\fRkern" and "\fB\-f\fRliga"
+options, which activate pair kerns and f-ligatures. Other interesting
+features include "\fB\-f\fRcpsp", for capital spacing; "\fB\-f\fRdlig", for
+optional ligatures; "\fB\-f\fRlnum", "\fB\-f\fRonum", "\fB\-f\fRpnum", and
+"\fB\-f\fRtnum", to control digit glyphs; "\fB\-f\fRsmcp", for small
+capitals; "\fB\-f\fRswsh", for swash variants; and "\fB\-f\fRcswh", for
+contextual swash. See the FEATURE DIRECTORY section below for more. The
+.M otfinfo 1
+program will report which features a font supports; run "\fBotfinfo\fR
+\fB\-f\fR \fIfontfile\fR.otf".
+'
+.PP
+Feature options can also apply a feature to a subset of characters in the
+font. For example, "\fB\-\-lf\fR smcp"
+.I only
+replaces letters with small capitals, whereas "\fB\-f\fRsmcp" might
+additionally replace digits and punctuation marks with small-capital
+versions.
+'
+.SS Automatic Mode
+.PP
+Automatic mode, triggered by the
+.BR \-a / \-\-automatic
+option, installs font metrics and encoding files where TeX can find them,
+and additionally installs a Type 1 font and mapping for
+.M dvips 1 .
+This requires a TeX installation that follows the TeX Directory Structure
+standard (http://www.tug.org/tds/), such as most Unix TeX installations.
+'
+.PP
+Automatic mode should run seamlessly out of the box.
+.B Otftotfm
+will install metrics files, encodings, map files, and Type\~1 fonts into
+.I $HOME/.texmf-var
+or any other writable TEXMF directory, and run
+.M updmap 1
+to update the global lists of installed fonts. (On older teTeX
+installations, you may first need to copy the system's
+.I updmap.cfg
+file to
+.I $HOME/texmf/web2c
+and run
+.M mktexlsr 1 .)
+You can then run "\fBotftotfm\fR
+.B \-a
+.IR file .otf
+.IR texname \&"
+and immediately refer to the font in TeX using the
+.I texname
+you supplied. Again, you will have to write ".fd" files and/or typescripts
+to make the font conveniently accessible from LaTeX or ConTeXt. See the
+DIAGNOSTICS section if you have problems with these instructions.
+'
+.PP
+In automatic mode,
+.B otftotfm
+searches your $TEXMFVAR or $TEXMF path for a writable directory, then
+installs files under that directory tree as follows:
+'
+.TS
+l l l .
+\fBFile type\fR \fBDirectory\fR \fBFilename\fR
+TFM TEXMF/fonts/tfm/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fItexname\fR[--base].tfm
+VF TEXMF/fonts/vf/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fItexname\fR.vf
+PL TEXMF/fonts/pl/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fItexname\fR[--base].pl
+VPL TEXMF/fonts/vpl/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fItexname\fR.vpl
+encoding TEXMF/fonts/enc/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/ a_\fIsignature\fR.enc
+ or TEXMF/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/
+PFB font TEXMF/fonts/type1/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fIPStexname\fR.pfb
+font map TEXMF/fonts/map/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/ \fIvendor\fR.map
+ or TEXMF/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/
+.TE
+.PP
+"TEXMF" stands for the writable TEXMF directory. \fITexname\fR is the
+font name supplied as
+.BR otftotfm 's
+second argument, and \fIPStexname\fR is the PostScript name of the input
+font. The \fIvendor\fR and \fItypeface\fR strings are required by TDS;
+they default to "lcdftools" and the font's family name, respectively, but
+see the
+.B \-\-vendor
+and
+.B \-\-typeface
+options. \fISignature\fR is an opaque 6-character encoding signature.
+.PP
+You can override these directories with environment variables and options
+as follows. Options take precedence over environment variables.
+'
+.TS
+l l l .
+\fBFile type\fR \fBEnvironment variable\fR \fBOption\fR
+TFM TFMDESTDIR \-\-tfm\-directory
+VF VFDESTDIR \-\-vf\-directory
+PL PLDESTDIR \-\-pl\-directory
+VPL VPLDESTDIR \-\-vpl\-directory
+encoding ENCODINGDESTDIR \-\-encoding\-directory
+PFB font T1DESTDIR \-\-type1\-directory
+font map \- \-\-map\-file
+.TE
+.PP
+.B Otftotfm
+will update the
+.I TEXMF/ls-R
+file when installing files under TEXMF. It will also run the
+.M updmap 1
+program after changing a map file, unless the
+.B \-\-no\-updmap
+option was supplied. However, if an executable file called
+.IR TEXMF/dvips/updmap
+exists, this file is executed (from the
+.I TEXMF/dvips
+directory) rather than the global
+.BR updmap .
+This is so you can write a fast, customized version of
+.B updmap
+if desired.
+'
+.SH EXAMPLE
+This section uses MinionPro to show one way to install OpenType fonts for
+LaTeX. We begin with six fonts: "MinionPro-Regular.otf",
+"MinionPro-It.otf", "MinionPro-Semibold.otf", "MinionPro-SemiboldIt.otf",
+"MinionPro-Bold.otf", and "MinionPro-BoldIt.otf".
+.PP
+Our first task is to decide how to encode the fonts. The "encoding scheme"
+is used by TeX to decide how to typeset accents and symbols like "$". The
+"LY1" encoding scheme is a good choice for many OpenType fonts; it
+corresponds to the "texnansx.enc" encoding file, so we will supply
+.B otftotfm
+with the "\fB\-e\fR texnansx" option.
+.PP
+Next, we decide on a naming scheme for the font metric files. Let's use
+the OpenType font names as a base. (There's generally no need to follow
+the six-character "Karl Berry" naming scheme.) Just in case we come back
+later and add a different encoding scheme, we'll prepend "LY1--" to each
+name.
+.PP
+We're now ready to run
+.B otftotfm
+for the first set of fonts. Note the "\fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga"
+options, which access pair kerns and the default "f" ligatures.
+.Sp
+.nf
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro-Regular.otf \e
+ \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1--MinionPro-Regular
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro-It.otf \e
+ \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1--MinionPro-It
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro-Semibold.otf \e
+ \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1--MinionPro-Semibold
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro-SemiboldIt.otf \e
+ \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1--MinionPro-SemiboldIt
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro-Bold.otf \e
+ \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1--MinionPro-Bold
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro-BoldIt.otf \e
+ \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1--MinionPro-BoldIt
+.fi
+.Sp
+The small-caps fonts are generated with an additional "\fB\-f\fRsmcp"
+option. We append "--fsmcp" to the font metric names as well,
+differentiating them from the regular fonts. Although MinionPro's italic
+fonts support small-caps, the LaTeX font selection scheme can't access them
+easily, so we've left them off.
+.Sp
+.nf
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro-Regular.otf \e
+ \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga \fB\-f\fRsmcp LY1--MinionPro-Regular--fsmcp
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro-Semibold.otf \e
+ \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga \fB\-f\fRsmcp LY1--MinionPro-Semibold--fsmcp
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro-Bold.otf \e
+ \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga \fB\-f\fRsmcp LY1--MinionPro-Bold--fsmcp
+.fi
+.Sp
+To get old-style numerals, just add the "\fB\-f\fRonum" option to each
+invocation -- and, to reduce confusion, append "--fonum" to the font metric
+names.
+.PP
+At this point, all our font metric files are installed, and it's finally
+time to create the ".fd" file. (The ".fd" format is documented in
+.IR "The LaTeX Companion" .)
+Let's call the LaTeX font family "MinionPro". Then the ".fd" file is
+"LY1MinionPro.fd", and it contains:
+.Sp
+.nf
+ \eDeclareFontFamily{LY1}{MinionPro}{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{m}{n}%
+ { <\-> LY1--MinionPro-Regular }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{m}{it}{ <\-> LY1--MinionPro-It }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{m}{sc}%
+ { <\-> LY1--MinionPro-Regular--fsmcp }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{sb}{n}%
+ { <\-> LY1--MinionPro-Semibold }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{sb}{it}%
+ { <\-> LY1--MinionPro-SemiboldIt }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{sb}{sc}%
+ { <\-> LY1--MinionPro-Semibold--fsmcp }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{b}{n}{ <\-> LY1--MinionPro-Bold }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{b}{it}%
+ { <\-> LY1--MinionPro-BoldIt }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{b}{sc}%
+ { <\-> LY1--MinionPro-Bold--fsmcp }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{bx}{n}%
+ { <\-> ssub * MinionPro/b/n }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{bx}{it}%
+ { <\-> ssub * MinionPro/b/it }{}
+ \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{bx}{sc}%
+ { <\-> ssub * MinionPro/b/sc }{}
+.fi
+.PP
+We're now ready to use MinionPro in LaTeX, with lines like this in the
+document preamble:
+.Sp
+.nf
+ \eusepackage[LY1]{fontenc}
+ \erenewcommand{\ermdefault}{MinionPro}
+ \erenewcommand{\ebfdefault}{b}
+.fi
+.PP
+Of course, we're free at any time to add more MinionPro variants with
+.BR otftotfm ;
+they'll become accessible to LaTeX as soon as we edit the "MinionPro.fd"
+file.
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+With long options, you need type only as many characters as will make the
+option unique.
+.SS Font Feature and Transformation Options
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BI \-s " script\fR[.\fIlang\fR], " \-\-script= "script\fR[.\fIlang\fR]"
+Apply features suitable to the script system
+.I script
+and language system
+.IR lang .
+Scripts and language systems are two-to-four-letter names assigned by
+Microsoft and Adobe. Examples include "latn" (Latin script), "grek" (Greek
+script), and "yi.YIC" (Yi script with classic characters). If
+.I lang
+is not specified,
+.B otftotfm
+will use the default language system for that
+script. You can give this option multiple times. Run "\fBotfinfo\fR
+\-s \fIfont\fR" to see the list of scripts and languages a
+font supports. Defaults to "latn".
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-f " feature\fR, " \-\-feature= "feature"
+Activate the feature named
+.IR feature .
+Features are four-letter names assigned by Microsoft and Adobe; they are
+meant to correspond to font behaviors, such as kerning or small-capitals.
+Examples include "liga" (default ligatures), "dlig" (discretionary
+ligatures), "kern" (kerning), and "c2sc" (replacing capitals with small
+capitals). Give this option multiple times to apply multiple features. Run
+"\fBotfinfo\fR \-f [\-\-script option] \fIfont\fR" to see the list
+of features a font supports for a specified script.
+Defaults to any features required by the selected scripts.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-lf " feature\fR, " \-\-letter\-feature= "feature"
+Activate the feature named
+.IR feature ,
+but only for letters. For instance, the "\-f smcp" option will apply the
+small-caps feature to all characters in the encoding; this may result in
+changes to punctuation and numbers as well as letters. The "\-\-lf smcp"
+option will apply the small-caps feature only to letters, meaning
+characters with the "Letter" Unicode property.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-subs\-filter " pattern"
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-include\-subs " pattern"
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-exclude\-subs " pattern"
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-clear\-subs
+Limit the characters that
+.B otftotfm
+will substitute. Substitution is allowed on an input character if it
+matches at least one of the
+.B \-\-include
+patterns, and none of the
+.B \-\-exclude
+patterns. Each pattern applies to all following features, except that the
+.B \-\-clear
+option clears any accumulated patterns. The
+.BI \-\-subs\-filter " pattern"
+option acts like
+.B \-\-clear\-subs
+followed by
+.BI \-\-include\-subs " pattern\fR. "
+For pattern syntax, see CHARACTER PATTERNS, below.
+.Sp
+In the command line below, the '<Number>' pattern will force the "onum"
+feature to substitute only numbers (and not, for example, punctuation).
+The "salt" feature can still substitute any character.
+.nf
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-f\fRsalt \fB\-\-include\-subs\fR='<Number>' \fB\-f\fRonum \.\.\.
+.fi
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-E " fac\fR, " \-\-extend= fac
+Widen, or extend, the font by a factor of
+.IR fac .
+Like
+.M afm2tfm 1 's
+.B \-e
+option.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-S " amt\fR, " \-\-slant= amt
+Oblique, or slant, the font by
+.IR amt .
+Like
+.M afm2tfm 1 's
+.B \-s
+option.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-L " amt\fR, " \-\-letterspacing= amt
+Letterspace each character by
+.IR amt
+units, where 1000 units equals one em. The width of each character
+increases by
+.IR amt ,
+with half the space distributed to each sidebearing. Boundary-character
+kerns are added to maintain alignment at the ends of lines.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-math\-spacing "[=\fIskewchar\fR]"
+Ignore the font's claimed character widths, deriving horizontal metrics
+from bounding boxes instead. This results in similar spacing as the
+Computer Modern Math Italic font, with increased sidebearings for letters
+like f and j.
+.Sp
+If you provide
+.IR skewchar ,
+a number between 0 and 255 or a single character, then
+.B otftotfm
+adds heuristically-derived kerns to the font that may improve accent
+positions in math mode. To get the benefits, you must tell TeX about the
+.I skewchar
+with a command like "\eskewchar\efont=\fIskewchar\fR".
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI "\-k " "N\fR, " \-\-min\-kern= N
+Only output kerning pairs whose absolute value is
+.IR N
+or larger. Larger minimum kerns make kerning less precise, but shrink the
+output TFM file. The default minimum kern is 2.0, or 0.002 em.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-space\-factor= fac
+Scale the width of the inter-word space by a factor of
+.IR fac .
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-design\-size= size
+Set the output font's design size to
+.IR size ,
+a value in TeX points. This value is mostly just documentation, since LaTeX
+essentially ignores fonts' design sizes, but plain TeX may occasionally use
+the design size to decide how large a font should be. (Loading a font in
+TeX "at" a particular size effectively ignores the design size; loading a
+font plain or "scaled" by a given factor uses the design size.) The default
+is taken from the input font's optical size feature, or 10pt if it has no
+such feature.
+.PD
+'
+'
+.SS Encoding Options
+'
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BI \-e " encoding\fR, " \-\-encoding= encoding
+Select the output metrics's base
+.M dvips 1
+encoding.
+.B Otftotfm
+will search for
+.IR encoding [.enc]
+the same way that
+.B dvips
+would, so you may not need to give a full pathname. Say
+.B \-e \-
+to start with the font's default encoding.
+See ENCODINGS, below,
+for more information.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-literal\-encoding= encoding
+Select the
+.M dvips 1
+encoding used for the font. No glyph substitutions will be permitted, so
+the output encoding will equal the input encoding (and
+.B otftotfm
+will not generate an output encoding).
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-ligkern= command
+Execute the specified LIGKERN
+.IR command
+in addition to any in the encoding. For example, "\fB\-\-ligkern\fR 'T {L}
+h'" suppresses any T_h ligature in the font. You can supply multiple
+.B \-\-ligkern
+options. See ENCODINGS, below.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-position= command
+Execute the specified POSITION
+.IR command
+in addition to any in the encoding. For example, "\fB\-\-position\fR 'T 10
+0 20'" adds ten units of space to either side of the "T" character. You
+can supply multiple
+.B \-\-position
+options. See ENCODINGS, below.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-unicoding= command
+Execute the specified UNICODING
+.IR command
+in addition to any in the encoding. For example, "\fB\-\-unicoding\fR 'pi1
+=: uni03D6'" tells
+.B otftotfm
+to encode "/pi1" as U+03D6 GREEK PI SYMBOL. You can supply multiple
+.B \-\-unicoding
+options. See ENCODINGS, below.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-no\-encoding\-commands
+Ignore any LIGKERN and/or UNICODING commands in the encoding file.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-no\-default\-ligkern
+Don't include
+.BR otftotfm 's
+default LIGKERN commands.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-coding\-scheme= scheme
+Set the font's TFM coding scheme to
+.IR scheme ,
+which must be a string less than 40 characters long containing no
+parentheses. The default is the encoding's PostScript name. Most tools
+ignore the coding scheme, so you probably don't need to worry about this
+command unless you are using fontinst.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-boundary\-char= char
+Set the font's boundary character to
+.IR char ,
+which should either be a single non-digit character, or a number between \-1
+and 255. The default is taken from the encoding.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-altselector\-char= char
+Set the font's alternate-selector character to
+.IR char ,
+which should either be a single non-digit character, or a number between \-1
+and 255. Use an alternate selector if you want to choose between different
+versions of a character from within a TeX file. For instance, say that your
+font provides three versions of "A". If you want to access them all, pick a
+character to be your alternate selector -- say "*". Then give
+.B otftotfm
+the
+.BR \-\-altselector\-char= '*'
+option. In TeX, "A" will produce the normal version, "A*" will produce the
+first alternate, and "A**" will produce the second alternate. Furthermore,
+"s*t" will activate any discretionary "s_t" ligature in the font. The
+default alternate-selector character is taken from the encoding.
+.Sp
+The
+.B \-\-altselector\-char
+mechanism uses the features specified by
+.BR \-\-altselector\-feature
+options. You don't need to turn on those features if you use
+.BR \-\-altselector .
+.Sp
+See Sivan Toledo's article cited in the SEE ALSO section for more
+information.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-altselector\-feature= feature
+Activate the feature named
+.I feature
+for the
+.B \-\-altselector\-char
+mechanism. Give this option multiple times to activate multiple
+features. This option activates features only for use with
+.BR \-\-altselector\-char ;
+use the
+.B \-\-feature
+option to activate features globally. Defaults to the
+.I salt
+and
+.I dlig
+features.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-alternates\-filter= pattern
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-include\-alternates= pattern
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-exclude\-alternates= pattern
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-clear\-alternates
+Limit the alternate characters that
+.B otftotfm
+will select. An alternate is used if it matches at least one of the
+.B \-\-include
+patterns, and none of the
+.B \-\-exclude
+patterns. Each pattern applies to all following features, except that the
+.B \-\-clear
+option clears any accumulated patterns. The
+.BI \-\-alternates\-filter " pattern"
+option acts like
+.B \-\-clear\-alternates
+followed by
+.BI \-\-include\-alternates " pattern\fR. "
+For pattern syntax, see CHARACTER PATTERNS, below.
+.Sp
+OpenType fonts can have many alternates per character, most of which aren't
+interesting. For example, the character "a" in WarnockPro-Regular has five
+alternates, "ordfeminine", "Asmall", "asuperior", "a.end", and
+"orn.013". The
+.B \-\-altselector\-char
+option lets you cycle through these alternates, but it's better to leave
+out the ones you don't want, to avoid overfull encodings. Thus, if you were
+only interested in ".end" variants, you might supply an
+.BR \-\-include\-alternates= "'*.end'"
+option.
+.Sp
+In the command line below, the '*.end' pattern will apply to "aalt"
+alternates, but not to "salt" alternates.
+.nf
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-f\fRsalt \fB\-\-include\-alternates\fR='*.end' \fB\-f\fRaalt \.\.\.
+.fi
+'
+.PD
+'
+'
+.SS Automatic Mode Options
+'
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BI \-a "\fR, " \-\-automatic
+Select automatic mode.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-v " vendor\fR, " \-\-vendor= vendor
+Set the font vendor name, which is used to locate files within the TDS.
+Defaults to "lcdftools".
+.Sp
+In automatic mode, TeX and friends will generally find required font files
+independently of the vendor you select.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-typeface= typeface
+Set the font typeface name, which is used to locate files within the TDS.
+Defaults to the current font's family name with unsuiable characters
+removed.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-no\-type1
+Do not use
+.M cfftot1 1
+to create Type 1 fonts corresponding to the OpenType input fonts.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-no\-dotlessj
+Do not use
+.M t1dotlessj 1
+to create a special dotless-j font when the input font doesn't have
+dotless-j.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-no\-updmap
+Do not run an
+.M updmap 1
+program. This can be useful if you're installing a bunch of fonts; it is
+much faster to run
+.B updmap
+once, at the end, than to run it once per font.
+.PD
+'
+'
+.SS Output Options
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BI \-n " texname\fR, " \-\-name= texname
+Set the TeX name of the output font, which is used in font map files and,
+in automatic mode, to generate the output filename. The default is derived
+from the OpenType font's name and the features you selected.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-p "\fR, " \-\-pl
+Output human-readable PL and VPL metrics, not binary TFM and VF metrics.
+Note:
+.BR Otftotfm 's
+PL and VPL output files are legal, but the
+.B fontinst
+program may not accept them (it has a picky parser). Make sure to supply a
+.BR \-\-coding\-scheme ;
+if that doesn't help, run the TFM output through
+.M tftopl 1 .
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-no\-virtual
+Do not generate virtual fonts (VFs and VPLs).
+.B Otftotfm
+will warn if the selected font features cannot be implemented without
+virtual fonts.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-no\-encoding
+Do not generate an encoding file.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-output\-encoding [=\fIfile\fR]
+Only generate an encoding file; do not generate any other output. The
+encoding file is written to
+.IR file ,
+or to standard output if no
+.I file
+argument is supplied.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-no\-map
+Do not generate a font map line for the font.
+.PD
+'
+'
+.SS File Location Options
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-tfm\-directory= dir
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-pl\-directory= dir
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-vf\-directory= dir
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-vpl\-directory= dir
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-encoding\-directory= dir
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-type1\-directory= dir
+Set the directory used for various output types. Each directory may be set
+by an environment variable, and defaults to a TDS directory in automatic
+mode, or to "." otherwise. Environment variable names and default TDS
+locations are described in the Automatic Mode section above.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-map\-file= filename
+Set file in which
+.B otftotfm
+will write a font map
+line for the font. The default is the standard output in manual mode, and
+"TEXMF/fonts/map/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/\fIvendor\fR.map" (or
+"TEXMF/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/\fIvendor\fR.map" on older installations) in
+automatic mode.
+.PD
+'
+'
+.SS Miscellaneous Options
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-glyphlist= file
+Use
+.I file
+as the Adobe glyph list, which helps translate glyph names to Unicode code
+points. See ENCODINGS, below, for more information.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-V ", " \-\-verbose
+Write progress messages to standard error.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-no\-create
+Do not create or modify any files. Instead, write messages about the
+program's hypothetical progress to standard error.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-force
+Generate all files, even if it looks like versions are already installed.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet
+Do not generate any error messages.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-kpathsea\-debug= flags
+Set path searching debugging flags. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-h ", " \-\-help
+Print usage information and exit.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-version
+Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit.
+.PD
+'
+.SH ENCODINGS
+.B Otftotfm
+interprets encoding files as Unicode. For example, if an input encoding
+has "/dotlessi" at position 10, then
+.B otftotfm
+detects that the user wants to encode Unicode character U+0131 LATIN SMALL
+LETTER DOTLESS I at position 10. The output encoding will use whatever
+glyph the font suggests for that Unicode character, given the collection of
+features you chose.
+.PP
+You can control this process with "UNICODING" comments in the input
+encoding file. UNICODING comments have the following format:
+.nf
+ % UNICODING \fIglyph\fR =: \fIchoice1\fR [\fIchoice2\fR ...] ;
+.fi
+\fIGlyph\fR and the
+.IR choice s
+are PostScript glyph names. This comment tells
+.B otftotfm
+that the glyph named
+.I glyph
+translates into the first Unicode value in the
+.I choice
+list that has a character in the font. For example,
+.nf
+ % UNICODING pi1 =: uni03D6 ;
+.fi
+tells otftotfm that the character "/pi1" encodes as U+03D6 GREEK PI SYMBOL,
+and
+.nf
+ % UNICODING Delta =: uni0394 uni2206 ;
+.fi
+tells it that U+0394 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER DELTA should be preferred to
+U+2206 INCREMENT as an encoding for "/Delta". You can also supply regular
+glyph names:
+.nf
+ % UNICODING Delta =: Deltagreek Delta ;
+.fi
+.B Otftotfm
+uses Adobe's
+.I glyphlist.txt
+file to translate glyph names to Unicode; see
+.IR http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/type/unicodegn.html .
+.LP
+You can map a glyph to nothing to remove that glyph from the input
+encoding. This is useful to remove optional characters; for instance:
+.nf
+ % UNICODING ff =: ; fi =: ; fl =: ; ffi =: ; ffl =: ;
+.fi
+The f-ligatures will be added back to the encoding, preferably at their
+original locations, if some font feature requires them.
+.LP
+Map a glyph to 'emptyslot' if you don't want
+.B otftotfm
+to use the slot for a ligature character. For example, given this
+UNICODING,
+.nf
+ % UNICODING ff =: ff emptyslot ;
+.fi
+.B otftotfm
+will leave the 'ff' encoding slot unused if the font has no 'ff' glyph.
+(Note that most OpenType fonts provide a visible representation for unused
+encoding slots, namely a box with an X inside.)
+.LP
+Each UNICODING line can contain multiple commands, separated by spaced
+semicolons.
+.PP
+LIGKERN comments in the encoding can add ligatures and inhibit kerns, as in
+.M afm2tfm 1 .
+To add a ligature, say:
+.nf
+ % LIGKERN \fIglyph1\fR \fIglyph2\fR =: \fIresult\fR ;
+.fi
+The "=:" operator indicates a normal ligature, where both the input glyphs
+are removed and replaced by
+.IR result .
+To preserve the left-hand glyph, for an effect like "\fIglyph1\fR
+\fIglyph2\fR =: \fIglyph1\fR \fIresult\fR", use "|=:" instead; to preserve
+the right-hand glyph, use "=:|". The other five ligature operators are not
+yet supported.
+To remove all kerns between two characters, say:
+.nf
+ % LIGKERN \fIglyph1\fR {} \fIglyph2\fR ;
+.fi
+A "*" matches any character, so
+.nf
+ % LIGKERN a {} * ;
+.fi
+removes all kerns with "a" as the left-hand character, and
+.nf
+ % LIGKERN * {} * ;
+.fi
+removes all kerns.
+.PP
+.B Otftotfm
+also supports extended syntax for setting kern values and inhibiting
+ligatures. To add an \fIn\fR-unit kern between two glyphs, say:
+.nf
+ % LIGKERNX \fIglyph1\fR {\fIn\fR} \fIglyph2\fR ;
+.fi
+where \fIn\fR is an integer. This:
+.nf
+ % LIGKERNX \fIglyph1\fR {L} \fIglyph2\fR ;
+.fi
+inhibits any ligature between
+.I glyph1
+and
+.IR glyph2 .
+"{LK}" and "{KL}" inhibit both ligatures and kerns.
+.PP
+You can set the
+.B \-\-boundary\-char
+and
+.B \-\-altselector\-char
+from an encoding file with commands like this:
+.nf
+ % LIGKERN || = \fIboundarychar\fR ;
+ % LIGKERNX ^^ = \fIaltselectorchar\fR ;
+.fi
+As with UNICODING, each LIGKERN or LIGKERNX line can contain multiple
+commands, separated by spaced semicolons.
+.PP
+The POSITION command shifts a glyph within its bounding box. The syntax is
+.nf
+ % POSITION \fIglyph\fR \fIpdx\fR \fIpdy\fR \fIadx\fR ;
+.fi
+This will add
+.I pdx
+units of space to
+.IR glyph 's
+left edge; raise it up by
+.I pdy
+units; and add
+.I adx
+units to its width. For example, to add 10 units of space to either side
+of the "T" glyph, supply
+.nf
+ % POSITION T 10 0 20
+.fi
+To move the "degree" symbol up by 20 units, supply
+.nf
+ % POSITION degree 0 20 0
+.fi
+.PP
+Finally, the CODINGSCHEME command specifies a default
+.B \-\-coding\-scheme
+for the encoding; for example:
+.nf
+ % CODINGSCHEME EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING
+.fi
+.PP
+The
+.BR \-\-unicoding ,
+.BR \-\-ligkern ,
+and
+.B \-\-position
+options let you add virtual UNICODING, LIGKERN/LIGKERNX, and POSITION
+comments to an encoding.
+.PP
+.B Otftotfm
+has a default set of eight ligatures, namely:
+.nf
+ space l =: lslash ; space L =: Lslash ;
+ question quoteleft =: questiondown ; exclam quoteleft =: exclamdown ;
+ hyphen hyphen =: endash ; endash hyphen =: emdash ;
+ quoteleft quoteleft =: quotedblleft ;
+ quoteright quoteright =: quotedblright
+.fi
+LIGKERN commands in the encoding file and
+.B \-\-ligkern
+options can override these defaults, or supply the
+.B \-\-no\-default\-ligkern
+option to turn them off.
+.PP
+Some common encoding files have commands that are inappropriate for
+OpenType fonts. For example, "t1.enc" hard-codes f-ligatures, which can
+cause problems with small-cap fonts. Supply the
+.B \-\-no\-encoding\-commands
+option to ignore all commands from the encoding file. Explicit
+.B \-\-ligkern
+and
+.B \-\-unicoding
+options are processed in any case.
+'
+.SS New Glyphs
+.PP
+New glyphs, such as ligatures and contextual substitutions, are added to
+the encoding in any empty spaces, using their original locations when
+possible. If the encoding doesn't have enough space for all new glyphs,
+shorter ligatures composed of unaccented letters get precedence.
+'
+.SS Synthetic Glyphs
+.PP
+.B Otftotfm
+can synthesize some glyphs using virtual font manipulations, if a required
+glyph is not available in the input font. Specifically, it will synthesize:
+.Sp
+.PD 0
+.TP 22
+cwm
+TeX's compound word mark (a zero-width "strut" rule with height equal to the font's x-height)
+.TP
+ascendercompwordmark
+"cwm" with height equal to the font's ascenders
+.TP
+capitalcompwordmark
+"cwm" with height equal to the font's capitals
+.TP
+visualspace
+A square cup used to represent spaces
+.TP
+dotlessj
+A dotless "j", synthesized with
+.M t1dotlessj 1
+.TP
+dblbracketleft
+Kerned version of "[["
+.TP
+dblbracketright
+Kerned version of "]]"
+.TP
+bardbl
+The parallel symbol "||"
+.TP
+asteriskmath
+Vertically-centered "*"
+.TP
+twelveudash
+2/3-em-wide dash
+.TP
+threequartersemdash
+3/4-em-wide dash
+.TP
+centigrade
+"(degrees)C"
+.TP
+interrobang
+Combined "?!" symbol
+.TP
+interrobangdown
+Inverted interrobang
+.TP
+pertenthousand
+Per-ten-thousand sign (% with two extra 0s)
+.TP
+IJ
+"IJ" ligature
+.TP
+ij
+"ij" ligature
+.TP
+Germandbls
+"SS" (a capital sharp-s)
+.TP
+SSsmall
+Small-capital version of "SS"
+.TP
+FFsmall
+Small-capital version of "FF"
+.TP
+FIsmall
+Small-capital version of "FI"
+.TP
+FLsmall
+Small-capital version of "FL"
+.TP
+FFIsmall
+Small-capital version of "FFI"
+.TP
+FFIsmall
+Small-capital version of "FFL"
+.PD
+'
+'
+.SH "GLYPH PATTERNS"
+.LP
+The
+.BR \-\-include\-subs
+and
+.BR \-\-include\-alternates
+options, and their
+.B \-\-exclude
+variants, accept the following types of pattern.
+.BUP
+Glyph names. Example: "Aacute". Use
+.M otfinfo 1 's
+.B \-g
+option to see a font's glyph names, and "\fBcfftot1\fR \fIfont\fR.otf |
+\fBt1testpage\fR" to generate a PostScript file showing each glyph.
+.BUP
+Glyph name patterns using the shell-style glob-matching rules: "*" matches
+any number of characters, "?" matches any single character, and "[...]"
+matches any character in a set. Example: "*.end".
+.BUP
+Unicode category properties in angle brackets. Examples: "<Letter>",
+"<UppercaseLetter>", "<Lu>". The complete list of both short and long
+names: Letter/L, UppercaseLetter/Lu, LowercaseLetter/Ll,
+TitlecaseLetter/Lt, ModifierLetter/Lm, OtherLetter/Lo; Number/N,
+DecimalNumber/Nd, LetterNumber/Nl, OtherNumber/No; Punctuation/P,
+ConnectorPunctuation/Pc, DashPunctuation/Pd, OpenPunctuation/Ps,
+ClosePunctuation/Pe, InitialPunctuation/Pi, FinalPunctuation/Pf,
+OtherPunctuation/Po; Symbol/S, MathSymbol/Sm, CurrencySymbol/Sc,
+ModifierSymbol/Sk, OtherSymbol/So; Mark/M, SpacingMark/Mc,
+EnclosingMark/Me, NonspacingMark/Mn; Separator/Z, SpaceSeparator/Zs,
+LineSeparator/Zl, ParagraphSeparator/Zp; Other/C, Surrogate/Cs, Format/Cf,
+Control/Cc, PrivateUse/Co, Unassigned/Cn. Category values current as of
+Unicode 4.0.
+.BUP
+Unicode ranges. Example: "U+007f-U+008C".
+.PP
+The "!" prefix negates a pattern, and you can separate multiple patterns by
+spaces.
+'
+.SH "FEATURE DIRECTORY"
+.LP
+This section lists features common to Western OpenType fonts and describes
+how
+.B otftotfm
+handles them for common fonts. Please send the author mail if
+.B otftotfm
+does not handle a feature you need, or you believe it handles some feature
+incorrectly.
+.Sp
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.IR aalt ", Access All Alternates"
+Lets the user choose between all available alternate forms for a character.
+This includes things like superscript and subscript variants, different
+styles (swash, for example), and even ornaments. The
+.BR \-\-altselector\-feature= aalt
+option can help an
+.BR \-\-altselector\-char
+provide useful access to alternates, but the
+.I aalt
+feature isn't usually useful on its own. Try the
+.IR salt " and " calt
+features instead.
+.TP 5
+.IR c2sc ", Small Capitals From Capitals"
+Replaces capital letters with small capitals: a sort of converse of the
+more conventional
+.I smcp
+feature, which replaces lower-case letters with small capitals. Supported.
+.TP 5
+.IR calt ", Contextual Alternates"
+Lets the user choose between context-appropriate swash forms for each
+character. For example, given the word "DREW" in a cursive typeface, the "R
+E W" might be translated to calmer forms than the initial "D". There may be
+more than one choice for a given letter, in which case the user should be
+able to select among them. TeX can't support complex contextual alternates,
+or alternate selection, but
+.B otftotfm
+supports some fonts quite well. The input encoding should have lots of
+empty space for variants, and it should specify a boundary character. See
+also
+.IR cswh .
+.TP 5
+.IR case ", Case-Sensitive Forms"
+Shifts punctuation marks up to a position that works well with
+all-capital-letter sequences. For example, the hyphen character, which
+generally centers vertically on the x-height, is raised up to center
+vertically on a capital letter. Also replaces text figures with lining
+figures, and accent marks with forms more appropriate for capitals.
+Supported.
+.TP 5
+.IR cpsp ", Capital Spacing"
+Adds a bit of space on either side of each capital letter. Supported.
+(However, the OpenType tag registry suggests that
+.I cpsp
+be on by default, but applying to all-caps text only; TeX cannot easily
+implement that contextual intelligence.)
+.TP 5
+.IR cswh ", Contextual Swash"
+Lets the user choose between context-appropriate swash forms for each
+character. For example, in the words "Ab AC", the first "A" might be
+translated to a swash form, while the second might not. There may be more
+than one choice for a given letter, in which case the user should be able
+to select among them. TeX can't support complex contextual swashes, or
+alternate selection, but
+.B otftotfm
+supports some fonts quite well. The input encoding should have lots of
+empty space for swash variants, and it should specify a boundary
+character. See also
+.IR calt .
+.TP 5
+.IR dlig ", Discretionary Ligatures"
+Activates uncommon ligatures, such as "c_t", "s_p", and "s_t". Supported.
+.TP 5
+.IR dnom ", Denominators"
+Replaces digits and some punctuation marks with smaller forms sitting on
+the baseline, intended for fraction denominators. Supported.
+.TP 5
+.IR fina ", Terminal Forms"
+Substitutes appropriate forms for letters occurring at the ends of words.
+This feature doesn't select swash variants; it's intended for normal use,
+and the specification recommends that it be on by default. Partially
+supported: TeX will only treat spaces as the ends of words, where a correct
+implementation would probably include punctuation too. See
+.IR cswh
+for selecting swash variants active at the ends of words.
+.TP 5
+.IR frac ", Fractions"
+Replaces simple sequences like "1/2" with nice-looking fractions.
+Supported, but beware: many fonts will translate "11/32" into "1" + "1/3" +
+"2".
+.TP 5
+.IR hist ", Historical Forms"
+Replaces characters with historical variants. Usually, this means at least
+translating regular "s" to long "s". Supported.
+.TP 5
+.IR kern ", Kerning"
+Adjusts the space between characters (pair kerning). Generally supported,
+and you should probably turn it on.
+.TP 5
+.IR liga ", Standard Ligatures"
+Activates common ligatures, such as "f_f", "f_i", "f_f_j", and (in some
+Adobe fonts) "T_h". Generally supported, and you should probably turn it
+on.
+.TP 5
+.IR lnum ", Lining Figures"
+Uses lining figures, the set of digits that are all about as high as
+capital letters.
+Supported. Compare
+.IR onum ;
+see also
+.IR pnum
+and
+.IR tnum.
+.TP 5
+.IR numr ", Numerators"
+Replaces digits and some punctuation marks with smaller, raised forms
+intended for fraction numerators. Supported, but not usually useful.
+.TP 5
+.IR onum ", Oldstyle Figures"
+Uses old-style figures, also known as text figures. This is the set of
+digits that have ascenders and descenders like lower-case letters.
+Supported. Compare
+.IR lnum ;
+see also
+.IR pnum
+and
+.IR tnum .
+.TP 5
+.IR ordn ", Ordinals"
+Designed for Spanish and French. Replaces ordinal numbers, such as "2.o",
+with forms where the "o" is raised, and replaces the sequence "No" with an
+integrated glyph. Supported.
+.TP 5
+.IR ornm ", Ornaments"
+Replaces some alphabetic characters in the font with ornaments, and links
+the bullet character to a set of all bullet-like ornaments, from which the
+user can choose. Partially supported: TeX can handle alphabetic
+substitutions, but not bullet choice.
+.TP 5
+.IR pnum ", Proportional Figures"
+Digits will have different widths. Supported. Compare
+.IR tnum ;
+see also
+.IR lnum
+and
+.IR onum.
+.TP 5
+.IR salt ", Stylistic Alternates"
+Lets the user choose between stylistic alternate forms for a character.
+The
+.BR \-\-altselector\-char
+mechanism provides useful access to this feature. If you turn on
+.IR salt
+globally,
+.B otftotfm
+takes the first alternate form whenever there's more than one choice. See
+also
+.IR aalt
+and
+.IR ss01 ;
+.IR salt
+is generally more useful than
+.IR aalt
+for TeX, since it refers exclusively to stylistic alternates.
+.TP 5
+.IR sinf ", Scientific Inferiors"
+Replaces digits and some punctuation marks with smaller, lowered forms
+intended for subscripts. Supported.
+.TP 5
+.IR size ", Optical Size"
+This feature stores information about the range of optical sizes for which
+the font was intended. There is no point in selecting it with
+.BR otftotfm ,
+since it should not change the font's appearance in any way.
+.TP 5
+.IR smcp ", Small Capitals"
+Replaces lower-case letters with small capitals. Supported. Compare
+.IR c2sc .
+.TP 5
+.IR ss01 - ss20 ", Stylistic Sets 1-20"
+Replaces characters with a uniform set of stylistic alternates. Differs
+from features like
+.I salt
+in that a Stylistic Set is uniform: an
+.I ssXX
+feature should never involve selection from a set of possible alternate
+characters. Supported.
+.TP 5
+.IR sups ", Superscript"
+Replaces digits, some punctuation marks, and some lower-case letters with
+smaller, raised forms intended for superscripts. Supported.
+.TP 5
+.IR swsh ", Swash"
+Activates all swash forms for each character. There may be more than one
+swash form, in which case
+.B otftotfm
+will pick the first one listed. Supported, except that swash variants
+other than the first are inaccessible.
+.TP 5
+.IR tnum ", Tabular Figures"
+All digits will have the same width, so that tables and the like will align
+visually. Supported. Compare
+.IR pnum ;
+see also
+.IR lnum
+and
+.IR onum.
+.TP 5
+.IR zero ", Slashed Zero"
+Replaces the zero character with a slashed zero. Supported.
+.PD
+'
+.SH "DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING"
+'
+.TP 5
+no writable directory found in $TEXMF
+'
+.B Otftotfm
+could not find a writable directory in your $TEXMFVAR or $TEXMF path. Did
+you create a
+.I $HOME/.texmf-var
+or
+.I $HOME/texmf
+directory? If so, run the command "kpsewhich \-\-expand\-path='$TEXMF'" to
+verify that directory is not being found. You may need to set your TEXMF
+environment variable, to '{!!'"$HOME"'/texmf,!!$TEXMFMAIN}', for instance
+(note the different kinds of quotes; on my machine, this expands to
+\&'{!!/home/kohler/texmf,!!$TEXMFMAIN}').
+'
+.TP 5
+\&'\fIchar\fR' has no encoding, ignoring kern removal
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+(or ligature removal, lig/kern removal, or ligature)
+.PD
+'
+These messages indicate a slight problem with your encoding file: one of
+the LIGKERN commands referred to a character not present in the encoding.
+This might be due to a misspelling in the LIGKERN command or the encoding
+file, or it might be an oversight. Either fix the encoding file or ignore
+the warning.
+'
+.TP 5
+can't map '\fIchar\fR' to Unicode
+'
+Another encoding file problem: One of the glyph names in an UNICODING block
+could not be converted to Unicode. This is problematic since UNICODING
+exists wholly to translate glyph names into Unicode. Fix the encoding file
+or ignore the warning.
+'
+.TP 5
+not enough room in encoding, ignoring \fIN\fR glyph(s) ...
+'
+There wasn't space in the encoding for all the glyphs referred to by the
+features you selected. For example, maybe the font had more ligatures than
+there were empty slots in the encoding. Fix this warning by selecting fewer
+features, or by using an encoding with more empty slots, such as the 7t.enc
+encoding distributed with
+.BR otftotfm .
+'
+.SH "FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS"
+.TP 5
+How can I get a small-caps "SS" in place of the German sharp-S?
+'
+Supply the option "\fB\-\-unicoding\fR 'germandbls =: SSsmall'".
+'
+.TP 5
+How can I prevent f-ligatures from forming in a small-caps font?
+'
+This should happen automatically, but some overzealous encoding files add
+f-ligatures even when the font doesn't request them. Try the
+"\fB\-\-no\-encoding\-commands\fR" option if this is a problem for you.
+'
+.TP 5
+\fBOtftotfm\fR seems to take a long time.
+'
+Use the
+.B \-V
+option to see what it's doing. Often the culprit is the
+.M updmap 1
+program; if you're planning to run
+.B otftotfm
+multiple times, give it the
+.B \-\-no\-updmap
+option and run
+.B updmap
+manually when you're done.
+'
+.SH "BUGS"
+.\" .LP
+.\" Presumably some context-sensitive positionings and ligatures could be
+.\" implemented with TeX's boundary character, but
+.\" .B otftotfm
+.\" doesn't do that yet.
+.LP
+See the documentation for
+.B \-\-pl
+above if you have problems running
+.BR otftotfm 's
+output through
+.BR fontinst .
+'
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M pltotf 1 ,
+.M tftopl 1 ,
+.M vptovf 1 ,
+.M afm2tfm 1 ,
+.M dvips 1 ,
+.M cfftot1 1 ,
+.M otfinfo 1 ,
+.M t1dotlessj 1 ,
+.M t1testpage 1 ,
+.M kpsewhich 1 ,
+.M updmap 1
+.LP
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format"
+.LP
+Adobe Technical Notes #5176,
+.IR "The Compact Font Format Specification" ,
+and #5177,
+.I "The Type 2 Charstring Format"
+.LP
+.IR "OpenType Specification" ,
+Version 1.4
+.LP
+.IR "A Directory Structure for TeX Files" ,
+http://www.tug.org/tds/
+.LP
+.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" ,
+http://www.tug.org/kpathsea/
+.LP
+Sivan Toledo,
+.IR "Exploiting Rich Fonts" ,
+TUGboat 21(2), 2000,
+http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb21-2/tb67tole.pdf
+.LP
+Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and Alexander Samarin,
+.IR "The LaTeX Companion"
+(for information on the .fd file format).
+'
+.SH AUTHOR
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@cs.ucla.edu)
+.PP
+Thanks to Karl Berry, Marco Kuhlmann, Adam Lindsay, Bruce D'Arcus, Thomas
+Esser, Claire Connelly, Nelson H.F. Beebe, and Ryuji Suzuki for
+suggestions, bug reports, and help. Particular thanks to Achim Blumensath
+and Michael Zedler for suggestions and patches, some of them extensive.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c111acc49d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+.TH "otp2ocp" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+otp2ocp \- convert Omega Translation Process files to Omega
+Compiled Process files
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBotp2ocp\fP \fIOTPFILE\fP[\&.otp] [ \fIOCPFILE\fP[\&.ocp] ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBotp2ocp\fP is used to create or recreate Omega Compiled Process
+files (binary) from Omega Translation Process (text) files\&.
+.PP
+Omega Translation Processes are rules used to translate one character
+set to another and to choose between characters with one or more
+context-sensitive variants\&. OTPs could also be used to change the
+case or hyphenation of text\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBmkocp\fP(1), \fBomega\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/>
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice
+<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous
+<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
+.PP
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ee803d9be67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+.TH "outocp" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+outocp \- debug an OCP file
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBoutocp\fP \fIOCPFILE\fP[\&.ocp]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBoutocp\fP is used for debugging Omega Compiled Translation Process
+(OCP) files\&. It generates some statistics about the OCP file, and
+then runs through the states that the file defines\&.
+.PP
+Omega Translation Processes are rules used to translate one character
+set to another and to choose between characters with one or more
+context-sensitive variants\&. OTPs could also be used to change the
+case or hyphenation of text\&.
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBocp2otp\fP(1), \fBotp2ocp\fP(1), \fBomega\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/>
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice
+<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous
+<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..86fbbb56dd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+.TH "ovf2ovp" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+ovf2ovp \- convert a virtual font file and its associated
+font metric file into property-list format
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBovf2ovp\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIOVFNAME\fP[\&.ovf] [ [
+\fIOFMNAME\fP[\&.ofm] ] [ \fIOVPFILE\fP[\&.ovp] ] ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBovf2ovp\fP translates a virtual font (OVF) file, \fIOVFNAME\fP,
+and its companion font metric (OFM) file, \fIOFMNAME\fP, into a
+human-readable property-list format\&. The program writes to standard
+output (by default) or to a file specified as \fIOVPNAME\fP\&.
+.PP
+The program also works with TeX VF and TFM files, producing TeX VP
+files\&. (\fBovf2ovp\fP is based on the WEB source code for
+\fBvftovp\fP(1)\&.)
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP
+.IP "\fB-charcode-format=\fP\fITYPE\fP"
+output character codes
+according to \fITYPE\fP, which can be either `hex\&' or `ascii\&'\&.
+Default is `hex\&'\&. ascii specifes all ASCII letters and digits; hex
+gets you everything else\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB-help\fP"
+display a brief summary of syntax and options
+.IP "\fB-verbose\fP"
+display progress reports
+.IP "\fB-version\fP"
+output version information and exit
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+.IP "\fIOVPFILE\fP"
+Omega Virtual Property List file
+.IP "\fIOFMNAME\fP"
+Omega Font Metric file
+.IP "\fIOVFNAME\fP"
+Omega Virtual Font file
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. You should also
+check to see if the bug is also in \fBvftovp\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBomega\fP(1), \fBofm2opl\fP(1), \fBovp2ovf\fP(1),
+\fBpltotf\fP(1), \fBtftopl\fP(1), \fBvftovp\fP(1),
+\fBvptovf\fP(1)
+.PP
+\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/>
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+According to the WEB documentation:
+.PP
+.RS
+\fBVFtoVP\fP is an extended version of the program \fBTFtoPL\fP,
+which is part of the standard tex()ware library\&. The idea of a
+virtual font was inspired by the work of David R\&. Fuchs who designed a
+similar set of conventions in 1984 while developing a device driver
+for ArborText, Inc\&. He wrote a somewhat similar program called
+\fBAMFtoXPL\fP\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice
+<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous
+<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
+.PP
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2793db27eda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+.TH "ovp2ovf" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+ovp2ovf \- convert a virtual property-list file into a
+virtual font file and its associated font metric file
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBovp2ovf\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIOVPFILE\fP[\&.ovp] [ [
+\fIOVFFILE\fP[\&.ovf] ] [ \fIOFMFILE\fP[\&.ofm] ] ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBovp2ovf\fP translates a human-readable virtual property list (OVP)
+file, \fIOVPFILE\fP, into a virtual font (OVF) file, \fIOVFFILE\fP
+and its companion font metric (OFM) file, \fIOFMFILE\fP\&.
+.PP
+The program also works with TeX VP files, producing VF and TFM files\&.
+(\fBovp2ovf\fP is based on the WEB source code for \fBvptovf\fP(1)\&.)
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB-help\fP"
+display a brief summary of syntax and options
+.IP "\fB-verbose\fP"
+display progress reports
+.IP "\fB-version\fP"
+output version information and exit
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.IP "\fIOFMFILE\fP"
+Omega Font Metric file
+.IP "\fIOVFFILE\fP"
+Omega Virtual Font file
+.IP "\fIOVPFILE\fP"
+Omega Virtual Property List file
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. You should also
+check to see if the bug is in \fBvptovf\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBomega\fP(1), \fBofm2opl\fP(1), \fBovf2ovp\fP(1),
+\fBpltotf\fP(1), \fBtftopl\fP(1), \fBvftovp\fP(1),
+\fBvptovf\fP(1)
+.PP
+\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/>
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+According to the WEB documentation:
+.PP
+.RS
+\fBVPtoVF\fP is an extended version of the program \fBPLtoTF\fP,
+which is part of the standard TeXware library\&. \fBOVP2OVF\fP is an
+extended version of \fBVPtoVF\fP that allows much larger fonts\&. The
+idea of a virtual font was inspired by the work of David R\&. Fuchs who
+designed a similar set of conventions in 1984 while developing a
+device driver for ArborText, Inc\&. He wrote a somewhat similar program
+called \fBPLFONT\fP\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice
+<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous
+<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
+.PP
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/oxdvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/oxdvi.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..33de598c928
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/oxdvi.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+xdvi.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ac33a0852e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.1
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+.TH PATGEN 1 "23 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+patgen \- generate patterns for TeX hyphenation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B patgen
+.I dictionary_file pattern_file patout_file translate_file
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B patgen
+program reads the
+.I dictionary_file
+containing a list of hyphenated words and the
+.I pattern_file
+containing previously-generated patterns (if any) for a particular
+language, and produces the
+.I patout_file
+with (previously- plus newly-generated) hyphenation patterns for that
+language. The
+.I translate_file
+defines language specific values for the parameters
+.IR left_hyphen_min " and " right_hyphen_min
+used by \*(TX's hyphenation algorithm and the external representation
+of the lower and upper case version(s) of all \`letters' of that
+language. Further details of the pattern generation process such as
+hyphenation levels and pattern lengths are requested interactively from
+the user's terminal. Optionally
+.B patgen
+creates a new dictionary file
+.BI pattmp. n
+showing the good and bad hyphens found by the generated patterns, where
+.I n
+is the highest hypenation level.
+.PP
+The patterns generated by
+.B patgen
+can be read by
+.B initex
+for use in hyphenating words. For a (very) long example of
+.IR patgen 's
+output, see
+.IR $TEXMFMAIN/tex/generic/hyphen/hyphen.tex ,
+which contains the patterns \*(TX uses for English.
+At some sites, patterns for several other languages may be available,
+and the local
+.B tex
+programs may have them preloaded; consult your
+.I Local Guide
+or your system administrator for details.
+.PP
+All filenames must be complete; no adding of default
+extensions or path searching is done.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILE FORMATS
+.TP \w'@@'u+2n
+.B Letters
+When
+.B initex
+digests hyphenation patterns, \*(TX first expands macros and the result
+must entirely consist of digits (hyphenation levels), dots (\`.', edge
+of a word), and letters. In pattern files for non-English languages
+letters are often represented by macros or other expandable constructs.
+For the purpose of
+.B patgen
+these are just character sequences, subject to the condition that no
+such sequence is a prefix of another one.
+.TP \w'@@'u+2n
+.B Dictionary file
+A dictionary file contains a weighted list of hyphenated words, one word
+per line starting in column 1. A digit in column 1 indicates a global
+word weight (initially =1) applicable to all following words up to the
+next global word weight. A digit at some intercharacter position
+indicates a weight for that position only.
+
+The hyphens in a word are indicated by \`-', \`*', or \`.' (or their
+replacements as defined in the translate file) for hyphens yet to be
+found, \`good' hyphens (correctly found by the patterns), and \`bad'
+hyphens (erroneously found by the patterns) respectively; when reading a
+dictionary file \`*' is treated like \`-' and \`.' is ignored.
+.TP \w'@@'u+2n
+.B Translate file
+A translate file starts with a line containing the values of
+.I left_hypen_min
+in columns 1-2,
+.I right_hyphen_min
+in columns 3-4, and either a blank or the replacement for one of the
+"hyphen" characters \`-', \`*', and \`.' in columns 5, 6, and 7. (Input
+lines are padded with blanks as for many \*(TX related programs.)
+
+Each following line defines one \`letter': an arbitrary delimiter
+character in column 1, followed by one or more external representations
+of that character (first the \`lower' case one used for output), each
+one terminated by the delimiter and the whole sequence terminated by
+another delimiter.
+
+If the translate file is empty, the values
+.IR left_hypen_min "=2, " right_hyphen_min "=3,"
+and the 26 lower case letters
+.IR a ... z
+with their upper case representations
+.IR A ... Z
+are assumed.
+.TP \w'@@'u+2n
+.B Terminal input
+After reading the
+.I translate_file
+and any previously-generated patterns from
+.IR pattern_file,
+.B patgen
+requests input from the user's terminal.
+
+First the integer values of
+.IR hyph_start " and " hyph_finish ,
+the lowest and highest hyphenation level for which patterns are to be
+generated. The value of
+.I hyph_start
+should be larger than any hyphenation level already present in
+.IR pattern_file .
+
+Then, for each hyphenation level, the integer values of
+.IR pat_start " and " pat_finish ,
+the smallest and largest pattern length to be analyzed, as well as
+.IR "good weight" ", " "bad weight" ", and " threshold ,
+the weights for good and bad hyphens and a weight threshold for useful
+patterns.
+
+Finally the decision (\`y' or \`Y' vs. anything else) whether or not to
+produce a hypenated word list.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP \w'@@'u+2n
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/generic/hyphen/hyphen.tex
+Patterns for English.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+Frank Liang,
+.IR "Word hy-phen-a-tion by com-puter" ,
+STAN-CS-83-977,
+Stanford University Ph.D. thesis, 1983.
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR "The \*(OXbook" ,
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13447-0, Appendix H.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Frank Liang wrote the first version of this program. Peter
+Breitenlohner made a
+substantial revision in 1991 for \*(TX 3.
+The first version was published as the appendix to the
+.I \*(OXware
+technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. Howard Trickey
+originally ported it to Unix.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fb532c5e01e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,487 @@
+.TH PDFETEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+pdfetex, pdfeinitex, pdfevirtex \- PDF output from e-TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pdfetex
+.RI [ options ]
+[\fB&\fR \fIformat\fR ]
+[ \fIfile\fR | \fB\e\fR \fIcommands\fR ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Run the pdfe\*(TX typesetter on
+.IR file ,
+usually creating
+.IR file.pdf .
+If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it.
+Instead of a filename, a set of pdfe\*(TX commands can be given, the first
+of which must start with a backslash.
+With a
+.BI & format
+argument pdfe\*(TX uses a different set of precompiled commands,
+contained in
+.IR format.fmt ;
+it is usually better to use the
+.B -fmt
+.I format
+option instead.
+.PP
+pdfe\*(TX is a version of e-\*(TX that can create
+.I PDF
+files as well as
+.I DVI
+files.
+.PP
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, pdfe\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement of the e-\*(TX
+engine.
+.PP
+The typical use of pdfe\*(TX is with a pregenerated formats for which
+PDF output has been enabled. The
+.B pdfetex
+command uses the equivalent of the plain e-\*(TX format, and the
+.B pdfelatex
+command uses the equivalent of the e-\*(LX format.
+To generate formats, use the
+.B -ini
+switch.
+.PP
+The
+.B pdfeinitex
+and
+.B pdfevirtex
+commands are pdfe\*(TX's analogues to the
+.B einitex
+and
+.B evirtex
+commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the
+.B pdfetex
+executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all.
+.PP
+In
+.I PDF
+mode, pdfe\*(TX can natively handle the
+.IR PDF ,
+.IR JPG ,
+and
+.I PNG
+graphics formats.
+pdfe\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of
+of the other \*(TX programs in the
+.I web2c
+implementation.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of pdfe\*(TX understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.B -enc
+.rb
+Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in
+combination with
+.BR -ini .
+For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see
+.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html .
+.TP
+.B -etex
+.rb
+Enable the e-\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in
+combination with
+.BR -ini .
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error
+.rb
+Print error messages in the form
+.I file:line:error
+which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
+.TP
+.B -no-file-line-error
+.rb
+Disable printing error messages in the
+.I file:line:error
+style.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error-style
+.rb
+This is the old name of the
+.B -file-line-error
+option.
+.TP
+.BI -fmt \ format
+.rb
+Use
+.I format
+as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
+pdfe\*(TX was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -ini
+.rb
+Start in
+.I INI
+mode, which is used to dump formats. The
+.I INI
+mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and
+basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required.
+.TP
+.BI -interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+\ecommands.
+.TP
+.B -ipc
+.rb
+Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output file.
+Whether this option is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.B -ipc-start
+.rb
+As
+.BR -ipc ,
+and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
+is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.BI -jobname \ name
+.rb
+Use
+.I name
+for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
+.TP
+.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI -mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.B -mltex
+.rb
+Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with
+.BR -ini .
+.TP
+.BI -no-mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI -output-comment \ string
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, use
+.I string
+for the
+.I DVI
+file comment instead of the date. This option is ignored
+in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.BI -output-format \ format
+.rb
+Set the output format mode, where
+.I format
+must be either
+.I pdf
+or
+.IR dvi .
+This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by pdfe\*(TX.
+.TP
+.B -parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name or a
+.B -translate-file
+option.
+.TP
+.B -no-parse-first-line
+.rb
+Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file.
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B -recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder.
+This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output
+in a file with extension
+.IR .fls .
+.TP
+.B -shell-escape
+.rb
+Enable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct. The
+.I command
+can be any shell command. This construct is normally
+disallowed for security reasons.
+.TP
+.B -no-shell-escape
+.rb
+Disable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct, even if it is enabled in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file.
+.TP
+.B -src-specials
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials into the
+.I DVI
+file.
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -src-specials \ where
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials in certain placed of the
+.I DVI
+file.
+.I where
+is a comma-separated value list:
+.IR cr ,
+.IR display ,
+.IR hbox ,
+.IR math ,
+.IR par ,
+.IR parent ,
+or
+.IR vbox .
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Use the
+.I tcxname
+translation table to set the mapping of input characters and
+re-mapping of output characters.
+.TP
+.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Like
+.B -translate-file
+except that a
+.I %&
+line can overrule this setting.
+.TP
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
+The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+One caveat: In most pdfe\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
+give directly to pdfe\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
+expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
+\*(MF, do not have this problem.
+.PP
+.TP
+TEXMFOUTPUT
+Normally, pdfe\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If
+any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
+directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
+There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+.I pdfetex paper
+and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
+the value
+.IR /tmp ,
+pdfe\*(TX attempts to create
+.I /tmp/paper.log
+(and
+.IR /tmp/paper.pdf ,
+if any output is produced.)
+.TP
+TEXINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I \einput
+and
+.I \eopenin
+files.
+This should probably start with ``.'', so
+that user files are found before system files. An empty path
+component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
+current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
+.TP
+TEXFORMATS
+Search path for format files.
+.TP
+TEXPOOL
+search path for
+.B pdfetex
+internal strings.
+.TP
+TEXEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+.BR vi ,
+is set when pdfe\*(TX is compiled.
+.TP
+TFMFONTS
+Search path for font metric
+.RI ( .tfm )
+files.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I pdfetex.pool
+Text file containing pdfe\*(TX's internal strings.
+.TP
+.I pdftex.map
+Filename mapping definitions.
+.TP
+.I *.tfm
+Metric files for pdfe\*(TX's fonts.
+.TP
+.I *.fmt
+Predigested pdfe\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files.
+.br
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NOTES
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of pdfe\*(TX can be found in the info
+manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+This version of pdfe\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions.
+In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
+extent with the definition of pdfe\*(TX. When such extensions are
+enabled, the banner printed when pdfe\*(TX starts is changed to print
+.B pdfeTeXk
+instead of
+.BR pdfeTeX .
+.PP
+This version of pdfe\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
+dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
+but when it does the generated
+.I DVI
+file will be invalid. Whether a generated
+.I PDF
+file would be usable is unknown.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+pdfe\*(TX is available for a large variety of machine architectures
+and operation systems.
+pdfe\*(TX is part of all major \*(TX distributions.
+.P
+Information on how to get pdfe\*(TX and related information
+is available at the
+.BI "http://tug.org" \ TUG
+website.
+The most recent version of pdfe\*(TX is available for anonymous
+ftp at the
+.B http://www.pdftex.org/
+.IR "pdfe\*(TX development site" .
+.P
+The following pdfe\*(TX related mailing list is available:
+.BR pdftex@tug.org .
+This is a mailman list;
+to subscribe send a message containing
+.I subscribe
+to
+.BR pdftex-request@tug.org .
+More about the list can be found at the
+.B "http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/pdftex"
+.I mailing list
+website.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1),
+.BR etex (1),
+.BR pdftex (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+The primary authors of pdf\*(TX are Han The Thanh, Petr Sojka, and
+Jiri Zlatuska.
+.PP
+\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth,
+who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs.
+It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and
+at Cornell by Pavel Curtis.
+The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that
+generated by the \*(WB to C system
+.RB ( web2c ),
+originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan.
+.PP
+The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..8237fbd3a07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+pdfetex.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..56ca5798215
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,479 @@
+.TH PDFTEX 1 "25 March 2004" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds AX AmSTeX
+.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX
+.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+pdftex, pdfinitex, pdfvirtex \- PDF output from TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pdftex
+.RI [ options ]
+[\fB&\fR \fIformat\fR ]
+[ \fIfile\fR | \fB\e\fR \fIcommands\fR ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Run the pdf\*(TX typesetter on
+.IR file ,
+usually creating
+.IR file.pdf .
+If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it.
+Instead of a filename, a set of pdf\*(TX commands can be given, the first
+of which must start with a backslash.
+With a
+.BI & format
+argument pdf\*(TX uses a different set of precompiled commands,
+contained in
+.IR format.fmt ;
+it is usually better to use the
+.B -fmt
+.I format
+option instead.
+.PP
+pdf\*(TX is a version of \*(TX that can create
+.I PDF
+files as well as
+.I DVI
+files.
+.PP
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, pdf\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement of the \*(TX
+engine.
+.PP
+The typical use of pdf\*(TX is with a pregenerated formats for which
+PDF output has been enabled. The
+.B pdftex
+command uses the equivalent of the plain \*(TX format, and the
+.B pdflatex
+command uses the equivalent of the \*(LX format.
+To generate formats, use the
+.B -ini
+switch.
+.PP
+The
+.B pdfinitex
+and
+.B pdfvirtex
+commands are pdf\*(TX's analogues to the
+.B initex
+and
+.B virtex
+commands. In this installation, they are symbolic links to the
+.B pdftex
+executable. These symbolic links may not exist at all.
+.PP
+In
+.I PDF
+mode, pdf\*(TX can natively handle the
+.IR PDF ,
+.IR JPG ,
+and
+.I PNG
+graphics formats.
+pdf\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of
+of the other \*(TX programs in the
+.I web2c
+implementation.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of pdf\*(TX understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.B -enc
+.rb
+Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in
+combination with
+.BR -ini .
+For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see
+.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html .
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error
+.rb
+Print error messages in the form
+.I file:line:error
+which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
+.TP
+.B -no-file-line-error
+.rb
+Disable printing error messages in the
+.I file:line:error
+style.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error-style
+.rb
+This is the old name of the
+.B -file-line-error
+option.
+.TP
+.BI -fmt \ format
+.rb
+Use
+.I format
+as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
+pdf\*(TX was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -ini
+.rb
+Start in
+.I INI
+mode, which is used to dump formats. The
+.I INI
+mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and
+basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required.
+.TP
+.BI -interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+\ecommands.
+.TP
+.B -ipc
+.rb
+Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output file.
+Whether this option is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.B -ipc-start
+.rb
+As
+.BR -ipc ,
+and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
+is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.BI -jobname \ name
+.rb
+Use
+.I name
+for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
+.TP
+.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI -mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.B -mltex
+.rb
+Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with
+.BR -ini .
+.TP
+.BI -no-mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI -output-comment \ string
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, use
+.I string
+for the
+.I DVI
+file comment instead of the date. This option is ignored
+in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.BI -output-format \ format
+.rb
+Set the output format mode, where
+.I format
+must be either
+.I pdf
+or
+.IR dvi .
+This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by pdf\*(TX.
+.TP
+.B -parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name or a
+.B -translate-file
+option.
+.TP
+.B -no-parse-first-line
+.rb
+Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file.
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B -recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder.
+This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output
+in a file with extension
+.IR .fls .
+.TP
+.B -shell-escape
+.rb
+Enable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct. The
+.I command
+can be any shell command. This construct is normally
+disallowed for security reasons.
+.TP
+.B -no-shell-escape
+.rb
+Disable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct, even if it is enabled in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file.
+.TP
+.B -src-specials
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials into the
+.I DVI
+file.
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -src-specials \ where
+.rb
+In
+.I DVI
+mode, insert source specials in certain placed of the
+.I DVI
+file.
+.I where
+is a comma-separated value list:
+.IR cr ,
+.IR display ,
+.IR hbox ,
+.IR math ,
+.IR par ,
+.IR parent ,
+or
+.IR vbox .
+This option is ignored in
+.I PDF
+mode.
+.TP
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Use the
+.I tcxname
+translation table to set the mapping of input characters and
+re-mapping of output characters.
+.TP
+.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Like
+.B -translate-file
+except that a
+.I %&
+line can overrule this setting.
+.TP
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
+The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+One caveat: In most pdf\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
+give directly to pdf\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
+expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
+\*(MF, do not have this problem.
+.PP
+.TP
+TEXMFOUTPUT
+Normally, pdf\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If
+any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
+directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
+There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+.I pdftex paper
+and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
+the value
+.IR /tmp ,
+pdf\*(TX attempts to create
+.I /tmp/paper.log
+(and
+.IR /tmp/paper.pdf ,
+if any output is produced.)
+.TP
+TEXINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I \einput
+and
+.I \eopenin
+files.
+This should probably start with ``.'', so
+that user files are found before system files. An empty path
+component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
+current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
+.TP
+TEXFORMATS
+Search path for format files.
+.TP
+TEXPOOL
+search path for
+.B pdftex
+internal strings.
+.TP
+TEXEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+.BR vi ,
+is set when pdf\*(TX is compiled.
+.TP
+TFMFONTS
+Search path for font metric
+.RI ( .tfm )
+files.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I pdftex.pool
+Text file containing pdf\*(TX's internal strings.
+.TP
+.I pdftex.map
+Filename mapping definitions.
+.TP
+.I *.tfm
+Metric files for pdf\*(TX's fonts.
+.TP
+.I *.fmt
+Predigested pdf\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files.
+.br
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NOTES
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of pdf\*(TX can be found in the info
+manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+This version of pdf\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions.
+In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
+extent with the definition of pdf\*(TX. When such extensions are
+enabled, the banner printed when pdf\*(TX starts is changed to print
+.B pdfTeXk
+instead of
+.BR pdfTeX .
+.PP
+This version of pdf\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
+dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
+but when it does the generated
+.I DVI
+file will be invalid. Whether a generated
+.I PDF
+file would be usable is unknown.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+pdf\*(TX is available for a large variety of machine architectures
+and operation systems.
+pdf\*(TX is part of all major \*(TX distributions.
+.P
+Information on how to get pdfe\*(TX and related information
+is available at the
+.BI "http://tug.org" \ TUG
+website.
+The most recent version of pdf\*(TX is available for anonymous
+ftp at the
+.B http://www.pdftex.org/
+.IR "pdf\*(TX development site" .
+.P
+The following pdfe\*(TX related mailing list is available:
+.BR pdftex@tug.org .
+This is a mailman list;
+to subscribe send a message containing
+.I subscribe
+to
+.BR pdftex-request@tug.org .
+More about the list can be found at the
+.B "http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/pdftex"
+.I mailing list
+website.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tex (1),
+.BR mf (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+The primary authors of pdf\*(TX are Han The Thanh, Petr Sojka, and
+Jiri Zlatuska.
+.PP
+\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth,
+who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs.
+It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and
+at Cornell by Pavel Curtis.
+The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that
+generated by the \*(WB to C system
+.RB ( web2c ),
+originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan.
+.PP
+The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f81abb8ed2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.1
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+.TH PFB2PFA 1 TeX
+.SH NAME
+pfb2pfa \- convert a type1 pfb file (binary MSDOS) into a pfa (ASCII)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+pfb2pfa [-v] pfbfile [pfafile]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Program converts a binary MSDOS representation for a type1 PostScript
+font into a readable ASCII version. The MSDOS newline (\\r) is converted
+into the UNIX newline (\\n). The output is written in a file whose name
+is the name that is provided on the command line or the basename of the
+input file plus extension ".pfa".
+.PP
+With the -v option you get some information about what the
+program is doing.
+.SH AUTHOR
+.nf
+Piet Tutelaers <rcpt@urc.tue.nl>
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5b9c6d599db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+.TH PK2BM 1 TeX
+.SH NAME
+pk2bm \- create a bitmap from a TeX pkfont
+.SH SYNOPSIS:
+pk2bm [-bh] [-W\fIwidth\fP] [-H\fIheight\fP] -c\fIchar\fP pkfont
+
+pk2bm [-bh] [-W\fIwidth\fP] [-H\fIheight\fP] -o\fIoctchar\fP pkfont
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This program generates a bitmap (ASCII file) which can be used
+to create X11 applications. The bitmap file consists of all pixels
+of the specified character (via the -c or -o option) from
+the given pkfont. The format is described in bitmap(X11).
+.PP
+The pkfont is a packed fontfile generated by gftopk(TeX) from a
+gffont. A gffont is the output of METAFONT a program to design fonts
+in a device independant way.
+.PP
+With the -b flag a bitmap is generated in which all black pixels are
+drawn as a `*' and all white bits as a `.'. With the -h flag a
+hexadecimal bitmap dump is generated.
+.PP
+The -W and/or -H options can be used to create a bitmap of
+respectivally `width' and `height' pixels. The pk-bitmap will in
+this case be centered according to these new dimensions.
+.PP
+The output is written to the standard output.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.nf
+`METAFONT', Donald Knuth.
+`The PKtype processor', belonging to the METAFONTware.
+bitmap(X11),
+gftopk(TeX),
+pktype(TeX),
+ps2pk(1)
+
+.SH AUTHOR
+.nf
+Piet Tutelaers <rcpt@urc.tue.nl>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f341a3a2c8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+.TH PKTOGF 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+pktogf \- convert packed font files to generic font files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pktogf
+[
+.B \-v
+]
+.I pk_file_name
+[
+.I gf_file_name
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B pktogf
+program converts a packed font file
+.RI ( pk )
+to a generic font file
+.RI ( gf ).
+Packed
+font files are much smaller than the corresponding
+.I gf
+files,
+but some DVI readers only understand
+.I gf
+files.
+.PP
+The
+.I pk_file_name
+on the command line must be complete. Because
+the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make
+sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or
+DVI-reading software. The
+.I gf_file_name
+defaults to the same (stripped) name as
+.IR pk_file_name ,
+and it is placed in the current
+working directory with the
+.I gf
+suffix replacing
+.IR pk .
+For example, the input file
+.I io.300pk
+would become
+.IR io.300gf .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+Unless the
+.B \-v
+switch is given,
+.B pktogf
+operates silently. With
+.BR \-v ,
+the version number of the program and statistics about the
+unpacking are output to
+.IR stdout .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.B pktogf
+looks for
+.I pk_file_name
+using the
+environment variable PKFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable
+TEXPKS. If that is not set, it uses TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it
+uses the system default.
+.PP
+See
+.BR tex (1)
+for the details of the searching.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR gftopk (1),
+.BR gftype (1),
+.BR pktype (1).
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth et al.,
+.IR \*(MFware .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Tomas Rokicki wrote the program.
+Pierre MacKay adapted it for compilation with
+.BR web2c .
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..60bb34540aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.1
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+.TH PKTYPE 1 "13 March 1996" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+pktype \- verify and translate a packed font bitmap file to plain text
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pktype
+.I pk_file
+[
+.I output_file
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B pktype
+program translates a packed font file
+.RI ( pk )
+(output by, for example,
+.BR gftopk (1)
+to a file that humans can read. It also serves as a
+.I pk
+file-validating program (i.e., if
+.B pktype
+can read it, it's correct) and as an example of a
+.IR pk -reading
+program for other software that wants to read
+.I pk
+files.
+.PP
+The
+.I pk_file
+on the command line must be complete. Because
+the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make
+sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or
+DVI-reading software. If no
+.I output_file
+is specified, the plain text translation is written to standard output.
+.PP
+The output file gives a compact encoding of the packed encoding, using
+conventions described in the source code. Run lengths of black pixels
+alternate with parenthesized run lengths of white pixels, and brackets
+are used to indicate when a row should be repeated.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.B pktype
+looks for
+.I pk_file
+using the environment variable PKFONTS. If that is not set, it uses
+the variable TEXPKS. If that is not set, it uses TEXFONTS. If that
+is not set, it uses the system default.
+.PP
+See
+.BR tex (1)
+for the details of the searching.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR dvitype (1),
+.BR gftopk (1),
+.BR gftype (1).
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth et al.,
+.IR \*(MFware .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Tomas Rokicki wrote the program.
+Donald E. Knuth originally ported it to Unix.
+Pierre MacKay adapted it for compilation with Web2c.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..497f565770f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+.TH PLTOTF 1 "27 December 1992" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if n .ds WB Web
+.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+pltotf \- convert property list files to TeX font metric (tfm) format
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pltotf
+[
+.B \-verbose
+]
+.I pl_file_name
+.I tfm_file_name
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B pltotf
+program translates a (human-oriented) \*(WB property list file to a
+(program-oriented) \*(TX font metric file. Thus, after editing the property
+list file, a TFM file can be generated for use with, for example,
+.BR tex (1).
+.PP
+Both the
+.I pl_file_name
+and the
+.I tfm_file_name
+must be complete; no adding of default extensions or path searching is done.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+Without the
+.B \-verbose
+option,
+.B pltotf
+operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on
+.IR stdout .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tftopl (1).
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR "\*(OXware" .
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR "The \*(MFbook" ,
+(Volume C of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as
+part of the
+.I \*(OXware
+technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group.
+Howard Trickey, Pavel Curtis, and Richard Furuta originally ported it to
+Unix.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2f50fdbc582
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.1
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+.TH POOLTYPE 1 "27 December 1992" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if n .ds WB Web
+.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+pooltype \- display a WEB pool file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pooltype
+.I pool_file_name
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B pooltype
+program translates a (program-oriented) \*(WB string pool file to a
+(human-oriented) text file.
+.PP
+The
+.I pool_file_name
+must be complete; no adding of default extensions or path searching is done.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tangle (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Donald E. Knuth wrote the program and originally ported it to Unix. It was
+published as part of the
+.I \*(OXware
+technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b572c5733c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.1
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+.TH ps2frag 1 "Feb 95" TeXware
+.SH NAME
+ps2frag - obsolete shell script for the PSfrag system.
+.SH IMPORTANT NOTICE
+The new PSfrag system no longer requires the ps2frag script; instead, it
+handles the processing entirely within TeX/LaTeX and DVIPS. I'm sure you
+will agree that never needing to run ps2frag again is a nice convenience!
+.P
+However, there are two significant differences in the way this new version
+of PSfrag works. Please make yourself aware of them:
+.P
+1) XDvi is no longer able to determine where your PSfrag replacements
+should
+go, so instead it lines them up in a vertical list to the left of the
+figure. This allows you to confirm that they have been typeset properly, at
+least. However, to confirm that PSfrag
+.B positions
+your replacements properly, you will have to view the PostScript
+version of your file with a viewer like GhostView, or print it out.
+This seems to be the
+only disadvantage to the elimination of the pre-processing step.
+.P
+2) If you embed '\\tex' commands inside your figures, you now need to
+explicitly _tell_ PSfrag to process these commands. To do so, use
+\\usepackage[scanall]{psfrag}
+instead of
+\\usepackage{psfrag}
+at the beginning of your LaTeX file.
+.P
+If you only use '\\tex' commands in a small number of figures, then a
+more efficient might be to turn on '\\tex'-scanning only for those
+figures. To do that, add the command '\\psfragscanon' immediately before
+each relevant \\includegraphics or \\epsfbox command.
+.P
+.SH NOTES
+See the PSfrag documentation for further information.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+dvips(1), gs(1), ghostview(1), latex(1)
+.SH AUTHORS
+.IP psfrag@rascals.stanford.edu
+The PSfrag maintainer's mailing list.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dbeed0cdbfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.1
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+.TH PS2PK 1 TeX
+.SH NAME
+ps2pk \- creates a TeX pkfont from a type1 PostScript font
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+ps2pk
+[ -v ]
+[ -e\fIenc\fP ]
+[ -X\fIxres\fP ]
+[ -E\fIexpansion\fP ]
+[ -S\fIslant\fP ]
+[ -P\fIpointsize\fP ]
+[ -R\fIbaseres\fP ]
+[ -r\fIaspectratio\fP ]
+[ -Y\fIyres\fP ]
+[ -a\fIAFMfile\fP ]
+[ -m\fImodename\fP ]
+type1 [pkfont]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This program renders a given type1 PostScript font at a given pointsize
+(default 10.0 points) and resolution (default 300dpi) into a TeX pkfont.
+.PP
+To generate the pkfont ps2pk needs a valid type1 font file (for
+example Utopia-Regular, Utopia-Regula.pfb or Utopia-Regula.pfa) and
+its corresponding AFM-file (Utopia-Regular.afm) with the font metrics.
+The program accepts both the binary type1 format (Utopia-Regula.pfb)
+and its ASCII equivalent (Utopia-Regular or Utopia-Regula.pfa). To
+locate the files, ps2pk uses the kpathsea library (see the info page
+on kpathsea). Additionally, pfb and pfa files are searched for in the
+directory specified in the environment variable T1INPUTS, and afm
+files are searched in AFMFONTS, if they are set (the -v flag will
+report which filenames are looked for).
+.PP
+The program will make a pkfont in which the character codes are derived
+from their AFM (Adobe Font Metrics) defined values. This can be
+overruled by specifying an explicit encoding file via the -e option.
+The encoding file \fIenc\fP
+should contain a valid PostScript encoding containing PostScript names
+like /hyphen. Here is an incomplete example (see afm2tfm for complete
+syntax):
+
+.RS
+.nf
+% This is the EC encoding.
+/ECEncoding [ % now 256 chars follow
+% 0x00
+ /grave /acute /circumflex /tilde /dieresis /hungarumlaut
+ /ring /caron /breve /macron /dotaccent /cedilla
+ /ogonek /quotesinglbase /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright
+
+ (Rest of lines omitted.)
+
+% 0xF0
+ /eth /ntilde /ograve /oacute /ocircumflex /otilde
+ /odieresis /oe /oslash /ugrave /uacute /ucircumflex
+ /udieresis /yacute /thorn /germandbls ] def
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+Options and arguments:
+.IP -a\fIAFMfile\fP 12
+Overrules the name that is used to locate the AFM file.
+
+.IP -e\fIenc\fP 12
+Name of a file containing an encoding scheme
+(default \- the encoding named in the AFM-file is used).
+The actual PostScript name of the encoding scheme is written
+as a "special" at the end of the pkfont.
+
+.IP -E\fIextension\fP 12
+The extension factor (real value, default 1.0).
+
+.IP -m\fImodename\fP 12
+A modename such as would be used by METAFONT (default "Unknown mode").
+
+.IP -P\fIpointsize\fP 12
+The desired pointsize (real value, default 10.0 points).
+
+.IP -R\fIbaseres\fP 12
+The desired base resolution (integer value, default 300 dpi).
+If this differs from the value of \fIxres\fP, the appropriate
+magnification will be shown in the "specials" at the end
+of the pkfont. If possible, this will be expressed as a
+magstep, otherwise as a real number. For example, a pkfont with an \fIxres\fP
+of 329, using the default base resolution of 300,
+will include the "special" text "mag=magstep(0.5)" at the
+end of the font.
+
+.IP -r\fIaspectratio\fP 12
+The desired aspect ratio (expression, integerY/integerX, default 300/300).
+This will be shown in the "specials" at the end
+of the pkfont. Setting the aspect ratio creates a value for
+\fIyres\fP but an explicit \fIyres\fP value will take precedence.
+Argument must be in "" if spaces are left around `/'.
+
+.IP -S\fIslant\fP 12
+The slant (real value, default 0.0).
+
+.IP -X\fIxres\fP 12
+The resolution in the X direction (integer value, default 300 dpi).
+
+.IP -Y\fIyres\fP 12
+The resolution in the Y direction (integer value, default the value
+of \fIxres\fP). If \fIyres\fP differs from \fIxres\fP, a "special"
+text giving the aspect ratio will be written at the end of the
+pkfont.
+
+.IP -v 12
+Verbose flag. (Tells what the program is doing.)
+
+.IP type1 12
+The name of the PostScript type1 font. The name of the AFM-file will be
+constructed from this name by removing the extension (if suplied) and
+adding ".afm". The PostScript "FontName" is extracted from the
+AFM-file and written into a "special" at the end of the pkfont.
+
+.IP [pkfont] 12
+The name of the resulting pkfont can be overruled with this name. The
+default name of pkfont is derived from the basename of the type1
+font, the pointsize and \fIxres\fP. For example
+`ps2pk -P17.28 Utopia-Regular' will result in `Utopia-Regular17.300pk'.
+An explicit value for the name of the pkfont is necessary when
+the type1 font name already shows the point size, otherwise
+the \fIpointsize\fP value is catenated on to the pkfont basename
+which is usually not what is wanted.
+
+.PP
+The following PK "specials" provide an internal check on the
+characteristics of the pkfont, in accordance with the recommendations
+of the TeX Working Group on the TeX Directory Standard (TWG-TDS):
+.br
+"fontid=\fIFontName\fP", "codingscheme=\fIEncoding\fP", "fontfacebyte", "mag",
+"mode=(ps2pk)\fImodename\fP", "pixels-per-inch", and "aspect-ratio" if it
+is other than unity.
+
+.SH ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
+This program uses the type1 hinting and rendering software IBM
+has donated to the X-consortium.
+
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.nf
+`METAFONT: The Program', Donald Knuth.
+`The GFtoPK processor', belonging to the METAFONTware.
+`Adobe Font Metric Files', Version 3.0, PostScript Developer
+Support Group.
+afm2tfm(1)
+pk2bm(1)
+kpsewhich(1)
+info kpathsea
+
+.SH VERSION
+1.4 (January 1994)
+
+.SH AUTHOR
+Piet Tutelaers <rcpt@urc.tue.nl>.
+Modified for ps2pkm by Pierre A. Mackay <mackay@cs.washington.edu>,
+This manpage was adapted to teTeX by Frank Kuester <frank@kuesterei.ch>.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..97cf6229455
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.1
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+.TH PSBOOK 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+psbook \- rearrange pages in PostScript file into signatures
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B psbook
+[
+.B \-q
+] [
+.B \-s\fIsignature\fR
+] [
+.I infile
+[
+.I outfile
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Psbook
+rearranges pages from a PostScript document into ``signatures'' for
+printing books or booklets, creating a new PostScript file. The
+input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring
+Conventions.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-s
+option selects the size of signature which will be used. The signature size is
+the number of sides which will be folded and bound together; the number given
+should be a multiple of four. The default is to use one signature for the
+whole file. Extra blank sides will be added if the file does not contain a
+multiple of four pages.
+.PP
+Psbook normally prints the page numbers of the pages rearranged; the
+.I \-q
+option suppresses this.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH BUGS
+.I Psbook
+does not accept all DSC comments.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c206596a6a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+.TH "pslatex" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+pslatex \- utility to typeset LaTeX files using PostScript fonts
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBpslatex\fP [\fILATEXARGS\fP] \fILATEXFILE\fP[\&.tex]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBpslatex\fP allows you to typeset a LaTeX source file using basic
+Adobe Type 1 PostScript fonts (Times, Helvetica, and Courier)
+\fIwithout\fP editing the file to load the necessary packages\&.
+.PP
+It takes any arguments that \fBlatex\fP(1) can take\&.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+None\&.
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+Many\&. See the readme file for \fIpslatex\&.sty\fP\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBlatex\fP(1), \fI\fITEXMF\fP/latex/pslatex/00readme\&.txt\fP
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known\&. Report any found to the author\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBpslatex\fP was written by David Carlisle
+<david@dcarlisle\&.demon\&.co\&.uk>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1f4b564930d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.1
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+.TH PSMERGE 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+psmerge \- filter to merge several PostScript files into one
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B psmerge
+[
+.B \-o\fIout.ps\fB
+]
+[
+.I file.ps ...
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Psmerge
+merges PostScript documents into a single document. It only works in the
+specific case the the files were created using the same application, with the
+same device setup and resources (fonts, procsets, patterns, files, etc)
+loaded.
+
+If the
+.B \-o
+option is used, output will be sent to the file named, otherwise it will go to
+standard output.
+
+.I Psmerge
+will merge multiple files concatenated into a single file as if they
+were in separate files.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH BUGS
+.I psmerge
+is for a very specific case; it does not merge files in the general case.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c90227c6070
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.1
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+.TH PSNUP 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+psnup \- multiple pages per sheet
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B psnup
+[
+.B \-w\fIwidth\fR
+] [
+.B \-h\fIheight\fR
+] [
+.B \-p\fIpaper\fR
+] [
+.B \-W\fIwidth\fR
+] [
+.B \-H\fIheight\fR
+] [
+.B \-P\fIpaper\fR
+] [
+.B \-l
+] [
+.B \-r
+] [
+.B \-f
+] [
+.B \-c
+] [
+.B \-m\fImargin\fR
+] [
+.B \-b\fIborder\fR
+] [
+.B \-d\fIlwidth\fR
+] [
+.B \-s\fIscale\fR
+] [
+.B \-\fInup\fR
+] [
+.B \-q
+] [
+.I infile
+[
+.I outfile
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Psnup
+puts multiple logical pages onto each physical sheet of paper.
+The input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring
+Conventions.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-w
+option gives the paper width, and the
+.I \-h
+option gives the paper height,
+normally specified in
+.B "cm"
+or
+.B "in"
+to convert
+PostScript's points (1/72 of an inch)
+to centimeters or inches.
+The
+.I \-p
+option can be used as an alternative, to set the paper size to
+.B a3, a4, a5, b5, letter, legal, tabloid, statement, executive, folio, quarto
+or
+.B 10x14.
+The default paper size is
+.B a4.
+The
+.I \-W, \-H,
+and
+.I \-P
+options set the input paper size, if it is different from the output
+size. This makes it easy to impose pages of one size on a different size of
+paper.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-l
+option should be used for pages which are in landscape orientation (rotated 90
+degrees anticlockwise). The
+.I \-r
+option should be used for pages which are in seascape orientation (rotated 90
+degrees clockwise), and the
+.I \-f
+option should be used for pages which have the width and height interchanged,
+but are not rotated.
+.PP
+.I Psnup
+normally uses `row-major' layout, where adjacent pages are placed in rows
+across the paper.
+The
+.I \-c
+option changes the order to `column-major', where successive pages are placed
+in columns down the paper.
+.PP
+A margin to leave around the whole page can be specified with the
+.I \-m
+option. This is useful for sheets of `thumbnail' pages, because the normal
+page margins are reduced by putting multiple pages on a single sheet.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-b
+option is used to specify an additional margin around each page on a sheet.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-d
+option draws a line around the border of each page, of the specified width.
+If the \fIlwidth\fR parameter is omitted, a default linewidth of 1 point is
+assumed. The linewidth is relative to the original page dimensions,
+\fIi.e.\fR it is scaled down with the rest of the page.
+.PP
+The scale chosen by
+.I psnup
+can be overridden with the
+.I \-s
+option. This is useful to merge pages which are already reduced.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-\fInup\fR
+option selects the number of logical pages to put on each sheet of paper. This
+can be any whole number;
+.I psnup
+tries to optimise the layout so that the minimum amount of space is wasted. If
+.I psnup
+cannot find a layout within its tolerance limit, it will abort with an error
+message. The alternative form
+.I \i \fInup\fR
+can also be used, for compatibility with other n-up programs.
+.PP
+.I Psnup
+normally prints the page numbers of the pages re-arranged; the
+.I \-q
+option suppresses this.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The potential use of this utility is varied but one particular
+use is in conjunction with
+.I psbook(1).
+For example, using groff to create a PostScript document and lpr as
+the
+.SM UNIX
+print spooler a typical command line might look like this:
+.sp
+groff -Tps -ms \fIfile\fP | psbook | psnup -2 | lpr
+.sp
+Where file is a 4 page document this command will result in a
+two page document printing two pages of \fIfile\fP per page and
+rearranges the page order to match the input pages 4 and 1
+on the first output page and
+pages 2 then 3 of the input document
+on the second output page.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH BUGS
+.I Psnup
+does not accept all DSC comments.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..034ab27d54c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.1
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+.TH PSRESIZE 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+psresize \- multiple pages per sheet
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B psresize
+[
+.B \-w\fIwidth\fR
+] [
+.B \-h\fIheight\fR
+] [
+.B \-p\fIpaper\fR
+] [
+.B \-W\fIwidth\fR
+] [
+.B \-H\fIheight\fR
+] [
+.B \-P\fIpaper\fR
+] [
+.B \-q
+] [
+.I infile
+[
+.I outfile
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Psresize
+rescales and centres a document on a different size of paper.
+The input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring
+Conventions.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-w
+option gives the output paper width, and the
+.I \-h
+option gives the output paper height, normally specified in
+.B "cm"
+or
+.B "in"
+to convert
+PostScript's points (1/72 of an inch)
+to centimeters or inches.
+The
+.I \-p
+option can be used as an alternative, to set the output paper size to
+.B a3, a4, a5, b5, letter, legal, tabloid, statement, executive, folio, quarto
+or
+.B 10x14.
+The default output paper size is
+.B a4.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-W
+option gives the input paper width, and the
+.I \-H
+option gives the input paper height.
+The
+.I \-P
+option can be used as an alternative, to set the input paper size.
+The default input paper size is
+.B a4.
+.PP
+.I Psresize
+normally prints the page numbers of the pages output; the
+.I \-q
+option suppresses this.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following command can be used to convert a document on A4 size paper to
+letter size paper:
+.sp
+psresize -PA4 -pletter in.ps out.ps
+.sp
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH BUGS
+.I Psresize
+does not accept all DSC comments.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..22a70bd6826
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.1
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+.TH PSSELECT 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+psselect \- select pages from a PostScript file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B psselect
+[
+.B \-q
+] [
+.B \-e
+] [
+.B \-o
+] [
+.B \-r
+] [
+.B \-p\fIpages\fR
+] [
+.I pages
+] [
+.I infile
+[
+.I outfile
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Psselect
+selects pages from a PostScript document, creating a new PostScript file. The
+input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring
+Conventions.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-e
+option selects all of the even pages; it may be used in conjunction with the
+other page selection options to select the even pages from a range of pages.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-o
+option selects all of the odd pages; it may be used in conjunction with the
+other page selection options.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-p\fIpages\fR
+option specifies the pages which are to be selected.
+.I Pages
+is a comma separated list of page ranges, each of which may be a page number,
+or a page range of the form \fIfirst\fR-\fIlast\fR. If \fIfirst\fR is omitted,
+the
+first page is assumed, and if \fIlast\fR is omitted, the last page is assumed.
+
+The prefix character `_' indicates that the page number is relative to the end
+of the document, counting backwards. If just this character with no page
+number is used, a blank page will be inserted.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-r
+option causes
+.I psselect
+to output the selected pages in reverse order.
+.PP
+Psselect normally prints the page numbers of the pages rearranged; the
+.I \-q
+option suppresses this.
+.PP
+If any of the
+.I \-r, \-e,
+or
+.I \-o
+options are specified, the page range must be given with the
+.I \-p
+option. This is for backwards compatibility with previous versions.
+
+.SH NOTES
+The page number given to
+.I psselect
+is the number of the page counting from the start or end of the file, starting
+at one. The actual page number in the document may be different.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH BUGS
+.I Psselect
+does not accept all DSC comments.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2b3cbe2bf3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.1
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+.TH PSTOPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17"
+.SH NAME
+pstops \- shuffle pages in a PostScript file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pstops
+[
+.B \-q
+] [
+.B \-b
+] [
+.B \-w\fIwidth\fR
+] [
+.B \-h\fIheight\fR
+] [
+.B \-p\fIpaper\fR
+] [
+.B \-d\fIlwidth\fR
+]
+.I pagespecs
+[
+.I infile
+[
+.I outfile
+] ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Pstops
+rearranges pages from a PostScript document, creating a new PostScript file.
+The input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring
+Conventions.
+.I Pstops
+can be used to perform a large number of arbitrary re-arrangements of
+Documents, including arranging for printing 2-up, 4-up, booklets, reversing,
+selecting front or back sides of documents, scaling, etc.
+.PP
+.I pagespecs
+follow the syntax:
+.RS
+.TP 12
+.I pagespecs
+.I = [modulo:]specs
+.TP
+.I specs
+.I = spec[+specs][,specs]
+.TP
+.I spec
+.I = [-]pageno[L][R][U][@scale][(xoff,yoff)]
+.RE
+.sp
+.I modulo
+is the number of pages in each block. The value of
+.I modulo
+should be greater than 0; the default value is 1.
+.I specs
+are the page specifications for the pages in each block. The value of the
+.I pageno
+in each
+.I spec
+should be between 0 (for the first page in the block) and \fImodulo\fR-1
+(for the last page in each block) inclusive.
+The optional dimensions
+.I xoff
+and
+.I yoff
+shift the page by the specified amount.
+.I xoff
+and
+.I yoff
+are in PostScript's points, but may be followed by the units
+.B "cm"
+or
+.B "in"
+to convert to centimetres or inches, or the flag
+.B "w"
+or
+.B "h"
+to specify as a multiple of the width or height.
+The optional parameters \fIL\fR, \fIR\fR, and \fIU\fR rotate the page left,
+right, or upside-down.
+The optional
+.I scale
+parameter scales the page by the fraction specified.
+If the optional minus sign is specified, the page is relative to the end of
+the document, instead of the start.
+
+If page \fIspec\fRs are separated by
+.B \+
+the pages will be merged into one page; if they are separated by
+.B \,
+they will be on separate pages.
+If there is only one page specification, with
+.I pageno
+zero, the \fIpageno\fR may be omitted.
+
+The shift, rotation, and scaling are performed
+in that order regardless of which order
+they appear on the command line.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-w
+option gives the width which is used by the
+.B "w"
+dimension specifier, and the
+.I \-h
+option gives the height which is used by the
+.B "h"
+dimension specifier. These dimensions are also used (after scaling) to set the
+clipping path for each page.
+The
+.I \-p
+option can be used as an alternative, to set the paper size to
+.B a3, a4, a5, b5, letter, legal, tabloid, statement, executive, folio, quarto
+or
+.B 10x14.
+The default paper size is
+.B a4.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-b
+option prevents any
+.B bind
+operators in the PostScript prolog from binding. This may be needed in cases
+where complex multi-page re-arrangements are being done.
+.PP
+The
+.I \-d
+option draws a line around the border of each page, of the specified width.
+If the \fIlwidth\fR parameter is omitted, a default linewidth of 1 point is
+assumed. The linewidth is relative to the original page dimensions,
+\fIi.e.\fR it is scaled up or down with the rest of the page.
+.PP
+Pstops normally prints the page numbers of the pages re-arranged; the
+.I \-q
+option suppresses this.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+This section contains some sample re-arrangements. To put two pages on one
+sheet (of A4 paper), the pagespec to use is:
+.sp
+.ce
+2:0L@.7(21cm,0)+1L@.7(21cm,14.85cm)
+.sp
+To select all of the odd pages in reverse order, use:
+.sp
+.ce
+2:-0
+.sp
+To re-arrange pages for printing 2-up booklets, use
+.sp
+.ce
+4:-3L@.7(21cm,0)+0L@.7(21cm,14.85cm)
+.sp
+for the front sides, and
+.sp
+.ce
+4:1L@.7(21cm,0)+-2L@.7(21cm,14.85cm)
+.sp
+for the reverse sides (or join them with a comma for duplex printing).
+.SH AUTHOR
+Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+psbook(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), epsffit(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psmerge(1), fixscribeps(1), getafm(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixmacps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), extractres(1), includeres(1)
+.SH TRADEMARKS
+.B PostScript
+is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
+.SH BUGS
+.I Pstops
+does not accept all DSC comments.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0142072a769
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.TH "rubibtex" "1" "October 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+rubibtex \- make a bibliography for (La)TeX using Russian
+letters as item names
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBrubibtex\fP \fIBASENAME\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBrubibtex\fP is used to run \fBbibtex\fP(1) on auxiliary files with
+Russian characters in item names (citation keys)\&. It is part of the
+T2 package\&.
+.PP
+\fBrubibtex\fP copies the auxiliary file to \fI/tmp\fP, uses
+\fBsed\fP(1) to convert Cyrillic character commands to their 8-bit
+ASCII equivalents; runs \fBbibtex\fP(1) on the modified file; and
+finally moves the original auxiliary file back (overwriting the
+modified file)\&.
+.PP
+\fBrubibtex\fP assumes that the \fBbibtex\fP(1) database (\f(CWbib\fP)
+files are encoded with the KOI8-R encoding\&.
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+.IP
+.IP "\fIbasename\&.aux\fP"
+LaTeX auxiliary file
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to the authors\&.
+.PP
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.PP
+The T2 package is Copyright 1997-1999 Werner Lemberg, Vladimir
+Volovich and any individual authors listed elsewhere in package files\&.
+.PP
+It may be distributed under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public
+License, either version 1\&.1 of this license or (at your option) any
+later version\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBbibtex\fP(1), \fBsed\fP(1),
+<ftp://ftp\&.vsu\&.ru/pub/tex/T2/README>\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+Werner Lemberg
+<wl@gnu\&.org>, Vladimir Volovich
+<TeX@vvv\&.vsu\&.ru>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
+.PP
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0fb271841d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.TH "rumakeindex" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+rumakeindex \- process a LaTeX index using Russian Cyrillic
+characters
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBrumakeindex\fP \fIbasename\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBrumakeindex\fP is used to run \fBmakeindex\fP(1) on \f(CWidx\fP files
+that use Russian characters\&. It is part of the T2 package\&.
+.PP
+\fBrumakeindex\fP runs \fBsed\fP(1) on the \f(CWidx\fP file to convert
+Cyrillic character commands to 8-bit ASCII characters; pipes the
+results through \fBmakeindex\fP(1); and then through \fBtr\fP(1)
+to do some final conversions\&. The results are placed in a KOI8-R
+encoded \f(CWind\fP file\&.
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+.IP
+.IP "\fIbasename\&.idx\fP"
+LaTeX index entry file
+.IP "\fIbasename\&.ilg\fP"
+LaTeX index log file
+.IP "\fIbasename\&.ind\fP"
+LaTeX processed index file
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to the authors\&.
+.PP
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.PP
+The T2 package is Copyright 1997-1999 Werner Lemberg, Vladimir
+Volovich and any individual authors listed elsewhere in package files\&.
+.PP
+It may be distributed under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public
+License, either version 1\&.1 of this license or (at your option) any
+later version\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBmakeindex\fP(1), \fBsed\fP(1), \fBtr\fP(1),
+<ftp://ftp\&.vsu\&.ru/pub/tex/T2/README>\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+Werner Lemberg
+<wl@gnu\&.org>, Vladimir Volovich
+<TeX@vvv\&.vsu\&.ru>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
+.PP
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..99436936cd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.1
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+.\" man page for sjisconv
+.
+.TH SJISCONV 1 11-Aug-2005 "CJK Version 4.6.0"
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.
+.\" and here the same for \LaTeX
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \
+.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX
+.\}
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.
+.\" \LaTeXe
+.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be
+.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font)
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v'
+.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v'
+.\}
+.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e
+.
+.\" a typewriter font
+.if t \{\
+.de C
+\fC\\$1\fP\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.if n \{\
+.de C
+\\$1\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== end of macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.
+.
+.SH NAME
+sjisconv \- convert a TeX document in SJIS encoding into `preprocessed'
+form.
+.
+.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B sjisconv
+<
+.I infile
+>
+.I outfile
+.
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+SJIS encoding for Japanese uses the characters
+.C { ,
+.C } ,
+and
+.C \e
+which have special meanings in \*(TX
+documents.
+.PP
+After processing a \*(LE
+document which contains SJIS characters with
+.B \%sjisconv
+you need not care about these special characters.
+.PP
+This filter is part of the
+.B CJK
+macro package for \*(LE.
+.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR bg5conv (1),
+.BR \%cefconv (1),
+.BR cef5conv (1),
+.BR \%cefsconv (1),
+.BR \%extconv (1),
+.br
+the
+.B CJK
+documentation files.
+.
+.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Werner Lemberg
+.C <wl@gnu.org>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0ae4d3eed57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.1
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+.ds V 1.32
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.TH T1ASCII 1 "" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1ascii \- convert PostScript Type 1 font from binary to ASCII
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1ascii
+\%[\fB\-l\fR \fIlength\fR]
+\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.BR t1ascii
+converts Adobe Type 1 font programs in PFB (binary) format to PFA
+(hexadecimal) format. If the file
+.I output
+is not specified output goes to the standard output.
+If the file
+.I input
+is not specified input comes from the standard input.
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-line\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num"
+Set the maximum length of encrypted lines in the output to
+.I num.
+(These are the lines consisting wholly of hexadecimal digits.) The default
+is 64.
+'
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-warnings ", " \-w
+Warn when the input font contains lines longer than 255 characters.
+Long lines don't strictly conform to Adobe's Document Structuring
+Conventions, and may cause problems with older software.
+'
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M t1binary 1 ,
+.M t1unmac 1 ,
+.M t1mac 1 ,
+.M t1asm 1 ,
+.M t1disasm 1
+.LP
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format"
+.SH AUTHORS
+Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu)
+.br
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
+.PP
+Ported to Microsoft C/C++ Compiler and MS-DOS operating system by
+Kai-Uwe Herbing (herbing@netmbx.netmbx.de).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..59d4db5e790
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+.ds V 1.32
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.TH T1ASM 1 "" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1asm \- assemble PostScript Type 1 font
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1asm
+\%[\fB\-a\fR|\fB\-b\fR]
+\%[\fB\-l\fR \fIlength\fR]
+\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B t1asm
+assembles Adobe Type 1 font programs into either PFA (hexadecimal) or PFB
+(binary) formats from a human-readable form. If the file
+.I output
+is not specified output goes to the standard output. If the file
+.I input
+is not specified input comes from the standard input.
+
+.B t1asm
+tokenizes the charstring data and performs eexec and charstring encryption
+as specified in the ``black book,''
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format."
+
+The input must have a line of the form
+.RS
+.nf
+.ft B
+/-|{string currentfile exch readstring pop}executeonly def
+.ft R
+.fi
+.RE
+which defines the command, in this case `\-|', that is to start charstring
+data. It is an error not to define such a command. Another common name for
+this command is `RD'.
+
+After the start of the
+.B Subrs
+array in the input, all open braces `{' not in a comment begin a
+charstring. Such a charstring is terminated by the next non-comment close
+brace `}'. Within such a charstring, only comments, integers, and valid
+charstring commands are allowed. Valid charstring command names can be
+found in
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format"
+and other documents describing the newer Type 2 opcodes. The format within
+a charstring is unimportant as long as integers and commands are separated
+by at least a one whitespace (space, tab, newline) character. Note that
+within charstrings, comments are discarded because they cannot be encoded.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a
+Output in PFA (ASCII) format.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b
+Output in PFB (binary) format. This is the default.
+.TP
+.BI \-\-block\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num"
+PFB only: Set the maximum output block length to
+.I num.
+The default length is as large as memory allows.
+.TP
+.BI \-\-line\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num"
+PFA only: Set the maximum length of encrypted lines in the output to
+.I num.
+(These are the lines consisting wholly of hexadecimal digits.) The default
+is 64.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+% t1asm Utopia-Regular.raw > Utopia-Regular.pfb
+% t1asm -a Utopia-Regular.raw > Utopia-Regular.pfa
+.fi
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M t1disasm 1 ,
+.M t1ascii 1 ,
+.M t1binary 1 ,
+.M t1unmac 1 ,
+.M t1mac 1
+.LP
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format"
+is available free from Adobe as a PDF file.
+http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/T1_SPEC.PDF
+.LP
+.I "The Type 2 Charstring Format,"
+also available from Adobe as a PDF file, describes the newer Type 2
+operators, which are also used in some multiple-master Type 1 fonts like
+Adobe Jenson and Kepler.
+http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/5177.Type2.pdf
+'
+.SH AUTHORS
+Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu)
+.br
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fc41bcacc87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.1
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+.ds V 1.32
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.TH T1BINARY 1 "" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1binary \- convert PostScript Type 1 font from ASCII to binary
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1binary
+\%[\fB\-l\fR \fIlength\fR]
+\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B t1binary
+converts Adobe Type 1 font programs in PFA (hexadecimal) format to PFB
+(binary) format. If the file
+.I output
+is not specified output goes to the standard output.
+If the file
+.I input
+is not specified input comes from the standard input.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP 5
+.BI \-\-block\-length= "length\fR, " \-l " length"
+Set the maximum length of sections in PFB output to
+.I length.
+The default length is as large as memory allows.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M t1ascii 1 ,
+.M t1unmac 1 ,
+.M t1mac 1 ,
+.M t1disasm 1 ,
+.M t1asm 1
+.LP
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format"
+.SH AUTHORS
+Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu)
+.br
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
+.PP
+Ported to Microsoft C/C++ Compiler and MS-DOS operating system by
+Kai-Uwe Herbing (herbing@netmbx.netmbx.de).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..381bfb1b607
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+.ds V 1.32
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.TH T1DISASM 1 "" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1disasm \- disassemble PostScript Type 1 font
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1disasm
+\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B t1disasm
+disassembles Adobe Type 1 font programs in either PFA (hexadecimal) or PFB
+(binary) formats into human-readable form. If the file
+.I output
+is not specified output goes to the standard output.
+If the file
+.I input
+is not specified input comes from the standard input.
+
+.B t1disasm
+performs eexec and charstring decryption as specified in the ``black
+book'',
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format."
+Additionally, the charstring binary tokens are expanded into human-readable
+text form, using the names given in the black book and later documents
+describing Type 2 opcodes.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+% t1disasm Utopia-Regular.pfb Utopia-Regular.raw
+% t1disasm Utopia-Regular.pfa Utopia-Regular.raw
+.fi
+
+In
+.B Subrs
+entries in Utopia-Regular.raw will look like
+.RS
+.nf
+.ft B
+dup 5 {
+ 8 111 vstem
+ -12 128 hstem
+ 707 -20 hstem
+ return
+ } |
+.ft R
+.fi
+.RE
+and the
+.B CharStrings
+entries like
+.RS
+.nf
+.ft B
+/exclam {
+ 58 242 hsbw
+ 6 callsubr
+ 5 4 callsubr
+ 63 707 rmoveto
+ -54 0 -5 -22 4 -45 rrcurveto
+ 40 -431 rlineto
+ 29 hlineto
+ 42 431 rlineto
+ 4 45 -5 22 -55 0 rrcurveto
+ closepath
+ 6 4 callsubr
+ -719 vmoveto
+ 243 callsubr
+ endchar
+ } |-
+.ft R
+.fi
+.RE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M t1asm 1 ,
+.M t1ascii 1 ,
+.M t1binary 1 ,
+.M t1unmac 1 ,
+.M t1mac 1
+.LP
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format"
+is available free from Adobe as a PDF file:
+http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/T1_SPEC.PDF
+.LP
+.I "The Type 2 Charstring Format,"
+also available from Adobe as a PDF file, describes the newer Type 2
+operators, which are also used in some multiple-master Type 1 fonts like
+Adobe Jenson and Kepler:
+http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/5177.Type2.pdf
+'
+.SH AUTHORS
+Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu)
+.br
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fd5778f88a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.1
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+.ds V 2.34
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.de Sp
+.if n .sp
+.if t .sp 0.4
+..
+.TH T1DOTLESSJ 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1dotlessj \- create a dotless-j PostScript Type 1 font
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1dotlessj
+\%[OPTIONS...]
+.I font
+.RI [ outputfile ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.BR T1dotlessj
+creates a PostScript Type\~1 font whose only character is a dotless 'j'
+matching the input font's design. It works simply by removing the dot from
+the input font's 'j'. The output font has three characters: '.notdef',
+\&'space', and 'uni0237', where 'uni0237' is the dotless 'j'. The command
+fails if the input font already has a dotless 'j' character, or if there
+seems to be no dot to remove. T1dotlessj writes the created PFA or PFB font
+to the standard output (but see the
+.B \-\-output
+option); if no input file is supplied, it reads a PFA or PFB font from the
+standard input.
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-output "=\fIfile\fR, " \-o " \fIfile"
+Send output to
+.I file
+instead of standard output.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b
+Output a PFB font. This is the default.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a
+Output a PFA font.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-name "=\fIname\fR, " \-n " \fIname"
+Set the output font's PostScript name to
+.IR name .
+The default is
+.IR InputFontName "LCDFJ."
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet
+Do not generate any error messages.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-h ", " \-\-help
+Print usage information and exit.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-v ", " \-\-version
+Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit.
+.PD
+'
+.SH "RETURN VALUES"
+.B T1dotlessj
+exits with one of the following values:
+.TP 5
+0
+A dotless-j font was successfully generated.
+.TP 5
+1
+The font already contained a dotless-j character.
+.TP 5
+2
+The font's "j" character had no dot to remove.
+.TP 5
+3
+The font had no "j" character.
+.TP 5
+>3
+An error occurred.
+'
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format"
+'
+.SH AUTHOR
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..54077ee6728
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.1
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+.ds V 2.34
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.de Sp
+.if n .sp
+.if t .sp 0.4
+..
+.TH T1LINT 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1lint \- check a PostScript Type 1 font for correctness
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1lint
+\%\fIfont\fR [\fIfont\fR...]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.BR T1lint
+checks PostScript Type 1 font programs for correctness. Any errors or
+variances from the specification are reported to standard error. If there
+are no errors, the command prints nothing. It exits with status 0 if all
+fonts were OK, and status 1 otherwise. If no input files are supplied,
+t1lint reads a font from the standard input.
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet
+Do not generate any error messages. The only output will be the exit
+status.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-h ", " \-\-help
+Print usage information and exit.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-v ", " \-\-version
+Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit.
+.PD
+'
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M t1disasm 1
+.LP
+.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format"
+'
+.SH AUTHOR
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..63a196da720
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.1
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+.ds V 1.32
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.TH T1MAC 1 "" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1mac \- translate a PFA or PFB PostScript Type 1 font into Macintosh format
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1mac
+\%[\fB\-\-macbinary\fR | \fB\-\-applesingle\fR |
+\fB\-\-appledouble\fR | \fB\-\-binhex\fR | \fB\-\-raw\fR]
+\%[\fB\-\-filename\fR \fIname\fR]
+\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B t1mac
+reads a PFA (hexadecimal) or PFB (binary) PostScript Type 1 font file and
+generates an equivalent Macintosh Type 1 font file. The output file can be
+in MacBinary II, AppleSingle, AppleDouble, or BinHex format, or it can be a
+raw resource fork. The default is MacBinary II; use an option to choose a
+different format. If the
+.I output
+file is not specified output goes to the standard output.
+.PP
+WARNING: The output of
+.B t1mac
+is not sufficient to use the font, since Macintoshes can't read raw Type 1
+fonts. You will need to create a font suitcase containing bitmap fonts if
+you do not have such a suitcase for the font already.
+.B t1mac
+cannot help you do this.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-raw ", " \-r
+Indicates that output should be a raw resource fork.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-macbinary
+Indicates that output should be in MacBinary I or II format. This is the
+default.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-applesingle
+Indicates that output should be in AppleSingle format.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-appledouble
+Indicates that output should be in AppleDouble format.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-binhex
+Indicates that output should be in BinHex 4.0 format.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-filename "=\fIname\fR, " \-n " \fIname\fR"
+Sets the Macintosh filename of the output font to \fIname\fR. The default
+is to construct the filename from the font's name using established
+Macintosh conventions. This option is not useful when output is a raw
+resource fork.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M t1unmac 1 ,
+.M t1ascii 1 ,
+.M t1binary 1 ,
+.M t1asm 1 ,
+.M t1disasm 1
+.SH AUTHORS
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..784a329a0e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.1
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+.ds V 2.34
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.de Sp
+.if n .sp
+.if t .sp 0.4
+..
+.TH T1REENCODE 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1reencode \- reencode a PostScript Type 1 font
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1reencode
+\%\-e ENCODING
+\%[OPTIONS...]
+.I font
+.RI [ outputfile ]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.BR T1reencode
+changes a PostScript Type\~1 font's embedded encoding. The reencoded font
+is written to the standard output (but see the
+.B \-\-output
+option). If no input font file is supplied,
+.B t1reencode
+reads a PFA or PFB font from the standard input.
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-encoding "=\fIfile\fR, " \-e " \fIfile"
+Read the encoding from
+.IR file ,
+which must contain an encoding in
+.M dvips 1
+format. Alternatively,
+.I file
+can be one of "StandardEncoding", "ISOLatin1Encoding", "ExpertEncoding",
+"ExpertSubsetEncoding", or "SymbolEncoding", in which case the
+corresponding standard encoding is used.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-encoding\-text "=\fItext\fR, " \-E " \fItext"
+Use the encoding in the
+.I text
+argument, which must be formatted as a
+.M dvips 1
+encoding. One of
+.B \-\-encoding
+and
+.B \-\-encoding\-text
+must be supplied.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-name "=\fIname\fR, " \-n " \fIname"
+Set the output font's PostScript name to
+.IR name .
+The default is the input font name followed by the encoding's name.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-full-name "=\fIname\fR, " \-N " \fIname"
+Set the output font's FullName to
+.IR name .
+The default is the input FullName followed by the encoding's name.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-output "=\fIfile\fR, " \-o " \fIfile"
+Send output to
+.I file
+instead of standard output.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b
+Output a PFB font. This is the default.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a
+Output a PFA font.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-h ", " \-\-help
+Print usage information and exit.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-version
+Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit.
+.PD
+'
+.SH "RETURN VALUES"
+.B T1reencode
+exits with value 0 if a reencoded font was successfully generated, and 1
+otherwise.
+'
+.SH "NOTES"
+.LP
+.B T1reencode
+should be used only in special situations. It's generally much better to
+use PostScript commands to reencode a font; for instance, executing the
+PostScript commands to generate two differently-encoded versions of a
+single font will take up much less memory than loading two
+.BR t1reencode d
+fonts.
+'
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+.PP
+This command reencodes Frutiger Roman in the ISO Latin\~1 encoding. The new
+font will have the PostScript name Frutiger-RomanISOLatin1Encoding.
+.Sp
+.nf
+ \fBt1reencode\fR \fB\-e\fR ISOLatin1Encoding FrutiRom.pfb \e
+ \fB\-o\fR FrutiRomISOL1.pfb
+.fi
+.Sp
+This series of commands, which use
+.M cfftot1 1
+and
+.M otftotfm 1
+as well as
+.B t1reencode
+itself, generate a version of Warnock Pro Regular with old-style figures in
+the slots for numbers (because of
+.BR otftotfm 's
+.BR \-f onum
+option). The new font will be called WarnockPro-RegularOsF.
+.Sp
+.nf
+ \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-f\fRonum WarnockPro-Regular.otf \e
+ \fB\-\-output\-encoding\fR /tmp/osf.enc
+ \fBcfftot1\fR WarnockPro-Regular.otf | \fBt1reencode\fR \fB\-e\fR /tmp/osf.enc \e
+ \fB\-n\fR WarnockPro-RegularOsF \fB\-N\fR "Warnock Pro Regular OsF" \e
+ \fB\-o\fR WarnoProRegOsF.pfb
+.fi
+'
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.IR "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" ,
+.M dvips 1 ,
+.M cfftot1 1 ,
+.M otftotfm 1
+'
+.SH AUTHOR
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@cs.ucla.edu)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..87816fe364f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.1
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+.ds V 2.34
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.de Sp
+.if n .sp
+.if t .sp 0.4
+..
+.TH T1TESTPAGE 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1testpage \- create a PostScript proof for a Type 1 font
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1testpage
+\%[\fIfont\fR]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.BR T1testpage
+creates a PostScript proof document for the specified Type 1 font file and
+writes it to the standard output. The proof shows every glyph in the
+font, including its glyph name and encoding. The
+.I font
+argument should be the name of a PFA or PFB font file. If it is omitted,
+t1testpage will read a font file from the standard input.
+.PP
+T1testpage is preliminary software.
+'
+.SH OPTIONS
+.PD 0
+.TP 5
+.BR \-g " \fIglyphs\fR, " \-\-glyph= \fIglyphs
+Print only glyphs matching
+.IR glyphs .
+The argument is a glyph pattern, using shell-like matching rules; thus,
+.BR "\-g " 'A*'
+will match the glyphs 'A', 'Atilde', and 'Ampersand', among others. You
+can give this option multiple times, or supply multiple space-separated
+patterns in a single option.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-s ", " \-\-smoke
+Print smoke proofs, one glyph per page. This option is preliminary.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-o " \fIfile\fR, " \-\-output= \fIfile
+Write the output proof to
+.I file
+instead of the standard output.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-h ", " \-\-help
+Print usage information and exit.
+'
+.Sp
+.TP 5
+.BR \-v ", " \-\-version
+Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit.
+.PD
+'
+.SH AUTHOR
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..deb6f252136
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.1
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+.ds V 1.32
+.de M
+.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3"
+..
+.TH T1UNMAC 1 "" "Version \*V"
+.SH NAME
+t1unmac \- translate a Mac PostScript Type 1 font into PFA or PFB format
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B t1unmac
+\%[\fB\-a\fR|\fB\-b\fR]
+\%[\fB\-r\fR]
+\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B t1unmac
+extracts POST resources from a Macintosh PostScript font file and creates a
+PFA (hexadecimal) or PFB (binary) font file. The file
+.I input
+should be in MacBinary I or II, AppleSingle, AppleDouble, or BinHex format,
+or it can be a raw resource fork. If the file is a raw resource fork, you
+need to give the `\-\-raw' option; otherwise
+.B t1unmac
+should automatically figure out what kind of file you have. If the file
+.I output
+is not specified output goes to the standard output.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a
+Output in PFA (ASCII) format.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b
+Output in PFB (binary) format. This is the default.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-raw ", " \-r
+Indicates that the input is a raw resource fork.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-macbinary
+Indicates that the input is in MacBinary I or II format.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-applesingle
+Indicates that the input is in AppleSingle format.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-appledouble
+Indicates that the input is in AppleDouble format.
+.TP 5
+.BR \-\-binhex
+Indicates that the input is in BinHex 4.0 format.
+.TP
+.BI \-\-block\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num"
+PFB only: Set the maximum output block length to
+.I num.
+The default length is as large as memory allows.
+.TP
+.BI \-\-line\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num"
+PFA only: Set the maximum length of encrypted lines in the output to
+.I num.
+(These are the lines consisting wholly of hexadecimal digits.) The default
+is 64.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.LP
+.M t1mac 1 ,
+.M t1ascii 1 ,
+.M t1binary 1 ,
+.M t1asm 1 ,
+.M t1disasm 1
+.SH AUTHORS
+Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu)
+.br
+Eddie Kohler (kohler@icir.org)
+.PP
+Ported to Microsoft C/C++ Compiler and MS-DOS operating system by
+Kai-Uwe Herbing (herbing@netmbx.netmbx.de).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..43a5da6f3e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.1
@@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
+.TH TANGLE 1 "20 October 2002" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if n .ds WB Web
+.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+tangle \- translate WEB to Pascal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tangle
+[
+.RI options
+]
+.I webfile[.web]
+[
+.I changefile[.ch]
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B tangle
+program converts a \*(WB
+source document into a Pascal program that may be compiled in the usual
+way with the on-line Pascal compiler (e.g.,
+.BR pc (1)).
+The output file is packed into lines of 72 characters or less, with
+the only concession to readability being the termination of lines at
+semicolons when this can be done conveniently.
+.PP
+The \*(WB language allows you to prepare a single document containing all
+the information that is needed both to produce a compilable Pascal
+program and to produce a well-formatted document describing the program
+in as much detail as the writer may desire. The user of \*(WB must be
+familiar with both \*(TX and Pascal. \*(WB also provides a relatively
+simple, although adequate, macro facility that permits a Pascal program
+to be written in small easily-understood modules.
+.PP
+The command line should have either one or two names on it.
+The first is taken as the \*(WB file (and
+.I .web
+is added if there is no
+extension).
+If there is another name, it is a change file (and
+.I .ch
+is added if there is
+no extension). The change file overrides parts of the \*(WB file,
+as described in the \*(WB system documentation.
+.PP
+The output files are a Pascal file and a string pool file,
+whose names are formed by adding
+.I .p
+and
+.I .pool
+respectively to the root of the \*(WB file name.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+This version of
+.B tangle
+understands the following options. Note that some of these options
+may render the output unsuitable for processing by a Pascal compiler.
+.TP
+.B --help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.BI --length \ number
+.rb
+Compare only the first
+.I number
+characters of identifiers when checking for collisions. The default
+is 32, the original
+.B tangle
+used 7.
+.TP
+.B --loose
+.rb
+When checking for collisions between identifiers, honor the settings
+of the
+.BR --lowercase ,
+.BR --mixedcase ,
+.BR --uppercase ,
+and
+.B --underline
+options. This is the default.
+.TP
+.B --lowercase
+.rb
+Convert all identifiers to lowercase.
+.TP
+.B --mixedcase
+.rb
+Retain the case of identifiers. This is the default.
+.TP
+.B --strict
+.rb
+When checking for collisions between identifiers, strip underlines and
+convert all identifiers to uppercase first.
+.TP
+.B --underline
+.rb
+Retain underlines (also known as underscores) in identifiers.
+.TP
+.B --uppercase
+.rb
+Convert all identifiers to uppercase. This is the behaviour of the
+original
+.BR tangle .
+.TP
+.B --version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR pc (1),
+.BR pxp (1)
+(for formatting
+.B tangle
+output when debugging),
+.BR tex (1).
+.PP
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR "The \*(WB System of Structured Documentation" .
+.PP
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR "Literate Programming" ,
+Computer Journal
+.BR 27 ,
+97\-111, 1984.
+.PP
+Wayne Sewell,
+.IR "Weaving a Program" ,
+Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1989, ISBN 0-442-31946-0.
+.PP
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.I "\*(OX: The Program"
+(Volume B of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13437-3.
+.PP
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.I "\*(MF: The Program"
+(Volume D of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13438-1.
+.PP
+These last two are by far the largest extant examples of \*(WB
+programs.
+.PP
+There is an active Internet electronic mail discussion list on the
+subject of literate programming; send a subscription request to
+.I litprog-request@shsu.edu
+to join.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+\*(WB was designed by Donald E. Knuth, based on an earlier system
+called DOC (implemented by Ignacio Zabala).
+The
+.B tangle
+and
+.B weave
+programs are themselves written in \*(WB. The system
+was originally ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and at
+Cornell by Pavel Curtis.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tcdialog.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tcdialog.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..73931f1c4ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tcdialog.1
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+.TH DIALOG 1 "10 January 1994"
+.SH NAME
+dialog \- display dialog boxes from shell scripts
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B dialog --clear
+.br
+.BI "dialog --create-rc " file
+.br
+.B dialog
+[
+.B \-\-title
+.I title
+]
+[
+.B \-\-clear
+]
+.B box-options
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B Dialog
+is a program that will let you to present a variety of questions or
+display messages using dialog boxes from a shell script. Currently,
+these types of dialog boxes are implemented:
+.LP
+.BR yes/no " box," " menu" " box," " input" " box,"
+.BR message " box," " text" " box," " info" " box, and"
+.BR checklist " box."
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-\-clear
+The screen will be cleared to the
+.BR "screen attribute" " on exit."
+.TP
+.BI \-\-create-rc " file"
+.RB "Since " dialog " supports run-time configuration,"
+this can be used to dump a sample configuration file to the file specified
+by
+.IR file "."
+.TP
+.BI \-\-title " title"
+Specifies a
+.I title
+string to be displayed at the top of the dialog box.
+.TP
+.B Box Options
+.TP
+.BI \-\-yesno " text height width"
+.RB A " yes/no" " dialog box of size"
+.I height
+rows by
+.I width
+columns will be displayed. The string specified by
+.I text
+is displayed inside the dialog box. If this string is too long to be fitted
+in one line, it will be automatically divided into multiple lines at
+appropriate places. The
+.I text
+string may also contain the sub-string
+.I
+"\en"
+or newline characters
+.I `\en\'
+to control line breaking explicitly. This dialog box is useful for
+asking questions that require the user to answer either yes or no.
+.RB "The dialog box has a" " Yes" " button and a " No
+button, in which the user can switch between by pressing the
+.IR TAB " key."
+.TP
+.BI \-\-msgbox " text height width"
+.RB A " message" " box is very similar to a" " yes/no" " box."
+The only difference between a
+.B message
+box and a
+.B yes/no
+box is that a
+.B message
+box has only a single
+.B OK
+button. You can use this dialog box to display any message you like.
+After reading the message, the user can press the
+.I ENTER
+key so that
+.B dialog
+will exit and the calling shell script can continue its operation.
+.TP
+.BI \-\-infobox " text height width"
+.RB An " info" " box is basically a" " message" " box."
+However, in this case,
+.B dialog
+will exit immediately after displaying the message to the user. The
+screen is not cleared when
+.B dialog
+exits, so that the message will remain on the screen until the calling
+shell script clears it later. This is useful when you want to inform
+the user that some operations are carrying on that may require some
+time to finish.
+.TP
+.BI \-\-inputbox " text height width"
+.RB "An " input " box is useful when you want to ask questions that"
+require the user to input a string as the answer. When inputing the
+string, the
+.I BACKSPACE
+key can be used to correct typing errors. If the input string is longer than
+can be fitted in the dialog box, the input field will be scrolled. On exit,
+the input string will be printed on
+.IR stderr "."
+.TP
+.BI \-\-textbox " file height width"
+.RB A " text" " box lets you display the contents of a text file in a"
+dialog box. It is like a simple text file viewer. The user can move
+through the file by using the
+.IR UP/DOWN ", " PGUP/PGDN
+.RI and " HOME/END" " keys available on most keyboards."
+If the lines are too long to be displayed in the box, the
+.I LEFT/RIGHT
+keys can be used to scroll the text region horizontally. For more
+convenience, forward and backward searching functions are also provided.
+.IP "\fB\-\-menu \fItext height width menu-height \fR[ \fItag item \fR] \fI..."
+As its name suggests, a
+.B menu
+box is a dialog box that can be used to present a list of choices in
+the form of a menu for the user to choose. Each menu entry consists of a
+.IR tag " string and an " item " string. The"
+.I tag
+gives the entry a name to distinguish it from the other entries in the
+menu. The
+.I item
+is a short description of the option that the entry represents. The
+user can move between the menu entries by pressing the
+.I UP/DOWN
+keys, the first letter of the
+.I tag
+as a hot-key, or the number keys
+.IR 1-9 ". There are"
+.I menu-height
+entries displayed in the menu at one time, but the menu will be
+scrolled if there are more entries than that. When
+.B dialog
+exits, the
+.I tag
+of the chosen menu entry will be printed on
+.IR stderr "."
+.IP "\fB\-\-checklist \fItext height width list-height \fR[ \fItag item status \fR] \fI..."
+.RB "A " checklist " box is similar to a " menu " box in that there are"
+multiple entries presented in the form of a menu. Instead of choosing
+one entry among the entries, each entry can be turned on or off by the
+user. The initial on/off state of each entry is specified by
+.IR status "."
+On exit, a list of the
+.I tag
+strings of those entries that are turned on will be printed on
+.IR stderr "."
+.SH "RUN-TIME CONFIGURATION"
+.TP 4
+1.
+Create a sample configuration file by typing:
+.LP
+.in +1i
+"dialog --create-rc <file>"
+.TP 4
+2.
+At start,
+.B dialog
+determines the settings to use as follows:
+.RS
+.TP 4
+a)
+if environment variable
+.B DIALOGRC
+is set, it's value determines the name of the configuration file.
+.TP 4
+b)
+if the file in (a) can't be found, use the file
+.I $HOME/.dialogrc
+as the configuration file.
+.TP 4
+c)
+if the file in (b) can't be found, use compiled in defaults.
+.RE
+.TP 4
+3.
+Edit the sample configuration file and copy it to some place that
+.B dialog
+can find, as stated in step 2 above.
+.SH ENVIROMENT
+.TP 15
+.B DIALOGRC
+Define this variable if you want to specify the name of the configuration file
+to use.
+.SH FILES
+.TP 20
+.I $HOME/.dialogrc
+default configuration file
+.SH DIAGNOSTICS
+Exit status is 0 if
+.BR dialog " is exited by pressing the " Yes " or " OK
+button, and 1 if the
+.BR No " or " Cancel
+button is pressed. Otherwise, if errors occur inside
+.B dialog
+or
+.B dialog
+is exited by pressing the
+.I ESC
+key, the exit status is -1.
+.SH BUGS
+Text files containing
+.I tab
+characters may cause problems with
+.B text
+box.
+.I Tab
+characters in text files must first be expanded to spaces before being
+.RB "displayed by " text " box."
+.TP
+Screen update is too slow.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Savio Lam <lam836@cs.cuhk.hk>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e13fecc48b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,541 @@
+.TH TEX 1 "21 August 2004" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if n .ds WB Web
+.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0
+.\" EX and EE are used for displays that are pure code
+.de EX
+.nf
+.ft CW
+..
+.de EE
+.ft R
+.fi
+..
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+tex, virtex, initex \- text formatting and typesetting
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tex
+.RI [ options ]
+[\fB&\fR \fIformat\fR ]
+[ \fIfile\fR | \fB\e\fR \fIcommands\fR ]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Run the \*(TX typesetter on
+.IR file ,
+usually creating
+.IR file.dvi .
+If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it.
+Instead of a filename, a set of \*(TX commands can be given, the first
+of which must start with a backslash.
+With a
+.BI & format
+argument \*(TX uses a different set of precompiled commands,
+contained in
+.IR format.fmt ;
+it is usually better to use the
+.B -fmt
+.I format
+option instead.
+.PP
+\*(TX
+formats the interspersed text and commands contained in the named
+files
+and outputs a typesetter independent file (called
+.IR DVI ,
+which is short for
+.IR "DeVice Independent" ).
+\*(TX's capabilities and language are described in
+.IR "The \*(OXbook" .
+\*(TX
+is normally used with a large body of precompiled macros,
+and there are several specific formatting systems, such as
+\*(LX,
+which require the support of several macro files.
+.PP
+This version of \*(TX looks at its command line to see what name it
+was called under. If they exist, then both
+.B initex
+and
+.B virtex
+are symbolic links to the
+.B tex
+executable. When called as
+.BR initex
+(or when the
+.B -ini
+option is given) it can be used to precompile macros into a
+.I .fmt
+file. When called as
+.B virtex
+it will use the
+.I plain
+format. When called under any other name, \*(TX will use that name as
+the name of the format to use. For example, when called as
+.B tex
+the
+.I tex
+format is used, which is identical to the
+.I plain
+format. The commands defined by the
+.I plain
+format are documented in
+.IR "The \*(OXbook" .
+Other formats that are often available include
+.I latex
+and
+.IR amstex .
+.PP
+The non-option command line arguments to the
+\*(TX
+program are passed to it as the first input line. (But it is often
+easier to type extended arguments as the first input line, since UNIX
+shells tend to gobble up or misinterpret \*(TX's favorite symbols,
+like backslashes, unless you quote them.)
+As described in
+.IR "The \*(OXbook" ,
+that first line should begin with a filename, a
+.IR \econtrolsequence ,
+or a
+.IR &formatname .
+.PP
+The normal usage is to say
+.EX
+tex paper
+.EE
+to start processing
+.IR paper.tex .
+The name
+.I paper
+will be the ``jobname'', and is used in forming
+output filenames.
+If \*(TX doesn't get a filename in the first line, the jobname is
+.IR texput .
+When looking for a file, \*(TX looks for the name with and without the
+default extension
+.RI ( .tex )
+appended, unless the name already contains that extension. If
+.I paper
+is the ``jobname'',
+a log of error messages, with rather more detail than normally appears
+on the screen, will appear in
+.IR paper.log ,
+and the output file will be in
+.IR paper.dvi .
+.PP
+This version of \*(TX can look in the first line of the file
+.I paper.tex
+to see if it begins with the magic sequence
+.IR %& .
+If the first line begins with
+.BI %& format
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+then \*(TX will use the named format and transation table
+.I tcxname
+to process the source file. Either the format name or the
+.B -translate-file
+specification may be omitted, but not both. This overrides the
+format selection based on the name by which the program is invoked.
+The
+.B -parse-first-line
+option or the
+.B parse_first_line
+configuration variable controls whether this behaviour is enabled.
+.PP
+The
+.I e
+response to \*(TX's error prompt causes the system default editor to
+start up at the current line of the current file. The environment
+variable TEXEDIT can be used to change the editor used. It may
+contain a string with "%s" indicating where the filename goes and "%d"
+indicating where the decimal line number (if any) goes. For example,
+a TEXEDIT string for
+.B emacs
+can be set with the
+.B sh
+command
+.EX
+\fITEXEDIT="emacs +%d %s"; export TEXEDIT\fP
+.EE
+.PP
+A convenient file in the library is
+.IR null.tex ,
+containing nothing.
+When \*(TX can't find a file it thinks you want to input, it keeps
+asking you for another filename; responding `null' gets you out
+of the loop if you don't want to input anything. You can also type your
+EOF character (usually control-D).
+.PP
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+This version of \*(TX understands the following command line options.
+.TP
+.B -enc
+.rb
+Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in
+combination with
+.BR -ini .
+For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see
+.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html .
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error
+.rb
+Print error messages in the form
+.I file:line:error
+which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
+.TP
+.B -no-file-line-error
+.rb
+Disable printing error messages in the
+.I file:line:error
+style.
+.TP
+.B -file-line-error-style
+.rb
+This is the old name of the
+.B -file-line-error
+option.
+.TP
+.BI -fmt \ format
+.rb
+Use
+.I format
+as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
+\*(TX was called or a
+.I %&
+line.
+.TP
+.B -halt-on-error
+.rb
+Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing.
+.TP
+.B -help
+.rb
+Print help message and exit.
+.TP
+.B -ini
+.rb
+Start in
+.I INI
+mode, which is used to dump formats. The
+.I INI
+mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and
+basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required.
+.TP
+.BI -interaction \ mode
+.rb
+Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either
+.IR batchmode ,
+.IR nonstopmode ,
+.IR scrollmode ,
+and
+.IR errorstopmode .
+The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
+\ecommands.
+.TP
+.B -ipc
+.rb
+Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether
+this option is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.B -ipc-start
+.rb
+As
+.BR -ipc ,
+and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
+is available is the choice of the installer.
+.TP
+.BI -jobname \ name
+.rb
+Use
+.I name
+for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
+.TP
+.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
+.rb
+Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
+.I Kpathsea
+manual for details.
+.TP
+.BI -mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Enable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.B -mltex
+.rb
+Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with
+.BR -ini .
+.TP
+.BI -no-mktex \ fmt
+.rb
+Disable
+.RI mktex fmt ,
+where
+.I fmt
+must be either
+.I tex
+or
+.IR tfm .
+.TP
+.BI -output-comment \ string
+.rb
+Use
+.I string
+for the
+.I DVI
+file comment instead of the date.
+.TP
+.BI -output-directory \ directory
+.rb Write output files in
+.I directory
+instead of the current directory. Look up input files in
+.I directory
+first, the along the normal search path.
+.TP
+.B -parse-first-line
+.rb
+If the first line of the main input file begins with
+.I %&
+parse it to look for a dump name or a
+.B -translate-file
+option.
+.TP
+.B -no-parse-first-line
+.rb
+Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file.
+.TP
+.BI -progname \ name
+.rb
+Pretend to be program
+.IR name .
+This affects both the format used and the search paths.
+.TP
+.B -recorder
+.rb
+Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened
+for input and output in a file with extension
+.IR .fls .
+.TP
+.B -shell-escape
+.rb
+Enable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct. The
+.I command
+can be any shell command. This construct is normally
+disallowed for security reasons.
+.TP
+.B -no-shell-escape
+.rb
+Disable the
+.BI \ewrite18{ command }
+construct, even if it is enabled in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file.
+.TP
+.B -src-specials
+.rb
+Insert source specials into the
+.I DVI
+file.
+.TP
+.BI -src-specials \ where
+.rb
+Insert source specials in certain places of the
+.I DVI
+file.
+.I where
+is a comma-separated value list:
+.IR cr ,
+.IR display ,
+.IR hbox ,
+.IR math ,
+.IR par ,
+.IR parent ,
+or
+.IR vbox .
+.TP
+.BI -translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Use the
+.I tcxname
+translation table to set the mapping of input characters and
+re-mapping of output characters.
+.TP
+.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname
+.rb
+Like
+.B -translate-file
+except that a
+.I %&
+line can overrule this setting.
+.TP
+.B -version
+.rb
+Print version information and exit.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
+node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
+The
+.B kpsewhich
+utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
+.PP
+One caveat: In most \*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
+give directly to \*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
+expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
+\*(MF, do not have this problem.
+.PP
+.TP
+TEXMFOUTPUT
+Normally, \*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If
+any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
+directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
+There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+.I tex paper
+and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
+the value
+.IR /tmp ,
+\*(TX attempts to create
+.I /tmp/paper.log
+(and
+.IR /tmp/paper.dvi ,
+if any output is produced.)
+.TP
+TEXINPUTS
+Search path for
+.I \einput
+and
+.I \eopenin
+files.
+This should probably start with ``.'', so
+that user files are found before system files. An empty path
+component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+.I texmf.cnf
+file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
+current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
+.TP
+TEXFORMATS
+Search path for format files.
+.TP
+TEXPOOL
+search path for
+.B tex
+internal strings.
+.TP
+TEXEDIT
+Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+.BR vi ,
+is set when \*(TX is compiled.
+.TP
+TFMFONTS
+Search path for font metric
+.RI ( .tfm )
+files.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
+system. Use the
+.B kpsewhich
+utility to find their locations.
+.TP
+.I texmf.cnf
+Configuration file. This contains definitions of search paths as well
+as other configuration parameters like
+.BR parse_first_line .
+.TP
+.I tex.pool
+Text file containing \*(TX's internal strings.
+.TP
+.I texfonts.map
+Filename mapping definitions.
+.TP
+.I *.tfm
+Metric files for \*(TX's fonts.
+.TP
+.I *.fmt
+Predigested \*(TX format (.\|fmt) files.
+.TP
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/plain/base/plain.tex
+The basic macro package described in the \*(OXbook.
+.br
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NOTES
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH BUGS
+This version of \*(TX implements a number of optional extensions.
+In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
+extent with the definition of \*(TX. When such extensions are
+enabled, the banner printed when \*(TX starts is changed to print
+.B TeXk
+instead of
+.BR TeX .
+.PP
+This version of \*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
+dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
+but when it does the generated
+.I DVI
+file will be invalid.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR mf (1),
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR "The \*(OXbook" ,
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13447-0.
+.br
+Leslie Lamport,
+.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" ,
+Addison-Wesley, 1985, ISBN 0-201-15790-X.
+.br
+K. Berry,
+.IR "Eplain: Expanded plain \*(TX" ,
+ftp://ftp.cs.umb.edu/pub/tex/eplain/doc.
+.br
+Michael Spivak,
+.IR "The Joy of \*(OX" ,
+2nd edition, Addison-Wesley, 1990, ISBN 0-8218-2997-1.
+.br
+.I TUGboat
+(the journal of the \*(TX Users Group).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH TRIVIA
+\*(TX, pronounced properly, rhymes with ``blecchhh.'' The proper
+spelling in typewriter-like fonts is ``TeX'' and not ``TEX'' or ``tex.''
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth,
+who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs.
+It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and
+at Cornell by Pavel Curtis.
+The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that
+generated by the \*(WB to C system
+.RB ( web2c ),
+originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan.
+.PP
+The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..5d3f79303b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+texconfig.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..30cb0ea7e90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.1
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+.TH texconfig 1 "February 2005" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.SH NAME
+texconfig \- configures teTeX
+.LP
+texconfig-sys \- configures teTeX system\-wide
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B texconfig
+.LP
+.B texconfig-sys
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I texconfig
+allows to configure and maintain
+.I teTeX
+in an easy and convenient manner. It uses the
+.I dialog
+program to draw nice input boxes. After answering the dialoges, the
+appropriate files are changed automatically and all necessary
+steps are involved to apply the new settings.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR dialog (1),
+.IR initex (1),
+.IR mf (1),
+.IR vi (1),
+.IR EDITOR
+environment-variable.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Thomas Esser <te@dbs.uni-hannover.de>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9d680c35b0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.1
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+.\" EX and EE are used for displays that are pure code
+.de EX
+.nf
+.ft CW
+.in +5
+..
+.de EE
+.in -5
+.ft R
+.fi
+..
+.TH "texdoc" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+texdoc \- Utility to look up TeX documentation
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBtexdoc\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP \&.\&.\&. ] \fINAME\fP [ \&.\&.\&. ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBtexdoc\fP seaches for \fINAME\fP in the TeX documentation and
+starts an appropriate viewer\&.
+.PP
+\fINAME\fP should be the name of a command or package in the teTeX
+distribution\&.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--help\fP"
+Display a brief summary of options\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB-l\fP"
+List matching files\&. Does not start a viewer\&.
+.IP "\fB-v\fP"
+Sets verbose mode\&. Shows the command being used to
+display the documentation\&.
+.PP
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB$TEXDOCVIEW_dvi\fP"
+DVI viewer\&. Defaults to \fBxdvi\fP(1)\&.
+.IP "\fB$TEXDOCVIEW_pdf\fP"
+PDF viewer\&. Defaults to \fBacroread\fP(1)\&.
+.IP "\fB$TEXDOCVIEW_ps\fP"
+PostScript viewer\&. Defaults to
+\fBghostview\fP(1)\&.
+.IP "\fB$TEXDOCVIEW_html\fP"
+HTML viewer\&. Defaults to \fBnetscape\fP(1)\&.
+.IP "\fB$TEXDOCVIEW_txt\fP"
+Text viewer\&. Defaults to \fB$PAGER-more\fP\&.
+.PP
+The environment variables should be set with a ``%s\&'\&' as a placeholder
+for the name of the file\&. For example,
+.PP
+.EX
+hostname% setenv TEXDOCVIEW_pdf "gv %s"
+.EE
+.PP
+or
+.PP
+.EX
+hostname$ TEXDOCVIEW_html="mozilla %s"
+
+hostname$ export TEXDOCVIEW_html
+.EE
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBacroread\fP(1), \fBgv\fP(1), \fBkpsewhich\fP(1),
+\fBless\fP(1), \fBmore\fP(1), \fBxdvi\fP(1)
+.PP
+Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/>
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBtexdoc\fP was written by Thomas Esser
+<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de>, David Aspinall
+<da@dcs\&.ed\&.ac\&.uk>, and
+Simon Wilkinson
+<sxw@dcs\&.ed\&.ac\&.uk> during 1998 and 1999\&. \fBtexdoc\fP is in the public
+domain\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..03bb298c7a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.1
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+.TH TEXDOCTK 1
+.SH NAME
+texdoctk \- GUI for easier access of TeX package and program documentations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B texdoctk
+-[aq]
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.B texdoctk
+is a GUI for easier access to a large part of the vast amount
+of package and program documentations and tutorials for TeX and its
+different derivates (mainly LaTeX). It is optimized and included in
+the teTeX and fpTeX distributions and also available with TeXLive.
+.PP
+The documentation is grouped into 17 categories; the 18th button of the main
+panel is inactive by default and intended for use with local additions (see
+section
+.B CONFIGURATION
+below).
+.PP
+In the settings window you see a checkbox in the html->ps and text->ps
+converter menus for switching on/off output redirect. This is due to the fact
+that some converters do not write their output into a file but to stdout by
+default, so a redirect is needed, e.g.
+.PP
+a2ps myfile.txt >myfile.ps
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.TP
+.I "\-v"
+verbose: enable some viewer messages which are otherwise sent to stderr,
+as well as some warning popup windows. This can also be set in a
+configuration file.
+.TP
+.I "\-a"
+autoview: autostart viewer if a listbox contains only one item (this will
+frequently happen in search results). This can also be set in a configuration
+file.
+.SH "CONFIGURATION"
+.PP
+The configuration is controlled by the system default concfiguration file
+($TEXMFMAIN)/texdoctk/texdocrc.defaults, most of whose entries can though be
+overridden by the users' own optional ~/.texdocrc files and/or command line
+options.
+.SS The Settings menu and configuration files
+.PP
+The Settings menu is used to change the user-definable settings of \fBtexdoctk\fP
+for the duration of the programm call or as new defaults. The latter case is
+the purpose of the Save button, which generates or rewrites the user's own
+~/.texdocrc file. The system defaults cannot be edited with the Settings
+menu.
+.TP
+Paths
+The TEXMF-type paths on the system are reported, and the user can specify the
+name of the subdirectory of $HOMETEXMF, where the personal documentation is
+stored.
+.TP
+General viewer behaviour
+
+.I Suppress error messages
+toggle verbose mode (see option -v); default is off.
+
+.I Autostart viewer for one-item listboxes
+if a listbox contains only one item (see option -a)
+
+.I Use text viewer for unknown file format
+i.e. treat the file as plain text. \fBtexdoctk\fP should recognize the usual file
+formats and also relate names like README to plain text, but some docs may have
+freely invented names. Default is on; if switched off, trying to view such
+files will raise an error. The switch does not influence printing: unrecognized
+formats cannot be printed.
+
+.I Change viewer colours
+using either RGB triplets in the format #rrggbb or the standardized names.
+.TP
+DVI/PostScript/PDF/HTML/Plain text
+For text files, \fBtexdoctk\fP provides an own viewer. If this viewer is disabled,
+but no alternative viewer is specified, \fBtexdoctk\fP tries to read the content
+of the environment variable $PAGER.
+
+If you want to print the documentations, you will need converters to turn
+non-PS files into PostScript. Here are some suggestions:
+
+\& dvi->ps:
+dvips (is part of teTeX) (http://www.radicaleye.com/dvips.html)
+
+\& pdf->ps:
+pdf2ps (http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost) or
+Acrobat Reader (http://www.adobe.com)
+
+\& html->ps: html2ps (http://user.it.uu.se/~jan/html2ps.html)
+
+\& plain text->ps: a2ps (http://www-inf.enst.fr/~demaille/a2ps/)
+
+The html->ps and text->ps converter menus for switching on/off output redirect.
+This is due to the fact that some converters do not write their output into a
+file but to stdout by default, so a redirect is needed, e.g.
+.B a2ps myfile.txt >myfile.ps
+.PP
+The system-wide configuration file is ($TEXMFMAIN)/texdoctk/texdocrc.defaults
+and should only be writeable by the administrator of the installation using any
+text editor. The optional user configuration file is ~/.texdocrc and can
+override all but those system settings which affect the installation as a
+whole. The preferred way of changing it is through the Settings menu.
+.SS The databases
+\fBtexdoctk\fP comes with a default database file ($TEXMFMAIN)/texdoctk/texdoctk.dat
+with a special format. It is divided into 17 sections corresponding to the
+17 buttons that are active by default. Each section begins with a line
+
+@\fIsection_name\fP
+
+where
+.I section_name
+is the text as it appears in the button. This title is
+followed by the descriptive entries for each documentation, which have this
+format:
+
+\fIpackage-label\fP;Short description for listbox (opt. \fIpackage-name\fP);path in doc directory;optional keywords
+
+(without breaking the line!). Comments (initiated with a #) and empty lines
+are ignored by the program. The second field is the text displayed in the
+selection listboxes of \fBtexdoctk\fP, and you will usually want to mention the name
+of the package in parens along with it; the first field is a \fBunique\fP label
+for the package for internal use of the program which will usually be chosen
+identical to the package name, but can be different if there is more than one
+documentation file coming with a package.
+.PP
+The administrator will probably install additional packages in the local texmf
+tree. The corresponding documentation can be made accessible by an additional
+database $TEXMFLOCAL/texdoctk/texdoctk-local.dat. Furthermore, individual
+users possibly install additional packages in an texmf subdirectory of their
+$HOME, for which they can make an individual database themselves as
+$TEXMFHOME/texdoctk/texdoctk-pers.dat. After creating such files, texhash
+must be executed.
+.PP
+Both types of databases must have the same structure as the system database,
+although they need (and should) not include all its sections if there are no
+additional entries. For example, if the the package
+.I foo
+is added to the local tree such that its documentation file is
+($TEXMFLOCAL)/doc/latex/foo/foo.dvi and it is decided that it fits best into
+the existing category Graphics, texdoctk-local.dat would look like this:
+
+@Graphics
+.br
+foo;Create bells and whistles (foo);latex/foo/foo.dvi;decoration
+
+The entry for
+.I foo
+will then be appended to the list of entries in the Graphics category. The 18th
+button can be activated in the same way, but using a new category name;
+possible entries at the beginning of the database which have not been assigned
+to a category will be assigned to the default Miscellaneous, making the 18th
+button active with that label. Note that you cannot have more than 18
+categories; if there are more, only the one defined last will appear and be
+used.
+.PP
+If the documentation is included in the .sty file instead of a proper
+documentation file, the optional keywords should start with
+-?- directly after the semicolon, where ? is 0, 1, 2 or 3; these are flags
+which indicate in which part of the .sty the instructions are placed and
+should help \fBtexdoctk\fP to extract the documentation from the style and present
+it without the code, which would normally be of little use.
+.TP
+0
+no specific place, scattered between the code
+.TP
+1
+at end, behind \\endinput; some .sty files have well-organized documentation
+behind the end of the actual code, where TeX doesn't see it upon compilation
+.TP
+2
+at beginning, terminated by %%%%%%; in some other cases, some usage information
+is at the beginning of the .sty as a comment terminated by a line full of %
+.TP
+3
+as 2, but with a blank line as termination
+.PP
+See the system database for plenty of examples.
+
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+\& $TEXMFMAIN/texdoctk/texdocrc.defaults
+system-wide configuration file
+.PP
+\& ~/.texdocrc
+(optional) personal configuration file; can also be created with the Settings menu
+.PP
+\& $TEXMFMAIN/texdoctk/texdoctk.dat
+default database file for documentation files of the distribution
+.PP
+\& $TEXMFLOCAL/texdoctk/texdoctk-local.dat
+(optional) local database file for documentation files
+.PP
+\& $TEXMFHOME/texdoctk/texdoctk-pers.dat
+(optional) personal database file of individual users for documentation files
+.SH BUGS
+Widget placement in topic toplevels becomes ugly when the toplevel is stretched
+or shrunk.
+.PP
+The font in the frame labels of the Settings menu are not forced to the default
+font; this will become visible e.g. at hi-res screens, where the label font is
+not scaled up.
+.PP
+Netscape and Mozilla error output will be written to stderr even if the quiet
+mode was set.
+.SH AUTHOR
+.B texdoctk
+was written by Thomas Ruedas <tr@geol.ku.dk>.
+.PP
+This manual page was originally written by Adrian Bunk <bunk@fs.tum.de> for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system (but may be used by others). It is now maintained
+by Thomas Ruedas.
+
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Copyright (C) 2000-2004 Thomas Ruedas
+.br
+This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
+warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2d8593b674c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.1
@@ -0,0 +1,574 @@
+.de EX
+.sp
+.in +5
+.nf
+.ft CW
+..
+.de EE
+.in -5
+.ft R
+.sp
+.fi
+..
+.TH "texexec" "1" "October 2000" "ConTeXt" "ConTeXt"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+texexec \- ConTeXt and PDF auxiliary program and batch processor
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+\fBtexexec\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP \&.\&.\&. ] \fIFILE\fP [ \&.\&.\&. ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBtexexec\fP is a Perl script that provides several functions:
+.IP o
+Process a TeX file\&. This includes performing as many runs as
+necessary of \fBtex\fP(1), \fBtexutil\fP(1), and
+\fBmetapost\fP(1)\&. Options allow you to select the output
+format, the pages to process, paper size, and so forth\&.
+.IP o
+Create new ConTeXt formats (with \fB--format\fP)\&.
+.IP o
+Post-process existing PDF files, including merging multiple
+files, and extracting and rearranging pages within a file
+(similar to the functions provided by \fBpsnup\fP(1) and
+\fBpdfmerge\fP(1))\&.
+.IP o
+Extract or strip documentation from com{ConTeXt} source files
+(using \fBtexutil\fP(1))\&.
+.IP o
+Run METAPOST (\fBmpost\fP(1)) to generate figures from METAPOST
+source\&.
+.IP o
+Produce ``proof sheets\'\' of figures used in a \fBConTeXt\fP source
+file\&.
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+All switches are specified in full, but can be abbreviated to the
+shortest unique string\&. Thus, \fB--ver\fP works the same as
+\fB--verbose\fP\&.
+.PP
+.SH "General Options"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--alone\fP"
+Avoid calling other programs when possible\&. For
+example, \fB--alone\fP will prevent \fBtexexec\fP from
+using \fBfmtutil\fP(1) to generate formats (which can
+be handy when tracing installation problems)\&.
+.IP "\fB--environment=\fP\fIENVIRONMENT\fP"
+Specify a ConTeXt
+\fIENVIRONMENT\fP to use when processing the file\&.
+This option can be useful when converting from
+non-ConTeXt file formats where no environment or layout
+settings are present in the file\&.
+.IP "\fB--help\fP [ \fISWITCH\fP ]"
+Produce a summary of switches
+and arguments\&. Many switches have additional
+information that can be seen by typing ``\f(CWtexexec
+--help optvar(SWITCH)\fP\'\'\&.
+.IP "\fB--interface=\fP\fILANGUAGE\fP"
+Specify the language
+\fBConTeXt\fP should use to communicate with you\&.
+Options are
+.IP
+.RS
+.IP "\fBen\fP"
+US English
+.IP "\fBnl\fP"
+Dutch
+.IP "\fBde\fP"
+German
+.IP "\fBuk\fP"
+British English
+.IP "\fBcz\fP"
+Czech
+.IP "\fBit\fP"
+Italian
+.RE
+.IP "\fB--once\fP"
+Process a file once and only once\&. (By default,
+\fBtexexec\fP processes the file as many times as
+necessary to sort out all references, typeset
+\fBMETAPOST\fP code, and so forth\&.)
+.IP "\fB--output=\fP\fIDRIVER\fP"
+Specify the output \fIDRIVER\fP
+for use with \f(CW\especial\fP primitives\&. Defaults to the setting in
+the local \fIcont-sys\&.tex\fP file, but can be set to one of
+.IP
+.RS
+.IP "\fBpdftex\fP"
+Native \fBpdftex\fP(1) code
+.IP "\fBdvips\fP"
+For \fBdvips\fP(1) (the default)
+.IP "\fBdvipsone\fP"
+For \fBdvipsone\fP
+.IP "\fBdviwindo\fP"
+For \fBdviwindo\fP, the oldest
+\fBConTeXt\fP drivers
+.IP "\fBdviview\fP"
+For \fBdviview\fP (experimental)
+.IP
+.RE
+.IP
+There may be other supported drivers -- check the most
+recent \fBConTeXt\fP documentation\&.
+.IP "\fB--pages=\fP\fIPAGENUMBERLIST\fP"
+Specify the pages or page
+range to appear in the output file\&.
+\fIPAGENUMBERLIST\fP may be the keyword \fBodd\fP
+or \fBeven\fP; one or more pages separated by commas
+(\f(CWx,y\fP); or a page range in the form \f(CW:z\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--passon=\fP\fISTRING\fP"
+Pass additional command-line
+switches and arguments to the \fBtex\fP(1) process
+run by \fBtexexec\fP\&.
+.IP
+For example, the \fBMikTeX\fP TeX system (for
+DOS/Windows) can embed information in the DVI file that
+will allow you to find the line in a source code file
+corresponding to the line in the typeset output\&. It
+uses a switch called ``--src\'\' to activate this
+functionality, and can be used from \fBtexexec\fP as
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec --passon="--src" somefile\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+The double quotes (\f(CW"\fP) are required to prevent
+\fBtexexec\fP from using the switch itself\&.
+.IP "\fB--program\fP"
+The name of the TeX program to use
+(\fBtex\fP(1), by default)\&.
+.IP "\fB--result=\fP\fIFILENAME\fP"
+Allows you to change the
+basename of the output file\&. See
+\fB--mode\fP for an example\&.
+.IP "\fB--runs=\fP\fINUMBER\fP"
+Specify the number of runs to
+perform on a file\&. Overrides
+\fBtexexec\fP\'s calculations\&.
+.IP "\fB--silent\fP"
+Suppress diagnostic and progress messages\&.
+.IP "\fB--suffix=\fP\fISUFFIX\fP"
+Specify the suffix of the output file\&.
+.IP "\fB--tex=\fP\fIPROGRAMNAME\fP"
+Allows you specify the program
+to use instead of \fBtex\fP(1)\&. Useful for trying
+different versions of \fBtex\fP(1) installed on the
+same machine\&.
+.IP "\fB--texutil\fP"
+Force a run of \fBtexutil\fP(1)\&.
+.IP "\fB--verbose\fP"
+Output diagnostic information, including the
+contents of \fItexexec\&.ini\fP\&.
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "Processing \fBConTeXt\fP Source Files"
+.PP
+Including specifying paper sizes, formats, and so forth\&.
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--arrange\fP"
+Don\'t perform page rearrangements (e\&.g\&., for
+producing a booklet) until the last run\&.
+.IP "\fB--batch\fP"
+Process the file in batch mode -- continue to
+typeset the document after finding errors\&. More
+imformation about batch mode can be found in Donald
+E\&. Knuth\'s \fITeXbook\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--bodyfont\fP"
+The name of a font to preload for use in
+setting the body of the text\&.
+.IP "\fB--centerpage\fP"
+Center the document image on the page\&.
+.IP "\fB--color\fP"
+Turn on color mode\&. Color mode can also be set by
+commands embedded in the document\&. These commands
+override the \fB--color\fP option\&.
+.IP "\fB--convert=\fP\fIFORMAT\fP"
+Convert the input file to
+ConTeXt format from \fIFORMAT\fP before
+processing\&. In most cases, this conversion will result
+in a TeX file\&. Currently supported input
+\fIFORMAT\fPs are \fBxml\fP and
+\fBsgml\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--dvi\fP"
+Shortcut for \fB--output=dvi\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--fast\fP"
+Typeset the document(s) as fast as possible without
+causing problems\&.
+.IP "\fB--final\fP"
+Perform a final run without skipping anything\&.
+This option is typically used with \fB--fast\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--language=\fP\fILANGUAGE\fP"
+Set the language for
+hyphenation\&. Can be specified in your source file\&.
+Options are the same as those for \fB--interface\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--mode=\fP\fIMODELIST\fP"
+Allows you to change the mode
+(page size and resolution) of the output file\&.
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec --pdf --mode=A4 --result=pdftex-a pdftex-t\fP
+\f(CWtexexec --pdf --mode=letter --result=pdftex-l pdftex-t\fP
+\f(CWtexexec --pdf --mode=screen --result=pdftex-s pdftex-t\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+Here the mode switch tells \fBConTeXt\fP to obey
+the mode directives in the layout specifications\&. The
+\fB--result\fP flag allows you to
+rename the output file\&.
+.IP "\fB--noarrange\fP"
+Ignore arrangement commands in the source
+file\&.
+.IP "\fB--paper=\fP\fIKEY\fP"
+For typesetting multiple pages on a
+single piece of paper\&. \fIKEY\fP can be \fBa4a3\fP
+(for printing A4 pages on A3 paper) or \fBa5a4\fP
+(for printing A5 pages on A4 paper)\&. The actual layout
+of the pages is specified with the
+\fB--print\fP switch\&.
+.IP "\fB--pdf\fP"
+Shorthand for \fB--output=pdftex\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--print=\fP\fIKEY\fP"
+Specify the layout of the final
+output\&. \fIKEY\fP can be \fBup\fP, resulting in 2
+pages per sheet, double sided, or \fBdown\fP, resulting
+in 2 rotated pages per sheet, double sided\&. Use the
+--paper switch to specify the original page
+and sheet size\&.
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "Creating \fBConTeXt\fP Format Files"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--format=\fP\fIFORMATFILE\fP"
+Specify a \fIFORMATFILE\fP
+to use when typesetting\&. \fBtexexec\fP will prepend the
+string \f(CWcont- \fP to the name you give, so you can
+type \f(CWplain\fP instead of \f(CWcont-plain\fP, as in
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec --format=plain --program=pdftex somefile\fP
+.EE
+.IP "\fB--make\fP"
+Generate a \fBConTeXt\fP format file\&.
+.PP
+.SH "Postprocess PDF Files"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--combination=\fP\fIROWS\fP\fB*\fP\fICOLS\fP"
+Specify
+the number of pages to show on a single page\&. Use with
+\fB--pdfcombine\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--pdfarrange\fP"
+For rearranging pages in PDF files\&.
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec --pdfarrange --paper=a5a4 --print=up foo\&.pdf\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+This command creates an A5 booklet from a PDF file
+\fIfoo\&.pdf\fP\&. \fB--pdfarrange\fP is used in
+conjunction with the following switches:
+.IP "\fB--paperoffset\fP"
+Adjust the space between the
+edge of the pages and the beginning of the text block\&.
+.IP "\fB--backspace\fP"
+Adjust the inside (``gutter\'\')
+margins\&.
+.IP "\fB--topspace\fP"
+Adjust the top and bottom
+margin\&.
+.IP "\fB--markings\fP"
+Add crop marks\&.
+.IP "\fB--addempty=\fP\fIPAGES\fP"
+Add empty pages
+after the pages specified in \fIPAGES\fP\&. (Useful
+for, among other things, adding blank pages after a
+table of contents\&.)
+.IP "\fB--textwidth=\fP\fIWIDTH\fP"
+Set the width of
+the original text\&. Specifying this parameter with a
+single-sided original will allow \fBConTeXt\fP to adjust
+the page layout for double-sided output, producing much
+more attractive results\&.
+.IP
+With the \fB--pdfarrange\fP flag, specifying more
+than one file will result in all of the files being
+combined in the final result, allowing you to add title
+pages, decorated part separators, and so forth\&.
+.IP
+You can also do more complex manipulations, such as
+adding additional text to the page by setting up a
+small file with layout definitions and a simple figure
+insertion loop\&.
+.IP "\fB--pdfcombine\fP"
+Combine multiple pages\&. Requires you to
+specify the
+\fB--combination\fP
+switch\&.
+.IP "\fB--pdfselect\fP"
+Extract pages from a file\&. Use in combination with
+the \fB--selection\fP switch, as
+in
+.IP
+.RS
+\f(CWtexexec --pdfselect --paper=S6
+--selection=1,9,14 file-1\fP
+.RE
+.IP
+which extracts pages 1, 9, and 14 from
+\fIfile-1\&.pdf\fP, and places them in
+\fItexexec\&.pdf\fP (the default output filename if
+an output file isn\'t specified)\&.
+.IP
+See \fB--pdfarrange\fP for other
+options\&.
+.IP "\fB--selection=\fP\fIPAGES\fP"
+Specify pages to be affected by
+another option\&. See \fB--pdfarrange\fP and
+\fB--pdfselect\fP for examples\&.
+.PP
+.SH "Extract or Strip Out Documentation"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--listing\fP"
+Produce a typeset version of the source code in
+\fIFILE\fP\&. You can specify the form of the output
+file, as in
+.RS
+\f(CWtexexec --listing --pdf readme\&.now\fP
+.RE
+.IP
+which will produce a PDF file called
+\fItexexec\&.pdf\fP\&. Without the
+\fB--pdf\fP flag, \fBtexexec\fP will
+produce a DVI file\&.
+.IP
+See also \fB--backspace\fP and
+\fB--topspace\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--module\fP"
+Create documentation for \fBConTeXt\fP,
+\fBMetaPost\fP (see \fBmpost\fP(1)), and Perl modules\&.
+Converts the documentation to \fBConTeXt\fP format and
+then typesets that documentation\&. See
+\fBtexutil\fP(1) for more information about the
+format of the documentation strings\&.
+.PP
+.SH "Process METAPOST Figures"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--mpformat\fP"
+The name of a \fBMetaPost\fP format file\&.
+.IP "\fB--mptex\fP"
+Strips out and typesets TeX code embedded in a
+\fBMetaPost\fP file\&.
+.IP "\fB--nomp\fP"
+Do not run \fBMetaPost\fP, even if needed\&.
+.IP "\fB--nomprun\fP"
+Do not run \fBmpost\fP(1) on embedded
+\fBMetaPost\fP code\&.
+.PP
+.SH "Producing Proof Sheets of Figures"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--figures=\fP\fIALTERNATIVE\fP"
+Specify one of three
+options to produce a document containing the images
+used in the source file:
+.IP
+.RS
+.IP "\fBa\fP"
+A proof sheet with additional
+information provided for each figure
+.IP "\fBb\fP"
+A proof sheet with the graphics only
+.IP "\fBc\fP"
+One figure per page, with the page
+clipped to the bounding box of the
+figure
+.IP
+See also \fB--paperoffset\fP,
+which allows you to specify an offset to be added to
+the page, as in
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec --figures=c --paperoffset=\&.5cm *\&.pdf
+*\&.png *\&.jpg\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+.RE
+.IP
+\fBtexexec\fP uses \fBtexutil\fP(1) to obtain the list
+of figures to process\&.
+.PP
+.SH "USAGE"
+.PP
+.IP o
+Each \fBConTeXt\fP user interface (language) has its own format\&. The
+following command generates two formats, one using the English
+interface for typesetting in English, and one for Dutch:
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec --make en nl\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+By default, the language used for typesetting matches the
+user-interface language (set with
+\fB--interface\fP\&. It\'s possible to use one
+language for typesetting and another for messages by changing the
+relevant settings in \fIcont-usr\&.tex\fP, but these languages can
+also be changed on the command line with a command such as
+.IP
+.RS
+\f(CWtexexec --make --language=pl,cz,sk --bodyfont=plr en\fP
+.RE
+.IP
+That command generates a \fBConTeXt\fP format file with an English user
+interface, and the main language set to Polish (\fBpl\fP)\&. The
+default body font is the Polish version of Computer Modern Roman
+(\fBplr\fP)\&. Czech and Slovak hyphenation patterns are also loaded
+so that Czech and Slovak text included in a source file will be
+typeset properly (\fBcz\fP and \fBsk\fP)\&.
+.IP o
+When the appropriate formats are present, a file can be typeset
+by typing
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec test\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+\fBtexexec\fP tries to determine what interface it should use to
+typeset \fItest\&.tex\fP by looking for a line such as
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CW% interface=en tex=pdfetex output=pdftex\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+at the top of the file (i\&.e\&., on the very first line)\&. This line is
+equivalent to \fBTeX\fP\'s format line, ``&\fIFORMAT\fP\'\')\&.
+.IP
+By default, \fBtexexec\fP will produce a DVI file\&. The
+\fB--pdf\fP flag tells \fBtexexec\fP to produce a PDF
+file, instead (by running \fBpdftex\fP(1))\&. You can also be more
+specific about what drivers \fBtexexec\fP should use, by specifying a
+command line such as
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec --output=dvips,acrobat test\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+which specifies the use of the \fBdvips\fP driver (which is the
+default), combined with the use of Acrobat-specific PDF instructions\&.
+.IP
+After an error-free run, \fBtexexec\fP will run \fBtexutil\fP(1) to
+determine whether additional runs of \fBtex\fP(1) (or
+\fBpdftex\fP(1)) or any utility programs (e\&.g\&., \fBbibtex\fP(1),
+\fBmakeindex\fP(1)) are necessary\&. You can suppress these
+additional runs by specifying the \fB--once\fP or
+\fB--runs\fP flags:
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec --once test\fP
+\f(CWtexexec --runs=2 test\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+.SH "INITIALIZATION"
+.IP
+When starting, \fBtexexec\fP first looks for the file
+\fItexexec\&.ini\fP, which specifies the location of various
+programs and configuration files, and specifies the programs to use\&.
+The \fB--verbose\fP flag causes \fBtexexec\fP to print
+the information in \fItexexec\&.ini\fP to the terminal and the log
+file\&.
+.IP
+\fBtexexec\fP requires Perl\&. On Unix and Unix-like systems, no special
+steps have to be taken to get \fBtexexec\fP to work beyond installing
+Perl and having the \fBperl\fP(1) binary in your path\&. On Windows
+systems, however, you may need to run Perl by typing commands such as
+``\f(CWperl texexec\&.pl optvar(ARGS)\fP\'\'\&.
+.IP
+The \fBfpTeX\fP distribution comes with a program called
+\fBrunperl\&.exe\fP that can be copied and renamed to \fBtexexec\&.exe\fP\&.
+You will also have to rename a copy to \fBtexutil\&.exe\fP (see
+\fBtexutil\fP(1))\&. The \fBteTeX\fP and \fBfpTeX\fP distributions, at
+least, should perform the necessary steps as part of their
+installation sequence -- if you have problems, however, you may need
+to follow the advice given here\&.
+.IP
+The file \fItexexec\&.rme\fP contains default configuration
+information\&. If no file \fItexexec\&.ini\fP exists (in
+\fITEXMF/context/config/\fP, you should copy \fItexexec\&.rme\fP
+to that directory and rename it to \fItexexec\&.ini\fP\&. Make any
+necessary changes to this file to reflect the layout of programs and
+directories on your system\&.
+.SH "ENCODINGS"
+.IP
+Some languages require specific character encodings to represent their
+alphabets (beyond the basic ASCII encoding)\&. Although you can use TeX
+commands to represent these characters, such as ``\f(CW\e\&.z\fP\'\', it\'s
+easier to use a text editor that includes direct support for these
+characters and let \fBConTeXt\fP translate them to the necessary TeX
+commands\&. For some languages, this approach can also improve the
+performance of TeX\'s hyphenation algorithms\&.
+.IP
+\fBConTeXt\fP supports several of the most commonly used encodings\&.
+Check the files beginning with \fIenco-\fP, \fIlang-\fP, and
+\fIfont-\fP in the \fBConTeXt\fP distribution for more information\&.
+.IP
+\fBweb2c\fP distributions (such as \fBteTeX\fP) support a mechanism to
+map document encodings to \fBConTeXt\fP\'s internal encoding, font
+encodings, and hyphenation patterns\&. \fBtexexec\fP provides a document
+option and a command-line flag to pass the necessary information to
+\fBtex\fP(1) or \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&. You can add lines such as
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CW%& --translate-file=cp1250pl\fP
+.EE
+or
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CW% --translate=cp1250pl\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+to the beginning of your document, or specify the \fB--translate\fP
+flag on the command line, as
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexexec --translate=il2pl somefile\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+Note that using language-specific encodings will make your file less
+portable than using ASCII\&. It may not be possible for other people to
+typeset your documents on their systems\&.
+.SH "FILES"
+.IP
+.IP "\fITEXMF/context/config/texexec\&.ini\fP"
+TeXExec configuration file
+.IP "\fITEXMF/context/config/texexec\&.rme\fP"
+TeXExec configuration file defaults
+.IP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IP
+\fBbibtex\fP(1), \fBdvips\fP(1), \fBfmtutil\fP(1),
+\fBmakeindex\fP(1), \fBmetapost\fP(1), \fBmpost\fP(1),
+\fBpdfetex\fP(1), \fBpdfmerge\fP(1), \fBpdftex\fP(1),
+\fBperl\fP(1), \fBpsnup\fP(1), \fBtex\fP(1), \fBtexshow\fP(1),
+\fBtexutil\fP(1)\&.
+.IP
+The TeXExec manual, \fImtexexec\&.pdf\fP\&.
+.IP
+The TeXExec configuration README files:
+.IP o
+\fITEXMF/context/config/texexec\&.rme\fP
+.IP o
+\fITEXMF/context/perltk/texexec\&.rme\fP
+.IP
+Donald E\&. Knuth\'s \fIThe TeXbook\fP\&.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.IP
+This manpage was written by Tobias Burnus
+<burnus@gmx\&.de> and C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>\&. It is based on
+the \fBTeXExec\fP manual written by Hans Hagen
+<pragma@wxs\&.nl>\&.
+.IP
+The PDF manual and \fBtexexec\fP itself can be obtained from
+<http://www\&.pragma-ade\&.com/pragma-ade/texexec\&.htm>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfind.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfind.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d9e88940cdf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfind.1
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+.TH "texfind" "1" "April 2004" "ConTeXt" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+texfind \- graphical tool to search for text in TeX input files
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBtexfind\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP \&.\&.\&. ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBtexfind\fP is a graphical, interactive tool that helps you
+searching through TeX input files, including subdirectories, and
+allows you to do search/replace tasks using Perl regular
+expressions. It opens two windows: One displays the directory
+hierarchy and allows to select different search directories. The
+second window is used to enter the query and display the results.
+.PP
+.SH "SEARCHING"
+.PP
+Enter a search string in the input box at the top, choose the file
+extension (*tex by default) and hit ENTER to start the search. The
+results will be displayed below.
+.PP
+The search string is actually a perl regular expression. This gives
+you lots of flexibility. The search-and-replace function also uses
+Perl regex syntax, but you can also just use simple strings. Currently
+there is no way to save changed files.
+.PP
+.SH "MENU"
+.PP
+Use the right mouse button to open a menu.
+.HP
+\fBFile\fP : Currently only used to exit the program
+.HP
+\fBEdit\fP : Copy selections, select or unselect all
+.HP
+\fBSearch\fP : Open a \fBFind\fP dialog that allows further searching
+through the displayed results. The \fBReplace\fP option can be used to
+replace single or all occurrences of a string, but currently it is not
+possible to change the file.
+.PP
+\fBView\fP : Select specific lines, and adjust word or character
+wrapping.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.HP
+\fB\-\-font\fR : specify the font used for the menu. Default is
+courier.
+.HP
+Other options probably exist - I appreciate input by the program
+authors, experienced users or perl geeks.
+.HP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IP
+\fBperlre\fP(1)
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known\&. Well - the replace function isn't the most useful one.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBtexfind\fP was written for the ConTeXt package by Hans Hagen and
+Ton Otten, PRAGMA\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by Frank Küster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch>,
+for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used and modified by
+others without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in
+the manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary
+author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfont.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfont.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..692d5bcf3d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texfont.1
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+.TH TEXFONT "1" "May 2004" "teTeX " "texfont.pdf"
+.SH NAME
+texfont \- font installation tool for ConTeXt
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+\fBtexfont\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP \&.\&.\&. ]
+.PP
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+TeXFont is a perl script that helps to set up and install TeX fonts.
+It was designed for use with ConTeXt, but may also be helpful for
+users of other formats, like plain TeX or LaTeX. Its use is described
+in detail in the files mtexfont.pdf and mfont.pdf.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.HP
+\fB\-\-fontroot\fR=\fIpath\fR : texmf font root (automatically determined)
+.HP
+\fB\-\-sourcepath\fR=\fIpath\fR : when installing, copy from this path (default: .)
+.HP
+\fB\-\-sourcepath\fR=\fIauto\fR : locate and use vendor/collection
+.HP
+\fB\-\-vendor\fR=\fIname\fR : vendor name (first level directory)
+.HP
+\fB\-\-collection\fR=\fIname\fR : font collection (second level
+directory)
+.HP
+\fB\-\-encoding\fR=\fIname\fR : encoding vector (default: texnansi)
+.HP
+\fB\-\-slant\fR=\fIs\fR : slant glyphs in font by factor (0.0 - 1.5)
+.HP
+\fB\-\-extend\fR=\fIs\fR : extend glyphs in font by factor (0.0 - 1.5)
+.HP
+\fB\-\-caps\fR=\fIs\fR : capitalize lowercase chars by factor (0.5 - 1.0)
+.HP
+\fB\-\-noligs\fR : remove ligatures
+.HP
+\fB\-\-install\fR : copy files from source to font tree
+.HP
+\fB\-\-listing\fR : list files on auto sourcepath
+.HP
+\fB\-\-remove\fR : remove files on auto sourcepath
+.HP
+\fB\-\-makepath\fR : when needed, create the paths
+.HP
+\fB\-\-test\fR : use test paths for vendor/collection
+.HP
+\fB\-\-show\fR : run tex on texfont.tex
+.HP
+\fB\-\-batch\fR : process given batch file
+.HP
+\fB\-\-weight\fR : multiple master weight
+.HP
+\fB\-\-width\fR : multiple master width
+.HP
+\fB\-\-expert\fR : also handle expert fonts
+.HP
+\fB\-\-help\fR : show some more info
+.HP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBtexexec\fP(1), \fBfontinst\fP(1), \fBtexshow\fP(1),
+\fBtexutil\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+The TeXFont manual, \fImtexfont\&.pdf\fP\&
+.PP
+The ConTeXt Font manual, \fImfonts\&.pdf\fP\&
+.PP
+The TeXExec manual, \fImtexexec\&.pdf\fP\&.
+.PP
+Donald E\&. Knuth\'s \fIThe TeXbook\fP\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.IP
+This manual page was written by Frank Küster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch>,
+for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used and modified by
+others without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in
+the manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary
+author)\&.
+.IP
+The PDF manual and \fBtexfont\fP itself can be obtained from
+<http://www\&.pragma-ade\&.com>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..ac860c268d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+mktexlsr.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2dvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2dvi.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..41fae2f7d5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2dvi.1
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.33.
+.TH TEXI2DVI "1" "February 2005" "texi2dvi 1.39" "User Commands"
+.SH NAME
+texi2dvi \- print Texinfo documents
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B texi2dvi
+[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIFILE\fR...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Run each Texinfo or LaTeX FILE through TeX in turn until all
+cross-references are resolved, building all indices. The directory
+containing each FILE is searched for included files. The suffix of FILE
+is used to determine its language (LaTeX or Texinfo).
+.PP
+Makeinfo is used to perform Texinfo macro expansion before running TeX
+when needed.
+.SS "Operation modes:"
+.TP
+\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-batch\fR
+no interaction
+.TP
+\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-clean\fR
+remove all auxiliary files
+.TP
+\fB\-D\fR, \fB\-\-debug\fR
+turn on shell debugging (set \fB\-x\fR)
+.TP
+\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
+display this help and exit successfully
+.TP
+\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR=\fIOFILE\fR
+leave output in OFILE (implies \fB\-\-clean\fR);
+Only one input FILE may be specified in this case
+.TP
+\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR
+no output unless errors (implies \fB\-\-batch\fR)
+.TP
+\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-silent\fR
+same as \fB\-\-quiet\fR
+.TP
+\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR
+display version information and exit successfully
+.TP
+\fB\-V\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
+report on what is done
+.SS "TeX tuning:"
+.TP
+-@
+use @input instead of \einput; for preloaded Texinfo
+.TP
+\fB\-e\fR, \fB\-E\fR, \fB\-\-expand\fR
+force macro expansion using makeinfo
+.TP
+\fB\-I\fR DIR
+search DIR for Texinfo files
+.TP
+\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-language\fR=\fILANG\fR
+specify the LANG of FILE (LaTeX or Texinfo)
+.TP
+\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-pdf\fR
+use pdftex or pdflatex for processing
+.TP
+\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-recode\fR
+call recode before TeX to translate input characters
+.TP
+\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-command\fR=\fICMD\fR
+insert CMD in copy of input file
+.TP
+or \fB\-\-texinfo\fR=\fICMD\fR
+multiple values accumulate
+.PP
+The values of the BIBTEX, LATEX (or PDFLATEX), MAKEINDEX, MAKEINFO,
+TEX (or PDFTEX), TEXINDEX, and THUMBPDF environment variables are used
+to run those commands, if they are set. Any CMD strings are added
+after @setfilename for Texinfo input, in the first line for LaTeX input.
+.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
+Email bug reports to <bug-texinfo@gnu.org>,
+general questions and discussion to <help-texinfo@gnu.org>.
+Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Copyright \(co 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
+under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
+For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The full documentation for
+.B texi2dvi
+is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
+.B info
+and
+.B texi2dvi
+programs are properly installed at your site, the command
+.IP
+.B info texi2dvi
+.PP
+should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2html.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2html.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d5f080f0301
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2html.1
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+.TH TEXI2HTML 1 "4 February 2005"
+.AT 3
+.SH NAME
+texi2html \- a Texinfo to HTML converter
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B texi2html [options] file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.I Texi2html
+converts the given Texinfo file to a set of HTML files. It tries to handle
+most of the Texinfo commands. It creates hypertext links for cross-references,
+footnotes...
+.PP
+.I Texi2html
+may furthermore use latex2html to generate HTML (code and/or images) for @math
+and @iftex tags (see the
+.B \-\-l2h
+option).
+.PP
+.I Texi2html
+creates several files depending on the contents of the Texinfo file and on
+the chosen options (see FILES).
+.PP
+The HTML files created by
+.I texi2html
+are closer to TeX than to Info.
+.SH OPTIONS
+Options may be abbreviated to th shortests unique prefix. The
+following is only an incomplete list of the available options:
+.TP 12
+.B \-\-help [1|2]
+Print usage instructions and list the most important, all relevant,
+or all recognised (including obsolete) command-line options, and exit.
+.TP
+.B \-\-ifinfo \-\-iftex \-\-ifxml \-\-ifplaintext \-\-ifhtml
+Expand @ifinfo, @iftex and @tex, @ifxml and @xml, @ifplaintext,
+@ifhtml and @html regions, and don't expand @ifnot
+corresponding regions (default: ifhtml).
+.TP
+.B \-\-no\-ifinfo \-\-no\-iftex \-\-no\-ifxml \-\-no\-ifplaintext \-\-no\-html
+Don't expand @ifinfo, @iftex, @ifxml, @ifplaintext regions and expand
+@ifnot corresponding regions.
+.TP
+.B \-I \fIdir\fP
+Append \fIdir\fP to the directory list searched for included files.
+.TP
+.B \-P \fIdir\fP
+Prepend \fIdir\fP to the directory list searched for included files.
+.TP
+.B \-\-no\-menu
+Don't show the Texinfo menus; by default they are shown.
+.TP
+.B \-\-no\-number
+Don't number the sections.
+.TP
+.B \-\-split chapter|section|node
+Split the output into several HTML files (one per main chapter/section or node).
+.TP
+.B \-\-l2h
+Use latex2html for content of @math and @tex tags. Content must be such that
+both, latex and tex, can translate it correctly. I.e., no tex-only constructs
+must be used.
+.TP
+.B \-\-l2h\-l2h \fIprog\fP
+Use \fIprog\fP as latex2html program (default \fIlatex2html\fP).
+Program must be executable.
+.TP
+.B \-\-l2h\-init \fIfile\fP
+Use \fIfile\fP as latex2html init file. \fIfile\fP should be used to specify in which way latex2html handles mathematical expressions and formulas.
+
+Note that latex2html locates
+(and uses) init-files in the following order (provided they exist):
+(1) global init file (usually in latex2html source dir)
+(2) $HOME/.latex2html_init
+(3) ./.latex2html_init
+(4) init file given on command line.
+.TP
+.B \-\-l2h\-tmp \fIdir\fP
+Use \fIdir\fP as tmp dir for latex2html. This directory (resp. its path)
+must not contain a dot (i.e., a ".").
+.TP
+.B \-\-l2h\-clean
+remove all intermediate files generated by latex2html (prevents caching!)
+.TP
+.B \-\-l2h\-skip
+Do not really run latex2html. Use (kept) files of previous runs, instead.
+.TP
+.B \-\-Verbose
+Give a verbose output.
+.TP
+.B \-\-version
+Print version and exit.
+.PP
+.SH FILES
+Initialisation options are read first from ${prefix}/etc/texi2html/Config
+(the exact location being changeable with the
+.RI --sysconfdir= dir
+option to the configure script), then from $HOME/.texi2html/Config,
+then any command-line options including \-\-init\-file options;
+with later settings overriding earlier ones.
+.P
+By default
+.I texi2html
+my creates the following files (foo being the name of the Texinfo file):
+.TP 16
+.B foo_toc.html
+The table of contents (if @contents is present).
+.TP
+.B foo.html
+The document's contents or the Top element.
+.TP
+.B foo_fot.html
+The footnotes (if any).
+.TP
+.B foo_abt.html
+An help section.
+.TP
+.B foo_l2h_img*
+Images generated by latex2html (if any).
+.PP
+When used with the
+.B \-\-split
+option, it creates several files (one per chapter or node), named
+.B foo_n.html
+(n being the index of the chapter or node), and the
+.B foo.html
+file contains the Top element.
+.PP
+Otherwise it creates only one file:
+.B foo.html
+.SH VERSION
+This is \fItexi2html\fP version 1.76, 4 February 2005.
+.SH AUTHOR
+Texi2html was originally written by is Lionel Cons, CERN IT/DIS/OSE,
+Lionel.Cons@cern.ch. Over time, many other people around the net
+contributed to this program. Its current maintainer is Olaf Bachmann,
+obachman@mathematik.uni-kl.de.
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+The latest version of this program, as well as support in the form of mailing
+lists with archives, bug tracking, documentation, and other tools can be found
+at:
+ http://texi2html.cvshome.org/
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Copyright \(co 1999, 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
+under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
+For more information about these matters, see the file named COPYING.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+GNU Texinfo Documentation Format
+.br
+http://texinfo.org/
+.br
+World Wide Web (WWW),
+HyperText Markup Language (HTML)
+.br
+http://www.w3.org
+.br
+LaTeX2HTML
+.br
+http://www-dsed.llnl.gov/files/programs/unix/latex2html
+.SH BUGS
+This man-page is not up-to-date and there exists no up-to-date documentation, yet.
+Until it exists, see the beginning of the texi2html.init file for remarks about
+command-line options and configurations.
+.ex
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2pdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2pdf.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..24af14aff5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texi2pdf.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+texi2dvi.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindex.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..732e12b8874
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindex.1
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.34.
+.TH TEXINDEX "1" "December 2004" "texindex 4.8" "User Commands"
+.SH NAME
+texindex \- sort Texinfo index files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B texindex
+[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIFILE\fR...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Generate a sorted index for each TeX output FILE.
+Usually FILE... is specified as `foo.??' for a document `foo.texi'.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
+display this help and exit
+.TP
+\fB\-k\fR, \fB\-\-keep\fR
+keep temporary files around after processing
+.TP
+\fB\-\-no\-keep\fR
+do not keep temporary files around after processing (default)
+.TP
+\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR FILE
+send output to FILE
+.TP
+\fB\-\-version\fR
+display version information and exit
+.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
+Email bug reports to bug\-texinfo@gnu.org,
+general questions and discussion to help\-texinfo@gnu.org.
+Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Copyright \(co 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
+under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
+For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The full documentation for
+.B texindex
+is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
+.B info
+and
+.B texindex
+programs are properly installed at your site, the command
+.IP
+.B info texindex
+.PP
+should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d195b2c888e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.1
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+.TH "texlinks" "8" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+texlinks \- maintain symbolic links from format to engine
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBtexlinks\fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIDIRECTORIES\fP\&.\&.\&.
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBtexlinks\fP is used to create or recreate symbolic links from
+formats to engines according to the information in
+\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP or a file specified with \fB--cnffile\fP\&.
+.PP
+\fIDIRECTORIES\fP is an optional list of directories in which to
+operate\&. If no directories are specified the list of directories
+depends on the \fB--multiplatform\fP option\&.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--help\fP or \fB-h\fP"
+show some help text
+.IP "\fB--cnffile\fP \fIFILE\fP or \fB-f\fP \fIFILE\fP"
+use
+file as configuration file (default:
+\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP)
+.IP "\fB--verbose\fP or \fB-v\fP"
+set verbose mode on (default: off)
+.IP "\fB--multiplatform\fP or \fB-m\fP"
+operate in all
+platform-specific directories (default:
+operate only in the directory for this
+platform)
+.IP "\fB--silent\fP or \fB-s\fP"
+silently skip over existing
+scripts/binaries instead of printing a warning
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+.IP "\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP"
+default configuration file
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBfmtutil\fP(1), \fBfmtutil\&.cnf\fP(5)
+.PP
+Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/>
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBtexlinks\fP was written by Thomas Esser
+<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> and is Copyright © 1999\&.
+\fBtexlinks\fP has been released into the public domain\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texshow.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texshow.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1fda1f952c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texshow.1
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+.TH "texshow" "1" "Oct 2000" "ConTeXt" "CONTEXT"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+texshow \- ConTeXt command and parameter reference
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+\fBtexshow\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP ] [ \fICOMMAND\fP ]
+[ \fILANGUAGE\fP ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBtexshow\fP uses \fBperl\fP(1) and PerlTk (see \fBTk\fP(3pm)) to
+show a overview of the commands and parameters of those\&. In the Tk
+window you can search for a command and by switching the interface,
+you can see the equivalent in another interface language\&.
+.PP
+\fICOMMAND\fP is a \fBConTeXt\fP command to search for in the
+database\&. Note that Plain TeX commands are not (yet) in this database
+although they can be used in \fBConTeXt\fP source files\&.
+.PP
+\fILANGUAGE\fP can be one of \fBcz\fP (Czech), \fBde\fP
+(German), \fBen\fP (US-English) or \fBnl\fP (Dutch)\&. The default
+language is Dutch\&.
+.PP
+You can also set the interface language with the
+\fB--interface\fP switch\&.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--help\fP"
+Print a brief syntax summary
+.IP "\fB--interface=\fP\fILANGUAGE\fP"
+Primary interface language\&.
+See DESCRIPTION for \fILANGUAGE\fP options\&.
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+.IP "\fITEXMF/context/perltk/cont_mis\&.pm\fP"
+Perl module for
+formatting data
+.IP "\fITEXMF/context/perltk/cont_set\&.pm\fP"
+Perl module for
+defining and constructing Tk interface
+.IP "\fITEXMF/context/data/cont-\fIXX\fP\&.tws\fP"
+The database
+file\&. At this writing, \fIXX\fP can be one of \fBcz\fP (Czech),
+\fBde\fP (German), \fBen\fP (English), \fBit\fP (Italian), or
+\fBnl\fP (Dutch)\&. Which file is used is determined by the
+\fILANGUAGE\fP specified on the command line\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBtexexec\fP(1), \fBtexutil\fP(1), \fBpdfetex\fP(1),
+\fBpdftex\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://www\&.pragma-ade\&.com/>
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBtexshow\fP was written by Hans Hagen
+<pragma@wxs\&.nl>\&.
+.PP
+This manpage was written by Tobias Burnus
+<burnus@gmx\&.de> and C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>\&.
+.PP
+\fBtexshow\fP is part of \fBTeXWork\fP and \fBConTeXt\fP and is available
+from <http://www\&.pragma-ade\&.com/pragma-ade/>\&.
+.PP
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texutil.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texutil.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5a6ea8d365e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texutil.1
@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+.TH TEXUTIL 1 UMFT
+.de EX
+.sp
+.in +5
+.nf
+.ft CW
+..
+.de EE
+.in -5
+.ft R
+.sp
+.fi
+..
+.TH "texutil" "1" "October 2000" "ConTeXt" "CONTEXT"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+texutil \- ConTeXt auxiliary program
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+\fBtexutil\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIFILENAME\fP[\&.\&.\&.]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+When processing a source file, \fBConTeXt\fP (via \fBtexexec\fP(1))
+saves information (including table of contents, tables of figures and
+tables, index entries, cross-references) in a ``utility file\'\' called
+\fIFILENAME\fP\fI\&.tui\fP\&. After each successful run, this
+utility file is postprocessed by \fBtexutil\fP to organize the
+information for the next run\&.
+.PP
+\fBtexutil\fP performs a number of useful functions:
+.PP
+.IP o
+Postprocessing references, including sorting index and list
+entries (with \fB--references\fP)
+.IP o
+Extracting documentation and other types of information from
+\fBConTeXt\fP source files (with
+\fB--documents\fP)
+.IP o
+Logfile analysis (with \fB--logfile\fP)
+.IP o
+Collecting information about graphic files to help with
+typesetting (with \fB--figures\fP)
+.IP o
+Converting EPS files to a PDF format suitable for inclusion in
+PDF files generated with \fBpdftex\fP(1) (with
+--\fB--epspage\fP and
+\fB--epstopdf\fP)
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+All switches are specified here in full, but can be abbreviated to the
+shortest unique string\&. Thus, \fB--ver\fP works the same as
+\fB--verbose\fP provided that there is no other flag beginning with
+``\f(CWver\fP\'\'\&.
+.PP
+.SH "General Options"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--help\fP"
+Print a usage summary to stdout\&.
+.IP "\fB--interface=\fP\fILANGUAGECODE\fP"
+Specify the language for
+messages\&. One of \fBen\fP (English), \fBde\fP (German), or
+\fBnl\fP (Dutch)\&. The default language is English\&.
+.IP "\fB--outputfile=\fP\fIFILENAME\fP"
+Specify the name of the
+output file\&.
+.IP "\fB--purge\fP [ \fIBASENAME\fP ]"
+Delete temporary files\&.
+Specifying an optional \fIBASENAME\fP will only
+affect the temporary files that begin with that
+\fIBASENAME\fP\&.
+.IP "\fB--silent\fP"
+Redirects stdout to the \fIlog\fP file
+(\fItexutil\&.log\fP, by default)\&. When used with
+\fB--verbose\fP, a summary is printed to stdout, while
+any other output is written to the \fIlog\fP file\&.
+.IP
+For example,
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexutil --figures --silent --verbose somefile\&.png\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+will output something like
+.IP
+.EX
+\f(CWn=somefile\&.png t=png x=0bp y=0bp w=443bp h=591bp\fP
+.EE
+.IP
+to stdout, placing other output into
+\fItexutil\&.log\fP\&. This information can be piped
+into another program for further processing\&.
+.IP "\fB--type=\fP\fISUFFIX\fP"
+Specify the \fISUFFIX\fP of the
+file you want \fBtexutil\fP to process\&.
+.IP "\fB--verbose\fP"
+Print diagnostic messages to the screen\&.
+.PP
+.SH "Postprocessing References"
+.PP
+The \fB--references\fP flag instructs \fBtexutil\fP to process
+information about cross-references, index entries, and other data
+requiring more than one pass to process in the \fBConTeXt\fP utility
+file\&.
+.PP
+Index and sorted list entries are sorted before being written out;
+redundant index entries are removed\&.
+.PP
+\fBtexutil\fP is called automatically by \fBtexexec\fP(1) during its
+processing runs unless you specify otherwise\&. \fBtexutil\fP can also
+be run by hand, using the form
+.PP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexutil --references\fP \fIFILENAME\fP
+.EE
+.PP
+This command would cause \fBtexutil\fP to load the utility file
+\fIFILENAME\fP\fI\&.tui\fP, sort and convert the contents of that
+file, and write the results to \fIFILENAME\fP\fI\&.tuo\fP\&.
+.PP
+Options specific to this mode are:
+.IP "\fB--ij\fP"
+Sort ``\f(CWIJ\fP\'\' as ``\f(CWY\fP\'\'\&. Often used when
+processing files written in Dutch\&.
+.IP "\fB--high\fP"
+Convert ``high\'\' ASCII values into equivalent TeX
+commands\&. This switch is provided for backward
+compatibility\&.
+.IP "\fB--quotes\fP"
+Take \fBtex\fP(1) accent commands into
+consideration when sorting\&. (Otherwise, quotes are
+considered to be boundary characters for strings\&.)
+.IP "\fB--tcxpath=\fP\fIPATH\fP"
+Specify path to \fItcx\fP
+filter files for translating
+between encodings\&.
+.PP
+.SH "Extracting Information from ConTeXt Source Files"
+.PP
+\fBConTeXt\fP source files often contain documentation (see
+USAGE for more information about the format) or other
+information that can be extracted by \fBtexutil\fP when called with the
+\fB--documents\fP flag:
+.PP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexutil --documents\fP \fIFILENAME\fP
+.EE
+.PP
+This command produces a file called \fIFILENAME\fP\fI\&.ted\fP
+from a ConTeXt file called \fIFILENAME\fP\fI\&.tex\fP\&.
+.PP
+The \fB--sources\fP flag does the opposite: Documentation lines are
+stripped out of the output, which is written to a file called
+\fIFILENAME\fP\fI\&.tes\fP\&.
+.PP
+Historically, \fBConTeXt\fP source files included other forms of
+information -- such as syntax definitions, macro definitions, and
+editor templates -- that can be extracted with the following flags:
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--infos\fP"
+Extract TeXEdit macro information
+(\fItex\fP->\fItud\fP -- see
+USAGE)
+.IP "\fB--setups\fP"
+Extract \fBConTeXt\fP syntax definitions
+(\fItex\fP->\fItexutil\&.tus\fP)
+.IP "\fB--templates\fP"
+Extract TeXEdit editor templates
+(\fItex\fP->\fItud\fP)
+.PP
+.SH "Analyzing Log Files"
+.PP
+Calling \fBtexutil\fP with the \fB--logfile\fP option allows you to
+extract information about problems with your \fBConTeXt\fP source file
+from the log file produced during a \fBtexexec\fP(1) run\&.
+.PP
+You can specify what information \fBtexutil\fP should report with the
+following options:
+.IP "\fB--box\fP"
+Extract information about overfull boxes\&. By
+default, this flag will cause \fBtexedit\fP to report both
+horizontal and vertical overfull boxes\&. If you\'re only
+interested in one kind, you can specify \fB--hbox\fP or
+\fB--vbox\fP instead\&.
+.IP "\fB--criterium=\fP\fISIZE\fP"
+Exclude reports about boxes that
+are less than \fISIZE\fP points too large\&.
+.IP "\fB--unknown\fP"
+Extract messages about missing references or
+figures\&.
+.PP
+.SH "Gathering Information about Figures"
+.PP
+The \fB--figures\fP flag tells \fBtexutil\fP to generate information
+about one or more (non-EPS) graphics files for use in typesetting\&.
+Called as, for example,
+.PP
+.EX
+\f(CWtexutil --figures *\&.png *\&.tif\fP
+.EE
+.PP
+\fBtexutil\fP will scan the current directory for PNG and TIFF files
+and extract some useful information about their sizes and types\&. By
+default, this information is stored in a file called
+\fItexutil\&.tuf\fP, which is consulted by \fBConTeXt\fP when
+typesetting a page with a non-EPS image file -- see the example given
+for the \fB--silent\fP flag for an alternative\&.
+.PP
+This flag is especially useful when you plan to typeset a file of
+previews of graphic files -- see the discussion of the
+\fB--figures\fP flag in the \fBtexexec\fP(1) manpage\&.
+.PP
+.SH "Converting EPS Files for PDF Inclusion"
+.PP
+\fBtexutil\fP can also convert EPS files to PDF format for inclusion in
+PDF files generated with \fBpdftex\fP(1) or \fBpdfetex\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--epspage\fP"
+Adjust the bounding box of an EPS file to the
+dimensions of the output page\&. This option also removes some
+redundant information and marks files as converted so that they
+will not be affected by subsequent runs\&.
+.IP "\fB--epstopdf\fP"
+Calls \fBgs\fP(1) to convert the specified
+EPS graphic files into PDF format\&.
+.PP
+.SH "USAGE"
+.PP
+.SH "Embedded Documentation Format"
+.PP
+Documentation lines included in \fBConTeXt\fP source files can be
+specified by beginning lines with the following strings:
+.IP "\f(CW%C\fP"
+Copyright information
+.IP "\f(CW%D\fP"
+Documentation lines
+.IP "\f(CW%I\fP"
+TeXEdit information lines (mostly in Dutch)
+.IP "\f(CW%M\fP"
+Macro code needed to processs the documentation
+.IP "\f(CW%S\fP"
+``Suppressed\'\' lines
+.PP
+The same forms can be used for Perl scripts, except that the
+``\f(CW%\fP\'\' characters are replaced by ``\f(CW#\fP\'\' characters\&. See
+the source for \fBtexutil\fP for an example\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBgs\fP(1), \fBpdfetex\fP(1), \fBpdftex\fP(1),
+\fBtexexec\fP(1), \fBtexshow\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://www\&.pragma-ade\&.com/>
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+This manpage was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com> and Tobias Burnus
+<burnus@gmx\&.de>\&. It is based on
+the \fBtexutil\fP manual written by Hans Hagen
+<pragma@wxs\&.nl>\&.
+.PP
+The PDF manual and \fBtexutil\fP itself can be obtained at
+<http://www\&.pragma-ade\&.com/pragma-ade/texutil\&.htm>\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8f66a461e1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.1
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+.TH TFTOPL 1 "17 December 1994" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+tftopl \- convert TeX font metric (tfm) files to property lists
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tftopl
+[
+.BI \-charcode-format =format
+]
+[
+.B \-verbose
+]
+.I tfm_name[.tfm]
+[
+.I pl_name[.pl]
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B tftopl
+program translates a (program-oriented) font metric file to a
+(human-oriented) property list file. Thus, you can edit the contents of
+the TFM files, if the font designer has not done his or her job
+properly, or if you're encountering strange difficulties, or if you're
+just curious. It also serves as a TFM-file validating program, i.e., if
+no error messages are given, the input file is correct.
+.PP
+The
+.I pl_name
+is extended with
+.I .pl
+if it lacks a suffix.
+If
+.I pl_name
+is not given, standard output is used. Likewise,
+.I tfm_name
+is extended with
+.I .tfm
+if it lacks a suffix. Also, path searching is done for the
+.I .tfm
+file
+using the environment variable TEXFONTS. If that is not set,
+.B tftopl
+uses the system default.
+.PP
+See
+.BR tex (1)
+for the details of the searching.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+The argument
+.I format
+to
+.B \-charcode-format
+specifies how character codes are output in the PL file. By
+default, only letters and digits are output using the
+.B C
+integer code (i.e., in ASCII); the others are output in octal. (Unless
+the font's coding scheme starts with
+.B "TeX math sy"
+or
+.BR "TeX math ex" ,
+in which case all character codes are output in octal.) If
+.I format
+is
+.BR ascii ,
+all character codes that correspond to graphic characters, besides the
+left and right parentheses, are output in ASCII. Finally, if
+.I format
+is
+.BR octal ,
+all character codes are output in octal.
+.PP
+Without the
+.B \-verbose
+option,
+.B tftopl
+operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on
+.IR stdout .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR pltotf (1),
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.IR "\*(OXware" .
+.br
+Donald E. Knuth,
+.I "The \*(MFbook"
+(Volume C of
+.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ),
+Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as
+part of the
+.I \*(OXware
+technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group.
+Howard Trickey and Pavel Curtis originally ported it to Unix.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d1d7e358f9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+.TH "thumbpdf" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+thumbpdf \- generate thumbnail images for a PDF file
+created with \fBpdftex\fP
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBthumbpdf\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIPDF_FILE\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBthumbpdf\fP is used to create thumbnail images of individual pages
+within a PDF (Portable Document Format) document\&.
+.PP
+.SH "USAGE"
+.PP
+First run \fBpdftex\fP(1) on your document to create a PDF file\&.
+Then run \fBthumbpdf\fP to generate the thumbnails, a PDF file
+containing the thumbnails, and a pdfTeX file to include the thumbnails
+in the PDF file\&. Finally, run \fBpdftex\fP(1) on your file again to
+create the final PDF file\&.
+.PP
+\fBthumbpdf\fP calls \fBgs\fP(1) to generate PNG images of the pages
+within \fIPDF_FILE\fP, and \fBpdftex\fP(1) to create a PDF file
+containing the thumbnail images\&.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB--help\fP"
+print usage
+.IP "\fB--(no)makepng\fP"
+make PNG thumbnail images (default: true)
+.IP "\fB--(no)makepdf\fP"
+generate new PDF file containing the
+thumbnails (default: true)
+.IP "\fB--(no)makedef\fP"
+create a TeX file for \fBpdftex\fP(1) to
+read in (default: true)
+.IP "\fB--(no)quiet\fP"
+suppress messages (default: false)
+.IP "\fB--(no)verbose\fP"
+verbose messages (default: false)
+.IP "\fB--(no)debug\fP"
+print debugging information while parsing
+(default: false)
+.IP "\fB--resolution\fP \fIres\fP"
+resolution for GhostScript step
+(default: 9)
+.IP "\fB--compress\fP \fIn\fP"
+\epdfcompresslevel for \fBthumbpdf\&.pdf\fP
+(0-9; default: 9)
+.IP "\fB--device\fP | \fBpng\fP\fIdev\fP"
+GhostScript PNG device;
+\fIdev\fP = `mono\', `gray\',
+`16\', `256\', `16m\' (default:
+`png16m\')
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+.IP "\fIthumb\fPnn\fI\&.png\fP"
+PNG thumbnail images
+.IP "\fIthumbpdf\&.pdf\fP"
+PDF file containing thumbnail images
+.IP "\fIthumbpdf\&.tex\fP"
+A pdfTeX program to include the thumbnails
+file
+.IP "\fIthumbpdf\&.log\fP"
+pdfTeX log file
+.IP "\fIthumbpdf\&.sty\fP"
+a LaTeX package to be included in files
+for which a user wants to generate thumbnails
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBgs\fP(1), \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/>
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to the author\&.
+.PP
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.PP
+Copyright © 1999\&. \fBthumbpdf\fP is distributed under
+version 1, or (at your option) a later version of the LaTeX Project
+Public License\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBthumbpdf\fP was written by Heiko Oberdiek
+<oberdiek@ruf\&.uni-freiburg\&.de>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..13d132d8ed6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.1
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+.TH TIE 1L 9/24/92
+.SH NAME
+tie \- merge or apply WEB change files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tie
+.B \-c|\-m
+.I outputfile masterfile changefile...
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.I tie
+program is used to process multiple change files used with the WEB
+system for literate programming. The WEB programs allow to apply
+patches to a source file (the
+.IR masterfile )
+by means of a number of change files (often only a single change file
+is allowed).
+.I Tie
+can be used to either merge up to nine change files into a single one
+or to apply the changes to the
+.I masterfile
+in order to create a new one. Output of either the new change file or
+the patched master file goes into
+.I outputfile.
+.SS OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-c
+Create a single change file from the given
+.I changefiles.
+.TP
+.B \-m
+Create a new master file by applying the given
+.I changefiles.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.br
+web(1), cweb(1l).
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+Klaus Guntermann, TH Darmstadt, Institut f. Theoretische Informatik. Man page
+by Joachim Schnitter, TH Darmstadt, Phys. Chemie I.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7cf15df3ab0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+.TH "ttf2afm" "1" "September 2000" "pdfTeX" "pdfTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+ttf2afm \- utility to generate AFM files for TrueType fonts
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBttf2afm\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIFONTFILE\fP
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBttf2afm\fP is used to generate Adobe Font Metrics (AFM) files for
+TrueType (TTF) fonts to allow them to be used with TeX\&.
+.PP
+\fBttf2afm\fP takes the name of a TrueType font file as a required
+argument\&. It may also take one or more options from the list below
+(note that \fB-d\fP and \fB-h\fP are mutually exclusive)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.IP "\fB-a\fP"
+print all glyphs
+.IP "\fB-i\fP"
+read names in encoding vector in form
+`index\fInum\fP\&'
+.IP "\fB-d\fP"
+print glyph names in the form
+`index\fIdecimal_num\fP\&'
+.IP "\fB-h\fP"
+print glyph names in the form
+`index\fIhex_num\fP\&'
+.IP "\fB-c\fP \fIname\fP"
+print encoding tables to file
+\fIname\&.eMN\fP, where \fIM\fP is the platform
+number and \fIN\fP is the encoding
+.IP "\fB-e\fP \fIenc\fP"
+use encoding from file \fIenc\fP
+.IP "\fB-o\fP \fIoutput\fP"
+output to file \fIoutput\fP instead
+of stdout
+.PP
+Platform numbers can be one of
+.IP "0"
+Apple Unicode
+.IP "1"
+Macintosh
+.IP "2"
+ISO
+.IP "3"
+Microsoft
+.PP
+Encodings can be
+.IP "0"
+Roman (if platform is Macintosh)
+.IP "0"
+Symbol (if platform is Microsoft)
+.IP "1"
+Unicode (if platform is Microsoft)
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but submit bug reports to <pdftex@tug\&.org> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBttf2afm\fP is part of pdfTeX and was written by Han The Thanh
+<thanh@informatics\&.muni\&.cz>\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..516a3081223
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.1
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+.\" man page for ttf2pk
+.
+.TH TTF2PK 1 10-Jan-2002 "FreeType version 1.5"
+.SH NAME
+ttf2pk \- convert a TrueType font into TeX's PK format
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.na
+.nh
+.B ttf2pk
+.RB [ \-q ]
+.RB [ \-n ]
+.I "\%font-name \%resolution"
+.br
+.B ttf2pk
+.B \-t
+.RB [ \-q ]
+.I \%font-name
+.br
+.B "ttf2pk \-\^\-version"
+|
+.B \-\^\-help
+.ad
+.hy
+.
+.
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.
+.\" and here the same for \LaTeX
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \
+.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX
+.\}
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.
+.\" \LaTeXe
+.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be
+.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font)
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v'
+.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v'
+.\}
+.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e
+.
+.\" a typewriter font
+.if t \{\
+.de C
+\fC\\$1\fP\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.if n \{\
+.de C
+\\$1\\$2
+..
+.\}
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== end of macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This program converts a TrueType font into a
+.C PK
+file; the created font can then be used with \*(TX
+or \*(LX.
+.PP
+CJKV (Chinese/Japanese/Korean/old Vietnamese) subfonts as created by
+.B ttf2tfm
+are also supported.
+.PP
+.B ttf2pk
+always assumes 10pt as the design size for the written \*(TX
+font.
+.
+.
+.SH PARAMETERS
+.TP
+.B \-q
+This optional switch makes
+.B ttf2pk
+quiet.
+It suppresses any informational output except warning and error
+messages.
+.TP
+.B \-n
+Use only `\c
+.C \&.pk '
+as the extension instead of `\c
+.C \&. \c
+.RI < \%resolution >\c
+.C pk '.
+.TP
+.B \-t
+Test for the existence of
+.IR \%font-name .
+Returns 0 on success and prints out the corresponding line of
+a map file (default:
+.C \%ttfonts.map ),
+provided the
+.B \-q
+switch isn't set.
+.TP
+.I font-name
+The \*(TX
+name of the font.
+.B ttf2pk
+looks this name up in a map file (see below) for further information how
+to process the font.
+.TP
+.I resolution
+The resolution, given in dots per inch.
+Currently the horizontal resolution is equal to the vertical
+resolution.
+The design size is always assumed to be 10pt.
+.TP
+.B \-\^\-version
+Shows the current version of
+.B ttf2pk
+and the used file search library (e.g.\ \c
+.BR kpathsea ).
+.TP
+.B \-\^\-help
+Shows usage information.
+.PP
+Environment variables for file searching are described in the manual page
+of
+.BR ttf2tfm .
+.
+.
+.SH "THE CONFIGURATION FILE"
+.B ttf2pk
+uses a small configuration file called
+.C ttf2pk.cfg ;
+in each line it contains a keyword with its value, separated by whitespace.
+Comment lines can start with any of the following characters: `*', `#',
+`;', and `%'.
+Leading whitespace is ignored.
+.PP
+Currently, only one keyword, `map', is recognized in this file; it takes
+a map file name as a parameter.
+If no extension is given to the map file name,
+.C \&.map
+is appended.
+No whitespace is allowed in the map file name.
+The `map' keyword can be given more than once to specify multiple map
+files; if the map file name is prepended by a plus sign, it is added to
+the list of map files to be used.
+Example:
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C "map foo"
+.br
+.C "map +bar"
+.PP
+This makes
+.B ttf2pk
+to first read
+.C foo.map ,
+then
+.C bar.map .
+.PP
+If the configuration file is not found,
+.B ttf2pk
+tries to use
+.C \%ttfonts.map
+instead.
+.
+.
+.SH "MAP FILES"
+Parameters specified to
+.B ttf2tfm
+are preserved for
+.B ttf2pk
+in map files\(em\c
+.B ttf2tfm
+writes out to standard output, as the last line, a proper entry for a
+map file.
+.PP
+As an example, a call to
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C "ttf2tfm arial -p T1.enc -s 0.25 -P 1 -E 0 arials"
+.PP
+will produce the following line:
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C "arials arial Slant=0.25 Pid=1 Eid=0 Encoding=T1.enc"
+.PP
+See
+.BR ttf2tfm (1)
+and
+.BR afm2tfm (1)
+of the
+.B dvips
+package for a detailed description of encoding files.
+.PP
+Here a table listing the various
+.B ttf2tfm
+parameters and the corresponding entries in a map file:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+-s Slant
+.br
+-e Extend
+.br
+-p Encoding
+.br
+-f Fontindex
+.br
+-P Pid
+.br
+-E Eid
+.br
+-n PS=Yes
+.br
+-N PS=Only
+.br
+-R Replacement
+.br
+-x Rotate=Yes
+.br
+-y Y-Offset
+.PP
+Single replacement glyph names given to
+.B ttf2tfm
+with `\c
+.BI \-r \ old-glyphname\ new-glyphname\c
+\&'
+are directly specified with `\c
+.IR old-glyphname = new-glyphname '.
+They will be ignored if in subfont mode or if no encoding file is given.
+.PP
+One additional parameter in a map file is unique to
+.BR ttf2pk :
+`Hinting', which can take the values `On' or `Off'.
+Some fonts (e.g.\ the CJK part of
+.C \%cyberbit.ttf )
+are rendered incorrectly if hinting is activated.
+Default is `On' (you can also use `Yes', `No', `1', and `0').
+.PP
+For a description of subfonts (i.e., entries of the form `\c
+.I <namestem>\c
+.C @\c
+.I <sfd-filename>\c
+.C @ ')
+please refer to
+.BR ttf2tfm (1).
+.PP
+The format of a map file is simple.
+Each line defines a font; first comes the \*(TX
+font name, then its TrueType font file name, followed by the
+parameters in any order.
+Case is significant (even for parameter names); the parameters are
+separated from its values by an equal sign, with whitespace possibly
+surrounding it.
+.B ttf2pk
+reads in all map files line by line in the order given in the
+configuration file, continuing until the \*(TX font specified on the
+command line is found, otherwise the programs exits with error code\ 2.
+Thus you can use any character invalid in a \*(TX
+font name to start a comment line.
+.PP
+You can use `\\' as the final character of a line to indicate that the
+input is continued on the next line.
+The backslash and the following newline character will be removed.
+.PP
+.B ttf2pk
+will abort if it can't find or read the \*(TX
+font metrics file of the given \*(TX
+font name.
+.
+.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the call was successful, 0\ will be returned.
+In case of error, the return value is\ 1.
+Finally, if the font can't be found in the map files,
+2\ is returned.
+This simplifies the inclusion of
+.B ttf2pk
+into scripts like
+.B mktexpk
+for automatic font generation.
+.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR ttf2tfm (1),
+.BR afm2tfm (1)
+.
+.
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+.B ttf2pk
+is part of the FreeType\ 1 package, a high quality TrueType rendering
+library.
+.
+.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Werner LEMBERG
+.C <wl@gnu.org>
+.br
+Fr\('ed\('eric LOYER
+.C <loyer@ensta.fr>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pt1.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pt1.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..86a36074b8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pt1.1
@@ -0,0 +1,619 @@
+.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
+.SH "NAME"
+TTF2PT1 \- A True Type to PostScript Type 1 Font Converter
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+\f(CWttf2pt1 \fI[-options] ttffont.ttf [Fontname]\fR\fR
+.PP
+or
+.PP
+\f(CWttf2pt1 \fI[-options] ttffont.ttf -\fR\fR
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+Ttf2pt1 is a font converter from the True Type format (and some other formats
+supported by the FreeType library as well) to the Adobe Type1 format.
+.PP
+The versions 3.0 and later got rather extensive post-processing algorithm that
+brings the converted fonts to the requirements of the Type1 standard, tries to
+correct the rounding errors introduced during conversions and some simple
+kinds of bugs that are typical for the public domain TTF fonts. It
+also generates the hints that enable much better rendering of fonts in
+small sizes that are typical for the computer displays. But everything
+has its price, and some of the optimizations may not work well for certain
+fonts. That's why the options were added to the converter, to control
+the performed optimizations.
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+The first variant creates the file \f(CWFontname.pfa\fR (or \f(CWFontname.pfb\fR if the
+option \*(L'\fB\-b\fR\*(R' was used) with the converted font and \f(CWFontname.afm\fR with the
+font metrics, the second one prints the font or another file (if the option
+\&\*(R'\fB\-G\fR\*(R' was used) on the standard output from where it can be immediately
+piped through some filter. If no \f(CWFontname\fR is specified for the first
+variant, the name is generated from \f(CWttffont\fR by replacing the \f(CW.ttf\fR
+filename suffix.
+.PP
+Most of the time no options are neccessary (with a possible exception
+of \*(L'\fB\-e\fR'). But if there are some troubles with the resulting font, they
+may be used to control the conversion.
+The \fBoptions\fR are:
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-a\fR\fR \- Include all the glyphs from the source file into the converted
+file. If this option is not specified then only the glyphs that have
+been assigned some encoding are included, because the rest of glyphs
+would be inaccessible anyway and would only consume the disk space.
+But some applications are clever enough to change the encoding on
+the fly and thus use the other glyphs, in this case they could
+benefit from using this option. But there is a catch: the X11 library
+has rather low limit for the font size. Including more glyphs increases
+the file size and thus increases the chance of hitting this limit.
+See \f(CWapp/X11/README\fR for the description of a
+patch to X11 which fixes this problem.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-b\fR\fR \- Encode the resulting font to produce a ready \f(CW.pfb\fR file.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-d \fIsuboptions\fR\fR\fR \- Debugging options. The suboptions are:
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBa\fR\fR \- Print out the absolute coordinates of dots in outlines. Such
+a font can not be used by any program (that's why this option is
+incompatible with \*(L'\fB\-e\fR') but it has proven to be a valuable debuging
+information.
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBr\fR\fR \- Do not reverse the direction of outlines. The \s-1TTF\s0 fonts have
+the standard direction of outlines opposite to the Type1 fonts. So
+they should be reversed during proper conversion. This option
+may be used for debugging or to handle a \s-1TTF\s0 font with wrong
+direction of outlines (possibly, converted in a broken way from
+a Type1 font). The first signs of the wrong direction are the
+letters like \*(L"P\*(R" or \*(L"B\*(R" without the unpainted \*(L"holes\*(R" inside.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-e\fR\fR \- Assemble the resulting font to produce a ready \f(CW.pfa\fR file.
+.Sp
+[ S.B.: Personally I don't think that this option is particularly useful.
+The same result may be achieved by piping the unassembled data
+through t1asm, the Type 1 assembler. And, anyways, it's good to
+have the t1utils package handy. But Mark and many users think that
+this functionality is good and it took not much time to add this option. ]
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-F\fR\fR \- Force the Unicode encoding: any type of \s-1MS\s0 encoding specified
+in the font is ignored and the font is treated like it has Unicode
+encoding. \fB\s-1WARNING\s0:\fR this option is intended for buggy fonts
+which actually are in Unicode but are marked as something else. The
+effect on the other fonts is unpredictable.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-G \fIsuboptions\fR\fR\fR \- File generation options. The suboptions may be lowercase
+or uppercase, the lowercase ones disable the generation of particular
+files, the corresponding uppercase suboptions enable the generation of the
+same kind of files. If the result of ttf2pt1 is requested to be printed on
+the standard output, the last enabling suboption of \fB\-G\fR determines
+which file will be written to the standard output and the rest of files
+will be discarded. For example, \fB\-G A\fR will request the \s-1AFM\s0 file.
+The suboptions to disable/enable the generation of the files are:
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBf/F\fR\fR \- The font file. Depending on the other options this file
+will have one of the suffixes \f(CW.t1a\fR, \f(CW.pfa\fR or \f(CW.pfb\fR. If the conversion result
+is requested on the standard output ('\f(CW-\fR\*(R' is used as the output file name)
+then the font file will also be written there by default, if not overwritten
+by another suboption of \fB\-G\fR.
+\fBDefault: enabled\fR
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBa/A\fR\fR \- The Adobe font metrics file (\f(CW.afm\fR).
+\fBDefault: enabled\fR
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBe/E\fR\fR \- The dvips encoding file (\f(CW.enc\fR).
+\fBDefault: disabled\fR
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-l \fIlanguage\fR[+\fIargument\fR]\fR\fR \- Extract the fonts for the specified language from a
+multi-language Unicode font. If this option is not used the converter
+tries to guess the language by the values of the shell variable \s-1LANG\s0.
+If it is not able to guess the language by \s-1LANG\s0 it tries all the
+languages in the order they are listed.
+.Sp
+After the plus sign an optional argument for the language extractor
+may be specified. The format of the argument is absolutely up to
+the particular language converter. The primary purpose of the
+argument is to support selection of planes for the multi-plane
+Eastern encodings but it can also be used in any other way. The
+language extractor may decide to add the plane name in some form
+to the name of the resulting font. None of the currently supported
+languages make any use of the argument yet.
+.Sp
+As of now the following languages are supported:
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWlatin1\fR \- for all the languages using the Latin-1 encoding
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWlatin2\fR \- for the Central European languages
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWlatin4\fR \- for the Baltic languages
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWlatin5\fR \- for the Turkish language
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWcyrillic\fR \- for the languages with Cyrillic alphabet
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWrussian\fR \- historic synonym for cyrillic
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWbulgarian\fR \- historic synonym for cyrillic
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWadobestd\fR \- for the AdobeStandard encoding used by TeX
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWplane+\fIargument\fR\fR \- to select one plane from a multi-byte encoding
+.Sp
+The argument of the \*(L"\f(CWplane\fR\*(R" language may be in one of three forms:
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWplane+\fBpid=\fR\fI<pid>\fR\fB,eid=\fR\fI<eid>\fR\fR
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWplane+\fBpid=\fR\fI<pid>\fR\fB,eid=\fR\fI<eid>\fR\fB,\fR\fI<plane_number>\fR\fR
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWplane+\fI<plane_number>\fR\fR
+.Sp
+Pid (\s-1TTF\s0 platform id) and eid (\s-1TTF\s0 encoding id) select a particular
+\s-1TTF\s0 encoding table in the original font. They are specified as decimal
+numbers. If this particular encoding table is not present in the font
+file then the conversion fails. The native ("ttf") front-end parser supports
+only pid=3 (Windows platform), the FreeType-based ("ft") front-end supports
+any platform. If pid/eid is not specified then the \s-1TTF\s0 encoding table is
+determined as usual: Unicode encoding if it's first or an 8-bit encoding
+if not (and for an 8-bit encoding the plane number is silently ignored).
+To prevent the converter from falling back to an 8-bit encoding, specify
+the Unicode pid/eid value explicitly.
+.Sp
+Plane_number is a hexadecimal (if starts with \*(L"\fB0x\fR") or decimal number.
+It gives the values of upper bytes for which 256 characters will be
+selected. If not specified, defaults to 0. It is also used as a font
+name suffix (the leading \*(L"0x\*(R" is not included into the suffix).
+.Sp
+\fB\s-1NOTE\s0:\fR
+You may notice that the language names are not uniform: some are the
+names of particular languages and some are names of encodings. This
+is because of the different approaches. The original idea was to
+implement a conversion from Unicode to the appropriate Windows
+encoding for a given language. And then use the translation tables
+to generate the fonts in whatever final encodings are needed. This
+would allow to pile together the Unicode fonts and the non-Unicode
+Windows fonts for that language and let the program to sort them out
+automatically. And then generate fonts in all the possible encodings
+for that language. An example of this approach is the Russian language
+support. But if there is no multiplicity of encodings used for some
+languages and if the non-Unicode fonts are not considered important
+by the users, another way would be simpler to implement: just provide
+only one table for extraction of the target encoding from Unicode
+and don't bother with the translation tables. The latin* \*(L"languages\*(R"
+are examples of this approach. If somebody feels that he needs the
+Type1 fonts both in Latin-* and Windows encodings he or she is absolutely
+welcome to submit the code to implement it.
+.Sp
+\fB\s-1WARNING\s0:\fR
+Some of the glyphs included into the AdobeStandard encoding are not
+included into the Unicode standard. The most typical examples of such
+glyphs are ligatures like \*(L'fi\*(R', \*(L'fl\*(R' etc. Because of this the font
+designers may place them at various places. The converter tries to
+do its best, if the glyphs have honest Adobe names and/or are
+placed at the same codes as in the Microsoft fonts they will be
+picked up. Otherwise a possible solution is to use the option \*(L'\fB\-L\fR\*(R'
+with an external map.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-L \fIfile\fR[+[pid=\fI<pid>\fR,eid=\fI<eid>\fR,][\fIplane\fR]]\fR\fR \- Extract the fonts for the specified
+language from a multi-language font using the map from this file. This is
+rather like the option \*(L'\fB\-l\fR\*(R' but the encoding map is not
+compiled into the program, it's taken from that file, so it's
+easy to edit. Examples of such files are provided in
+\f(CWmaps/adobe-standard-encoding.map\fR, \f(CWCP1250.map\fR. (\fB\s-1NOTE\s0:\fR
+the \*(L'standard encoding\*(R' map does not include all the glyphs of the
+AdobeStandard encoding, it's provided only as an example.) The
+description of the supported map formats is in the file
+\f(CWmaps/unicode-sample.map\fR.
+.Sp
+Likewise to \*(L'\fB\-l\fR\*(R', an argument may be specified after the map file
+name. But in this case the argument has fixed meaning: it selects the
+original \s-1TTF\s0 encoding table (the syntax is the same as in \*(L'\fB\-l plane\fR')
+and/or a plane of the map file. The plane name also gets added after dash
+to the font name. The plane is a concept used in the Eastern fonts with big
+number of glyphs: one \s-1TTF\s0 font gets divided into multiple Type1 fonts,
+each containing one plane of up to 256 glyphs. But with a little
+creativity this concept may be used for other purposes of combining
+multiple translation maps into one file. To extract multiple planes
+from a \s-1TTF\s0 font \f(CWttf2pt1\fR must be run multiple times, each time with
+a different plane name specified.
+.Sp
+The default original \s-1TTF\s0 encoding table used for the option \*(L'\fB\-L\fR\*(R' is
+Unicode. The map files may include directives to specify different original
+\s-1TTF\s0 encodings. However if the pid/eid pair is specified with
+it overrides any original encoding specified in the map file.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-m \fItype\fR=\fIvalue\fR\fR\fR \- Set maximal or minimal limits of resources.
+These limits control the the font generation by limiting the resources
+that the font is permitted to require from the PostScript interpreter.
+The currently supported types of limits are:
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBh\fR\fR \- the maximal hint stack depth for the substituted hints.
+The default value is 128, according to the limitation in X11. This seems to
+be the lowest (and thus the safest) widespread value. To display the
+hint stack depth required by each glyph in a \f(CW.t1a\fR file use the script
+\f(CWscripts/cntstems.pl\fR.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-O \fIsuboptions\fR\fR\fR \- Outline processing options. The suboptions
+may be lowercase or uppercase, the lowercase ones disable the features,
+the corresponding uppercase suboptions enable the same features.
+The suboptions to disable/enable features are:
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBb/B\fR\fR \- Guessing of the ForceBold parameter. This parameter helps
+the Type1 engine to rasterize the bold fonts properly at small sizes.
+But the algorithm used to guess the proper value of this flag makes
+that guess based solely on the font name. In rare cases that may cause
+errors, in these cases you may want to disable this guessing.
+\fBDefault: enabled\fR
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBh/H\fR\fR \- Autogeneration of hints. The really complex outlines
+may confuse the algorithm, so theoretically it may be useful
+sometimes to disable them. Although up to now it seems that
+even bad hints are better than no hints at all.
+\fBDefault: enabled\fR
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBu/U\fR\fR \- Hint substitution. Hint substitution is a technique
+permitting generation of more detailed hints for the rasterizer. It allows
+to use different sets of hints for different parts of a glyph and change
+these sets as neccessary during rasterization (that's why \*(L"substituted").
+So it should improve the quality of the fonts rendered at small sizes.
+But there are two catches: First, the X11 library has rather low limit for
+the font size. More detailed hints increase the file size and thus increase
+the chance of hitting this limit (that does not mean that you shall hit it
+but you may if your fonts are particularly big). This is especially
+probable for Unicode fonts converted with option \*(L'\fB\-a\fR\*(R', so you may want to
+use \*(L'\fB\-a\fR\*(R' together with \*(L'\fB\-Ou\fR\*(R'. See \f(CWapp/X11/README\fR for the description of
+a patch to X11 which fixes this problem. Second, some rasterizers (again,
+X11 is the typical example) have a limitation for total number of hints
+used when drawing a glyph (also known as the hint stack depth). If that
+stack overflows the glyph is ignored. Starting from version 3.22 \f(CWttf2pt1\fR
+uses algorithms to minimizing this depth, with the trade-off of slightly
+bigger font files. The glyphs which still exceed the limit set by option
+\&\*(R'\fB\-mh\fR\*(R' have all the substituted hints removed and only base hints left.
+The algorithms seem to have been refined far enough to make the fonts with
+substituted hints look better than the fonts without them or at least the
+same. Still if the original fonts are not well-designed the detailed
+hinting may emphasize the defects of the design, such as non-even thickness
+of lines. So provided that you are not afraid of the X11 bug the best idea
+would be to generate a font with this feature and without it, then compare
+the results using the program \f(CWother/cmpf\fR (see the description
+in \f(CWother/README\fR) and decide which one looks better.
+\fBDefault: enabled\fR
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBo/O\fR\fR \- Space optimization of the outlines\*(R' code. This kind of optimization
+never hurts, and the only reason to disable this feature is for comparison
+of the generated fonts with the fonts generated by the previous versions of
+converter. Well, it _almost_ never hurts. As it turned out there exist
+some brain-damaged printers which don't understand it. Actually this
+feature does not change the outlines at all. The Type 1 font manual
+provides a set of redundant operators that make font description shorter,
+such as \*(L'10 hlineto\*(R' instead of \*(L'0 10 rlineto\*(R' to describe a horizontal
+line. This feature enables use of these operators.
+\fBDefault: enabled\fR
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBs/S\fR\fR \- Smoothing of outlines. If the font is broken in some
+way (even the ones that are not easily noticeable), such smoothing
+may break it further. So disabling this feature is the first thing to be
+tried if some font looks odd. But with smoothing off the hint generation
+algorithms may not work properly too.
+\fBDefault: enabled\fR
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBt/T\fR\fR \- Auto-scaling to the 1000x1000 Type1 standard matrix. The
+\s-1TTF\s0 fonts are described in terms of an arbitrary matrix up to
+4000x4000. The converted fonts must be scaled to conform to
+the Type1 standard. But the scaling introduces additional rounding
+errors, so it may be curious sometimes to look at the font in its
+original scale.
+\fBDefault: enabled\fR
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fBw/W\fR\fR \- Glyphs\*(R' width corection. This option is designed to be
+used on broken fonts which specify too narrow widths for the
+letters. You can tell that a font can benefit from this option
+if you see that the characters are smashed together without
+any whitespace between them. This option causes the converter
+to set the character widths to the actual width of this character
+plus the width of a typical vertical stem. But on the other hand
+the well-designed fonts may have characters that look better if
+their widths are set slightly narrower. Such well-designed fonts
+will benefit from disabling this feature. You may want to convert
+a font with and without this feature, compare the results and
+select the better one. This feature may be used only on proportional
+fonts, it has no effect on the fixed-width fonts.
+\fBDefault: disabled\fR
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-p \fIparser_name\fR\fR\fR \- Use the specified front-end parser to read the font file.
+If this option is not used, ttf2pt1 selects the parser automatically based
+on the suffix of the font file name, it uses the first parser in its
+list that supports this font type. Now two parsers are supported:
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWttf\fR \- built-in parser for the ttf files (suffix \f(CW.ttf\fR)
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWbdf\fR \- built-in parser for the \s-1BDF\s0 files (suffix \f(CW.bdf\fR)
+.Sp
+\ \ \f(CWft\fR \- parser based on the FreeType-2 library (suffixes \f(CW.ttf\fR,
+\&\f(CW.otf\fR, \f(CW.pfa\fR, \f(CW.pfb\fR)
+.Sp
+The parser \f(CWft\fR is \fB\s-1NOT\s0\fR linked in by default. See \f(CWMakefile\fR
+for instructions how to enable it. We do no support this parser on
+Windows: probably it will work but nobody tried and nobody knows how
+to build it.
+.Sp
+The conversion of the bitmap fonts (such as \s-1BDF\s0) is simplistic yet,
+producing jagged outlines. When converting such fonts, it might be
+a good idea to turn off the hint substitution (using option \fB\-Ou\fR)
+because the hints produced will be huge but not adding much to the
+quality of the fonts.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-u \fInumber\fR\fR\fR \- Mark the font with this value as its
+UniqueID. The UniqueID is used by the printers with the hard disks
+to cache the rasterized characters and thus significantly
+speed-up the printing. Some of those printers just can't
+store the fonts without UniqueID on their disk.The problem
+is that the \s-1ID\s0 is supposed to be unique, as it name says. And
+there is no easy way to create a guaranteed unique \s-1ID\s0. Adobe specifies
+the range 4000000-4999999 for private IDs but still it's difficult
+to guarantee the uniqueness within it. So if you don't really need the
+UniqueID don't use it, it's optional. Luckily there are a few millions of
+possible IDs, so the chances of collision are rather low.
+If instead of the number a special value \*(L'\f(CW\fBA\fR\fR\*(R' is given
+then the converter generates the value of UniqueID automatically,
+as a hash of the font name. (\fB\s-1NOTE\s0:\fR in the version 3.22 the
+algorithm for autogeneration of UniqueID was changed to fit the values
+into the Adobe-spacified range. This means that if UniqueIDs were used
+then the printer's cache may need to be flushed before replacing the
+fonts converted by an old version with fonts converted by a newer version).
+A simple way to find if any of the fonts in a given directory have
+duplicated UniqueIDs is to use the command:
+.Sp
+\f(CW\ \ cat *.pf[ab] | grep UniqueID | sort | uniq -c | grep -v ' 1 '\fR
+.Sp
+Or if you use \f(CWscripts/convert\fR it will do that for you automatically
+plus it will also give the exact list of files with duplicate UIDs.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-v \fIsize\fR\fR\fR \- Re-scale the font to get the size of a typical uppercase
+letter somewhere around the specified size. Actually, it re-scales
+the whole font to get the size of one language-dependent letter to be
+at least of the specified size. Now this letter is \*(L"A\*(R" in all the
+supported languages. The size is specified in the points of the
+Type 1 coordinate grids, the maximal value is 1000. This is an
+experimental option and should be used with caution. It tries to
+increase the visible font size for a given point size and thus make
+the font more readable. But if overused it may cause the fonts to
+look out of scale. As of now the interesting values of size for
+this option seem to be located mostly between 600 and 850. This
+re-scaling may be quite useful but needs more experience to
+understand the balance of its effects.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\f(CW\fB-W \fIlevel\fR\fR\fR \- Select the verbosity level of the warnings.
+Currently the levels from 0 to 4 are supported. Level 0 means no warnings
+at all, level 4 means all the possible warnings. The default level is 3.
+Other levels may be added in the future, so using the level number 99 is
+recommended to get all the possible warnings. Going below level 2 is
+not generally recommended because you may miss valuable information about
+the problems with the fonts being converted.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\fBObsolete option:\fR
+\f(CW\fB-A\fR\fR \- Print the font metrics (.afm file) instead of the font on \s-1STDOUT\s0.
+Use \fB\-\s-1GA\s0\fR instead.
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\fBVery obsolete option:\fR
+.Sp
+The algorithm that implemented the forced fixed width had major
+flaws, so it was disabled. The code is still in the program and
+some day it will be refined and returned back. Meanwhile the
+option name \*(L'\fB\-f\fR\*(R' was reused for another option. The old version was:
+.Sp
+\f(CW\fB-f\fR\fR \- Don't try to force the fixed width of font. Normally the converter
+considers the fonts in which the glyph width deviates by not more
+than 5% as buggy fixed width fonts and forces them to have really
+fixed width. If this is undesirable, it can be disabled by this option.
+.PP
+The \f(CW.pfa\fR font format supposes that the description of the characters
+is binary encoded and encrypted. This converter does not encode or
+encrypt the data by default, you have to specify the option \*(L'\fB\-e\fR\*(R'
+or use the \f(CWt1asm\fR program to assemble (that means, encode and
+encrypt) the font program. The \f(CWt1asm\fR program that is included with
+the converter is actually a part of the \f(CWt1utils\fR package, rather old
+version of which may be obtained from
+.PP
+http://ttf2pt1.sourceforge.net/t1utils.tar.gz
+.PP
+Note that \f(CWt1asm\fR from the old version of that package won't work properly
+with the files generated by \f(CWttf2pt1\fR version 3.20 and later. Please use
+\f(CWt1asm\fR packaged with \f(CWttf2pt1\fR or from the new version \f(CWt1utils\fR
+instead. For a newer version of \f(CWt1utils\fR please look at
+.PP
+http://www.lcdf.org/~eddietwo/type/
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+So, the following command lines:
+.PP
+\f(CWttf2pt1 -e ttffont.ttf t1font\fR
+.PP
+\f(CWttf2pt1 ttffont.ttf - | t1asm >t1font.pfa\fR
+.PP
+represent two ways to get a working font. The benefit of the second form
+is that other filters may be applied to the font between the converter
+and assembler.
+.SH "FILES"
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\s-1TTF2PT1_LIBXDIR/\s0t1asm
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\s-1TTF2PT1_SHAREDIR\s0/*
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\s-1TTF2PT1_SHAREDIR/\s0scripts/*
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\s-1TTF2PT1_SHAREDIR/\s0other/*
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\s-1TTF2PT1_SHAREDIR/README\s0
+.Ip "\(bu" 2
+\s-1TTF2PT1_SHAREDIR/FONTS\s0
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.Ip "\(bu" 4
+the \fIttf2pt1_convert(1)\fR manpage
+.Ip "\(bu" 4
+the \fIttf2pt1_x2gs(1)\fR manpage
+.Ip "\(bu" 4
+the \fIt1asm(1)\fR manpage
+.Ip "\(bu" 4
+ttf2pt1-announce@lists.sourceforge.net
+.Sp
+The mailing list with announcements about ttf2pt1. It is a moderated mailing
+with extremely low traffic. Everyone is encouraged to subscribe to keep in
+touch with the current status of project. To subscribe use the Web interface
+at http://lists.sourceforge.net/mailman/listinfo/ttf2pt1-announce.
+If you have only e-mail access to the Net then send a subscribe request to
+the development mailing list ttf2pt1-devel@lists.sourceforge.net and somebody
+will help you with subscription.
+.Ip "\(bu" 4
+ttf2pt1-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
+.Sp
+ttf2pt1-users@lists.sourceforge.net
+.Sp
+The ttf2pt1 mailing lists for development and users issues. They have not
+that much traffic either. To subscribe use the Web interface at
+http://lists.sourceforge.net/mailman/listinfo/ttf2pt1-devel
+and http://lists.sourceforge.net/mailman/listinfo/ttf2pt1-users.
+If you have only e-mail access to the Net then send a subscribe request to
+the development mailing list ttf2pt1-devel@lists.sourceforge.net and somebody
+will help you with subscription.
+.Ip "\(bu" 4
+http://ttf2pt1.sourceforge.net
+.Sp
+http://www.netspace.net.au/~mheath/ttf2pt1/
+.Sp
+The primary copies of the main page of the project.
+.SH "BUGS"
+It seems that many Eastern fonts use features of the TTF format that are
+not supported by the ttf2pt1's built-in front-end parser. Because of
+this for now we recommend using the FreeType-based parser (option
+\&\*(R'\fB\-p ft\fR') with the \*(L"\f(CWplane\fR\*(R" language.
+.Sh "Troubleshooting and bug reports"
+Have problems with conversion of some font ? The converter dumps core ? Or your
+printer refuses to understand the converted fonts ? Or some characters are
+missing ? Or some characters look strange ?
+.PP
+Send the bug reports to the ttf2pt1 development mailing list at
+ttf2pt1-devel@lists.sourceforge.net.
+.PP
+Try to collect more information about the problem and include it into
+the bug report. (Of course, even better if you would provide a ready
+fix, but just a detailed bug report is also good). Provide detailed
+information about your problem, this will speed up the response greatly.
+Don't just write \*(L"this font looks strange after conversion\*(R" but describe
+what's exactly wrong with it: for example, what characters look wrong
+and what exactly is wrong about their look. Providing a link to the
+original font file would be also a good idea. Try to do a little
+troublehooting and report its result. This not only would help with
+the fix but may also give you a temporary work-around for the bug.
+.PP
+First, enable full warnings with option \*(L'\fB\-W99\fR\*(R', save them to
+a file and read carefully. Sometimes the prolem is with a not implemented
+feature which is reported in the warnings. Still, reporting about such
+problems may be a good idea: some features were missed to cut corners,
+in hope that no real font is using them. So a report about a font using
+such a feature may motivate someone to implement it. Of course, you
+may be the most motivated person: after all, you are the one wishing
+to convert that font. ;\-) Seriously, the philosophy \*(L"scrath your own itch\*(R"
+seems to be the strongest moving force behind the Open Source software.
+.PP
+The next step is playing with the options. This serves a dual purpose:
+on one hand, it helps to localize the bug, on the other hand you may be
+able to get a working version of the font for the meantime while the
+bug is being fixed. The typical options to try out are: first \*(L'\fB\-Ou\fR\*(R', if
+it does not help then \*(L'\fB\-Os\fR\*(R', then \*(L'\fB\-Oh\fR\*(R', then \*(L'\fB\-Oo\fR\*(R'.
+They are described in a bit more detail above. Try them one by one
+and in combinations. See if with them the resulting fonts look better.
+.PP
+On some fonts ttf2pt1 just crashes. Commonly that happens because the
+font being converted is highly defective (although sometimes the bug
+is in ttf2pt1 itself). In any case it should not crash, so the reports
+about such cases will help to handle these defects properly in future.
+.PP
+We try to respond to the bug reports in a timely fashion but alas, this
+may not always be possible, especially if the problem is complex.
+This is a volunteer project and its resources are limited. Because
+of this we would appreciate bug reports as detailed as possible,
+and we would appreciate the ready fixes and contributions even more.
+.SH "HISTORY"
+Based on ttf2pfa by Andrew Weeks, and help from Frank Siegert.
+.PP
+Modification by Mark Heath.
+.PP
+Further modification by Sergey Babkin.
+.PP
+The Type1 assembler by I. Lee Hetherington with modifications by
+Kai-Uwe Herbing.
+
+.rn }` ''
+.IX Title "TTF2PT1 1"
+.IX Name "TTF2PT1 - A True Type to PostScript Type 1 Font Converter"
+
+.IX Header "NAME"
+
+.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
+
+.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
+
+.IX Header "OPTIONS"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Header "EXAMPLES"
+
+.IX Header "FILES"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Item "\(bu"
+
+.IX Header "BUGS"
+
+.IX Subsection "Troubleshooting and bug reports"
+
+.IX Header "HISTORY"
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a1edc31eaae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.1
@@ -0,0 +1,1182 @@
+.\" man page for ttf2tfm
+.
+.TH TTF2TFM 1 10-Jan-2002 "FreeType version 1.5"
+.SH NAME
+ttf2tfm \- build TeX metric files from a TrueType font
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.na
+.nh
+.B ttf2tfm
+'in +\n(.ku
+.IR ttffile [ .ttf | .ttc ]
+[\c
+.BI \-c \ \%caps-height-factor\c
+]
+[\c
+.BI \-e \ \%extension-factor\c
+]
+[\c
+.BI \-E \ \%encoding-id\^\c
+]
+[\c
+.BI \-f \ \%font-index\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-l\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-L\ \c
+.IR \%ligature-file [ .sfd ]\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-n\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-N\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-O\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-p\ \c
+.IR \%inencfile [ .enc ]\c
+]
+[\c
+.BI \-P \ \%platform-id\^\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-q\c
+]
+[\c
+.BI \-r \ \%old-glyphname\ \%new-glyphname\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-R\ \c
+.IR \%replacement-file [ .rpl ]\c
+]
+[\c
+.BI \-s \ \%slant-factor\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-t\ \c
+.IR \%outencfile [ .enc ]\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-T\ \c
+.IR \%inoutencfile [ .enc ]\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-u\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-v\ \c
+.IR \%vplfile [ .vpl ]\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-V\ \c
+.IR \%scvplfile [ .vpl ]\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-w\c
+]
+[\c
+.B \-x\c
+]
+[\c
+.BI \-y \ \%vertical-shift-factor\c
+]
+[\c
+.IR \%tfmfile [ .tfm ]\c
+]
+.br
+.in
+.B "ttf2tfm \-\^\-version"
+|
+.B \-\^\-help
+.ad
+.hy
+.
+.
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff
+.if t .ds TX T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.
+.\" and here the same for \LaTeX
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \
+.ds LX L\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\*(TX
+.el .ds LX L\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\*(TX
+.\}
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.
+.\" \LaTeXe
+.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be
+.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font)
+.if t \{\
+.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v'
+.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v'
+.\}
+.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e
+.
+.\" a typewriter font
+.if t \{\
+.de C
+\fC\\$1\fP\\$2\fC\\$3\fP\\$4
+..
+.\}
+.if n \{\
+.de C
+\\$1\\$2\\$3\\$4
+..
+.\}
+.
+.\" ====
+.\" ==== end of macro definitions
+.\" ====
+.
+.
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This program extracts the metric and kerning information of a TrueType
+font and converts it into metric files usable by \*(TX
+(quite similar to
+.B afm2tfm
+which is part of the
+.B dvips
+package; please consult its info files for more details on the various
+parameters (especially encoding files).
+.PP
+Since a TrueType font often contains more than 256\ glyphs, some means
+are necessary to map a subset of the TrueType glyphs onto a \*(TX
+font.
+To do this, two mapping tables are needed: the first (called `input' or
+`raw' encoding) maps the TrueType font to a raw \*(TX font (this mapping
+table is used by both
+.B ttf2tfm
+and
+.BR ttf2pk ),
+and the second (called `output' or `virtual' encoding) maps the raw \*(TX
+font to another (virtual) \*(TX
+font, providing all kerning and ligature information needed by \*(TX.
+.PP
+This two stage mapping has the advantage that one raw font can be
+accessed with various \*(LX
+encodings (e.g.\ T1 and OT1) via the virtual font mechanism, and just
+one
+.C PK
+file is necessary.
+.PP
+For CJKV (Chinese/Japanese/Korean/old Vietnamese) fonts, a different
+mechanism is provided (see
+.B "SUBFONT DEFINITION FILES"
+below).
+.
+.
+.SH PARAMETERS
+Most of the command line switch names are the same as in
+.B afm2tfm
+for convenience.
+One or more space characters between an option and its value is mandatory;
+options can't be concatenated.
+For historical reasons, the first parameter can
+.I not
+be a switch but must be the font name.
+.TP
+.BI \-c \ caps-height-factor
+The height of small caps made with the
+.B \-V
+switch.
+Default value of this real number is\ 0.8 times the height of uppercase
+glyphs.
+.IP
+Will be ignored in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.BI \-e \ extension-factor
+The extension factor to stretch the characters horizontally.
+Default value of this real number is\ 1.0; if less than\ 1.0, you get a
+condensed font.
+.TP
+.BI \-E \ encoding-id
+The TrueType encoding ID.
+Default value of this non-negative integer is\ 1.
+.IP
+Will be ignored if
+.B \-N
+is used.
+.TP
+.BI \-f \ font-index
+The font index in a TrueType Collection.
+Default is the first font (index\ 0).
+[TrueType collections are usually found in some CJK fonts; e.g.\ the first
+font index specifies glyphs and metrics for horizontal writing, and the
+second font index does the same for vertical writing.
+TrueType collections usually have the extension `\c
+.C \&.ttc '.]
+.IP
+Will be ignored for ordinary TrueType fonts.
+.TP
+.B \-l
+Create ligatures in subfonts between first and second bytes of all the
+original character codes.
+Example: Character code\ 0xABCD maps to character position\ 123 in
+subfont\ 45.
+Then a ligature in subfont\ 45 between position 0xAB and\ 0xCD pointing
+to character\ 123 will be produced.
+The fonts of the Korean H\*(LX
+package use this feature.
+Note that this option generates correct ligatures only for TrueType fonts
+where the input cmap is identical to the output encoding.
+In case of H\*(LX, TTFs must have platform ID\ 3 and encoding ID\ 5.
+.IP
+Will be ignored if not in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.BI \-L \ ligature-file
+Same as
+.BR \-l ,
+but character codes for ligatures are specified in
+.IR \%ligature-file .
+For example, `\c
+.C \-L\ \%KS-HLaTeX '
+generates correct ligatures for the Korean H\*(LX
+package regardless of the platform and encoding ID of the used TrueType
+font (the file
+.C KS-HLaTeX.sfd
+is part of the ttf2pk package).
+.IP
+Ligature files have the same format and extension as
+.C SFD
+files.
+This option will be ignored if not in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.B \-n
+Use PS names (of glyphs) of the TrueType font.
+Only glyphs with a valid entry in the selected cmap are used.
+.IP
+Will be ignored in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.B \-N
+Use only PS names of the TrueType font.
+No cmap is used, thus the switches
+.B \-E
+and
+.B \-P
+have no effect, causing a warning message.
+.IP
+Will be ignored in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.B \-O
+Use octal values for all character codes in the
+.C VPL
+file rather than names; this is useful for symbol or CJK fonts where
+character names such as `A' are meaningless.
+.TP
+.BI \-p \ inencfile
+The input encoding file name for the TTF\(->raw\ \*(TX
+mapping.
+This parameter has to be specified in a map file
+(default:
+.C \%ttfonts.map )
+recorded in
+.C \%ttf2pk.cfg
+for successive
+.B ttf2pk
+calls.
+.IP
+Will be ignored in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.BI \-P \ platform-id
+The TrueType platform ID.
+Default value of this non-negative integer is\ 3.
+.IP
+Will be ignored if
+.B \-N
+is used.
+.TP
+.B \-q
+Make
+.B ttf2tfm
+quiet.
+It suppresses any informational output except warning and error
+messages.
+For CJK fonts, the output can get quite large if you don't specify
+this switch.
+.TP
+.BI \-r \ old-glyphname\ new-glyphname
+Replaces
+.I \%old-glyphname
+with
+.IR \%new-glyphname .
+This switch is useful if you want to give an unnamed glyph (i.e., a glyph
+which can be represented with `.gXXX' or `.cXXX' only) a name or if you want
+to rename an already existing glyph name.
+You can't use the `.gXXX' or `.cXXX' glyph name constructs for
+.IR \%new-glyphname ;
+multiple occurrences of
+.B \-r
+are possible.
+.IP
+If in subfont mode or if no encoding file is specified, this switch is
+ignored.
+.TP
+.BI \-R \ replacement-file
+Use this switch if you have many replacement pairs; they can be collected
+in a file which should have `\c
+.C \&.rpl '
+as extension.
+The syntax used in such replacement files is simple: Each non-empty
+line must contain a pair `\c
+.IR "\%old-glyphname \%new-glyphname" '
+separated by whitespace (without the quotation marks).
+A percent sign starts a line comment; you can continue a line on the next
+line with a backslash as the last character.
+.IP
+If in subfont mode or if no encoding file is specified, this switch is
+ignored.
+.TP
+.BI \-s \ slant-factor
+The obliqueness factor to slant the font, usually much smaller than\ 1.
+Default of this real number is\ 0.0; if the value is larger than zero,
+the characters slope to the right, otherwise to the left.
+.TP
+.BI \-t \ outencfile
+The output encoding file name for the virtual font(s).
+Only characters in the raw \*(TX
+font are used.
+.IP
+Will be ignored in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.BI \-T \ inoutencfile
+This is equivalent to
+.RB ` \-p
+.I inoutencfile
+.B \-t
+.IR inoutencfile '.
+.IP
+Will be ignored in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.B \-u
+Use only those characters specified in the output encoding, and no
+others.
+By default,
+.B ttf2tfm
+tries to include all characters in the virtual font, even those not
+present in the encoding for the virtual font (it puts them into
+otherwise-unused positions, rather arbitrarily).
+.IP
+Will be ignored in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.BI \-v \ vplfile
+Output a
+.C VPL
+file in addition to the
+.C TFM
+file.
+If no output encoding file is specified,
+.B ttf2tfm
+uses a default font encoding (cmtt10).
+.B Note:
+Be careful to use different names for the virtual font and the raw font!
+.IP
+Will be ignored in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.BI \-V \ scvplfile
+Same as
+.BR \-v ,
+but the virtual font generated is a pseudo small caps font obtained by
+scaling uppercase letters by\ 0.8 (resp. the value specified with
+.BR \-c )
+to typeset lowercase.
+This font handles accented letters and retains proper kerning.
+.IP
+Will be ignored in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.B \-w
+Generate PostScript encoding vectors containing glyph indices, primarily
+used to embed TrueType fonts in pdf\*(TX.
+.B ttf2tfm
+takes the
+.C TFM
+names and replaces the suffix with
+.C \&.enc ;
+that is, for files
+.C foo01.tfm ,
+.C foo02.tfm ,\ \&.\|.\|.\&
+it creates
+.C foo01.enc ,
+.C foo02.enc ,\ \&.\|.\|.\|\&
+at the same place.
+.IP
+Will be ignored if not in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.B \-x
+Rotate all glyphs by 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
+If no
+.B \-y
+parameter is given, the rotated glyphs are shifted down vertically
+by\ 0.25em.
+.IP
+Will be ignored if not in subfont mode.
+.TP
+.BI \-y \ vertical-shift-factor
+Shift down rotated glyphs by the given amount (the unit is
+.IR em ).
+.IP
+Ignored if not in subfont mode or glyphs are not rotated.
+.TP
+.B \-\^\-version
+Shows the current version of
+.B ttf2tfm
+and the used file search library (e.g.
+.BR kpathsea ).
+.TP
+.B \-\^\-help
+Shows usage information.
+.PP
+If no
+.C TFM
+file name is given, the name of the
+.C TTF
+file is used, including the full path and replacing the extension with `\c
+.C \&.tfm '.
+.
+.
+.SH CMAPS
+Contrary to Type\ 1 PostScript fonts (but similar to the new CID
+PostScript font format), most TrueType fonts have more than one native
+mapping table, also called `cmap', which maps the (internal) TTF glyph
+indices to the (external) TTF character codes.
+Common examples are a mapping table to Unicode encoded character
+positions, and the standard Macintosh mapping.
+
+To specify a TrueType mapping table, use the options
+.B \-P
+and
+.BR \-E .
+With
+.B \-P
+you specify the platform ID; defined values are:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 3iC
+.I "platform platform ID (pid)"
+.sp
+.ta 3iR
+Apple Unicode 0
+.br
+Macintosh 1
+.br
+ISO 2
+.br
+Microsoft 3
+.PP
+The encoding ID depends on the platform.
+For pid=0, we ignore the
+.B \-E
+parameter (setting it to zero) since the mapping table is always
+Unicode version\ 2.0.
+For pid=1, the following table lists the defined values:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 3iC
+.ti -2m
+platform ID = 1
+.sp
+.I "script encoding ID (eid)"
+.sp
+.ta 3iR
+Roman 0
+.br
+Japanese 1
+.br
+Chinese 2
+.br
+Korean 3
+.br
+Arabic 4
+.br
+Hebrew 5
+.br
+Greek 6
+.br
+Russian 7
+.br
+Roman Symbol 8
+.br
+Devanagari 9
+.br
+Gurmukhi 10
+.br
+Gujarati 11
+.br
+Oriya 12
+.br
+Bengali 13
+.br
+Tamil 14
+.br
+Telugu 15
+.br
+Kannada 16
+.br
+Malayalam 17
+.br
+Sinhalese 18
+.br
+Burmese 19
+.br
+Khmer 20
+.br
+Thai 21
+.br
+Laotian 22
+.br
+Georgian 23
+.br
+Armenian 24
+.br
+Maldivian 25
+.br
+Tibetan 26
+.br
+Mongolian 27
+.br
+Geez 28
+.br
+Slavic 29
+.br
+Vietnamese 30
+.br
+Sindhi 31
+.br
+Uninterpreted 32
+.PP
+Here are the ISO encoding IDs:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 3iC
+.ti -2m
+platform ID = 2
+.sp
+.I "encoding encoding ID (eid)"
+.sp
+.ta 3iR
+ASCII 0
+.br
+ISO 10646 1
+.br
+ISO 8859-1 2
+.PP
+And finally, the Microsoft encoding IDs:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 3iC
+.ti -2m
+platform ID = 3
+.sp
+.I "encoding encoding ID (eid)"
+.sp
+.ta 3iR
+Symbol 0
+.br
+Unicode 2.0 1
+.br
+Shift JIS 2
+.br
+GB 2312 (1980) 3
+.br
+Big 5 4
+.br
+KS X 1001 (Wansung) 5
+.br
+KS X 1001 (Johab) 6
+.br
+UCS-4 10
+.PP
+The program will abort if you specify an invalid platform/encoding ID
+pair.
+It will then show the possible pid/eid pairs.
+Please note that most fonts have at most two or three cmaps, usually
+corresponding to the pid/eid pairs (1,0), (3,0), or (3,1) in case of
+Latin based fonts.
+Valid Microsoft fonts should have a (3,1) mapping table, but some
+fonts exist (mostly Asian fonts) which have a (3,1) cmap not encoded
+in Unicode.
+The reason for this strange behavior is the fact that some old
+MS\ Windows versions will reject fonts having a non-(3,1) cmap (since
+all non-Unicode Microsoft encoding IDs are for Asian MS\ Windows
+versions).
+.PP
+The
+.B \-P
+and
+.B \-E
+options of
+.B ttf2tfm
+must be equally specified for
+.BR ttf2pk ;
+the corresponding parameters in a map file are `Pid' and `Eid',
+respectively.
+.PP
+The default pid/eid pair is (3,1).
+.PP
+Similarly, an
+.B \-f
+option must be specified as `Fontindex' parameter in a map file.
+.PP
+If you use the
+.B \-N
+switch, all cmaps are ignored, using only the PostScript names in the
+TrueType font.
+The corresponding option in a map file is \%`PS=Only'.
+If you use the
+.B \-n
+switch, the default glyph names built into
+.B ttf2tfm
+are replaced with the PS glyph names found in the font.
+In many cases this is not what you want because the glyph names in the
+font are often incorrect or non-standard.
+The corresponding option in a map file is \%`PS=Yes'.
+.PP
+Single replacement glyph names specified with
+.B \-r
+must be given directly as `\c
+.IR "old-glyphname new-glyphname" '
+in a map file;
+.B \-R
+is equivalent to the `Replacement' option.
+.
+.
+.SH INPUT AND OUTPUT ENCODINGS
+You must specify the encoding vectors from the TrueType font to the
+raw \*(TX
+font and from the raw \*(TX
+font to the virtual \*(TX
+font exactly as with
+.BR afm2tfm ,
+but you have more possibilities to address the character codes.
+[With `encoding vector' a mapping table with 256\ entries in form of a
+PostScript vector is meant; see the file
+.C \%T1-WGL4.enc
+of this package for an example.]
+With
+.BR afm2tfm ,
+you must access each glyph with its Adobe glyph name, e.g.\ \c
+\%`/quotedsingle' or \%`/Acircumflex'.
+This has been extended with
+.BR ttf2tfm ;
+now you can (and sometimes must) access the code points and/or glyphs
+directly, using the following syntax for specifying the character position
+in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation:
+`/.c\c
+.IR <decimal-number> ',
+`/.c0\c
+.IR <octal-number> ',
+or `/.c0x\c
+.IR <hexadecimal-number> '.
+Examples: \%`/.c72', \%`/.c0646', \%`/.c0x48'.
+To access a glyph index directly, use the character `g' instead of `c' in
+the just introduced notation.
+Example: \%`/.g0x32'.
+[Note: The `.cXXX' notation makes no sense if
+.B \-N
+is used.]
+.PP
+For pid/eid pairs (1,0) and (3,1), both
+.B ttf2tfm
+and
+.B ttf2pk
+recognize built-in default Adobe glyph names; the former follows the names
+given in Appendix\ E of the book `Inside Macintosh', volume\ 6, the latter
+uses the names given in the TrueType Specification (WGL4, a Unicode subset).
+Note that Adobe names for a given glyph are often not unique and do
+sometimes differ, e.g., many PS fonts have the glyph `mu', whereas this
+glyph is called `mu1' in the WGL4 character set to distinguish it from the
+real Greek letter mu.
+Be also aware that OpenType (i.e. TrueType\ 2.0) fonts use an updated WGL4
+table; we use the data from the latest published TrueType specification
+(1.66).
+You can find those mapping tables in the source code file
+.C \%ttfenc.c .
+.PP
+On the other hand, the switches
+.B \-n
+and
+.B \-N
+makes
+.B ttf2tfm
+read in and use the PostScript names in the TrueType font itself (stored
+in the `post' table) instead of the default Adobe glyph names.
+.PP
+Use the
+.B \-r
+switch to remap single glyph names and
+.B \-R
+to specify a file containing replacement glyph name pairs.
+.PP
+If you don't select an input encoding, the first 256\ glyphs of the
+TrueType font with a valid entry in the selected cmap will be mapped
+to the \*(TX
+raw font (without the
+.B \-q
+option,
+.B ttf2tfm
+prints this mapping table to standard output), followed by all glyphs
+not yet addressed in the selected cmap.
+However, some code points for the (1,0) pid/eid pair are omitted since
+they do not represent glyphs useful for \*(TX:
+0x00 (null), 0x08 (backspace), 0x09 (horizontal tabulation), 0x0d
+(carriage return), and 0x1d (group separator).
+The `invalid character' with glyph index\ 0 will be omitted too.
+.PP
+If you select the
+.B \-N
+switch, the first 256\ glyphs of the TrueType font with a valid PostScript
+name will be used in case no input encoding is specified.
+Again, some glyphs are omitted: `.notdef', `.null', and
+`nonmarkingreturn'.
+.PP
+If you don't select an output encoding,
+.B ttf2tfm
+uses the same mapping table as
+.B afm2tfm
+would use (you can find it in the source code file
+.C \%texenc.c );
+it corresponds to \*(TX
+typewriter text.
+Unused positions (either caused by empty code points in the mapping
+table or missing glyphs in the TrueType font) will be filled (rather
+arbitrarily) with characters present in the input encoding but not
+specified in the output encoding (without the
+.B \-q
+option
+.B ttf2tfm
+prints the final output encoding to standard output).
+Use the
+.B \-u
+option if you want only glyphs in the virtual font which are defined
+in the output encoding file, and nothing more.
+.PP
+One feature missing in
+.B afm2tfm
+has been added which is needed by \*(LX's T1 encoding:
+.B ttf2tfm
+will construct the glyph `Germandbls' (by simply concatenating two `S'
+glyphs) even for normal fonts if possible.
+It appears in the glyph list as the last item, marked with an asterisk.
+Since this isn't a real glyph it will be available only in the virtual
+font.
+.PP
+For both input and output encoding, an empty code position is
+represented by the glyph name \%`/.notdef'.
+.PP
+In encoding files, you can use `\\' as the final character of a line to
+indicate that the input is continued on the next line.
+The backslash and the following newline character will be removed.
+.PP
+.
+.
+.SH SUBFONT DEFINITION FILES
+CJKV (Chinese/Japanese/Korean/old Vietnamese) fonts usually contain
+several thousand glyphs; to use them with \*(TX
+it is necessary to split such large fonts into subfonts.
+Subfont definition files (usually having the extension `\c
+.C \&.sfd ')
+are a simple means to do this smoothly.
+.PP
+A subfont file name usually consists of a prefix, a subfont infix, and
+a postfix (which is empty in most cases), e.g.
+.PP
+.in +2m
+ntukai23 \(-> prefix: ntukai, infix: 23, postfix: (empty)
+.PP
+Here the syntax of a line in an
+.C SFD
+file, describing one subfont:
+.in +2m
+.TP
+.I <whitespace> <infix> <whitespace> <ranges> <whitespace>
+.sp
+.TP
+.IR <infix> \ :=
+anything except whitespace.
+It is best to use only alphanumerical characters.
+.TP
+.IR <whitespace> \ :=
+space, formfeed, carriage return, horizontal and vertical tabs -- no
+newline characters.
+.TP
+.IR <ranges> \ :=
+.IR "<ranges> <whitespace> <codepoint>" \ |
+.br
+.IR "<ranges> <whitespace> <range>" \ |
+.br
+.I <ranges> <whitespace> <offset> <whitespace> <range>
+.TP
+.IR <codepoint> \ :=
+.I <number>
+.br
+.TP
+.IR <range> \ :=
+.IR <number> \ `_' \ <number>
+.br
+.TP
+.IR <offset> \ :=
+.IR <number> \ `:'
+.TP
+.IR <number> \ :=
+hexadecimal (prefix `0x'), decimal, or octal (prefix `0')
+.PP
+A line can be continued on the next line with a backslash ending the line.
+The ranges must not overlap; offsets have to be in the range 0-255.
+.PP
+Example:
+.PP
+.in +2m
+The line
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.C "03 10: 0x2349 0x2345_0x2347"
+.PP
+.in +2m
+assigns to the code positions 10, 11, 12, and\ 13 of the subfont
+having the infix `03' the character codes 0x2349, 0x2345, 0x2346, and
+0x2347 respectively.
+.PP
+The
+.C SFD
+files in the distribution are customized for the CJK package for
+\*(LX.
+.PP
+You have to embed the
+.C SFD
+file name into the
+.C TFM
+font name (at the place where the infix will appear) surrounded by two
+`@' signs, on the command line resp.\ a map file;
+both
+.B ttf2tfm
+and
+.B ttf2pk
+switch then to subfont mode.
+.PP
+It is possible to use more than a single
+.C SFD
+file by separating them with commata and no whitespace; for a given
+subfont, the first file is scanned for an entry, then the next file,
+and so on.
+Later entries override entries found earlier (possibly only partially).
+For example, the first
+.C SFD
+file sets up range 0x10-0xA0, and the next one modifies entries
+0x12 and 0x25.
+As can be easily seen, this algorithm allows for adding and replacing,
+but not for removing entries.
+.PP
+Subfont mode disables the options
+.BR \-n , \ \-N , \ \-p ,
+.BR \-r , \ \-R , \ \-t ,
+.BR \-T , \ \-u , \ \-v , \ \-V
+and
+.B \-w
+for
+.BR ttf2tfm ;
+similarly, no `Encoding' or `Replacement' parameter is allowed in
+a map file.
+Single replacement glyph names are ignored too.
+.PP
+.B ttf2tfm
+will create all subfont
+.C TFM
+files specified in the
+.C SFD
+files (provided the subfont contains glyphs) in one run.
+.PP
+Example:
+.PP
+.in +2m
+The call
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.C "ttf2tfm ntukai.ttf ntukai@Big5,Big5-supp@"
+.PP
+.in +2m
+will use
+.C Big5.sfd
+and
+.C Big5-supp.sfd ,
+producing
+.I all
+subfont files
+.C ntukai01.tfm ,
+.C ntukai02.tfm ,
+etc.
+.
+.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+ttf2tfm returns 0 on success and 1 on error; warning and error
+messages are written to standard error.
+.
+.
+.SH "SOME NOTES ON FILE SEARCHING"
+Both
+.B ttf2pk
+and
+.B ttf2tfm
+use either the
+.BR kpathsea ,
+.BR emtexdir ,
+or
+.B MiK\*(TX
+library for searching files
+.RB ( emtexdir
+will work only on operating systems which have an MS-DOSish background, i.e.
+MS-DOS, OS/2, Windows;
+.B Mik\*(TX
+is specific to MS Windows).
+.PP
+As a last resort, both programs can be compiled without a search library;
+the searched files must be then in the current directory or specified with a
+path.
+Default extensions will be appended also (with the exception that only `\c
+.C \&.ttf '
+is appended and not `\c
+.C \&.ttc ').
+.
+.
+.SS kpathsea
+Please note that older versions of
+.B kpathsea
+(<3.2) have no special means to seach for TrueType fonts and related
+files, thus we use the paths for PostScript related stuff.
+The actual version of kpathsea is displayed on screen if you call
+either
+.B ttf2pk
+or
+.B ttf2tfm
+with the
+.B \-\^\-version
+command line switch.
+.PP
+Here is a table of the file type and the corresponding
+.B kpathsea
+variables.
+.C TTF2PKINPUTS
+and
+.C TTF2TFMINPUTS
+are program specific environment variables introduced in
+.B kpathsea
+version\ 3.2:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+.C \&.ttf \ and "\ .ttc TTFONTS"
+.br
+.C "ttf2pk.cfg TTF2PKINPUTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.map TTF2PKINPUTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.enc TTF2PKINPUTS, TTF2TFMINPUTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.rpl TTF2PKINPUTS, TTF2TFMINPUTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.tfm TFMFONTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.sfd TTF2PKINPUTS, TTF2TFMINPUTS"
+.PP
+And here the same for pre-3.2-versions of
+.B kpathsea:
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+.C \&.ttf \ and "\ .ttc T1FONTS"
+.br
+.C "ttf2pk.cfg TEXCONFIG"
+.br
+.C "\&.map TEXCONFIG"
+.br
+.C "\&.enc TEXPSHEADERS"
+.br
+.C "\&.rpl TEXPSHEADERS"
+.br
+.C "\&.tfm TFMFONTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.sfd TEXPSHEADERS"
+.PP
+Finally, the same for pre-3.0-versions (as used e.g. in te\*(TX\ 0.4):
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+.C \&.ttf \ and "\ .ttc DVIPSHEADERS"
+.br
+.C "ttf2pk.cfg TEXCONFIG"
+.br
+.C "\&.map TEXCONFIG"
+.br
+.C "\&.enc DVIPSHEADERS"
+.br
+.C "\&.rpl DVIPSHEADERS"
+.br
+.C "\&.tfm TFMFONTS"
+.br
+.C "\&.sfd DVIPSHEADERS"
+.PP
+Please consult the info files of
+.B kpathsea
+for details on these variables.
+The decision whether to use the old or the new scheme will be done
+during compilation.
+.PP
+You should set the
+.C TEXMFCNF
+variable to the directory where your
+.C texmf.cnf
+configuration file resides.
+.PP
+Here is the proper command to find out to which value a
+.B kpathsea
+variable is set (we use
+.C TTFONTS
+as an example).
+This is especially useful if a variable isn't set in
+.C texmf.cnf
+or in the environment, thus pointing to the default value which is
+hard-coded into the
+.B kpathsea
+library.
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C "kpsewhich -progname=ttf2tfm -expand-var='$TTFONTS'"
+.PP
+We select the program name also since it is possible to specify
+variables which are searched only for a certain program -- in our
+example it would be
+.C TTFONTS.ttf2tfm .
+.PP
+A similar but not identical method is to say
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C "kpsewhich -progname=ttf2tfm -show-path='truetype fonts'"
+.PP
+[A full list of format types can be obtained by saying `\c
+.C "kpsewhich --help" '
+on the command line prompt.]
+This is exactly how
+.B ttf2tfm
+(and
+.BR ttf2pk )
+searches for files; the disadvantage is that all variables are expanded
+which can cause very long strings.
+.
+.
+.SS emtexdir
+Here the list of suffixes and their related environment variables to be
+set in
+.C autoexec.bat
+(resp. in
+.C config.sys
+for OS/2):
+.PP
+.in +4m
+.ta 2i
+.C \&.ttf \ and "\ .ttc TTFONTS"
+.br
+.C "ttf2pk.cfg TTFCFG"
+.br
+.C "\&.map TTFCFG"
+.br
+.C "\&.enc TTFCFG"
+.br
+.C "\&.rpl TTFCFG"
+.br
+.C "\&.tfm TEXTFM"
+.br
+.C "\&.sfd TTFCFG"
+.PP
+If one of the variables isn't set, a warning message is emitted.
+The current directory will always be searched.
+As usual, one exclamation mark appended to a directory path causes
+subdirectories one level deep to be searched, two exclamation marks cause
+all subdirectories to be searched.
+Example:
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C TTFONTS=c:\\\\fonts\\\\truetype!!;d:\\\\myfonts\\\\truetype!
+.PP
+Constructions like `\c
+.C c:\\\\fonts!!\\\\truetype '
+aren't possible.
+.
+.
+.SS MiK\*(TX
+Both
+.B ttf2tfm
+and
+.B ttf2pk
+have been fully integrated into
+.BR MiK\*(TX .
+Please refer to the documentation of
+.B MiK\*(TX
+for more details on file searching.
+.
+.
+.SH PROBLEMS
+Many
+.B vptovf
+implementations allow only 100\ bytes for the
+.C TFM
+header (the limit is 1024 in the
+.C TFM
+file format itself): 8\ bytes for checksum and design size, 40\ bytes for the
+family name, 20\ bytes for the encoding, and 4\ bytes for a face byte.
+There remain only 28\ bytes for some additional information which is used by
+.B ttf2tfm
+for an identification string (which is essentially a copy of the command
+line), and this limit is always exceeded.
+
+The optimal solution is to increase the value of
+.I \%max_header_bytes
+in the file
+.C vptovf.web
+(and probably
+.C pltotf.web
+too) to, say,\ 400
+and recompile
+.B vptovf
+(and
+.BR pltotf ).
+Otherwise you'll get some (harmless) error messages like
+.PP
+.in +2m
+.C "This HEADER index is too big for my present table size"
+.PP
+which can be safely ignored.
+.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR ttf2pk (1),
+.BR afm2tfm (1),
+.BR vptovf (1),
+.br
+the info pages for
+.B dvips
+and
+.B kpathsea
+.
+.
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+.B ttf2tfm
+is part of the FreeType\ 1 package, a high quality TrueType rendering
+library.
+.
+.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Werner LEMBERG
+.C <wl@gnu.org>
+.br
+Fr\('ed\('eric LOYER
+.C <loyer@ensta.fr>
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e3916ecb211
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.1
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+.TH TTFDUMP 1 "18 Feb 1997" "ILX Project"
+.SH NAME
+ttfdump \- Dumping the contents of a TrueType Font file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBttfdump\fR [-h] [-t \fItablename\fP] [-g \fIglyphnumber\fP] [-c \fIcollection\fP] [-i] \fIttfile\fR [-o \fIdumpfile\fR]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBttfdump\fP dumps the contents of a TrueType font file in ASCII form.
+A TrueType font file is consist of various tables. Those table are divided into
+two categories - \fIRequired Tables\fP and \fIOptional Tables\fP. Mulitiple
+TrueType fonts and be merged to a TrueType Collection.
+.SS Options
+.TP
+\fB-h\fP
+Print a help message on standard output and exit.
+.TP
+\fB-t\fI tablename\fR
+If this option is specified then dump the table \fI"tablename"\fP, otherwise
+dump every tables in \fIttfile\fP.
+\fITablename\fP can be one of the following:
+.RS
+.TP
+\fBRequired Tables\fR
+.TP
+\fIcmap\fP
+character to glhph mapping table
+.TP
+\fIglyf\fP
+glyph data
+.TP
+\fIhead\fP
+font header
+.TP
+\fIhhea\fP
+horizontal header
+.TP
+\fIhmtx\fP
+horizontal metrics
+.TP
+\fIloca\fP
+index to location
+.TP
+\fImaxp\fP
+maximum profile
+.TP
+\fIname\fP
+naming table
+.TP
+\fIpost\fP
+PostScript information
+.TP
+\fIOS/2\fP
+OS/2 and windows specific metrics
+.TP
+\fBOptional Tables\fR
+.TP
+\fIcvt\fP
+control value table
+.TP
+\fIfpgm\fP
+font program; \fInot implemented yet.\fP
+.TP
+\fIgasp\fP
+grid-fitting and scan conversion procedure (grayscale)
+.TP
+\fIhdmx\fP
+horizontal device metrics
+.TP
+\fIkern\fP
+kerning table
+.TP
+\fILTSH\fP
+Linear threshold table
+.TP
+\fIprep\fP
+CVT program; \fInot implemented yet\fP
+.TP
+\fIPCLT\fP
+PCL5 table
+.TP
+\fIVDMX\fP
+Vertical Device Metrics table
+.TP
+\fIvhea\fP
+vertical metrics header
+.TP
+\fIvmtx\fP
+vertical metrics
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB-g\fI glyphnumber\fR
+If this option is specified then dump the glyph with index \fIglyphnumber\fP,
+otherwise dump all glyphs in \fIttfile\fP.
+.TP
+\fB-c\fI collection\fR
+Select a TrueType font in a TrueType Collection.
+.TP
+\fB-i\fI ttfile\fR
+TrueType font file to be dumped.
+.TP
+\fB-o\fI dumpfile\fR
+Output of the dump. If this option is not specified, dump to stdout.
+.RE
+.SH EXAMPLE
+To dump all information in the TrueType font file times.ttf:
+.RS
+ttfdump times.ttf
+.RE
+
+To dump the required table \fIcmap\fP in the file:
+.RS
+ttfdump -t cmap times.ttf
+.RE
+
+To dump a single glyph with index 50:
+.RS
+ttfdump -g 50 times.ttf
+.RE
+
+.SH SEE ALSO
+TrueType 1.0 Font Files, \fI Technical Specification Revision 1.66 November 1995\fR
+.SH NOTE
+Instruction disassembler in not implemented.
+.SH AOTHOR
+Li-Da Lho, ollie@ms1.hinet.net
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.1
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..60ebe4f8025
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.1
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+updmap.1 \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7ee7cbdf77f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.1
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
+.TH "updmap" "1" "February 2005" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+updmap \- Update font map files for TeX output drivers\&.
+.PP
+updmap-sys \- Update font map files for TeX output drivers system\-wide\&.
+.PP
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.PP
+\fBupdmap\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP \&.\&.\&. ] [
+\fICOMMAND\fP \&.\&.\&. ]
+.PP
+\fBupdmap-sys\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP \&.\&.\&. ] [
+\fICOMMAND\fP \&.\&.\&. ]
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBupdmap\fP is a utility that creates font configuration files for
+\fBdvips\fP(1), \fBpdftex\fP(1), \fBxdvi\fP(1),
+\fBps2pk\fP(1), \fBgsftopk\fP(1), \fBdvipdfm\fP(1) and (soon) \fBdvipdfmx\fP(1)\&.
+In an ideal world, updmap would be unnecessary -- each of these
+programs would read the same configuration file to learn what fonts
+are available and how they should be treated\&. As things stand,
+however, each of these tools has subtly different requirements and
+thereby needs its own font configuration file\&. \fBupdmap\fP creates
+font configuration files for all of these programs from a single
+source, allowing you to easily keep all the different configuration
+files in sync\&.
+.PP
+\fBupdmap\fP reads a configuration file, \fBupdmap\&.cfg\fP(5) and,
+depending on the options specified in that file and on the command
+line, \fBupdmap\fP will write generated map files to a directory of
+your choosing (via one of the \fB--*outputdir\fP options), or automatically
+determine where to place the files\&. In the latter case, it tries to
+use the tree where the variable TEXMFVAR points to.
+When used with the options \fB--edit\fP, \fB--setoption\fP,
+\fB--enable\fP, \fB--disable\fP, or \fB--syncwithtrees\fP, \fBupdmap\fP will first write
+\fBupdmap\&.cfg\fP(5) and regenerate the map files only if this file
+has been changed\&.
+.PP
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+The following command-line options are available:
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--cnffile\fP \fIfile\fP"
+Specify a configuration \fIfile\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--dvipsoutputdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP"
+Specify the output
+\fIdirectory\fP for map files generated with dvips syntax\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--pdftexoutputdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP"
+Specify the output
+\fIdirectory\fP for map files generated with pdftex syntax\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--dvipdfmoutputdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP"
+Specify the output
+\fIdirectory\fP for map files generated with dvipdfm syntax\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--outputdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP"
+Specify the output
+\fIdirectory\fP for all generated map files\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--nohash\fP"
+Do not run \fBtexhash\fP(1)\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--nomkmap\fP"
+Do not recreate existing map files\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--quiet\fP"
+Reduce verbosity\&.
+.IP
+.PP
+The following commands can be substituted for \fICOMMAND\fP:
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--edit\fP"
+Edit the \fIupdmap\&.cfg\fP file\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--help\fP"
+Show a command and option summary\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--showoptions\fP \fIitem\fP"
+Show alternatives for option
+\fIitem\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--setoption\fP \fIoption\fP \fIvalue\fP"
+Set
+\fIoption\fP to \fIvalue\fP, where \fIoption\fP is one of:
+.IP ""
+\fBdvipsPreferOutline\fP
+.IP ""
+\fBLW35\fP
+.IP ""
+\fBdvipsDownloadBase35\fP
+.IP ""
+\fBpdftexDownloadBase14\fP
+.IP ""
+\fBdvipdfmDownloadBase14\fP
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--enable\fP \fImaptype\fP \fImapfile\fP"
+Add or enable a \fBMap\fP or \fBMixedMap\fP for \fImapfile\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--enable Map=\fImapfile\fP"
+Add or enable a Map for \fImapfile\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--enable MixedMap=\fP\fImapfile\fP"
+Add or enable a MixedMap for \fImapfile\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--disable\fP \fImapfile\fP"
+Disable Map or MixedMap for \fImapfile\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--syncwithtrees\fP"
+Disable entries in the config file that refer to map files which are
+unavailable\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--listmaps\fP"
+List all active and inactive maps\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fB--listavailablemaps\fP"
+List all active and inactive maps, but restrict output to map files
+that are available in one of the texmf trees\&.
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+Configuration and input files:
+.IP "\fIupdmap\&.cfg\fP"
+Main configuration file\&. In
+\fItexmf/web2c\fP by default, but may be located elsewhere
+depending on your distribution\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIdvips35\&.map\fP"
+Map file for standard 35 PostScript fonts for
+use with \fBdvips\fP(1)\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIpdftex35\&.map\fP"
+Map file for standard 35 PostScript fonts for
+use with \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIdvipdfm35\&.map\fP"
+Map file for standard 35 PostScript fonts for
+use with \fBdvipdfm\fP(1)\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIps2pk35\&.map\fP"
+Map file for standard 35 PostScript fonts for
+use with \fBps2pk\fP(1)\&.
+.IP
+.PP
+Output files:
+.IP
+.IP "\fIpsfonts\&.map\fP"
+For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&.
+Soft link
+against \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP if option \fBdvipsPreferOutline\fP active,
+else against \fIpsfonts_pk\&.map\fP.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIpsfonts_pk\&.map\fP"
+For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&.
+Without information from MixedMap files\&.
+(Setting of \fBdvipsPreferOutline\fP ignored\&.)
+.IP
+.IP "\fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP"
+For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&.
+With information from MixedMap files\&.
+(Setting of \fBdvipsPreferOutline\fP ignored\&.)
+.IP
+.IP "\fIdownload35\&.map\fP"
+For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&.
+Always downloads the standard 35 fonts\&.
+(Setting of \fBdvipsDownloadBase35\fP ignored\&.)
+.IP
+.IP "\fIbuiltin35\&.map\fP"
+For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&.
+Never downloads the standard 35 fonts\&.
+(Setting of \fBdvipsDownloadBase35\fP ignored\&.)
+.IP
+.IP "\fIpdftex\&.map\fP"
+For \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&.
+Soft link
+against \fIpdftex_dl14\&.map\fP if option \fBpdftexDownloadBase14\fP active,
+else against \fIpdftex_ndl14\&.map\fP.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIpdftex_dl14\&.map\fP"
+For \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&.
+Always downloads the standard 14 fonts\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIpdftex_ndl14\&.map\fP"
+For \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&.
+Never downloads the standard 14 fonts\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIdvipdfm\&.map\fP"
+For \fBdvipdfm\fP(1)\&.
+Soft link
+against \fIdvipdfm_dl14\&.map\fP if option \fBdvipdfmDownloadBase14\fP active,
+else against \fIdvipdfm_ndl14\&.map\fP.
+.IP "\fIdvipdfm_dl14\&.map\fP"
+For \fBdvipdfm\fP(1)\&.
+Always downloads the standard 14 fonts\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIdvipdfm_ndl14\&.map\fP"
+For \fBdvipdfm\fP(1)\&.
+Never downloads the standard 14 fonts\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIps2pk\&.map\fP"
+Similar to \fIpsfonts.map\fP file, but
+forces all fonts to be downloaded, so this map file can be used with
+\fBxdvi\fP(1) and \fBps2pk\fP(1)\&.
+.IP
+.PP
+teTeX configuration files for \fBdvips\fP(1) tuned for use with \fBupdmap\fP:
+.IP
+.IP "\fIconfig\&.builtin35\fP"
+Loads \fIbuildin35\&.map\fP instead
+of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIconfig\&.download35\fP"
+Loads \fIdownload35\&.map\fP instead
+of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIconfig\&.outline\fP"
+Loads \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP instead
+of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIconfig\&.pdf\fP"
+Loads \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP instead
+of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP and has additional optimizations for PDF generation\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIconfig\&.pk\fP"
+Loads \fIpsfonts_pk\&.map\fP instead
+of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&.
+.IP
+.IP "\fIconfig\&.www\fP"
+Loads \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP instead
+of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&.
+(For compatibility with previous versions of teTeX\&.)
+.IP
+.IP "\fIconfig\&.gstopk\fP"
+Loads \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP instead
+of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&.
+.IP
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBupdmap\&.cfg\fP(5), \fBdvipdfm\fP(1), \fBdvips\fP(1),
+\fBgsftopk\fP(1), \fBpdftex\fP(1), \fBps2pk\fP(1),
+\fBtexhash\fP(1), \fBxdvi\fP(1)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: \fI<http://tug\&.org/teTeX/>\fP
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBupdmap\fP was written by Thomas Esser
+<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> and is in the public domain\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<cmc@debian\&.org>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system and later slightly adapted for teTeX 3\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3306e1d8c66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+.TH VFTOVP 1 "19 December 1994" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+vftovp \- convert virtual font (vf) files to virtual property lists (vpl)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B vftovp
+[
+.BI \-charcode-format =format
+]
+[
+.B \-verbose
+]
+.I vf_name[.vf]
+.I tfm_name[.tfm]
+[
+.I vpl_name[.vpl]
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B vftovp
+program translates a (program-oriented) virtual font file and its
+accompanying \*(TX font metric file to a (human-oriented) property list file.
+Thus, the virtual font can be edited, and its exact contents can be
+displayed mnemonically. It also serves as a VF-file validating program;
+if no error messages are given, the input files are correct.
+.PP
+The filenames are extended with the appropriate extension if necessary.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+The argument
+.I format
+to
+.B \-charcode-format
+specifies how character codes are output in the VPL file. By
+default, only letters and digits are output using the
+.B C
+integer code (i.e., in ASCII); the others are output in octal. (Unless
+the font's coding scheme starts with
+.B "TeX math sy"
+or
+.BR "TeX math ex" ,
+when all are output in octal.) If
+.I format
+is
+.BR ascii ,
+all character codes that correspond to graphic characters, besides the
+left and right parentheses, are output in ASCII. On the other hand, if
+.I format
+is
+.BR octal ,
+all character codes are output in octal.
+.PP
+Without the
+.B \-verbose
+option,
+.B vftovp
+operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on
+.IR stdout .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.B vftovp
+looks for
+.I vf_name
+using the
+environment variable VFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable
+TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default.
+.PP
+See
+.BR tex (1)
+for the details of the searching.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR pltotf (1),
+.BR tftopl (1),
+.BR vptovf (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Donald E. Knuth wrote the program, based in part on an idea of David Fuchs,
+starting with the code for
+.BR tftopl (1).
+Karl Berry adapted it for compilation with
+.BR web2c .
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4bbe9f70ffc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.1
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+.\" $Id$
+.TH VLNA 1 "4. unora 1998"
+.nh
+.SH NAZEV
+vlna \- pridani vlnek za neslabicne predlozky v TeXu
+.SH POUZITI
+.B vlna
+[\fIvolby\fP]
+[\fIsoubory\fP]
+.SH POPIS
+Program
+.B vlna
+pridava vlnky (misto puvodnich mezer) za neslabicne predlozky
+ve vstupnich souborech pro TeX, coz zabrani zlomu radku v nezadoucich mistech.
+.PP
+Veskere aktivity programu je mozne vypnout sekvenci \fB%~-\fP a zapnout
+sekvenci \fB%~+\fP (mezi uvedenymi znaky muze byt libovolne mnozstvi mezer).
+.PP
+Pred predlozkou se muze nachazet libovolne mnozstvi oteviracich zavorek,
+pred kterymi se musi nachazet mezera nebo zacatek radku. Pred
+oteviraci svorkou muze byt take misto mezery TeXova
+\(lq\\sekvence\(rq (od verze 1.2).
+Napr. za \(lq([{(V\(rq na pocatku radku bude vlnka pridana.
+Stejne tak se text \(lq\\uv{V lese}\(rq promeni na
+\(lq\\uv{V~lese}\(rq.
+.PP
+Program kontroluje konzistenci matematickych prostredi (neni-li uveden
+parametr \fB\-m\fP).
+Vstup do \fIdisplay\fP rezimu (\fB$$\fP) uvnitr \fItext\fP rezimu (\fB$\fP)
+(napr. \fB$\fP...\fB$$\fP...\fB$\fP) znamena varovani a prechod do
+\fIdisplay\fP.
+Podobne prazdny radek uvnitr \fItext\fP nebo \fIdisplay\fP rezimu znamena
+vypis varovani a prechod do nematematickeho (standardniho) rezimu.
+Uvnitr rezimu \fIdisplay\fP se ignoruji vyskyty samostatneho znaku \fB$\fP,
+jelikoz byva vetsinou soucasti konstrukce \fB\\hbox\fP.
+.PP
+Program kontroluje konzistenci verbatim rezimu na konci souboru.
+Nebyl-li ukoncen, vypise se varovani.
+Kontrola se neprovadi, pokud je pouzita volba \fB\-n\fP nebo \fB\-w\fP.
+.PP
+Program nedoplnuje vlnky za samostatna pismena, ktera jako predlozky vypadaji,
+ale nasleduji bezprostredne za sekvencemi \fB\\TeX\fP nebo \fB\\LaTeX\fP.
+Napr. do textu \(lq\fBVlastnosti \\TeX u jsou\fP\(rq nebude zadna vlnka
+doplnena.
+.SH VOLBY
+Volby jsou nepovinne a mohou byt uvedeny v libovolnem poradi, ale nemohou
+byt spojovany.
+.TP
+.B \-f
+Filtr. Jmena souboru jsou interpretovana takto:
+.RS
+.TP 4
+.B vlna \-f \fIsoubor1 soubor2\fP
+Vstup je \fIsoubor1\fP, vystup \fIsoubor2\fP.
+.TP 4
+.B vlna \-f \fIsoubor1\fP
+Vstup je \fIsoubor1\fP, vystup \fIstdout\fP.
+.TP 4
+.B vlna \-f
+Vstup je \fIstdin\fP, vystup \fIstdout\fP.
+.TP 4
+\fBvlna\fP \fIsoubor1\fP [\fIsoubor2\fP [\fIsoubor3\fP ...]]
+Neni-li uveden parametr \fB\-f\fP, kazdy soubor je zpracovavan samostatne.
+.RE
+.TP
+.B \-s
+Tichy rezim. Program potlaci vypis uvodni zpravy, varovnych zprav a
+statistik o zmenach v souborech
+(bez uvedeni parametru jsou zpravy vypisovany na \fIstderr\fP).
+V tichem rezimu se vypise jen chyba, ktera predcasne ukonci
+cinnost programu.
+.TP
+.B \-r
+Nevytvaret (mazat) zalohy.
+Parametr \fB\-r\fP nema vliv, pokud je uveden spolu s \fB\-f\fP.
+V opacnem pripade se ke kazdemu souboru vytvari zaloha s vlnkou na konci jmena
+a parametr \fB\-r\fP zpusobi, ze na konci zpracovani jsou tyto zalohy mazany.
+.TP
+.B \-v \fIznaky\fP
+Znaky povazovane za neslabicne predlozky, za ktere ma byt pridavana
+vlnka. Implicitni hodnota je \fB\-v\ KkSsVvZzOoUuAI\fP. (Mezi
+\fB\-v\fP a skupinou znaku musi byt mezera.)
+.TP
+.B \-m
+Ignorovani prechodu do matematickych prostredi
+(\fB$\fP...\fB$\fP a \fB$$\fP...\fB$$\fP).
+Parametr \fB\-m\fP zpusobi vlnkovani i v matematickych prostredich, ktera
+se implicitne vynechavaji.
+.TP
+.B \-n
+Ignorovani verbatim rezimu (\fB\\verb\fP\fI<znak>\fP...\fI<znak>\fP,
+\fB\\begtt\fP...\fB\\endtt\fP).
+Parametr \fB\-n\fP zpusobi vlnkovani i ve verbatim rezimu, ktery se
+implicitne vynechava.
+.TP
+.B \-l
+LaTeX. Pro rozpoznani matematickeho rezimu jsou pridana prostredi
+\fB\\begin{display}\fP...\fB\\end{display}\fP a
+\fB\\begin{equation}\fP...\fB\\end{equation}\fP.
+Pro rozpoznani verbatim rezimu je pridano LaTeXove prostredi
+\fB\\begin{verbatim}\fP...\fB\\end{verbatim}\fP.
+.TP
+.B \-w
+Web. Pro rozpoznani verbatim rezimu jsou pridany sekvence
+\fB@<\fP, \fB@d\fP...\fB@*\fP, \fB@\fP\fImezera\fP nebo \fB@>|\fP.
+Ve zdrojovem kodu se tedy nevlnkuje program, ale jen komentare.
+.SH PRIKLADY
+.TP
+.B vlna \-m \-n \-s \-r \fIsoubor\fP
+Volani priblizne odpovida volani puvodniho programu \fBvlna\fP.
+(Navic se neprovadi vlnkovani za sekvencemi \fB\\TeX\fP a \fB\\LaTeX\fP.)
+.TP
+.B vlna *.tex
+Vlnkovani vsech souboru s priponou \fBtex\fP.
+(Pouze na UNIXu.)
+.TP
+.B vlna \-f soubor > /dev/null
+Test konzistence matematickeho a verbatim rezimu bez provedeni zmen.
+(Pouze na UNIXu.)
+.SH SOUBORY
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.I c:Program FilesTeXLivebinwin32/vlna
+spustitelny program
+.TP
+.I c:Program FilesTeXLivetexmfdocman/vlna.1
+manualova stranka
+.PD
+.SH AUTOR
+Petr Olsak <olsak@math.feld.cvut.cz>. Manualovou stranku a Makefile vytvoril Rulolf Cejka
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3d85680e9ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+.TH VPTOVF 1 "16 December 1994" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+vptovf \- convert virtual property lists to virtual font metrics
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B vptovf
+[
+.B \-verbose
+]
+.I vpl_name[.vpl]
+.I vfm_name[.vf]
+.I tfm_name[.tfm]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B vptovf
+program translates a (human-oriented) property list file to a pair of
+(program-oriented) files in the VF (virtual font) and TFM (\*(TX font metric)
+formats. Thus, a virtual font
+file can be edited and its exact contents
+can be displayed mnemonically.
+New virtual fonts, which map characters as seen by \*(TX into an arbitrary
+sequence of low-level typesetting operations,
+can also be created in this way.
+.PP
+All three filenames,
+.I vpl_name,
+.I vf_name,
+and
+.I tfm_name,
+are extended with the appropriate suffix, if they lack one.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH OPTIONS
+Without the
+.B \-verbose
+option,
+.B vptovf
+operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on
+.IR stdout .
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR pltotf (1),
+.BR tftopl (1),
+.BR vftovp (1).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH AUTHORS
+Donald E. Knuth wrote the program, based in part on an idea of David Fuchs,
+starting with the code for
+.BR pltotf (1).
+Karl Berry adapted it for compilation with
+.BR web2c .
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5837755e54d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.1
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+.TH WEAVE 1 "4 May 1993" "Web2C 7.5.5"
+.\"=====================================================================
+.if n .ds MF Metafont
+.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
+.if n .ds TX TeX
+.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
+.\" the same but obliqued
+.el .ds OX TeX for nroff
+.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff
+.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
+.if n .ds BX BibTeX
+.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
+.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
+.if n .ds LX LaTeX
+.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
+.if n .ds WB Web
+.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH NAME
+weave \- translate WEB to TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B weave
+[
+.B \-x
+]
+.I webfile[.web]
+[
+.I changefile[.ch]
+]
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
+documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
+or manual
+.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
+.PP
+The
+.B weave
+program is used to create a \*(TX file for viewing a \*(WB program.
+It takes appropriate care of typographic details like page
+layout and the use of indentation, italics, boldface, etc., and it supplies
+extensive cross-index information that it gathers automatically.
+The command line arguments are the same as for
+.B tangle
+except for the option:
+.B \-x
+says to omit the index, module name list, and table of contents pages.
+(A
+.I CONTENTS.tex
+file will still be written when the \*(TX file is processed,
+however, unless some macros in
+.I webmac.tex
+are redefined.)
+.PP
+The output \*(TX file name is formed by adding
+.I .tex
+to the root of the \*(WB file name.
+.PP
+There are several macros
+that probably should be redefined by
+the programmer at the beginning of the \*(WB file.
+It is a good idea to set \\title
+to the name of the program.
+And, to cause output of only changed modules, one can say
+\\let\\maybe=\\iffalse (usually as the first change in the
+change file).
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH FILES
+.TP \w'@@'u+2n
+.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/plain/base/webmac.tex
+\*(TX macros used by
+.B weave
+output.
+.\"=====================================================================
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tangle (1)
+for references, authors, and other information.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8922ee1febe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.1
@@ -0,0 +1,4101 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1990-2004 Paul Vojta and others
+.\"
+.\" This is Paul's license, included here only for reference, it does not apply
+.\" to all parts of the k version.
+.\" ----
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
+.\" of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
+.\" deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
+.\" rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+.\" sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
+.\"
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
+.\" all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+.\" FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
+.\" PAUL VOJTA OR ANY OTHER AUTHOR OF THIS SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
+.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
+.\" ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
+.\" DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+.\" ----
+.\" This is the xdvik license:
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\" following is UGLY ... use La\*(Te\& instead:
+.\" .if t .ds La L\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'-0.20v'A\\v'0.20v'\\h'-0.1667m'T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X
+.\" .if n .ds La LaTeX
+.if t .ds Te T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X
+.if n .ds Te TeX
+' # small and boldface (not all -man's provide it)
+.de SB
+\&\fB\s-1\&\\$1 \\$2\s0\fR
+..
+.TH XDVI 1 "2005/04/28" "Xdvik 22.84.10"
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH NAME
+xdvi \- DVI Previewer for the X Window System
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B xdvi
+.nh
+[\fB+\fP[\fIpage\fP]]
+[\fB\--help\fP]
+[\fB\-allowshell\fP]
+[\fB\-altfont\fP \fIfont\fP]
+[\fB\-base\fP \fIbase URL\fP]
+.\" [\fB\-bd\fP \fIcolor\fP]
+[\fB\-bg\fP \fIcolor\fP]
+[\fB\-browser\fP \fIWWWbrowser\fP]
+[\fB\-bw\fP \fIwidth\fP]
+[\fB\-bw\fP \fIwidth\fP]
+[\fB\-copy\fP]
+[\fB\-cr\fP \fIcolor\fP]
+[\fB\-debug\fP \fIbitmask\fP|\fIstring[,string ...]\fP]
+[\fB\-display\fP \fIhost:display\fP]
+[\fB\-dvipspath\fP \fIpath\fP]
+[\fB\-editor\fP \fIcommand\fP]
+[\fB\-expertmode\fP \fIflag\fP]
+[\fB\-fg\fP \fIcolor\fP]
+[\fB\-findstring\fP \fIstring\fP]
+[\fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP]
+[\fB\-fullscreen \fP]
+[\fB\-gamma\fP \fIg\fP]
+[\fB\-geometry\fP \fIgeometry\fP]
+[\fB\-gsalpha\fP]
+[\fB\-gspalette\fP \fIpalette\fP]
+[\fB\-h\fP]
+[\fB\-help\fP]
+[\fB\-hl\fP \fIcolor\fP]
+[\fB\-href\fP \fIanchor\fP]
+[\fB\-hush\fP]
+[\fB\-hushchars\fP]
+[\fB\-hushchecksums\fP]
+[\fB\-hushspecials\fP]
+[\fB\-hushstdout\fP]
+[\fB\-icongeometry\fP \fIgeometry\fP]
+[\fB\-iconic\fP]
+[\fB\-install\fP]
+[\fB\-interpreter\fP \fIpath\fP]
+[\fB\-keep\fP]
+[\fB\-l\fP]
+[\fB\-linkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP]
+[\fB\-linkstyle\fP \fI0|1|2|3\fP]
+[\fB\-margins\fP \fIdimen\fP]
+[\fB\-mfmode\fP \fImode-def\fP[\fB:\fP\fIdpi\fP]]
+[\fB\-mgs\fP[\fIn\fP] \fIsize\fP]
+[\fB\-mousemode\fP \fI0|1|2\fP]
+[\fB\-nocolor\fP]
+[\fB\-nofork\fP]
+[\fB\-noghostscript\fP]
+[\fB\-nogrey\fP]
+[\fB\-nogssafer\fP]
+[\fB\-noinstall\fP]
+[\fB\-nomakepk\fP]
+[\fB\-nomatchinverted\fP]
+[\fB\-noomega\fP]
+[\fB\-noscan\fP]
+[\fB\-not1lib\fP]
+[\fB\-notempfile\fP]
+[\fB\-offsets\fP \fIdimen\fP]
+[\fB\-p\fP \fIpixels\fP]
+[\fB\-paper\fP \fIpapertype\fP]
+[\fB\-pause\fP]
+[\fB\-pausespecial\fP \fIspecial-string\fP]
+[\fB\-postscript\fP \fIflag\fP]
+[\fB\-rulecolor\fP \fIcolor\fP]
+[\fB\-rv\fP]
+[\fB\-S\fP \fIdensity\fP]
+[\fB\-s\fP \fIshrink\fP]
+[\fB\-safer\fP]
+[\fB\-sidemargin\fP \fIdimen\fP]
+[\fB\-sourceposition\fP \fIline\fP[\fB:\fP\fIcol\fP][\ ]\fIfilename\fP]
+[\fB\-statusline\fP]
+[\fB\-thorough\fP]
+[\fB\-topmargin\fP \fIdimen\fP]
+[\fB\-unique\fP]
+[\fB\-version\fP]
+[\fB\-visitedlinkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP]
+[\fB\-warnspecials\fP]
+[\fB\-watchfile\fP \fIsecs\fP]
+[\fB\-wheelunit\fP \fIpixels\fP]
+[\fB\-xoffset\fP \fIdimen\fP]
+[\fB\-yoffset\fP \fIdimen\fP]
+[\fIdvi_file\fP]
+.hy
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B Xdvi
+is a program for previewing
+.I dvi
+files, as produced e.g. by the
+.BR tex (1)
+program, under the X window system.
+.PP
+.B Xdvi
+can show the file shrunken by various
+integer factors, and it has a ``magnifying glass'' for viewing
+parts of the page enlarged (see the section MAGNIFIER below). This version
+of
+.B xdvi
+is also referred to as
+.B xdvik
+since it uses the kpathsea library to locate and generate font files.
+In addition to that, it supports the following features:
+.RS 2
+.TP 2
+-
+hyperlinks in DVI files (section HYPERLINKS),
+.TP
+-
+direct rendering of Postscript<tm> Type1 fonts (section T1LIB),
+.TP
+-
+source specials in the DVI file (section SOURCE SPECIALS),
+.TP
+-
+string search in DVI files (section STRING SEARCH),
+.TP
+-
+saving or printing (parts of) the DVI file (sections PRINT DIALOG and SAVE DIALOG).
+.RE
+.PP
+Xdvi can be compiled with the Motif toolkit or the Xaw (Athena) toolkit
+(and variants of it), and the Motif version has a slightly different GUI;
+these differences are noted below.
+.PP
+Before displaying a page of a DVI file,
+.B xdvi
+will check to see if the file has changed since the last time it was
+displayed. If this is the case, it will reload the file. This
+feature allows you to preview many versions of the same file while
+running
+.B xdvi
+only once. Since it cannot read partial DVI files,
+.B xdvik
+versions starting from 22.74.3 will create a temporary copy of the
+DVI file being viewed, to ensure that the file can be viewed without
+interruptions. (The
+.B \-notempfile
+can be used to turn off this feature).
+.PP
+.B Xdvi
+can show PostScript<tm> specials by any of three methods.
+It will try first to use Display PostScript<tm>, then NeWS, then it
+will try to use Ghostscript to render the images. All of these options
+depend on additional software to work properly; moreover, some of them
+may not be compiled into this copy of
+.BR xdvi .
+.PP
+For performance reasons,
+.B xdvi
+does not render PostScript specials in the magnifying glass.
+.PP
+If no file name has been specified on the command line,
+xdvi will try to open the most recently opened file; if the file
+history (accessible via the
+.B File > Open Recent
+menu) is empty, or if none of the files in the history are valid DVI files,
+it will pop up a file selector for choosing a file name.
+(In previous versions, which didn't have a file history, the file selector
+was always used; you can set the X resource
+.B noFileArgUseHistory
+to
+.I false
+to get back the old behaviour.)
+.PP
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH OPTIONS
+In addition to specifying the
+.I dvi
+file (with or without the
+.B .dvi
+extension),
+.B xdvi
+supports the following command line options. If the option begins with a
+.RB ` + '
+instead of a
+.RB ` \- ',
+the option is restored to its default value. By default, these options can
+be set via the resource names given in parentheses in the description of
+each option.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI + page
+Specifies the first page to show. If
+.B +
+is given without a number, the last page is assumed; the first page is
+the default.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-allowshell
+.RB ( .allowShell )
+This option enables the shell escape in PostScript specials.
+(For security reasons, shell escapes are disabled by default.)
+This option should be rarely used; in particular it should not be used just
+to uncompress files: that function is done automatically if the file name
+ends in
+.BR .Z ,
+.BR .gz ,
+or
+.BR .bz2 .
+Shell escapes are always turned off if the
+.B \-safer
+option is used.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-altfont " font"
+.RB ( .altFont )
+Declares a default font to use when the font in the
+.I dvi
+file cannot be found. This is useful, for example, with PostScript <tm> fonts.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-background " color"
+.RB ( .background )
+Determines the color of the background. Same as
+.BR -bg .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\" .TP
+.\" .BI \-bd " color"
+.\" .RB ( .borderColor )
+.\" Determines the color of the window border.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-bg " color"
+.RB ( .background )
+Determines the color of the background.
+.\" .\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\" .TP
+.\" .BI \-bordercolor " color"
+.\" Same as
+.\" .BR -bd .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-borderwidth " width"
+.RB ( .borderWidth )
+Specifies the width of the border of the window. Same as
+.BR -bw .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-browser " browser"
+.RB ( .wwwBrowser )
+Defines the web browser used for handling external URLs. The value of this
+option or resource has the same syntax as the
+.B BROWSER
+environment variable; see the explanation of that variable in the
+section `ENVIRONMENT' below for a detailed description.
+If neither the option nor the X resource
+.I wwwBrowser
+is specified, the environment variables
+.B BROWSER
+and
+.B WWWBROWSER
+(in that order) are used to determine the browser command. If these are
+not set either, the following default value is used:
+.SB netscape -raise -remote "openURL(%s,new-window)":xterm -e lynx %s:xterm -e wget %s
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-bw " width"
+.RB ( .borderWidth )
+Specifies the width of the border of the window.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-copy
+.RB ( .copy )
+Always use the
+.I copy
+operation when writing characters to the display.
+This option may be necessary for correct operation on a color display, but
+overstrike characters will be incorrect.
+If greyscale anti-aliasing is in use, the
+.B \-copy
+operation will disable the use of colorplanes and make overstrikes come
+out incorrectly.
+See also
+.BR \-thorough .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-cr " color"
+.RB ( .cursorColor )
+Determines the color of the mouse cursor. The default is the same as
+the foreground color.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-debug " bitmask|string[,string ...]"
+.RB ( .debugLevel )
+If nonzero, prints additional information on standard output. The
+argument can be either a bitmask specified as a decimal number, or
+comma-separated list of strings.
+.br
+For the bitmask representation, multiple values can
+be specified by adding the numbers that represent the individual bits;
+e.g. to debug all all file searching and opening commands, use 4032
+(= 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 128 + 64). Use -1 to turn on debugging
+of everything (this will produce huge output).
+.br
+For the string representation, use the strings listed in the following
+table, with a comma to separate the values; e.g. to debug
+all file searching and opening commands, use
+.BR search,expand,paths,hash,stat,open .
+(The option `kpathsea' is provided as a shorthand for these.)
+Note that such a list may need to be quoted to prevent the shell
+from interpreting commas or spaces in the list.
+.br
+The individual numbers and strings have the following meanings:
+.nf
+.sp 1n
+.ta 1L +8L +12L
+ 1 bitmap Bitmap creation
+ 2 dvi DVI translation
+ 4 pk PK fonts
+ 8 batch Batch mode: Exit after
+ reading the DVI file
+ 16 event Event handling
+ 32 ps PostScript interpreter calls
+ 64 stat Kpathsea stat(2) calls
+ 128 hash Kpathsea hash table lookups
+ 256 open Kpathsea file opening
+ 512 paths Kpathsea path definitions
+ 1024 expand Kpathsea path expansion
+ 2048 search Kpathsea searching
+ 4032 kpathsea All Kpathsea options
+ 4096 htex Hypertex specials
+ 8192 src Source specials
+ 16384 client Client/server mode (see -unique
+ and -sourceposition options)
+ 32768 t1 Type1 font library messages
+ 65536 t1_verbose Verbose Type1 library messages
+ 131072 gui GUI elements
+.sp 1n
+.fi
+Some of the Kpathsea debugging options are actually provided by Kpathsea;
+see the Debugging section in the Kpathsea manual for more information on
+these.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-density " density"
+.RB ( .densityPercent )
+Determines the density used when shrinking bitmaps for fonts.
+A higher value produces a lighter font. The default value is 40.
+If greyscaling is in use, this argument does not apply; use
+.B \-gamma
+instead.
+See also the
+.RB ` S '
+keystroke.
+Same as
+.BR \-S .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-display " host" : display
+Specifies the host and screen to be used for displaying the
+.I dvi
+file. By default this is obtained from the environment variable
+.SB DISPLAY.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-dvipspath " path"
+.RB ( .dvipsPath )
+Use
+.I path
+as the
+.B dvips
+program to use when printing. The default for this is
+.BR dvips .
+The program or script should read the DVI file from standard input,
+and write the Postscript file to standard output.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-editor " editor"
+.RB ( .editor )
+Specifies the editor that will be invoked when the
+.I source-special()
+action is triggered to start a reverse search (by default via Ctrl-Mouse 1).
+The argument to this option is a format string in which occurrences of
+.RB `` %f ''
+are replaced by the file name, occurrences of
+.RB `` %l ''
+are replaced by the line number within the file, and optional
+occurrences of
+.RB `` %c ''
+are replaced by the column number within the line.
+.sp
+If neither the option nor the X resource
+.I .editor
+is specified, the following environment variables are checked
+to determine the editor command:
+.BR XEDITOR ,
+.BR VISUAL ,
+and
+.B EDITOR
+(in this sequence). If the string is found as the value
+of the
+.SB VISUAL
+or
+.SB EDITOR
+environment variables, then
+.RI `` "xterm -e "''
+is prepended to the string; if the editor is specified by other means, then
+it must be in the form of a shell command to pop up an X window with an
+editor in it. If none of these variables is set, a warning message is displayed
+and the command
+.RI `` "xterm -e vi +%l %f"''
+is used.
+.sp
+If no
+.RB `` %f ''
+or
+.RB `` %l ''
+occurs in the string, the missing format strings are appended automatically.
+(This is for compatibility with other programs when using one of the environment
+variables).
+.sp
+A new instance of the editor is started each time this command is used;
+therefore it is preferrable to use an editor that can be invoked in
+`client' mode to load new files into the same instance. Example
+settings are:
+.RS 7
+.TP 7
+.SB emacsclient --no-wait
+(older Emacsen)
+.TP
+.SB gnuclient -q
+(XEmacs and newer Emacsen)
+.TP
+.SB gvim --servername xdvi --remote
+(VIM v6.0+; the `--servername xdvi' option will cause gvim to run a
+dedicated instance for the files opened by xdvi.)
+.TP
+.SB nc
+(nedit)
+.PP
+.sp
+Note that those strings need to be enclosed
+into quotes when using them on the command-line
+to protect them from the shell; when using them
+as argument for the
+.I .editor
+resource in an X resource file, no quotes should be used.
+.sp
+.B NOTE ON SECURITY:
+The argument of this option isn't executed as a shell command,
+but via
+.I exec()
+to prevent evil tricks with the contents of source specials.
+.RE
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-expert
+This option is only supported for backwards compatibility;
+it is equivalent to
+.BR "\-expertmode 0" ,
+which should be preferred.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-expertmode " flag"
+.RB ( .expertMode )
+With an argument of
+.IR 0 ,
+this option switches off the display of the buttons, scrollbars,
+the toolbar (Motif only),
+the statusline and the page list. These GUI elements
+can also be (de)activated separately, by combining the
+appropriate values in the
+.I flag
+argument. This acts similar to the
+.B \-debug
+option: The integer
+.I flag
+is treated as a bitmap where each bit represents one
+element. If the bit has the value
+.IR 1 ,
+the element is switched on, if it has the value
+.IR 0 ,
+the element is switched off. The meaning of the bits
+is as follows:
+.nf
+.sp 1n
+.ta 1L +8L +12L
+ 1 statusline
+ 2 scrollbars
+ 4 Motif: pagelist, Xaw: buttons and pagelist
+ 8 toolbar (Motif only)
+ 16 menubar (Motif only)
+.sp 1n
+.fi
+For example, to turn on only the statusline and the scrollbars,
+use 3 (= 1 + 2).
+See also the
+.RB ` x '
+keystroke, where the bits are addressed by their positions, from 1 to
+3 (Xaw) or 5 (Motif), respectively.
+.PP
+If the statusline is not active, all messages
+that would normally be printed to the statusline will be printed to
+.IR stdout ,
+unless the
+.B \-hushstdout
+option is used.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-fg " color"
+.RB ( .foreground )
+Determines the color of the text (foreground).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-findstring\fP \fIstring\fP
+This option triggers a search for
+.I string
+in the DVI file mentioned on the command-line, similar to forward search
+(see the description of the
+.B sourceposition
+option):
+If there is already another
+instance of
+.B xdvi
+running on the displaying that DVI file, it will cause that instance
+to perform the search instead. The search starts at the top of the current
+page of the DVI file.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-font " font"
+.RB ( *font )
+Sets the font used in menus, buttons etc., as described in the
+.I X(7x)
+man page. The font for child windows can be set separately,
+e.g.:
+.RS 7
+.nf
+.ft 3
+.sp 1n
+xdvi*statusline*font: \e
+ -*-helvetica-medium-r-*-*-12-*-*-*-*-*-*-*
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-foreground " color"
+Same as
+.BR -fg .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-fullscreen
+When this option is used, xdvi will (try to) run in fullscreen mode, with
+no window decorations.
+This option is not guaranteed to work with all windowmanagers/desktops;
+if you're experiencing problems with it, please use the
+.B \-geometry
+option instead, and a suitable window manager setting to remove
+the window decorations.
+When using this option for presentations, you might want
+to get rid of all the control widgets as well, using the
+.B -expertmode
+option. This option can also be toggled at runtime using the
+.B fullscreen
+action (by default bound to Ctrl-l).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-gamma " gamma"
+.RB ( .gamma )
+Controls the interpolation of colors in the greyscale anti-aliasing color
+palette. Default value is 1.0. For 0 <
+.I gamma
+< 1, the fonts will be lighter (more like the background), and for
+.I gamma
+> 1, the fonts will be darker (more like the foreground). Negative
+values behave the same way, but use a slightly different algorithm.
+For color and grayscale displays; for monochrome, see
+.BR \-density .
+See also the
+.RB ` S '
+keystroke.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-geometry " geometry"
+.RB ( .geometry )
+Specifies the initial geometry of the main window,
+as described in the
+.I X(7x)
+man page. The geometry of child windows can be set
+separately, e.g.:
+.br
+.I xdvi*helpwindow.geometry: 600x800
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-gsalpha
+.RB ( .gsAlpha )
+Causes
+.B Ghostscript
+to be called with the
+.B x11alpha
+driver instead of the
+.B x11
+driver. The
+.B x11alpha
+driver enables anti-aliasing in PostScript specials, for a nicer appearance.
+It is available on newer versions of
+.BR Ghostscript .
+This option can also be toggled with the
+.RB ` V '
+keystroke.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-gspalette " palette"
+.RB ( .palette )
+Specifies the palette to be used when using Ghostscript for rendering
+PostScript specials. Possible values are
+.BR Color ,
+.BR Greyscale ,
+and
+.BR Monochrome .
+The default is
+.BR Color .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BR \-h , " \-help" , " \--help"
+Prints a short help text with an overview of the command-line options
+to standard output.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-hl " color"
+.RB ( .highlight )
+Determines the color of the page border, of the ruler in `ruler mode',
+and of the highlighting markers in forward search and string search.
+The default is the foreground color.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-href " anchor"
+Jump to
+.I anchor
+after opening the DVI file. This is only useful when invoking
+.B xdvi
+from other applications.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-hush
+.RB ( .Hush )
+Causes
+.B xdvi
+to suppress all suppressible warnings.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-hushchars
+.RB ( .hushLostChars )
+Causes
+.B xdvi
+to suppress warnings about references to characters which are not defined
+in the font.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-hushchecksums
+.RB ( .hushChecksums )
+Causes
+.B xdvi
+to suppress warnings about checksum mismatches between the
+.I dvi
+file and the font file.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-hushspecials
+.RB ( .hushSpecials )
+Causes
+.B xdvi
+to suppress warnings about
+.B \especial
+strings that it cannot process.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-hushstdout
+.RB ( .hushStdout )
+Suppresses printing of status messages to
+.IR stdout .
+Note that errors or warnings will still be printed to
+.I stderr
+even if this option is used.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-icongeometry " geometry"
+.RB ( .iconGeometry )
+Specifies the initial position for the icon.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-iconic
+.RB ( .iconic )
+Causes the
+.B xdvi
+window to start in the iconic state. The default is to start with the
+window open.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-install
+.RB ( .install )
+If
+.B xdvi
+is running under a
+.B PseudoColor
+visual, then (by default) it will check for
+.B TrueColor
+visuals with more bits per pixel, and switch to such a visual if one exists.
+If no such visual exists, it will use the current visual and colormap. If
+.B \-install
+is selected, however, it will still use a
+.B TrueColor
+visual with a greater depth, if one is available; otherwise, it will
+install its own colormap on the current visual. If the current visual is not
+.BR PseudoColor ,
+then
+.B xdvi
+will not switch the visual or colormap, regardless of its options.
+The default value of the
+.B install
+resource is the special value,
+.BR maybe .
+There is no
+.B +install
+option. See also
+.BR \-noinstall ,
+and the GREYSCALING AND COLORMAPS section.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-interpreter " filename"
+.RB ( .interpreter )
+Use
+.I filename
+as the Ghostscript interpreter. By default it uses
+.BR gs .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-keep
+.RB ( .keepPosition )
+Sets a flag to indicate that
+.B xdvi
+should not move to the home position when moving to a new page. See also the
+.RB ` k '
+keystroke. This flag is only honoured by the
+.B up()
+and
+.B down()
+actions, not by
+.B up-or-previous()
+and
+.BR down-or-next() .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-l
+.RB ( .listFonts )
+List the names of all fonts used.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-linkcolor
+.RB ( .linkColor )
+Color used for unvisited hyperlinks (`Blue2' by default). Hyperlinks
+are unvisited before you click on them, or after the DVI file has been reloaded.
+The value should be either a valid X color name (such as
+.IR DarkGoldenrod4 )
+or a hexadecimal color string (such as
+.IR #8b6508 ). See also
+.B \-visitedlinkcolor
+and
+.BR \-linkstyle .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-linkstyle
+.RB ( .LinkStyle )
+Determines the style in which hyperlinks are displayed. Possible
+values and their meanings are:
+.nf
+.sp 1n
+.ta 1L +8L
+ 0 No highlighting of links
+ 1 Underline links with \fIlink color\fR
+ 2 No underlining, color text with \fIlink color\fR
+ 3 Underline and display text colored with
+ \fIlink color\fR
+.sp 1n
+.fi
+The values for \fIlink color\fR are specified by the options/resources
+.BI \-linkcolor
+and
+.BI \-visitedlinkcolor
+(which see).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-margins " dimen"
+.RB ( .Margin )
+Specifies the size of both the top margin and side margin.
+This determines the ``home'' position of the page within the window as
+follows. If the entire page fits in the window, then the margin settings
+are ignored. If, even after removing the margins from the left, right,
+top, and bottom, the page still cannot fit in the window, then the page
+is put in the window such that the top and left margins are hidden, and
+presumably the upper left-hand corner of the text on the page will be
+in the upper left-hand corner of the window.
+Otherwise, the text is centered in the window.
+The dimension should be a decimal number optionally followed by
+any of the two-letter abbreviations for units accepted by \*(Te\&
+.RB ( pt ,
+.BR pc ,
+.BR in ,
+.BR bp ,
+.BR cm ,
+.BR mm ,
+.BR dd ,
+.BR cc ,
+or
+.BR sp ).
+By default, the unit will be
+.BR cm " (centimeters)".
+See also
+.BR \-sidemargin ", " \-topmargin ,
+and the keystroke
+.RB ` M .'
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-mfmode " mode-def"
+.RB ( .mfMode )
+Specifies a
+.I mode-def
+string, which can be used in searching for fonts (see ENVIRONMENT, below).
+Generally, when changing the
+.IR mode-def ,
+it is also necessary to change the font size to the appropriate value
+for that mode. This is done by adding a colon and the value in dots per inch;
+for example,
+.BR "\-mfmode ljfour:600" .
+This method overrides any value given by the
+.B pixelsPerInch
+resource or the
+.B \-p
+command-line argument.
+The metafont mode is also passed to
+.B metafont
+during automatic creation of fonts.
+By default, it is
+.BR "unspecified" .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-mgs " size"
+Same as
+.BR \-mgs1 .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-mgs[ n ] " size"
+.RB ( .magnifierSize\fR[\fIn\fR] )
+Specifies the size of the window to be used for the ``magnifying glass''
+for Button
+.IR n .
+The size may be given as an integer (indicating that the magnifying glass
+is to be square), or it may be given in the form
+.IR width x height .
+See the MOUSE ACTIONS section. Defaults are 200x150, 400x250, 700x500,
+1000x800, and 1200x1200.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-mousemode " " [ 0 | 1 | 2 ]
+.RB ( .mouseMode )
+Specifies the default mode of xdvi at startup: Magnifier (0), Text Selection Mode (1)
+or Ruler Mode (2). See the section
+.BR MODES ,
+below, for more information.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-nocolor
+.RB ( .color )
+Turns off the use of color specials. This option can be toggled with the
+.RB ` C '
+keystroke.
+(Note:
+.B \-nocolor
+corresponds to
+.BR color:off ;
+.B +nocolor
+to
+.BR color:on .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-nofork
+.RB ( .fork )
+With the
+.B \-sourceposition
+and
+.B \-unique
+options, the default behavior is for
+.B xdvi
+to put itself into the background (like a daemon) if there
+is no appropriate instance of
+.B xdvi
+already running.
+This argument makes it run in the foreground instead. This is useful
+for debugging, or if your client application cannot deal well with
+a program self-backgrounding itself in this way -- e.g., the IPC functions
+in
+.B emacs
+are known to have problems with this.
+If no
+.B \-sourceposition
+or
+.B \-unique
+argument is given, then this option has no effect.
+(Note:
+.B \-nofork
+corresponds to
+.BR fork:off ;
+.B +nofork
+to
+.BR fork:on .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-noghostscript
+.RB ( .ghostscript )
+Inhibits the use of Ghostscript for displaying PostScript<tm> specials.
+(Note:
+.B \-noghostscript
+corresponds to
+.BR ghostscript:off ;
+.B +noghostscript
+to
+.BR ghostscript:on .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-nogrey
+.RB ( .grey )
+Turns off the use of greyscale anti-aliasing when printing shrunken bitmaps.
+(Note:
+.B \-nogrey
+corresponds to
+.BR grey:off ;
+.B +nogrey
+to
+.BR grey:on .)
+See also the
+.RB ` G '
+keystroke.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-nogssafer
+.RB ( .gsSafer )
+Normally, if Ghostscript is used to render PostScript specials, the Ghostscript
+interpreter is run with the option
+.BR \-dSAFER .
+The
+.B \-nogssafer
+option runs Ghostscript without
+.BR \-dSAFER .
+The
+.B \-dSAFER
+option in Ghostscript disables PostScript operators such as
+.BR deletefile ,
+to prevent possibly malicious PostScript programs from having any effect.
+If the
+.B \-safer
+option is specified, then this option has no effect; in that case Ghostscript
+is always run with
+.BR \-dSAFER .
+(Note:
+.B \-nogssafer
+corresponds to
+.BR gsSafer:off ;
+.B +nogssafer
+to
+.BR gsSafer:on .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-noinstall
+.RB ( .install )
+Inhibit the default behavior of switching to a
+.B TrueColor
+visual if one is available with more bits per pixel than the current visual.
+(Note:
+\-noinstall
+corresponds
+.BR install:off ;
+there is no
+.B +noinstall
+option.)
+See also
+.BR \-install ,
+and the GREYSCALING AND COLORMAPS section.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-nomakepk
+.RB ( .makePk )
+Turns off automatic generation of font files that cannot be found by other
+means.
+(Note:
+.B \-nomakepk
+corresponds to
+.BR makePk:off ;
+.B +nomakepk
+to
+.BR makePK:on .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-nomatchinverted
+.RB ( .matchInverted )
+Don't highlight string search matches in inverted color; instead, draw a rectangle in
+.I highlight
+color (see the
+.B \-hl
+option) around the match. This option is activated automatically if
+the display isn't running in TrueColor.
+(Note:
+.B \-nomatchinverted
+corresponds to
+.BR matchInverted:off ;
+.B +nomatchinverted
+to
+.BR matchInverted:on .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-noomega
+.RB ( .omega )
+This will disable the use of Omega extensions when interpreting DVI files.
+By default, the additional opcodes
+.I 129
+and
+.I 134
+are recognized by xdvi as Omega extensions and interpreted as requests
+to set 2-byte characters. The only drawback is that the virtual font
+array will require 65536 positions instead of the default 256 positions,
+i.e. the memory requirements of xdvi will be slightly larger. If you find
+this unacceptable or encounter another problem with the Omega extensions,
+you can switch this extension off by using
+.B \-noomega
+(but please do send a bug report if you find such problems - see the bug
+address in the
+.B AUTHORS
+section below).
+.br
+(Note:
+.B \-noomega
+corresponds to
+.BR "omega: off" ;
+.B +noomega
+to
+.BR "omega: on" .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-noscan
+.RB ( .prescan )
+By default,
+.B xdvi
+does a preliminary scan of the
+.I dvi
+file to process any
+.B papersize
+specials; this is especially important at startup since the paper size may be
+needed to determine the window size.
+If PostScript<tm> is in use, then prescanning is also necessary in order to
+properly process header files.
+In addition, prescanning is needed to correctly determine the background color
+of a page.
+This option turns off such prescanning.
+(Prescanning will be automatically be turned back on if
+.B xdvi
+detects any of the specials mentioned above.)
+(Note:
+.B \-noscan
+corresponds to
+.BR prescan:off ;
+.B +noscan
+to
+.BR prescan:on .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-not1lib
+.RB ( .t1lib )
+This will disable the use of T1Lib to display PostScript<tm> fonts.
+Use this option as a workaround when you encounter problems with the
+display of T1Lib (but please don't forget to send a bug report in
+this case, to the URL mentioned in the section AUTHORS below).
+.br
+(Note:
+.B \-not1lib
+corresponds to
+.BR t1lib:off ;
+.B +not1lib
+to
+.BR t1lib:on .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-notempfile
+.RB ( .tempFile )
+As mentined in the section
+.B DESCRIPTION
+above, xdvi will create a temporary copy of the DVI file so that it
+can be accessed without interruptions even while the file is being
+rewritten by
+.BR TeX .
+Since this introduces the overhead of copying the file every time
+it has changed, the
+.B \-notempfile
+allows you to turn off this behaviour. In this case, exposing parts of the
+window while the DVI file is being written by \*(Te\& will erase the current
+window contents until the DVI file can be completely reread.
+.br
+(Note:
+.B \-notempfile
+corresponds to
+.BR tempFile:off ;
+.B +notempfile
+to
+.BR tempFile:on .)
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-offsets " dimen"
+.RB ( .Offset )
+Specifies the size of both the horizontal and vertical offsets of the
+output on the page. By decree of the Stanford \*(Te\& Project,
+the default \*(Te\& page origin is always 1 inch over and down from
+the top-left page corner, even when non-American paper sizes are used.
+Therefore, the default offsets are 1.0 inch.
+The argument
+.I dimen
+should be a decimal number optionally followed by any of the two-letter
+abbreviations for units accepted by \*(Te\&
+.RB ( pt ,
+.BR pc ,
+.BR in ,
+.BR bp ,
+.BR cm ,
+.BR mm ,
+.BR dd ,
+.BR cc ,
+or
+.BR sp ).
+By default, the unit will be
+.BR cm " (centimeters)".
+See also
+.B \-xoffset
+and
+.BR \-yoffset .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-p " pixels"
+.RB ( .pixelsPerInch )
+Defines the size of the fonts to use, in pixels per inch. The
+default value is 600. This option is provided only for backwards
+compatibility; the preferred way is to set both the resolution
+and the Metafont mode via the
+.B \-mfmode
+option (which see).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-paper " papertype"
+.RB ( .paper )
+Specifies the size of the printed page. Note that in most cases it's
+best to specify the paper size in the TeX input file via the line
+.sp
+.B \eusepackage[dvips]{geometry}
+.sp
+which will be recognized by both dvips and xdvi; in that case the
+use of a `-paper' option should be unneccessary.
+.br
+The paper size may be specified in the form
+\fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fR optionally followed by a unit, where
+.I width
+and
+.I height
+are decimal numbers giving the width and height of the paper, respectively,
+and the unit is any of the two-letter abbreviations for units accepted
+by \*(Te\&
+.RB ( pt ,
+.BR pc ,
+.BR in ,
+.BR bp ,
+.BR cm ,
+.BR mm ,
+.BR dd ,
+.BR cc ,
+or
+.BR sp ).
+By default, the unit is
+.BR cm " (centimeters)"\fR.
+.br
+There are also synonyms which may be used:
+.B us
+(8.5x11in),
+.B legal
+(8.5x14in),
+.B foolscap
+(13.5x17in),
+as well as the ISO sizes
+.BR a1 - a7 ,
+.BR b1 - b7 ,
+.BR c1 - c7 .
+Each of these also has a landscape or `rotated' variant:
+.B usr
+(11x8.5in),
+.BR a1r - a7r ,
+etc. For compatibility with
+.BR dvips ,
+the formats
+.B letter
+(8.5x11in),
+.B ledger
+(17x11in)
+and
+.B tabloid
+(11x17in)
+are also supported (these don't have rotated variants).
+.br
+Any of the above sizes may be preceded by a plus sign
+.RB (` + ');
+this causes the paper size given here to override any paper size given in the
+.I dvi
+file. The default paper size is 21 x 29.7 cm (A4 size).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-pause
+.RB ( .pause )
+This option provides a simple implementation of incremental
+(stepwise) display, which can be used for presentations.
+When this option is used,
+.B xdvi
+will pause the display of the current page whenever it encounters a
+special
+.I special-string
+.RI ( xdvi:pause
+by default; the string can be customized via
+.IR \-pausespecial ,
+see below), and the cursor will change its shape. The action
+.B unpause-or-next()
+(by default bound to the
+.B Space
+key) will display the next portion of the page up to the following
+.IR special-string ,
+or until the end of the page is reached.
+When the option is not used, specials containing
+.I special-string
+will be ignored.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-pausespecial " special-string"
+.RB ( .pauseSpecial )
+Sets the special string that causes xdvi to pause when the
+.I -pause
+option is active. The default value of
+.I special-string
+is
+.IR xdvi:pause .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-postscript " flag"
+.RB ( .postscript )
+If
+.I flag = 0,
+rendering of PostScript<tm> specials is disabled; instead, bounding
+boxes will be displayed (if available). A value of
+.I 1
+(the default) switches PostScript<tm> specials on. With a value of
+.IR 2 ,
+the PostScript<tm> specials are displayed along with their
+bounding boxes; this allows you to visually check the correctness
+of the bounding boxes. The values can also be toggled at runtime
+with the
+.RB ` v '
+keystroke and the corresponding numerical prefix arguments 0, 1 and 2.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-ps2pdfpath " path"
+.RB ( .ps2pdfPath )
+Use
+.I path
+as a conversion program from Postscript to PDF. The program or script
+should accept two command-line arguments: The Postscript file as first
+argument, and the PDF output file as second argument.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-rulecolor " color"
+.RB ( .ruleColor )
+Determines the color of the rules used for the the magnifier
+(default: foreground color).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-q
+.RB ( .noInitFile )
+Ignore the
+.I $HOME/.xdvirc
+startup file (i.e. don't read it at startup, and don't write it
+at exit). This forces the defaults defined in
+.I $HOME/.Xdefaults
+to be used. See
+.B FILES
+for more information on
+.IR $HOME/.xdvirc .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-rv
+.RB ( .reverseVideo )
+Causes the page to be displayed with white characters on a black background,
+instead of vice versa.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-S " density"
+.RB ( .densityPercent )
+Same as
+.B \-density
+(which see).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-s " shrink"
+.RB ( .shrinkFactor )
+Defines the initial shrink factor. The default value is 8. If
+.I shrink
+is given as 0, then the initial shrink factor is computed so that the
+page fits within the window (as if the `s' keystroke were given without
+a number).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-safer
+.RB ( .safer )
+This option turns on all available security options; it is designed for use when
+.B xdvi
+is called by a browser that obtains a
+.I dvi
+or \*(Te\& file from another site.
+This option selects
+.B +nogssafer
+and
+.BR +allowshell .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-sidemargin " dimen"
+.RB ( .sideMargin )
+Specifies the side margin (see
+.BR \-margins ).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-sourceposition " line" [: col "][ ]" filename
+This option makes
+.B xdvi
+search in the
+.I dvi
+file for the place corresponding to the indicated line (and, optionally,
+column) in the .tex source file, and highlight the place found by drawing a
+rectangle in the
+.I highlight
+color (see the
+.B \-hl
+option) around the corresponding text. In addition, when run with this
+argument (and the
+.B \-nofork
+option is not given, which see),
+.B xdvi
+will always return immediately: if it finds another instance of
+.B xdvi
+already showing
+.I dvi_file,
+then it will cause that instance to raise its window and move to the given
+place in the
+.I dvi
+file; otherwise it will start up its own instance in the background.
+If several instances of xdvi are displaying the respective
+.I dvi
+file, the instance which was last raised to the foreground will be used.
+.sp
+The space before
+.I filename
+is only needed if the filename starts
+with a digit. When the space is used, the argument
+needs to be encosed in quotes to prevent the shell from
+misinterpreting the space as argument separator.
+.sp
+This option requires that
+.I dvi_file
+be prepared with source special information. See the section on SOURCE SPECIALS
+for details on how to do this.
+.sp
+Here is a more detailed description of how the filename in the
+.I \-sourceposition
+argument is matched with the filename in the source specials:
+.RS 7
+.TP 3
+1.
+If neither of the filenames contains a path name component, the filenames
+are compared ignoring the
+.RI ` .tex '
+extensions in both filenames.
+.TP
+2.
+Otherwise, if one of the filenames does contain a path component (e.g.:
+.IR ./test.tex ,
+.IR ../test.tex ,
+.IR /my/homedir/tex/test.tex
+or any combination of these), both filenames are expanded to a full path,
+with any occurences of
+.I ../
+and
+.I ./
+expanded, and multiple slashes removed.
+.br
+The pathname in the
+.I \-sourceposition
+is expanded relative to the current working directory of the
+.I xdvi \-sourceposition
+invocation, and the pathnames in the source specials are expanded
+relative to the path of the current DVI file being viewed.
+.br
+The path names are then compared ignoring the
+.RI ` .tex '
+extensions in both path names.
+.RE
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-statusline\fP
+.RB ( .statusline )
+This option is obsolete; use
+\fB\-expertmode \fP \fIflag\fP
+instead (which see).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-thorough
+.RB ( .thorough )
+.B Xdvi
+will usually try to ensure that overstrike characters
+.RI ( e.g. ,
+.BR \enotin )
+are printed correctly. On monochrome displays, this is always possible
+with one logical operation, either
+.I and
+or
+.IR or .
+On color displays, however, this may take two operations, one to set the
+appropriate bits and one to clear other bits. If this is the case, then
+by default
+.B xdvi
+will instead use the
+.I copy
+operation, which does not handle overstriking correctly. The
+.B \-thorough
+option chooses the slower but more correct choice. See also
+.BR \-copy .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-topmargin " dimen"
+.RB ( .topMargin )
+Specifies the top and bottom margins (see
+.BR \-margins ).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-unique
+.RB ( .unique )
+This option will make another instance of xdvi running on the same display
+act as a `server'. For example, the invocation
+.sp
+.B xdvi -unique +5 file.dvi
+.sp
+will cause this other instance to load
+.I file.dvi
+on page 5 in place of the file that it is currently displaying. If there is
+already another instance of xdvi already displaying the file
+.IR file.dvi ,
+then it will just jump to page 5.
+If the other instance of xdvi is displaying a different file, it will load
+.I file.dvi
+instead. Otherwise, if no other instance of
+xdvi is currently running on the display, this option instead
+starts a new instance of xdvi in the background (unless the
+.I \-nofork
+option is specified, which see) displaying page 5 of
+.IR file.dvi .
+.br
+The filename and the
+.B +n
+option for the page number are the only options available for
+controlling a remote instance of xdvi like this; all other options are
+currently ignored.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-useTeXpages
+Use logical \*(Te\& pages (the values of the
+.I \ecount0
+register) instead of physical pages for the pagelist lables and
+when jumping to a page in a document with the `g' keystroke (or the
+.B goto-page()
+action).
+This option can be toggled via the
+.RB ` T '
+keystroke.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-version
+Print information on the version of
+.BR xdvi .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-visitedlinkcolor
+.RB ( .visitedLinkColor )
+Color used for visited hyperlinks (`Purple4' by default). Hyperlinks become
+visited once you click on them. As for
+.BR linkColor ,
+the value should be either a valid X color name or a hexadecimal color string.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B \-warnspecials
+.RB ( .warnSpecials )
+Causes
+.B xdvi
+to issue warnings about
+.B \especial
+strings that it cannot process.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-watchfile " n"
+.RB ( .watchFile )
+If this option is set to a value larger than 0, xdvi will check
+the DVI file for changes every
+.I n
+seconds. If the DVI file has been completely written by TeX, it will
+be reloaded automatically. Fractional values (e.g. `2.5') are
+possible. The default for this option is 0, i.e. no watching.
+.br
+Since xdvi cannot handle partial DVI files, it tries not to reload
+the file while it is being rewritten. However, use of the magnifier
+or switching of pages requires reading (a part of) the DVI file, and
+if the
+.B tempfile
+option is switched off, this will erase the current contents of the window
+until the DVI file can be read entirely.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-wheelunit " pixels"
+.RB ( .wheelUnit )
+Sets the number of pixels that a motion of a wheel mouse will move the
+image up or down. If set to zero, the wheel mouse functionality is disabled.
+The default value is 80.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-xoffset " dimen"
+.RB ( .xOffset )
+Specifies the size of the horizontal offset of the output on the page. See
+.BR \-offsets .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BI \-yoffset " dimen"
+.RB ( .yOffset )
+Specifies the size of the vertical offset of the output on the page. See
+.BR -offsets .
+.PP
+
+
+
+.SH KEYSTROKES
+.B Xdvi
+recognizes the following keystrokes when typed in its window.
+Each may optionally be preceded by a (positive or negative) number, a
+`prefix argument', whose interpretation will depend on the particular keystroke.
+This prefix argument can be discarded by pressing the ``Escape'' key.
+If present, the ``Help'', ``Prior'' and ``Next'' keys are synonyms for
+.RB ` ? ',
+.RB ` b ',
+and
+.RB ` f '
+keys, respectively.
+.PP
+The key bindings listed here are those that
+.B xdvi
+assigns by default. The names appearing in brackets at the beginning
+of the descriptions are the names of the actions associated with the
+keys; these can be used to customize the key bindings, as explained in
+more detail in the section
+.B CUSTOMIZATION
+below. If only a lowercase binding is listed, both upper- and lowercase
+keys will work for that binding.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"
+.\" SPECIAL KEYS
+.\"
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BR ESC " key"
+.RB [ discard-number() ]
+The escape key discards the numerical prefix for all actions
+(useful when you mistyped a number).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BR Delete " key"
+.RB [ up-or-previous() ]
+Moves down two-thirds of a window-full, or to the top of the previous page
+if already at the bottom of the page. With a float argument, moves down the
+corresponding fraction of a window-full. By default, the
+.I Space
+key is bound to the action
+.B unpause-or-next()
+which does a similar thing; see there.
+.br
+The `keep' flag is ignored by these actions.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BR Space " key"
+.RB [ unpause-or-next() ]
+Moves down two-thirds of a window-full, or to the next page if already at
+the bottom of the page.
+.br
+When the option
+.BI \-pause " special-string"
+is used and the display is currenlty paused, this key will instead
+display the next portion of the page until the next
+.I special-string
+or the end of the page is encountered. See the description of the
+.B \-pause
+option for details.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BR Ctrl-Home " (Xaw), " Ctrl-osfBeginLine " (Motif)"
+.RB [ goto-page(1) ]
+Moves to the first page of the document.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BR Ctrl-End " (Xaw), " Ctrl-osfEndLine " (Motif)"
+.RB [ goto-page() ]
+Moves to the last page of the document.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BR Home " (Xaw), " osfBeginLine " (Motif)"
+.RB [ home-or-top() ]
+Move to the ``home'' position of the page, or to the top of the page if
+the
+.I keep
+flag is set (in this case, the page doesn't scroll horizontally).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BR End " (Xaw), " osfEndLine " (Motif)"
+.RB [ end-or-bottom() ]
+Move to the ``end'' position of the page (the lower right-hand corner),
+or to the bottom of the page if the
+.I keep
+flag is set (in this case, the page doesn't scroll horizontally).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"
+.\" ARROW KEYS
+.\"
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Down arrow
+.RB [ down(0.015) ]
+Scrolls page down.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Up arrow
+.RB [ up(0.015) ]
+Scrolls page up.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Right arrow
+.RB [ right(0.015) ]
+Scrolls page right.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Left arrow
+.RB [ left(0.015) ]
+Scrolls page left.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"
+.\" ORDINARY KEYS. Note that the special symbols ([ ] + - etc.) are not in
+.\" strict ASCII order (found that more intuitive). Sequence for each letter
+.\" is: Alt-Ctrl, Ctrl, uppercase, lowercase.
+.\"
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Alt-Ctrl-+
+.RB [ change-density(25) ]
+Increase the darkness of the fonts in the DVI window by adding to the gamma value
+(see also the
+.RB ` S '
+keystroke).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Alt-Ctrl--
+.RB [ change-density(-25) ]
+Decrease the darkness of the fonts in the DVI window by subtracting from the gamma value
+(see also the
+.RB ` S '
+keystroke).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-+
+.RB [ set-shrink-factor(+) ]
+Increase the shrink factor (see also the
+.RB ` s '
+keystroke).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl--
+.RB [ set-shrink-factor(-) ]
+Decrease the shrink factor (see also the
+.RB ` s '
+keystroke).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctr-[
+.RB [ pagehistory-delete-backward() ]
+Delete the current item in the page history and move to the history
+item before the deleted one. With a prefix argument
+.BR n ,
+delete
+.B n
+previous history items. See
+.B PAGE HISTORY
+for details.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B [
+.RB [ pagehistory-back() ]
+Move back in the page history (see
+.B PAGE HISTORY
+for details). With a prefix argument
+.BR n ,
+move back
+.B n
+history items.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctr-]
+.RB [ pagehistory-delete-forward() ]
+Delete the current item in the page history and move to the history
+item after the deleted one. With a prefix argument
+.BR n ,
+delete
+.B n
+next history items. See
+.B PAGE HISTORY
+for details.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B ]
+.RB [ pagehistory-forward() ]
+Move forward in the page history (see
+.B PAGE HISTORY
+for details). With a prefix argument
+.BR n ,
+move forward
+.B n
+history items.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.BR ^
+.RB [ home() ]
+Move to the ``home'' position of the page. This is normally the upper
+left-hand corner of the page, depending on the margins as described in the
+.B \-margins
+option, above.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B ?
+.RB [ help() ]
+Same as the
+.B h
+key (which see).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B B
+.RB [ htex-back() ]
+This key jumps back to the previous hyperlink anchor. See the
+section
+.B HYPERLINKS
+for more information on navigating the links.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B b
+.RB [ back-page() ]
+Moves to the previous page (or back
+.I n
+pages). Synonyms are
+.RB ` p '
+and
+.BR Ctrl-h .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B C
+.RB [ set-color() ]
+This key toggles the use of color specials. The key sequences
+.RB ` 0C '
+and
+.RB ` 1C '
+turn interpretation of color specials off and on, respectively.
+See also the
+.B \-nocolor
+option.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B c
+.RB [ center() ]
+Moves the page so that the point currently beneath the mouse cursor is moved to
+the middle of the window, and warps the mouse cursor to the same place.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B d
+.RB [ down() ]
+Moves page down two thirds of a window-full. With a float argument to ``down'',
+moves down the corresponding fraction of a window-full.
+.\" Therefore, a more
+.\" ``smooth'' scrolling using the ``Up'' and ``Down'' keys can be
+.\" achieved by the the following setting:
+.\" .sp
+.\" xdvi.mainTranslations: #override\e
+.\" .br
+.\" <Key>Up:up(0.01)\en\e
+.\" .br
+.\" <Key>Down:down(0.01)\en
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-f
+.RB [ find() ]
+Pop up a window to search for a string in the DVI file. See the section
+.BR "STRING SEARCH" ,
+below, for more details.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B f
+.RB [ forward-page() ]
+Moves to the next page (or to the
+.IR n th
+next page if a number is given). Synonyms are
+.RB ` n ',
+Return, and Line Feed.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B G
+.RB [ set-greyscaling() ]
+This key toggles the use of greyscale anti-aliasing for displaying shrunken
+bitmaps. In addition, the key sequences
+.RB ` 0G '
+and
+.RB ` 1G '
+clear and set this flag, respectively. See also the
+.B \-nogrey
+option.
+.sp
+If given a numeric argument that is not 0 or 1, greyscale anti-aliasing is
+turned on, and the gamma resource is set to the value divided by
+100. E.g.,
+.RB ` 150G '
+turns on greyscale and sets gamma to 1.5.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-g
+.RB [ find-next() ]
+Find the next match string in the DVI file; this can be used instead
+of pressing the `Find' button in the search window.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B g
+.RB [ goto-page() ]
+Moves to the page with the given number. If no page number is given, xdvi jumps to the last page.
+.br
+If the option/resource
+.B useTeXpages
+is active, the numbers correspond the the actual page numbers in the TeX file;
+otherwise, absolute page numbers (starting from 1) are used. In the latter case,
+the page numbers can be changed with the
+.RB ` P '
+keystroke, below.
+Note that with the
+.B useTeXpages
+option it is possible that the same page number occurs multiple
+times; in such a case, xdvi will use the first page number that matches.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B h
+Pops up a help window with a short explanation of the most important key
+bindings and concepts.
+.\"
+.\" Ummh, surely nobody will use the following ...
+.\"
+.\" For I18n purposes, the help texts and menu entries are configurable
+.\" via the following X resources:
+.\" .BR helpGeneral ,
+.\" #ifhyper
+.\" .BR helpHypertex ,
+.\" #endif
+.\" .BR helpOthercommands ,
+.\" .BR helpMarking ,
+.\" .BR helpPagemotion ,
+.\" .BR helpMousebuttons ,
+.\" .BR helpRulermode ,
+.\" .BR helpSearch and
+.\" .BR helpSourcespecials .
+.\" The values of this resource should be a text string, the first line of
+.\" which should contain two fields separated by `\en'. The first field is
+.\" used as list entry for the list of help topics on the left of the help
+.\" window, and the second field is used as the heading on the right-hand side.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B k
+.RB [ set-keep-flag() ]
+Normally when
+.B xdvi
+switches pages, it moves to the home position as well. The
+.RB ` k '
+keystroke toggles a `keep-position' flag which, when set, will keep
+the same position when moving between pages. Also
+.RB ` 0k '
+and
+.RB ` 1k '
+clear and set this flag, respectively. See also the
+.B \-keep
+option.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-l
+.RB [ fullscreen(toggle) ]
+Toggles fullscreen mode (see the description of the
+.B \-fullscreen
+option for more information on this). This is even more flaky than
+using the command-line option: There is no universal standard
+how a window could change its own geometry or window decorations at
+run-time, so this will not work with most window managers or
+desktops. Generally, it's better to use the window manager controls to
+change the size or decorations of the xdvi window.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B l
+.RB [ left() ]
+Moves page left two thirds of a window-full.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B M
+.RB [ set-margins() ]
+Sets the margins so that the point currently under the mouse cursor defines
+the upper left-hand corner of the text in the page. Note that the command
+does
+.I not
+move the image, but only determines the margins
+for the page switching commands. For details on how the margins
+are used, see the
+.B \-margins
+option.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B m
+.RB [ toggle-mark() ]
+Toggles the mark for the current page in the page list. When a page
+is marked, it is displayed with a small star `*' next to the page number.
+The marked pages can then be printed or saved to a file.
+A page or several pages can also be marked by clicking or dragging
+.B Mouse-2
+in the page list.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-n
+.RB [ toggle-mark()forward-page() ]
+Toggles the mark for the current page in the page list, and moves to
+the next page. This lets you quickly mark a series of subsequent pages.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B n
+.RB [ forward-page() ]
+Moves to the next page (or to the
+.IR n th
+next page if a number is given). Synonyms are
+.RB ` f ',
+Return, and Line Feed.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-o
+.RB [ select-dvi-file() ]
+Read a new
+.I dvi
+file. A file-selection widget is popped up for you to choose the DVI
+file from. If a prefix argument
+.I n
+is given, the
+.I n th
+file from the file history is opened instead.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B P
+.RB [ declare-page-number() ]
+``This is page number
+.IR n .''
+This can be used to make the
+.RB ` g '
+keystroke refer to a different page number than the physical page.
+(If you want to use `logical' or \*(Te\& page numbers instead of physical pages,
+consider using the option
+.B \-useTeXpages
+instead.)
+The argument
+.I n
+should be given as prefix to this key.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-p
+.RB [ print() ]
+Opens a popup window for printing the DVI file, or parts of it.
+See the section
+.B PRINT DIALOG
+for an explanation of the options available, and the resources to customize
+the default behaviour.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B p
+.RB [ back-page() ]
+Moves to the previous page (or back
+.I n
+pages). Synonyms are
+.RB ` b '
+and
+.BR Ctrl-h .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B q
+.RB [ quit() ]
+Quits the program.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-r
+.RB [ forward-page(0) ]
+Redisplays the current page.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B R
+.RB [ reread-dvi-file() ]
+Forces the
+.I dvi
+file to be reread. This allows you to preview many versions of the same
+file while running
+.B xdvi
+only once.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B r
+.RB [ right() ]
+Moves page right two thirds of a window-full.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-s
+.RB [ save() ]
+Opens a popup window for saving the DVI file, or parts of it. See the section
+SAVE DIALOG below for more information on this.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B S
+.RB [ set-density() ]
+Sets the density factor to be used when shrinking bitmaps. This should
+be a number between 0 and 100; higher numbers produce lighter characters.
+If greyscaling mode is in effect, this changes the value of gamma instead.
+The new value of gamma is the given number divided by 100; negative values
+are allowed.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B s
+.RB [ set-shrink-factor() ]
+Changes the shrink factor to the given number. If no number is given, the
+smallest factor that makes the entire page fit in the window will be used.
+(Margins are ignored in this computation.)
+.\" NOTE: following only works in action string, not interactively!!!
+.\" Two special values are
+.\" .B +
+.\" and
+.\" .B -
+.\" which zoom in and out respectively, by decrementing/incrementing the
+.\" shrinkfactor by one step.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B T
+.RB [ use-tex-pages() ]
+Use logical \*(Te\& pages (the values of the
+.I \ecount0
+register) instead of physical pages for the pagelist labels and
+when jumping to a page in a document via
+.BR goto-page() .
+See also the
+.B \-useTeXpages
+option.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B t
+.RB [ switch-magnifier-units() ]
+Switches the units used for the magnifier tick marks, and for reporting
+the distance between the mouse pointer and the ruler centre in
+ruler mode (see the section
+.BR MODES ).
+The default value is specified by the X resource
+.B tickUnits
+(`mm' by default). The units toggle through the following
+values; except for `px', they all correspond to \*(Te\&'s units:
+.I mm
+(millimeters)
+.I pt
+(\*(Te\& points),
+.I in
+(inches),
+.I sp
+(scaled points, the unit used internally by \*(Te\&)
+.I bp
+(big points or `Postscript points'),
+.I cc
+(cicero points),
+.I dd
+(didot points),
+.I pc
+(pica), and
+.I px
+(screen pixels).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-u
+.RB [ back-page()toggle-mark() ]
+Moves to the previous page, and toggles the mark for that page. This
+is the dual action to
+.BR Ctrl-n .
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B u
+.RB [ up() ]
+Moves page up two thirds of a window-full. With a float argument to ``up'',
+moves up the corresponding fraction of a window-full.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-v
+.RB [ show-source-specials() ]
+Show bounding boxes for every source special on the current page, and print
+the strings contained in these specials to stderr. With prefix 1,
+show every bounding box on the page. This is for debugging purposes mainly.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B V
+.RB [ set-gs-alpha() ]
+This key toggles the anti-aliasing of PostScript<tm> specials when
+.B Ghostscript
+is used as renderer. In addition the key sequences
+.RB ` 0V '
+and
+.RB ` 1V '
+clear and set this flag, respectively. See also the
+.B \-gsalpha
+option.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B v
+.RB [ set-ps() ]
+This key toggles the rendering of PostScript<tm> specials between 3 states:
+.RS 7
+.TP 0
+.SB - specials (like EPS graphics) are displayed;
+.TP
+.SB - specials are displayed along with their bounding box (if available);
+.TP
+.SB - only the bounding box is displayed.
+.PP
+.sp
+The states can also be selected directly by using
+.RB ` 1v ',
+.RB ` 2v '
+and
+.RB ` 0v '
+respectively.
+See also the
+.B \-postscript
+option.
+.RE
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-x
+.RB [ source-what-special() ]
+Display information about the source special next to the mouse cursor in the
+statusline. This is the same special that would be found by
+.I source-special() ,
+but without invoking the editor. For debugging purposes.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B x
+.RB [ set-expert-mode() ]
+Toggles expert mode, in which
+the statusline, the scrollbars, the menu buttons, the toolbar (Motif only)
+and the page list are not shown.
+Typing
+.RB ` 1x '
+toggles the display of the statusline at the bottom of
+the window. Typing
+.RB ` 2x '
+toggles the scrollbars (if available). For Xaw,
+.RB ` 3x '
+toggles the menu buttons and the page list, for Motif,
+it toggles the page list. In Motif, the additional bindings
+.RB ` 4x '
+toggle the toolbar, and
+.RB ` 5x '
+the menu bar.
+.br
+Without a prefix argument, all of the mentioned GUI elements are either
+switched on (if they had been invisible before) or off.
+.br
+Toggling the scrollbars may behave erratically with the
+Xaw widgets; e.g. the scrollbars may reappear after
+resizing the window, and at certain window sizes one of the
+scrollbars may fail to disappear.
+.br
+See also the option
+.B \-expertmode
+(the numbers above correspond to the bits in the argument to
+.BR \-expertmode ).
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH MOUSE ACTIONS IN THE MAIN WINDOW
+.TP
+.B Mouse-1
+.RB [ do-href()magnifier(*1) ]
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Mouse-2
+.RB [ do-href-newwindow()magnifier(*2) ]
+Usually, if a binding specifies more then one action, all actions
+are executed in a sequence. The hyperlink bindings
+.B do-href()
+and
+.B do-href-newwindow()
+are special in that they are used as an
+.I alternative
+to other actions that might follow them
+.I if
+the mouse is currently located on a hyperlink.
+In this case, none of the other actions will be executed.
+Otherwise,
+.I only
+the other actions are executed.
+.br
+The action
+.B do-href()
+jumps to the link target in the current xdvi
+window (eventually switching to another page), and
+.B do-href-newwindow()
+opens a new instance of xdvi for the link target.
+In both cases, the location of the target is
+indicated by a small arrow drawn in the same color
+as a visited link
+in the left corner of the window.
+.TP
+.B Mouse-3
+.RB [ magnifier(*3) ]
+The actions
+.B magnifier(n)
+will pop up a ``magnifying glass'' which shows the unshrunk
+image of the region around the mouse pointer. The magnifier disappears when
+the mouse button is released. Moving the mouse cursor while holding the button down will move the
+magnifier.
+.br
+In \fB`Ruler Mode'\fR, the first button moves or sets a ruler cross instead;
+see the section
+.BR MODES ,
+below, for details.
+.br
+Different mouse buttons produce different sized
+windows, as indicated by the
+the argument of the
+.I magnifier()
+action. Its argument is either a string of the form
+.IR width x height ,
+as in the
+.BI \-mgs n
+command-line option, or one of the strings
+.B *1
+through
+.BR *5 ,
+referring to the value specified by the corresponding
+.BI \-mgs n
+option. Note that in order to assign magnifier actions to
+the buttons 4 or 5, you need to use the resource
+.B wheelTranslations
+(more about this resource below), e.g.:
+.sp
+xdvi.wheelTranslations: <Btn4Down>: magnifier(*4)\en\e
+ <Btn5Down>: magnifier(*5)\en
+.sp
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Shift-Mouse-1
+.RB [ drag(+) ]
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Shift-Mouse-2
+.RB [ drag(|) ]
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Shift-Mouse-3
+.RB [ drag(-) ]
+Drags the page with the mouse. Shift-Mouse 1 allows dragging in all directions,
+Shift-Mouse 2 allows vertical dragging only, and Shift-Mouse 3 allows
+horizontal dragging only. To access these actions via customization, use the
+.B drag
+action. This action should have one parameter, the character
+.RB `` | '',
+.RB `` - '',
+or
+.RB `` + '',
+indicating vertical dragging, horizontal dragging, or dragging in both
+directions.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Ctrl-Mouse-1
+.RB [ source-special() ]
+Holding down the
+.I Ctrl
+key and clicking mouse button 1 starts a ``reverse search'',
+opening the editor at the location in the \*(Te\& file corresponding
+to the pointer location in the DVI file.
+See the section on SOURCE SPECIALS, below, for more information on this.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH UNBOUND ACTIONS
+The following actions are not bound to a key by default, but are available
+for customization.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B quit-confirm()
+Pops up a confirmation window to quit xdvi. To bind it to the
+.RB ` q '
+key instead of the default `quit()' action, put the following into your
+.I ~/.Xdefaults
+file:
+.sp
+xdvi.mainTranslations: #override\e
+.br
+<Key>q: quit-confirm()\en
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B down-or-next()
+Similar to
+.IR unpause-or-next() :
+Moves down two-thirds of a window-full, or to the next page if already
+at the bottom of the page.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B shrink-to-dpi()
+This action takes one (required) argument. It sets the shrink factor to
+an integer so as to approximate the use of fonts with the corresponding
+number of dots per inch. If
+.B xdvi
+is using fonts scaled for
+.I p
+dots per inch, and the argument to
+.B shrink-to-dpi
+is
+.IR n ,
+then the corresponding shrink factor is the ratio
+.IR p / n ,
+rounded to the nearest integer.
+.PP
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH CUSTOMIZATION
+Key and mouse button assignments can be changed by setting the
+.B mainTranslations
+resource to a string of translations as defined in the documentation for the
+X toolkit. The actions should take the form of action names listed in the
+KEYSTROKES and MOUSE ACTIONS sections.
+.PP
+An exception to this are the Motif keys
+.IR osfPageUp " (" PgUp ),
+.IR osfPageDown " (" PgDown ),
+.IR osfBeginLine " (" Home )
+and
+.IR osfEndLine " (" End )
+which are currently not customizable in the Motif version.
+.PP
+Key actions will usually be without arguments; if they are passed an argument,
+it represents the optional number or `prefix argument' typed prior to the action.
+.PP
+Some key actions may take special arguments, as follows: The argument of
+.B goto-page
+may be the letter
+.RB ` e ',
+indicating the action of going to the end of the document.
+The argument of
+.B set-shrink-factor
+may be the letter
+.RB ` a ',
+indicating that the shrink factor should be set to the smallest value such that
+the page will fit in the window, or one of the signs
+.RB ` + '
+or
+.RB ` - ',
+indicating that the shrink factor should be increased or decreased, respectively.
+Finally, actions that would perform a toggle, such as
+.BR set-keep-flag ,
+may receive an argument
+.RB ` t ',
+indicating that the action should toggle regardless of the current prefix argument.
+.PP
+Mouse actions should refer only to
+.B ButtonPress
+events (e.g.,
+.BR "<Btn1Down>:magnifier(*1)" ).
+The corresponding motion and release events will be handled internally.
+A key action may be bound to a mouse event, but not vice versa.
+.PP
+Usually the string of translations should begin with
+.RB `` #override '',
+indicating that the default key and mouse button assignments should not
+be discarded.
+.PP
+When keys or mouse buttons involving modifiers (such as Ctrl or Shift)
+are customized together with their non-modified equivalents, the modified
+keys should come first, for example:
+.RS 5
+.nf
+.ft 3
+.sp 1n
+xdvi.mainTranslations: #override \e
+Ctrl<Btn1Down>: magnifier(*3)\en\e
+Shift<Btn1Down>: magnifier(*2)\en\e
+<Btn1Down>: magnifier(*1)\en
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+Note: The additional `Modes' for Mouse-1 (Ruler Mode, Text Mode - see
+the section
+.BR MODES )
+only work if Mouse-1 has the magnifier() action bound to it.
+.PP
+Because
+.B xdvi
+needs to capture pointer motion events, and because the X Toolkit
+translations mechanism cannot accommodate both motion events and double-click
+events at the same time, it is not possible to specify double-click
+actions in
+.B xdvi
+customizations. For information on this and other aspects of translations,
+see the X Toolkit Intrinsics documentation.
+.PP
+There is no command-line option to set the
+.B mainTranslations
+resource, since changing this resource on the command line would be cumbersome.
+To set the resource for testing purposes, use the
+.B -xrm
+command-line option provided by the X toolkit. For example,
+\fBxdvi \-xrm 'XDvi.mainTranslations: #override "z":quit()' ...\fR
+or
+.B "xdvi \-xrm 'XDvi.mainTranslations: #override <Key>z:quit()' ..."
+will cause the key
+.RB ` z '
+to quit
+.BR xdvi .
+.PP
+Support of wheel mice is controlled by the
+.B wheelTranslations
+resource. Generally the only action routine called by this resource should be
+.BR wheel .
+The default value is
+``\fB<Btn4Down>:wheel(-1.)\en<Btn5Down>:wheel(1.)\fR''.
+Because this resource is implemented differently from the others, it should
+not begin with
+.RB ``#override '';
+when specifying a value for this resource, all wheel actions should be
+included.
+.\" #ifxaw
+.\" NOTE: following is different with Motif, and will change for Xaw too ...
+.\" removed for the time being.
+.\"
+.\" .PP
+.\" The menu entries and actions may also be customized, in a similar manner.
+.\" In this case the resource
+.\" .B menuTranslations
+.\" should consist of a string describing the pulldown menu names, submenu entries
+.\" and the associated actions. Currently, only one level of submenus is provided for.
+.\" The description consists of lines (substrings separated by the newline character
+.\" `\fB\\n\fP'),
+.\" where each line describes one menu entry. Each line consists of a colon-separated
+.\" list containing the following elements:
+.\" .RS 2
+.\" .TP 2
+.\" -
+.\" the name of the menu;
+.\" .TP
+.\" -
+.\" the name of the submenu;
+.\" .TP
+.\" -
+.\" an accelerator for the action (the accelerator is currently not displayed in the menu, but it might be in future versions);
+.\" .TP
+.\" -
+.\" one of the actions mentioned in the sections on KEYSTROKES above.
+.\" .RE
+.\" .PP
+.\" Instead of a submenu and an action, an entry may also contain the string
+.\" .RB `` SEP '' ;
+.\" in this case, a separator line is inserted after the preceding menu entry.
+.\" .PP
+.\" The default value of this resource is as follows:
+.\" .RS 5
+.\" .nf
+.\" .ft 3
+.\" .sp 1n
+.\" xdvi.menuTranslations: \e
+.\" File:Open ...:Ctrl-o:select-dvi-file()\en\e
+.\" File:Find ...:Ctrl-f:find()\en\e
+.\" File:Reload:R:reread-dvi-file()\en\e
+.\" File:Print ...:Ctrl-p:print()\en\e
+.\" File:Save as ...::save()\en\e
+.\" File:Quit:q:quit()\en\e
+.\" Navigate:First:1 g:goto-page(1)\en\e
+.\" Navigate:Page-10:10 p:back-page(10)\en\e
+.\" Navigate:Page-5:5 p:back-page(10)\en\e
+.\" Navigate:Prev:p:back-page(1)\en\e
+.\" Navigate:SEP:\en\e
+.\" Navigate:Next:n:forward-page(1)\en\e
+.\" Navigate:Page+5:5 n:forward-page(5)\en\e
+.\" Navigate:Page+10:10 n:forward-page(10)\en\e
+.\" Navigate:Last:g:goto-page()\en\e
+.\" Navigate:SEP:\en\e
+.\" Navigate:Back Hyperlink:B:htex-back()\en\e
+.\" Mark:Mark all:-1 m:toggle-mark(-1)\en\e
+.\" Mark:Unmark all:0 m:toggle-mark(0)\en\e
+.\" Mark:SEP:\en\e
+.\" Mark:Toggle odd:1 m:toggle-mark(1)\en\e
+.\" Mark:Toggle even:2 m:toggle-mark(2)\en\e
+.\" Mark:Toggle current:m:toggle-mark()\en\e
+.\" Zoom:Zoom in:Ctrl-+:set-shrink-factor(+)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:Zoom out:Ctrl--:set-shrink-factor(-)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:SEP:\en\e
+.\" Zoom:Fit in window:s:set-shrink-factor(a)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:SEP:\en\e
+.\" Zoom:$#:1 s:set-shrink-factor(1)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:$#:2 s:set-shrink-factor(2)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:$#:3 s:set-shrink-factor(3)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:$#:4 s:set-shrink-factor(4)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:$#:5 s:set-shrink-factor(5)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:$#:6 s:set-shrink-factor(6)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:$#:7 s:set-shrink-factor(7)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:$#:8 s:set-shrink-factor(8)\en\e
+.\" Zoom:$#:9 s:set-shrink-factor(9)\en\e
+.\" Options:View PS:1 v:set-ps(1)\en\e
+.\" Options:View PS + bbox:2 v:set-ps(2)\en\e
+.\" Options:No PS, bbox only:0 v:set-ps(0)\en\e
+.\" Options:SEP:\en\e
+.\" Options:Keep position:k:set-keep-flag(toggle)\en\e
+.\" Options:SEP:\en\e
+.\" Options:Fonts darker:Alt-Ctrl-+:change-density(25)\en\e
+.\" Options:Fonts lighter:Alt-Ctrl--:change-density(-25)\en\e
+.\" Help:About ...::help(helpGeneral)\en\e
+.\" Help:Page Motion ...::help(helpPagemotion)\en\e
+.\" Help:Other Commands ...::help(helpOthercommands)\en\e
+.\" Help:Mouse Buttons ...::help(helpMousebuttons)\en\e
+.\" Help:HyperTeX commands ...::help(helpHypertex)\en\e
+.\" Help:Source specials ...::help(helpSourcespecials)\en
+.\" .sp 1n
+.\" .ft
+.\" .fi
+.\" .RE
+.\" .PP
+.\" The label string may contain a colon if it is escaped by a backslash
+.\" (`\fB\\\fP'). (Note: Since the internal handling of menus requires
+.\" every menu label to be unique, xdvi's special strings for customizing
+.\" shrink factors in the buttons --
+.\" .RB ` $# ',
+.\" .RB ` $% '
+.\" and
+.\" .RB ' $_ '
+.\" -- are not supported by xdvik).
+.\" endif
+.PP
+Some resources are provided to allow customization of the geometry of
+the Xaw command buttons. Again, they are not changeable via command-line
+options, other than via the
+.B \-xrm
+option. All of these resources take integer values.
+.TP
+.B buttonSideSpacing
+The number of pixels to be placed on either side of the buttons.
+The default value is 6.
+.TP
+.B buttonTopSpacing
+The number of pixels between the top button and the top of the window.
+The default value is 50.
+.TP
+.B buttonBetweenSpacing
+The number of pixels between the buttons.
+The default value is 20.
+.TP
+.B buttonBetweenExtra
+The number of pixels of additional space to be inserted if the
+.B buttonTranslations
+resource string contains an extra newline character.
+The default value is 50.
+.TP
+.B buttonBorderWidth
+The border width of the button windows. The default value is 1.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH PAGE LIST
+The scrollable page list on the right of the main window allows you to
+jump directly to a page in the DVI file.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Mouse-1
+Jumps to the page the mouse is located on.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B Mouse-2
+.RB [ toggle-mark() ]
+Toggle the mark of the current page. The marks are used by the `Print'
+and `Save to file' dialogs to select only marked pages from the DVI file.
+.PP
+When the mouse pointer is inside the page list, the mouse wheel switches
+to the next or previous page.
+.PP
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH SCROLLBARS
+The scrollbars (if present) behave in the standard way: pushing Button 2
+in a scrollbar moves the top or left edge of the scrollbar to that point
+and optionally drags it;
+pushing Button 1 moves the image up or right by an amount equal to the distance
+from the button press to the upper left-hand corner of the window; pushing
+Button 3 moves the image down or left by the same amount.
+.PP
+The scrollbars can be removed via the
+.I -expertmode
+flag/keystroke (which see).
+.PP
+Wheel mice are supported: motion of the wheel on such a mouse moves the
+image up or down by the number of pixels indicated by the
+.B \-wheelunit
+option. To access this option via customization, use the
+.B wheel
+action. This action takes one parameter, giving the distance to scroll
+the image. If the parameter contains a decimal point, the distance is given
+in wheel units; otherwise, pixels.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH MAGNIFIER
+By default, the mouse buttons 1 to 5 will pop up a ``magnifying glass''
+that shows an unshrunken image of the page (i.e. an image at the resolution
+determined by the option/X resource
+.B pixels
+or
+.BR mfmode )
+at varying sizes. When the magnifier is moved, small ruler-like
+tick marks are displayed at the edges of the magnifier (unless
+the X resource
+.B delayRulers
+is set to false, in which case the tick marks will always be displayed).
+The unit of the marks is determined by the X resource
+.B tickUnits
+(mm by default). This unit can be changed at runtime via the action
+.BR switch-magnifier-units() ,
+by default bound to the keystroke
+.RB ` t '
+(see the description of that key, and of switch-magnifier-units() for
+more details on the units available).
+.br
+The length of the tick marks can be changed via the X resource
+.B tickLength
+(4 by default). A zero or negative value suppresses the tick marks.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH PAGE HISTORY
+Xdvi keeps a history of viewed pages, and you can move through the history
+and delete items using the keys
+.B [
+.RI ( pagehistory-back() ),
+.B ]
+.RI ( pagehistory-forward() ),
+.B Ctr-[
+.RI ( pagehistory-delete-backward() )
+and
+.B Ctr-]
+.RI ( pagehistory-delete-forward() ).
+.PP
+When one of the history commands is used, the page history is displayed
+in the status line at the bottom of the window, with the current list
+item marked by square brackets `[', `]' and a left and right context of
+at most 10 items. File boundaries are marked by `#'.
+.PP
+The size of the history can be customized with the X resource
+.B pageHistorySize
+(the default size is 1000 items). If the size is set to 0, the
+history commands are disabled.
+.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH HYPERLINKS
+The actions
+.B do-href()
+and
+.B do-href-newwindow()
+(by default bound to Mouse-1 and Mouse-2 if the pointer is currently located
+on a hyperlink) can be used to open the link target in the same window
+.RB ( do-href() )
+or in a new window
+.RB ( do-href-newwindow() ).
+.PP
+If the link target is not a file on the local disk,
+xdvi tries to launch a web browser (as specified by the
+.B -browser
+command line option, the
+.B BROWSER
+environment variable or the
+.B wwwBrowser
+X resource, in this order) to retrieve the document. See the description
+of the
+.B BROWSER
+environment variable, below, for an example setting.
+.PP
+If the file is a local file, xdvi tries to determine if it is a DVI
+file. If it is, xdvi will try to display the file; otherwise it will
+try to determine the MIME type of the file, and from that an
+application suitable for opening the file.
+This is done by parsing the files specified by the environment variable
+.B EXTENSIONMAPS
+for a mapping of filename extensions to MIME types,
+and the files determined by the environment variable
+.B MAILCAPS
+for a mapping of MIME types to application programs.
+See the descriptions of these variables in the section
+.BR ENVIRONMENT ,
+below, for a more detailed description and the default values of these
+variables. If no suitable files are found, a set of built-in default
+MIME types and applications is used.
+.PP
+Xdvi currently uses no heuristics apart from the filename suffix
+to determine the mime type of a file. If a filename has no suffix,
+the value of the resource
+.B noMimeSuffix
+is used (by default
+.IR application/x-unknown ).
+If the suffix doesn't match any of the suffixes in
+.BR mime.types ,
+the value of the resource
+.B unknownMimeSuffix
+is used (by default
+.IR application/x-unknown ).
+If the
+.B mailcap
+entries do not list a viewer for a given mime type, xdvi will show
+a warning popup. If you want to avoid this warning, and for example
+want to always use the netscape browser for unknown MIME types,
+you could add the following line to your ~/.mailcap file:
+.RS 4
+.nf
+.ft 3
+.sp 1n
+application/xdvi-unknown; \e
+ netscape -raise -remote 'openURL(%s,new-window)'
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.\" As an example, consider the following settings, which are the default
+.\" settings for buttons 1 and 2:
+.\" .RS 5
+.\" .nf
+.\" .ft 3
+.\" .sp 1n
+.\" xdvi.mainTranslations: #override \e
+.\" <Btn1Down>: do-href()magnifier(*1)\en\e
+.\" <Btn2Down>: do-href-newwindow()magnifier(*2)\en\e
+.\" <Btn3Down>: magnifier(*3)\en
+.\" .sp 1n
+.\" .ft
+.\" .fi
+.\" .RE
+.\" .PP
+.\" If a link points to a file which is not a DVI file (e.g. HTML, or
+.\" PostScript), the files
+.\" .B mime.types
+.\" and
+.\" .B mailcap
+.\" are parsed to determine a suitable viewer; if no suitable
+.\" .B mailcap
+.\" entry was found, if the
+.\" .SB WWWBROWSER
+.\" environment variable is set, or
+.\" .B \-browser
+.\" was specified on the command line, the browser is launched to load the file.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH STRING SEARCH
+The keystroke
+.I Ctrl-f
+or the menu entry
+.I File > Find ...
+(or the `Binoculars' symbol in the toolbar, for Motif)
+opens a dialog window to search for a text string or
+a regular expression in the DVI file.
+The keystroke
+.I Ctrl-g
+jumps to the next match (like pressing the `Find' button in the search window).
+.PP
+By default, the matches are highlighted in inverted color.
+If the display isn't running in TrueColor, or if the X resouce
+.B matchHighlightInverted
+is set to false or the command-line option
+.B \-nomatchinverted
+is used, xdvi will instead draw a rectangle in
+.I highlight
+color (see the
+.B \-hl
+option) around the match.
+.PP
+If a match crosses a page boundary, only the part on the
+first page is highlighted.
+.B Xdvi
+will scan up to 2 adjacent pages to match strings crossing page
+boundaries; but note that header or footer
+lines, or intervening float pages will be treated as parts of the
+scanned text. Such text will usually cause multi-page matching to fail.
+.PP
+This emphasizes the fact that searching in the
+formatted text (the DVI output) works differently from
+searching in the source text: Searching in the DVI file makes it easier to
+skip formatting instructions, and makes it possible to search for e.g.
+hyphenation and equation numbers; but sometimes the
+formatting results can also get in the way, e.g. in the case of
+footnotes. In these cases it's better to search in the \*(Te\& source
+instead. The use of
+.I source specials
+will make switching between the
+xdvi display and the editor with the \*(Te\& source easier; see the
+section
+.B SOURCE SPECIALS
+below for more information on this.
+.PP
+The text extracted from the DVI file is in encoded in UTF-8
+(you can view that text by saving the file in UTF-8 format via the
+.I File > Save as ...
+menu item).
+If xdvi has been compiled with locale,
+.I nl_langinfo()
+and
+.I iconv
+support, the search term is converted from the character set
+specified by the current locale into UTF-8. (See the output of
+.B locale -a
+for a list of locale settings available on your system).
+If
+.I nl_langinfo()
+is not available, but
+.I iconv
+is, you can specify the input encoding for
+.I iconv
+via the X resource
+.I textEncoding
+(see the output of
+.B iconv -l
+for a list of valid encodings). If
+.I iconv
+support is not available, only the encodings
+.I ISO-8859-1
+and
+.I UTF-8
+are supported (these names are case-insensitive).
+.PP
+Ideographic characters from CJKV fonts are treated specially: All white space
+(spaces and newlines) before and after such characters is ignored in
+the search string and in the DVI file.
+.PP
+To match a newline character, use \fI\en\fR in the search string;
+to match the string \fI\en\fR, use \fI\e\en\fR.
+.PP
+If the checkbox
+.I Regular Expression
+is activated, the string is treated as a regular expression in
+extended POSIX syntax, with the following properties:
+.RS 2
+.TP 2
+-
+\fIa?\fR matches \fIa\fR zero or one times.
+.TP
+-
+\fIa*\fR matches \fIa\fR zero or more times.
+.TP
+-
+\fIa+\fR matches \fIa\fR one or more times.
+Note that \fI*\fR and \fI+\fR are greedy, i.e. they match the longest possible substring.
+.TP
+-
+The pattern \fI.\fR matches any character except for newline. To also match a newline, use `\fI(.|\en)\fR'.
+.TP
+-
+\fIa{n}\fR matches \fIa\fR exactly n times.
+.TP
+-
+\fIa{n,m}\fR matches \fIa\fR at least n and no more than m times.
+.TP
+-
+\fIa|b\fR matches \fIa\fR or \fIb\fR. Brackets can be used
+for grouping, e.g.: \fI(a|b)|c\fR.
+.TP
+-
+The string matched by the nth group can be referenced by \fI\en\fR, e.g. \fI\e1\fR refers to the
+first match.
+.TP
+-
+The characters \fI^\fR and \fI$\fR match the beginning and the end of a line, respectively.
+.TP
+-
+\fI[abc]\fR matches any of the letters a, b, c, and \fI[a-z]\fR matches all characters from a to z.
+.TP
+-
+Each item in a regular expression can also be one of the following POSIX
+character classes:
+.br
+.nf
+.I [[:alnum:]] [[:alpha:]] [[:blank:]] [[:cntrl:]] [[:digit:]]
+.I [[:graph:]] [[:lower:]] [[:print:]] [[:space:]] [[:upper:]]
+.fi
+
+
+These can be negated by inserting a \fI^\fR symbol after the first bracket:
+.I [^[:alpha:]]
+
+For more details on POSIX regular expressions, see e.g. the
+.B IEEE Std 1003.1
+standard definition available online from:
+
+.nf
+http://www.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/007904975/basedefs/xbd_chap09.html
+.fi
+.TP
+-
+As a non-standard extension, the following Perl-like abbreviations
+can be used instead of the POSIX classes:
+.nf
+.sp 1n
+.ta 1L +8L +30L
+Symbol Meaning POSIX Class
+
+ \fI\ew\fR an alphanumeric character \fI[[:alnum:]]\fR
+ \fI\eW\fR a non-alphanumeric character \fI[^[:alnum:]]\fR
+ \fI\ed\fR a digit character \fI[[:digit:]]\fR
+ \fI\eD\fR a non-digit character \fI[^[:digit:]]\fR
+ \fI\es\fR a whitespace character \fI[[:space:]]\fR
+ \fI\eS\fR a non-whitespace character \fI[^[:space:]]\fR
+.sp 1n
+.fi
+.TP
+-
+The following characters are special symbols; they need to be escaped
+with \fI\e\fR in order to match them literally: \fI ( ) [ ] . * ? + ^ $ \e\fR.
+.TP
+-
+Matches of length zero are silently skipped.
+.RE
+.PP
+The dialog also provides checkboxes to:
+.RS 2
+.TP 2
+-
+search backwards;
+.TP
+-
+match in a case-sensitive manner (the default is to ignore case, i.e. a search
+string
+.I Test
+will match both the strings
+.I test
+and
+.I TEST
+in the DVI file);
+.TP
+-
+ignore line breaks and hyphens: This removes all hyphens at the ends
+of lines and the following newline characters, and replaces all
+remaining newline characters by white spaces. So hyphenated words will
+appear as one word to the search, and a search for two words with a space
+in between will also match the words if they are separated by a linebreak.
+.br
+Note that the hyphen removal may cause unwanted side effects for compound words
+containing hyphens that are wrapped after the hyphen, and that replacing the
+newlines affects the interpretation of regular expressions as follows:
+The \fI.\fR pattern will also match newlines, and \fI^\fR and \fI$\fR won't match
+begin and end of lines any more. (Since currently there is no option for turning
+off the greediness of \fI*\fR and \fI+\fR, turing on this option will usually
+result in matches that are longer than desired.)
+.RE
+.PP
+The current checkbox settings are saved in the
+.I ~/.xdvirc
+file.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH PRINT DIALOG
+The print dialog window allows you to print all pages, marked pages
+(click or drag Mouse-2 in the page list to mark them), or a range
+of pages. Note that the page numbers always refer to physical pages,
+so if you're using the option `use TeX pages', you may want to disable
+it to make it easier to determine the correct page numbers (or avoid this
+problem altogether by marking the pages to be printed).
+.PP
+The value of the
+.B Printer
+text filed is passed to
+.B dvips
+via the
+.B -o!
+mechanism, as a single argument after the `!'. Any arguments
+listed in the
+.B Dvips options
+field are segmeted at whitespaces and passed as separate arguments to dvips.
+If you e.g. want to print the file 2-up, you should enter
+the following string into the
+.B Printer
+field:
+.RS 5
+.nf
+.sp 1n
+ \fIpsnup -2 -q | lpr -Plp\fP
+.sp 1n
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+There are several resources for customizing the behaviour and the default entries
+of the print dialog:
+.TP
+.B dvipsPrinterString
+.TP
+.B dvipsOptionsString
+These can be used to provide default entries for the
+.B Printer
+and the
+.B Dvips options
+text fields, respectively. If no paper size is specified in the DVI file
+(via e.g. \eusepackage[dvips]{geometry} - this is the preferred method),
+the input field is initialized with the current value of the
+command line option/X resource
+.BR paper .
+E.g., the option
+.I -paper a4r
+is translated into the dvips options
+.IR "-t a4 -t landscape" .
+Note that no check is performed whether dvips actually understands these
+options (it will ignore them if it can't); currently not all options
+used by xdvi are also covered by dvips.
+.TP
+.B dvipsHangTime
+.TP
+.B dvipsFailHangTime
+These specify the time (in milliseconds) that the printing progress window will
+stay open after the
+.B dvips
+process has terminated. The value of
+.BR dvipsHangTime
+is used if the process terminates successfully;
+.B dvipsFailHangTime
+is used if it terminates with an error. The default values are 1.5 and 5 seconds, respectively.
+If both values are negative, the window will stay open until it is closed by the user.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH SAVE DIALOG
+This dialog allows you to save all or selected/marked pages in the current
+DVI file. You can save in one of the following formats:
+.RS 2
+.TP 2
+-
+Postscript (uses
+.B dvips
+to convert the DVI file to a Postscript file, just like when printing
+to a Postscript file).
+.TP
+-
+PDF (first uses
+.B dvips
+to convert the DVI file to a Postscript file, then uses
+.B ps2pdf
+to convert the Postscript file to PDF).
+.TP
+-
+Plain text in ISO-8859-1 or UTF-8 encoding (the latter will preserve more
+of the special LaTeX characters e.g. from mathematical mode).
+If a character cannot be displayed in the selected
+charset, it is replaced by `\e' followed by the hexadecimal character code.
+If a character is not recognized at all, it is replaced by `?'.
+If you think that xdvi should recognize a character but doesn't,
+please send a feature request to the address given in
+.B AUTHORS
+below. Likewise, if you observe spurious spaces or unwanted linebreaks in
+the output, please report this as a bug.
+.RE
+.PP
+The programs for Postscript and PDF conversion can be customized via
+the command line options or X resources
+.BR -dvipspath / .dvipsPath
+and
+.BR -ps2pdfpath / .ps2pdfPath ,
+respectively; see the explanation of these options above for more details.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH MODES
+The keystroke
+.B Ctrl-m
+[\fBswitch-mode()\fR]
+switches between three different bindings for
+.BR Mouse-1 ,
+which can also be activated via the
+.B Modes
+menu (in Motif, this is a submenu of the
+.B Options
+menu called
+.BR "Mouse Mode" ).
+The default mode at startup can be customized via the X resource
+.B mouseMode
+or the command-line option
+.BR \-mousemode .
+The default startup mode is Magnifier Mode.
+.PP
+.B Note:
+The modes are implemented by changing the
+.I magnifier()
+action. Switching the mode will not work if
+.B Mouse-1
+has been customized to an action sequence that does
+not contain the magnifier() action.
+.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B "Magnifier Mode"
+In this mode, the mouse buttons 1 to 5 pop up a ``magnifying glass''
+that shows an unshrunken image of the page (i.e. an image at the resolution
+determined by the option/X resource
+.B pixels
+or
+.BR mfmode )
+at varying sizes. When the magnifier is moved, small ruler-like
+tick marks are displayed at the edges of the magnifier (unless
+the X resource
+.B delayRulers
+is set to false, in which case the tick marks are always displayed).
+The unit of the marks is determined by the X resource
+.B tickUnits
+(mm by default). This unit can be changed at runtime via the action
+.BR switch-magnifier-units() ,
+by default bound to the keystroke
+.RB ` t '
+(see the description of that key, and of switch-magnifier-units() for
+more details on the units available).
+.br
+The length of the tick marks can be changed via the X resource
+.B tickLength
+(4 by default). A zero or negative value suppresses the tick marks.
+.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B "Text Selection Mode"
+This mode allows you to select a rectangular region of text in the DVI
+file by holding down
+.B Mouse-1
+and moving the mouse. The text is put into
+the X primary selection so that it can be pasted into other X applications
+with
+.B Mouse-2
+as usual.
+.br
+If xdvi has been compiled with locale,
+.I nl_langinfo()
+and
+.I iconv
+support, the selected text is converted into the character set of the
+current locale (see the output of
+.B locale -a
+for a list of locale settings available on your system).
+If
+.I nl_langinfo()
+is not available, but
+.I iconv
+is, you can specify the input encoding for
+.I iconv
+via the X resource
+.I textEncoding
+(see the output of
+.B iconv -l
+for a list of valid encodings). If
+.I iconv
+support is not available, only the encodings
+.I ISO-8859-1
+and
+.I UTF-8
+are supported (these names are case-insensitive).
+.br
+Note that UTF-8 is
+the only encoding that can render all characters (e.g. mathematical
+symbols) of a DVI file. If ISO-8859-1 is active, characters that cannot be displayed
+are replaced by `\e' followed by the hexadecimal character code.
+For other encodings, such characters may trigger iconv error messages.
+If a character is not recognized at all, it is replaced by `?'.
+.br
+To extract larger portions of text, you can alternatively
+save selected pages or the entire file in text format via the
+.B File > Save as ...
+menu.
+.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.B "Ruler Mode"
+This mode provides a simple way of measuring distances on the page.
+.br
+When this mode is activated, the mouse cursor changes into a
+thin cross, and a larger, cross-shaped ruler is drawn in the
+highlight color at the mouse location. The ruler doesn't have
+units attached to it; instead, the current distance between the
+ruler and the mouse cursor is continously printed to the
+statusline.
+.br
+When activating Ruler Mode, the ruler is at first attached to
+the mouse and can be moved around. It can then be positioned at
+a fixed place by clicking
+.BR Mouse-1 .
+After that, the mouse cursor
+can be moved to measure the horizontal
+.RI ( dx ),
+vertical
+.RI ( dy )
+and direct (shortest)
+.RI ( dr )
+distance between the ruler center point and the mouse.
+.br
+Clicking
+.B Mouse-1
+again will move the ruler to the current mouse
+position, and holding down
+.B Mouse-1
+will drag the ruler around.
+.br
+In Ruler Mode, the following special keybindings extend or
+replace the default bindings:
+.RS 7
+.TP 7
+.B o
+.RB [ ruler-snap-origin() ]
+Snap the ruler back to the origin coordinate (0,0).
+.TP
+.B t
+\fR[overrides \fBswitch-magnifier-units()\fP]
+Toggle between various ruler units, which can be specified by the X
+resource
+.B tickUnits
+(`mm' by default).
+.TP
+.B P
+\fR[overrides \fBdeclare-page-number()\fP]
+Print the distances shown in the statusline to standard output.
+.RE
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH TOOLBAR (Motif only)
+The Motif toolbar can also be customized. The XPM file used for the
+toolbar icons can be specified via the resource
+.BR toolbarPixmapFile ,
+which should contain a filename that can be found in one of
+.B XFILESEARCHPATH
+or
+.B XDVIINPUTS
+(see the section
+.B FILE SEARCHING
+below for more information on these variables).
+Xdvi will try to split this pixmap horizontally into
+.I n
+pieces, where each piece is as wide as the pixmap is high
+and is treated as an image for toolbar button
+.IR n .
+This means that each icon should be a square, and that the entire
+pixmap should have width
+\fIn\fR x \fIh\fR if \fIh\fR is the height of the pixmap.
+.PP
+The resource
+.B toolbarTranslations
+can be used to map icons/buttons to specific actions.
+The resource should contain a string separated by newline characters,
+similar to the resources
+.B mainTranslations
+and
+.BR menuTranslations .
+Every line must contain either a spacer definition, or an icon definition:
+.PP
+A spacer definition is a string \fBSPACER(\fIn\fB)\fR,
+where
+.I n
+is the number of pixels inserted as separator to the following button.
+.PP
+An icon definition is a colon-separated list containing the following elements:
+.RS 2
+.TP 2
+.SB - the index of an icon in the pixmap file (starting from zero);
+.TP
+.SB - a long tooltip string, displayed in the status area;
+.TP
+.SB - a short tooltip string, displayed as popup;
+.TP
+.SB - a sequence of actions to be performed when the corresponding toolbar button is pushed.
+.RE
+.PP
+To illustrate this, the default value of
+.B toolbarTranslations
+looks as follows:
+.RS 5
+.nf
+.ft 3
+.sp 1n
+xdvi.toolbarTranslations: \e
+ SPACER(5)\en\e
+ 0:Open a new document (Key\e\e: Ctrl-f):\e
+ Open file:select-dvi-file()\en\e
+ SPACER(10)\en\e
+ 1:Reread this document (Key\e\e: R):\e
+ Reread file:reread-dvi-file()\en\e
+ SPACER(10)\en\e
+ 2:Go to the first page of this document (Key\e\e: 1g):\e
+ Go to first page:goto-page(1)\en\e
+ 3:Go to the previous page of this document (Key\e\e: p):\e
+ Go to previous page:back-page(1)\en\e
+ 4:Go to the next page of this document (Key\e\e: n):\e
+ Go to next page:forward-page(1)\en\e
+ 5:Go to the last page of this document (Key\e\e: g):\e
+ Go to last page:goto-page()\en\e
+ SPACER(10)\en\e
+ 6:Enlarge the display (Key\e\e: Ctrl-+):Zoom in:\e
+ set-shrink-factor(+)\en\e
+ 7:Shrink the display (Key\e\e: Ctrl--):Zoom out:\e
+ set-shrink-factor(-)\en\e
+ SPACER(10)\en\e
+ 8:Jump back to the previous hyperlink (Key\e\e: B):\e
+ Back hyperlink:htex-back()\en\e
+ SPACER(10)\en\e
+ 10:Print this document:Print:print()\en\e
+ SPACER(10)\en\e
+ 11:Toggle marks for odd pages (Key\e\e: 1m):\e
+ Toggle odd:toggle-mark(1)\en\e
+ 12:Toggle marks for even pages (Key\e\e: 2m):\e
+ Toggle even:toggle-mark(2)\en\e
+ 13:Toggle mark for current page (Key\e\e: 2m):\e
+ Toggle current:toggle-mark()\en\e
+ 14:Unmark all pages (Key\e\e: 0m):\e
+ Unmark all:toggle-mark(0)\en\e
+ SPACER(10)\en\e
+ 18:Display fonts darker (Key\e\e: Alt-Ctrl-+):\e
+ Fonts darker:change-density(5)\en\e
+ 19:Display fonts lighter (Key\e\e: Alt-Ctrl--):\e
+ Fonts lighter:change-density(-5)\en
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+When the mouse remains over a toolbar button for a certain period, a `tooltip'
+window is shown, describing what the button does using the
+.I short tooltip string
+from the above resource. At the same time, the
+.I long tooltip string
+is displayed in the statusline.
+The appearance and behaviour of these tooltips can be customized via
+the following resources:
+.TP
+.B tipShell.background
+Background color of the tooltip window.
+.TP
+.B tipShell.fontSet
+Font used for the tooltip.
+.TP
+.B tipShell.waitPeriod
+The time (in milliseconds) the mouse pointer needs to be over
+the button before the tooltip is shown. Set it to a negative value
+to suppress the tooltips altogether.
+
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH GREYSCALING AND COLORMAPS
+The greyscale anti-aliasing feature in
+.B xdvi
+will not work at its best if the display does not have enough colors available.
+This can happen if other applications are using most of the colormap
+(even if they are iconified). If this occurs, then
+.B xdvi
+will print an error message and turn on the
+.B -copy
+option. This will result in overstrike characters appearing wrong;
+it may also result in poor display quality if the number of available
+colors is very small.
+.PP
+Typically this problem occurs on displays that allocate eight bits
+of video memory per pixel. To see how many bits per pixel your display
+uses, type
+.B xwininfo
+in an
+.B xterm
+window, and then click the mouse on the root window when asked. The
+``Depth:'' entry will tell you how many bits are allocated per pixel.
+.PP
+Displays using at least 15 bits per pixel are typically
+.B TrueColor
+visuals, which do not have this problem, since their colormap is
+permanently allocated and available to all applications. (The visual
+class is also displayed by
+.BR xwininfo .)
+For more information on visual classes see the documentation for the
+X Window System.
+.PP
+To alleviate this problem, therefore, one may (a) run with more bits
+per pixel (this may require adding more video memory or replacing the video
+card), (b) shut down other applications that may be using much of the colormap
+and then restart
+.BR xdvi ,
+or (c) run
+.B xdvi
+with the
+.B \-install
+option.
+.PP
+One application which is often the cause of this problem is
+.BR Netscape .
+In this case there are two more alternatives to remedying the situation.
+One can run
+.RB `` "netscape -install" ''
+to cause
+.B Netscape
+to install a private colormap. This can cause colors to change in
+bizarre ways when the mouse is moved to a different window.
+Or, one can run
+.RB `` "netscape -ncols 220" ''
+to limit
+.B Netscape
+to a smaller number of colors. A smaller number will ensure that
+other applications have more colors available, but will degrade the
+color quality in the
+.B Netscape
+window.
+
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH HANDLING OF POSTSCRIPT FIGURES
+.B Xdvi
+can display Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files included in the
+.I dvi
+file. Such files are first searched for in the directory where the
+.I dvi
+file is, and then using normal
+.B Kpathsea
+rules. There is an exception to this, however: if the file name begins
+with a backtick
+.RB ( ` ),
+then the remaining characters in the file name give a shell command (often
+.BR zcat )
+which is executed; its standard output is then sent to be interpreted as
+PostScript.
+Since the execution of arbitrary shell commands with the user's
+permissions is a huge security risk, evaluation of these backtick
+commands is disabled by default. It needs to be activated via the
+.B \-allowshell
+command-line option.
+.B NOTE:
+You should never use this option when viewing documents that you
+didn't compile yourself. The backtick specials are not needed for
+uncompressing gzipped Postscript files, since
+.B xdvi
+can do that on the fly if the filename ends with
+.I .eps.gz
+or
+.I .eps.Z
+(and if the first bytes of the file indicate that the file is indeed
+compressed). This is both safer and more flexible than the backtick
+approach, since the default file searching rules will apply to such
+filenames too.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH T1LIB
+Using T1Lib, a library written by Rainer Menzner
+(see ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/libs/graphics/),
+.B xdvi
+can render Postscript<tm> Type1 fonts directly, without the
+route via \*(Te\& pixel (pk)
+fonts. The advantage of this is that only one size of each font needs
+to be stored on disk.
+Unless the
+.B -not1lib
+option is used,
+.B xdvi
+will try to render every font using T1Lib. Only as a fallback it will
+invoke an external program (like
+.BR mktexpk ,
+which in turn may invoke utilities like
+.B ps2pk
+or
+.BR gsftopk )
+to generate a pixel font from the Type1 source. The direct rendering
+of the
+.B Computer Modern
+fonts should work out-of-the box, whereas other Type1 fonts such as
+the 35 `standard' Postscript<tm> fonts resident in printers may need
+to be made accessible for use with xdvi, unless your system
+administrator or TeX distribution has already done so (which is the case
+e.g. for current teTeX systems). The
+.B xdvik
+distribution comes with a utility called
+.B t1mapper
+to make these fonts available for xdvi;
+see the manual page for t1mapper(1) for usage details.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH SPECIALS (GENERALLY)
+Any of the specials used by
+.B xdvi
+may be preceded by the characters
+.RB `` xdvi: ''.
+Doing so does not change the behavior of the special under
+.BR xdvi ,
+but it tells other dvi drivers (such as e.g. dvips) to ignore the special.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH SOURCE SPECIALS
+Some \*(Te\& implementations or macro packages provide the facility to
+automatically include so-called `source specials' into a DVI file.
+These contain the line number, eventually a column number, and the
+filename of the .tex source. This makes it possible to jump from a .dvi
+file to the corresponding place in the .tex source and vice versa (also
+called `inverse search' - jumping from the DVI file to the TeX file is
+also known as `reverse search', and jumping from the TeX file to the
+DVI file as `forward search').
+.P
+To be usable with
+.BR xdvi ,
+source specials in the
+.I dvi
+file must have one of the following formats:
+.RS 5
+.nf
+.sp 1n
+ \fBsrc:\fP\fIline\fP[ ]\fIfilename\fP
+ \fBsrc:\fP\fIline\fP\fB:\fP\fIcol\fP[ ]\fIfilename\fP
+ \fBsrc:\fP\fIline\fP
+ \fBsrc:\fP\fIline\fP\fB:\fP\fIcol\fP
+ \fBsrc::\fP\fIcol\fP
+.sp 1n
+.fi
+.RE
+If
+.I filename
+or
+.I line
+are omitted, the most recent values are used. The first source special on
+each page must be in one of the first two forms, since defaults are not
+inherited across pages.
+.sp
+You will need a \*(Te\& implementation that provides an appropriate
+switch (e.g.
+.IR -src )
+or a macro package
+(such as
+.I srcltx.sty
+or
+.IR srctex.sty ,
+available from CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/srcltx/)
+to insert such source specials into the DVI file.
+.sp
+For reverse search, the combination
+.I Ctrl-Mouse 1
+will make xdvi open an editor (the value of the
+.I \-editor
+command line option) with the file and the line number of the .tex
+source. See the description of the
+.I \-editor
+option for more information
+and example settings.
+.P
+For forward search,
+.B xdvi
+has a
+.I \-sourceposition
+option that makes
+.B xdvi
+jump to the page in
+the DVI file corresponding to the given line (or the closest
+line having a source special) of the specified file and highlight
+the found region. See the description of the
+.I \-sourceposition
+option for more details.
+.PP
+More information on setting up various editors for use with source
+specials can be found at:
+.RS 5
+.nf
+.sp 1n
+http://xdvi.sourceforge.net/inverse-search.html
+.sp 1n
+.fi
+.RE
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH PAPERSIZE SPECIALS
+.B xdvi
+accepts specials to set the paper size for the document. These specials
+should be of the form
+.RS 5
+.nf
+.sp 1n
+ \fBpapersize=\fP[\fB*\fP]\fIwidth\fP,\fIheight\fP
+.sp 1n
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+where
+.I width
+and
+.I height
+give the width and height of the paper, respectively. Each of these should
+appear in the form of a decimal number followed by any of the two-letter
+abbreviations for units accepted by \*(Te\&
+.RB ( pt ,
+.BR pc ,
+.BR in ,
+.BR bp ,
+.BR cm ,
+.BR mm ,
+.BR dd ,
+.BR cc ,
+or
+.BR sp ).
+If an asterisk
+.RB ( * )
+appears just before the width, then the measurements refer to the document
+dimensions (e.g.,
+.B pt
+as opposed to
+.BR truept ).
+This allows a macro package to vary the page size according to elements
+of the document; e.g.,
+.RS 5
+.ft 3
+.nf
+.sp 1n
+\especial{xdvi: papersize=*\enumber\ewd\emybox sp,
+ \enumber\eht\emybox sp}
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+Except for the asterisk, this format is compatible with
+.BR dvips .
+.P
+The last
+.B papersize
+special on a page determines the size of that page. If there is no such
+special on a given page, the most recent
+.B papersize
+is used, or, if there are no
+.B papersize
+specials on any preceding page, then the value of the
+.B paper
+resource (or
+.B \-paper
+option on the command line) is used. Thus the paper size may vary for
+different pages of the
+.I dvi
+file.
+.P
+If the
+.B paper
+resource (or
+.B \-paper
+command-line option) begins with a plus sign
+.RB (` + '),
+then all
+.B papersize
+specials in the
+.I dvi
+file are ignored.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH COLOR SPECIALS
+The color specials supported by
+.B xdvi
+are the same as those supported by
+.BR dvips ,
+except that the literal PostScript color specification (as in the
+.B AggiePattern
+example in the
+.B dvips
+documentation) is not supported.
+There are also some restrictions due to the way xdvi's drawing routines
+are implemented; e.g. the \ecolorbox and \efcolorbox macros don't work
+with xdvi. See the section LIMITATIONS below for more information on these
+restrictions.
+Xdvi supports the same list of named colors as with
+.BR dvips ,
+namely:
+.P
+.BR Apricot ,
+.BR Aquamarine ,
+.BR Bittersweet ,
+.BR Black ,
+.BR Blue ,
+.BR BlueGreen ,
+.BR BlueViolet ,
+.BR BrickRed ,
+.BR Brown ,
+.BR BurntOrange ,
+.BR CadetBlue ,
+.BR CarnationPink ,
+.BR Cerulean ,
+.BR CornflowerBlue ,
+.BR Cyan ,
+.BR Dandelion ,
+.BR DarkOrchid ,
+.BR Emerald ,
+.BR ForestGreen ,
+.BR Fuchsia ,
+.BR Goldenrod ,
+.BR Gray ,
+.BR Green ,
+.BR GreenYellow ,
+.BR JungleGreen ,
+.BR Lavender ,
+.BR LimeGreen ,
+.BR Magenta ,
+.BR Mahogany ,
+.BR Maroon ,
+.BR Melon ,
+.BR MidnightBlue ,
+.BR Mulberry ,
+.BR NavyBlue ,
+.BR OliveGreen ,
+.BR Orange ,
+.BR OrangeRed ,
+.BR Orchid ,
+.BR Peach ,
+.BR Periwinkle ,
+.BR PineGreen ,
+.BR Plum ,
+.BR ProcessBlue ,
+.BR Purple ,
+.BR RawSienna ,
+.BR Red ,
+.BR RedOrange ,
+.BR RedViolet ,
+.BR Rhodamine ,
+.BR RoyalBlue ,
+.BR RoyalPurple ,
+.BR RubineRed ,
+.BR Salmon ,
+.BR SeaGreen ,
+.BR Sepia ,
+.BR SkyBlue ,
+.BR SpringGreen ,
+.BR Tan ,
+.BR TealBlue ,
+.BR Thistle ,
+.BR Turquoise ,
+.BR Violet ,
+.BR VioletRed ,
+.BR White ,
+.BR WildStrawberry ,
+.BR Yellow ,
+.BR YellowGreen ,
+.BR YellowOrange .
+.P
+Note that these names are case sensitive.
+.P
+The documentation of the La\*(Te\&
+.B color
+package provides more details on how to use such specials with
+La\*(Te\&; see the
+.B dvips
+documentation for a detailed description of the
+syntax and semantics of the color specials.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH SIGNALS
+When
+.B xdvi
+receives a
+.SB SIGUSR1
+signal, it rereads the
+.I dvi
+file.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.B Xdvik
+uses the same environment variables and algorithms for searching for
+font files as \*(Te\& and friends. See the documentation for the
+.B Kpathsea
+library,
+.BR kpathsea.dvi ,
+for a detailed description of these.
+.PP
+In addition,
+.B xdvik
+accepts the following variables:
+.TP
+.SB DISPLAY
+Specifies which graphics display terminal to use.
+.TP
+.SB KPATHSEA_DEBUG
+Trace
+.B Kpathsea
+lookups; set it to
+.B -1
+(= all bits on) for complete tracing.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.SB EXTENSIONMAPS
+A list of files to be searched for mime types entries (as for Acrobat Reader).
+Earlier entries in one of these files override later ones.
+If this variable is not set, the following default path is used:
+.RS 7
+.nf
+.ft 3
+.sp 1n
+$HOME/.mime.types:/etc/mime.types:\e
+ /usr/etc/mime.types:/usr/local/etc/mimetypes
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+
+.TP
+.SB MAILCAPS
+A list of files to be searched for mailcap entries, as defined by RFC
+1343. See this RFC or the
+.BR mailcap (4)
+manual page for a detailed description of the mailcap file format.
+Currently, only the following mailcap features are supported:
+.RS 7
+.TP 7
+.BI test= command
+The entry is only used if
+.I command
+can be executed via the
+.B system()
+call and if the system() call returns with value 0 (success).
+The
+.I command
+string may contain the format string
+.IR %s ,
+which will be replaced by the file name.
+.TP
+.BI needsterminal
+If this flag is used, the command will be executed in a new xterm
+window by prepending
+.RI `` "xterm -e "''
+to the command string.
+.RE
+.PP
+.RS 7
+All other fields in the mailcap entry are ignored by xdvi.
+Earlier entries in one of these files override later ones.
+If the variable is not defined, the following default path is used:
+.RS 4
+.nf
+.ft 3
+.sp 1n
+$HOME/.mailcap:/etc/mailcap:/usr/etc/mailcap:\e
+ /usr/local/etc/mailcap
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.br
+For security reasons, some special characters (i.e.: ( ) ` \e ;)
+are escaped in the argument before passing it to
+.BR system() .
+.RE
+.TP
+.SB BROWSER
+Determines the web browser used to open external links (i.e., all URLs that don't
+start with the
+.RI ` file: '
+scheme and are not relative links in the local DVI file), and to open links
+for which no viewer has been specified in the
+.B mailcap
+files. The value of this variable is a colon-separated list of commands. Xdvi
+will try each of them in sequence until one succeeds (i.e. doesn't immediately
+return with status 0). This allows you to
+specify your favourite browser at the beginning,
+and fallback browsers at the end. Every occurrence of
+.I %s
+in the string is replaced by the target URL; every occurrence of
+.I %%
+is replaced by a single
+.IR % .
+If no
+.I %s
+is present, the URL string is added as an extra argument.
+.br
+An example setting is:
+.RS 7
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP 7
+.SB "netscape -raise -remote 'openURL(%s,new-window)':xterm -e lynx %s:xterm -e wget %s:lynx %s:wget %s"
+.TP
+See
+.TP
+.SB http://www.catb.org/~esr/BROWSER/
+.PP
+for more details on the
+.B BROWSER
+environment variable.
+.RE
+.TP
+.SB TMPDIR
+The directory to use for storing temporary files created when uncompressing
+PostScript files.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.SB XEDITOR
+Determines the editor command used for source special `reverse
+search', if neither the
+.I \-editor
+command-line option
+nor the
+.I .editor
+resource are specified. See the description of the
+.I \-editor
+command line option for details on the format.
+.TP
+.SB VISUAL
+Determines an editor to be opened in an xterm
+window if neither of
+.IR -editor ,
+.IR .editor ,
+or
+.I XEDITOR
+is specified.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.SB EDITOR
+Determines an editor to be opened in an xterm
+window if neither of
+.IR -editor ,
+.IR .editor ,
+.I XEDITOR
+or
+.I VISUAL
+is specified.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.TP
+.SB WWWBROWSER
+Obsolete; use
+.B BROWSER
+instead.
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
+.SH LIMITATIONS
+.B xdvi
+accepts many but not all types of PostScript specials accepted by
+.BR dvips .
+For example, it accepts most specials generated by
+.B epsf
+and
+.BR psfig .
+It does not, however, support
+.B bop\-hook
+or
+.BR eop\-hook ,
+nor does it allow PostScript commands to affect the rendering of things that
+are not PostScript (for example, the ``NEAT'' and rotated ``A'' examples in the
+.B dvips
+manual). These restrictions are due to the design of
+.BR xdvi ;
+in all likelihood they will always remain.
+.PP
+La\*(Te\&2e rotation specials are currently not supported.
+.PP
+.B MetaPost
+files containing included text are not supported.
+.PP
+.BR Xdvi 's
+color handling doesn't support the
+.B \ecolorbox
+and
+.B \efcolorbox
+macros; this is not likely to change in the near future. This also
+means that e.g. colored tables (as created by the
+.I colortbl
+package) may render incorrectly: Text in colors different from the
+default foreground color may not not be displayed. When the page is
+redrawn (e.g. after using the magnifier), the background color of the
+cells may overdraw the text.
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.SB $HOME/.xdvirc
+A file that holds all settings that the user changed via the keys, the `Options'
+and the Xaw `Modes' menu and the dialogs, as X resources. These resources override the
+settings in
+.BR $HOME/.Xdefaults .
+This file is ignored if the
+.B \-q
+option is used or the
+.B noInitFile
+X resource is set.
+.TP
+.SB xdvi.cfg
+A configuration file for the T1 font setup which needs to be supplied
+in the directory determined by the
+.B XDVIINPUTS
+environment variable. Please see the file
+.B http://xdvi.sourceforge.net/README.t1fonts
+if that file is missing.
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.BR X (1),
+.BR dvips (1),
+.BR mktexpk (1),
+.BR ps2pk (1),
+.BR gsftopk (1),
+.BR t1mapper (1),
+.BR mailcap (4),
+the
+.B Kpathsea
+documentation,
+and the Xdvik home page at
+.BR http://xdvi.sourceforge.net/ .
+.SH AUTHORS
+Eric Cooper, CMU, did a version for direct output to a QVSS. Modified
+for X by Bob Scheifler, MIT Laboratory for Computer Science. Modified
+for X11 by Mark Eichin, MIT SIPB. Additional enhancements by many
+others.
+.PP
+The current maintainer of the original
+.B xdvi
+is Paul Vojta, U.C. Berkeley.
+.PP
+Code for the xdvik variant has been contributed
+by many people, whose names are scattered across the
+source files. Xdvik is hosted on
+.B CTAN:dviware/xdvik
+and on SourceForge; for the most up-to-date information, please
+visit:
+.PP
+.B http://xdvi.sourceforge.net
+.PP
+Please report all bugs to the SourceForge bug tracker:
+.PP
+.nf
+.B http://sourceforge.net/tracker/?func=add&group_id=23164&atid=377580
+.PP
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvizilla.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvizilla.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..62b0d91c2de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvizilla.1
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 2002-2004 Paul Vojta
+.\"
+.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
+.\" of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
+.\" deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
+.\" rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+.\" sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
+.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
+.\"
+.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
+.\" all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+.\" FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
+.\" PAUL VOJTA BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
+.\" IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
+.\" CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.TH XDVIZILLA 1 "11 October 2002" "X Version 11"
+.SH NAME
+xdvizilla \- Helper application for running xdvi
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B xdvizilla
+[\fB\-no\-rm\fP]
+.I file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Presently (October 2002), Mozilla has some bugs with helper applications:
+it passes gzipped
+.RB ( .gz )
+files directly to the helper application without uncompressing, and it
+passes compressed
+.RB ( .Z )
+files as empty files.
+.PP
+To work around these problems,
+.B xdvizilla
+was written to look at files and decompress them correctly (depending on
+their file types).
+.PP
+In addition, some sites produced tarred
+.I dvi
+files (including the
+.I dvi
+file as well as some included figures), and
+.B xdvizilla
+correctly handles those files as well.
+.SH OPTIONS
+Only one option is supported:
+.TP
+.B \-no\-rm
+Normally
+.B xdvizilla
+will remove
+.I file
+before finishing. This option inhibits this behavior.
+.SH INSTALLATION
+In addition to installing
+.B xdvizilla
+in a directory on the default search path, it is necessary to set it up
+as a helper application within the browser.
+.PP
+For
+.BR "Netscape 4.x" ,
+add the following lines to the
+.B mailcap
+file:
+.RS 5
+.nf
+.ft 3
+.sp 1n
+application/x-dvi; xdvi -safer %s
+application/x-dvi-tar; xdvizilla -no-rm %s
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+For
+.BR "Netscape 6.x" ,
+.BR "Netscape 7.x" ,
+or
+.BR "Mozilla 1.x" ,
+add the following lines to the
+.B mailcap
+file:
+.RS 5
+.nf
+.ft 3
+.sp 1n
+application/x-dvi; xdvizilla %s
+application/x-dvi-tar; xdvizilla %s
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.PP
+In addition, it would be useful to check that the following line is included
+in the
+.B mime.types
+file:
+.RS 5
+.nf
+.ft 3
+.sp 1n
+type=application/x-dvi exts="dvi" desc="TeX dvi file"
+.sp 1n
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.SH SEE ALSO
+.BR X (1),
+.BR xdvi (1).
+.SH AUTHOR
+Paul Vojta, U.C. Berkeley.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man3/zlib.3 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man3/zlib.3
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..890098449dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man3/zlib.3
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+.TH ZLIB 3 "17 November 2003"
+.SH NAME
+zlib \- compression/decompression library
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+[see
+.I zlib.h
+for full description]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.I zlib
+library is a general purpose data compression library.
+The code is thread safe.
+It provides in-memory compression and decompression functions,
+including integrity checks of the uncompressed data.
+This version of the library supports only one compression method (deflation)
+but other algorithms will be added later
+and will have the same stream interface.
+.LP
+Compression can be done in a single step if the buffers are large enough
+(for example if an input file is mmap'ed),
+or can be done by repeated calls of the compression function.
+In the latter case,
+the application must provide more input and/or consume the output
+(providing more output space) before each call.
+.LP
+The library also supports reading and writing files in
+.IR gzip (1)
+(.gz) format
+with an interface similar to that of stdio.
+.LP
+The library does not install any signal handler.
+The decoder checks the consistency of the compressed data,
+so the library should never crash even in case of corrupted input.
+.LP
+All functions of the compression library are documented in the file
+.IR zlib.h .
+The distribution source includes examples of use of the library
+in the files
+.I example.c
+and
+.IR minigzip.c .
+.LP
+Changes to this version are documented in the file
+.I ChangeLog
+that accompanies the source,
+and are concerned primarily with bug fixes and portability enhancements.
+.LP
+A Java implementation of
+.I zlib
+is available in the Java Development Kit 1.1:
+.IP
+http://www.javasoft.com/products/JDK/1.1/docs/api/Package-java.util.zip.html
+.LP
+A Perl interface to
+.IR zlib ,
+written by Paul Marquess (pmqs@cpan.org),
+is available at CPAN (Comprehensive Perl Archive Network) sites,
+including:
+.IP
+http://www.cpan.org/modules/by-module/Compress/
+.LP
+A Python interface to
+.IR zlib ,
+written by A.M. Kuchling (amk@magnet.com),
+is available in Python 1.5 and later versions:
+.IP
+http://www.python.org/doc/lib/module-zlib.html
+.LP
+A
+.I zlib
+binding for
+.IR tcl (1),
+written by Andreas Kupries (a.kupries@westend.com),
+is availlable at:
+.IP
+http://www.westend.com/~kupries/doc/trf/man/man.html
+.LP
+An experimental package to read and write files in .zip format,
+written on top of
+.I zlib
+by Gilles Vollant (info@winimage.com),
+is available at:
+.IP
+http://www.winimage.com/zLibDll/unzip.html
+and also in the
+.I contrib/minizip
+directory of the main
+.I zlib
+web site.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The
+.I zlib
+web site can be found at either of these locations:
+.IP
+http://www.zlib.org
+.br
+http://www.gzip.org/zlib/
+.LP
+The data format used by the zlib library is described by RFC
+(Request for Comments) 1950 to 1952 in the files:
+.IP
+http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1950.txt (concerning zlib format)
+.br
+http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1951.txt (concerning deflate format)
+.br
+http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1952.txt (concerning gzip format)
+.LP
+These documents are also available in other formats from:
+.IP
+ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/png/documents/zlib/zdoc-index.html
+.LP
+Mark Nelson (markn@ieee.org) wrote an article about
+.I zlib
+for the Jan. 1997 issue of Dr. Dobb's Journal;
+a copy of the article is available at:
+.IP
+http://dogma.net/markn/articles/zlibtool/zlibtool.htm
+.SH "REPORTING PROBLEMS"
+Before reporting a problem,
+please check the
+.I zlib
+web site to verify that you have the latest version of
+.IR zlib ;
+otherwise,
+obtain the latest version and see if the problem still exists.
+Please read the
+.I zlib
+FAQ at:
+.IP
+http://www.gzip.org/zlib/zlib_faq.html
+.LP
+before asking for help.
+Send questions and/or comments to zlib@gzip.org,
+or (for the Windows DLL version) to Gilles Vollant (info@winimage.com).
+.SH AUTHORS
+Version 1.2.1
+Copyright (C) 1995-2003 Jean-loup Gailly (jloup@gzip.org)
+and Mark Adler (madler@alumni.caltech.edu).
+.LP
+This software is provided "as-is,"
+without any express or implied warranty.
+In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages
+arising from the use of this software.
+See the distribution directory with respect to requirements
+governing redistribution.
+The deflate format used by
+.I zlib
+was defined by Phil Katz.
+The deflate and
+.I zlib
+specifications were written by L. Peter Deutsch.
+Thanks to all the people who reported problems and suggested various
+improvements in
+.IR zlib ;
+who are too numerous to cite here.
+.LP
+UNIX manual page by R. P. C. Rodgers,
+U.S. National Library of Medicine (rodgers@nlm.nih.gov).
+.\" end of man page
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/fmtutil.cnf.5 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/fmtutil.cnf.5
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7c5aeb905d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/fmtutil.cnf.5
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+.TH "fmtutil\&.cnf" "5" "October 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX"
+.PP
+.SH "NAME"
+fmtutil\&.cnf \- configuration file for fmtutil
+.PP
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+The \fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP file contains the configuration information
+for \fBfmtutil\fP(8)\&. Each line contains the name of the format
+(e\&.g\&., ``tex\'\', ``latex\'\', ``omega\'\'), the name of the engine that
+is used by that format (e\&.g\&., ``tex\'\', ``etex\'\', ``omega\'\'), the pattern
+file (e\&.g\&., \fIlanguage\&.dat\fP, \fIlanguage\&.def\fP), and any
+arguments (name of an \fI\&.ini\fP file)\&.
+.PP
+Fields are separated by whitespace\& and complete lines can be commented
+out with ``#\'\'\&. The ``pattern file\'\' field cannot be used to
+define a file that is used while building the format\&.
+It tells \fBfmtutil\fP which file the
+format creation procedure reads\& and it has an effect to the options
+\fI--showhyphen\fP and \fI--byhyphen\fP\&.
+If the format has no way to
+customize hyphenation, a ``-\'\' can be used to indicate this\&.
+.PP
+.SH "NOTES"
+.PP
+The \fBtex\fP(1) and \fBamstex\fP(1) formats always load
+\fIhyphen\&.tex\fP\&. No customization by a pattern file is available
+for these formats\&. Therefore, the pattern-file field for the
+\fBtex\fP and \fBamstex\fP is usually indicated to be empty (``-\'\')\&.
+.PP
+You can, however, build customized formats on top of plain
+\fBtex\fP(1) or \fBamstex\fP(1) by using \fIbplain\&.tex\fP instead of
+\fIplain\&.tex\fP (b for the \fIBabel\fP system). See, for example,
+the \fIbplain\&.ini\fP file for the bplain format)\&.
+.PP
+\fBetex\fP(1) loads \fIlanguage\&.def\fP, not
+\fIlanguage\&.dat\fP\&.
+.PP
+Symbolic links to the correct engines (e\&.g\&., bplain -> tex)
+are generated by the \fBtexlinks\fP(8) script\&. Remember to run
+\fBtexlinks\fP(8) if you run \fBfmtutil\fP(8) yourself, rather
+than using the FORMATS option in \fBtexconfig\fP(8)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+.IP "\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP"
+default configuration file
+.IP "\fIlanguage\&.dat\fP"
+hyphenation pattern file
+.IP "\fIlanguage\&.def\fP"
+hyphenation pattern file
+.PP
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBamstex\fP(1), \fBetex\fP(1), \fBfmtutil\fP(8),
+\fBtex\fP(1), \fBtexconfig\fP(8), \fBtexlinks\fP(8)\&.
+.PP
+Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/>
+.PP
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&.
+.PP
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP was written by Thomas Esser
+<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de>, and is Copyright 1998,
+1999 but released into the public domain\&.
+.PP
+This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly
+<c@eskimo\&.com>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions
+without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the
+manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this
+manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&.
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/info.5 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/info.5
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..08fd289908f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/info.5
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+.\" info(5)
+.\" $Id: info.5,v 1.2 2004/04/11 17:56:45 karl Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.\"
+.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+.\" preserved on all copies.
+.\"
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
+.\" this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+.\" the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+.\" permission notice identical to this one.
+.\"
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+.\" manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+.\" versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a
+.\" translation approved by the Foundation.
+.\"
+.de EX
+.nf
+.ft CW
+.in +5
+..
+.de EE
+.in -5
+.ft R
+.fi
+..
+.TH INFO 5 "GNU Info" "FSF"
+.SH NAME
+info \- readable online documentation
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The Info file format is an easily-parsable representation for online
+documents. It can be read by
+.I emacs(1)
+and
+.I info(1)
+among other programs.
+.PP
+Info files are usually created from
+.I texinfo(5)
+sources by
+.IR makeinfo(1) ,
+but can be created from scratch if so desired.
+.PP
+For a full description of the Texinfo language and associated tools,
+please see the Texinfo manual (written in Texinfo itself). Most likely,
+running this command from your shell:
+.EX
+info texinfo
+.EE
+or this key sequence from inside Emacs:
+.EX
+M-x info RET m texinfo RET
+.EE
+will get you there.
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/texinfo-<version>.tar.gz
+.br
+or any GNU mirror site.
+.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
+Please send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org,
+general questions and discussion to help-texinfo@gnu.org.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+info(1), install-info(1), makeinfo(1), texi2dvi(1),
+.br
+texindex(1).
+.br
+emacs(1), tex(1).
+.br
+texinfo(5).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/texinfo.5 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/texinfo.5
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0ca35cac0d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/texinfo.5
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+.\" texinfo(5)
+.\" $Id: texinfo.5,v 1.2 2004/04/11 17:56:45 karl Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.\"
+.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+.\" preserved on all copies.
+.\"
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
+.\" this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+.\" the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+.\" permission notice identical to this one.
+.\"
+.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+.\" manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+.\" versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a
+.\" translation approved by the Foundation.
+.\"
+.de EX
+.nf
+.ft CW
+.in +5
+..
+.de EE
+.in -5
+.ft R
+.fi
+..
+.TH TEXINFO 5 "GNU Texinfo" "FSF"
+.SH NAME
+texinfo \- software documentation system
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Texinfo is a documentation system that uses a single source file to
+produce both online information and printed output. It is primarily
+designed for writing software manuals.
+.PP
+For a full description of the Texinfo language and associated tools,
+please see the Texinfo manual (written in Texinfo itself). Most likely,
+running this command from your shell:
+.EX
+info texinfo
+.EE
+or this key sequence from inside Emacs:
+.EX
+M-x info RET m texinfo RET
+.EE
+will get you there.
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/
+.br
+or any GNU mirror site.
+.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
+Please send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org,
+general questions and discussion to help-texinfo@gnu.org.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+info(1), install-info(1), makeinfo(1), texi2dvi(1), texindex(1).
+.br
+emacs(1), tex(1).
+.br
+info(5).
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/updmap.cfg.5 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/updmap.cfg.5
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..67d6412fcc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man5/updmap.cfg.5
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+.\" Hey, Emacs! This is an -*- nroff -*- source file.
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Hilmar Preusse <hille42@web.de>
+.\"
+.\" This is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
+.\" the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+.\" Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
+.\" version.
+.\"
+.\" This is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+.\" ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+.\" FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
+.\" for more details.
+.\"
+.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License with
+.\" your Debian GNU/Linux system, in /usr/share/common-licenses/GPL, or with
+.\" the dpkg source package as the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
+.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+.\"
+.TH "UPDMAP.CFG" "5" "AUGUST 2005" "Debian/GNU Linux" ""
+.SH "NAME"
+\fBupdmap.cfg\fR \- configuration of font mapping/inclusion for dvips and
+friends.
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+The file \fBupdmap.cfg\fR is the central font configuration file of a
+teTeX system and is read by \fBupdmap\fP(1). It describes if and how
+fonts should be included (or not included) into PS-/PDF-files. This
+works for Outline (Postscript Type1) and Bitmap Fonts (Postscript
+Type3) mostly coming from MetaFont.
+.PP
+\fBupdmap\fP is a utility that creates font configuration files for
+\fBdvips\fP(1), \fBpdftex\fP(1), \fBxdvi\fP(1), \fBps2pk\fP(1),
+\fBgsftopk\fP(1), \fBdvipdfm\fP(1) and (soon) \fBdvipdfmx\fP(1)\&. In
+an ideal world, updmap would be unnecessary -- each of these programs
+would read the same configuration file to learn what fonts are
+available and how they should be treated\&. As things stand, however,
+each of these tools has subtly different requirements and thereby
+needs its own font configuration file\&. \fBupdmap\fP creates font
+configuration files for all of these programs from a single source,
+\fBupdmap.cfg\fR, allowing you to easily keep all the different
+configuration files in sync\&.
+.P
+\fBdvipsPreferOutline\fR
+.br
+Configures if \fBdvips\fR (by default) should prefer bitmap fonts or outline fonts
+if both are available? Independent of this setting, outlines can be forced
+by putting "p psfonts_t1.map" into a config file that dvips reads. Bitmaps
+can be forced by putting "p psfonts_pk.map" into a config file. We provide
+such config files which can be enabled via
+\fBdvips\fR \fI-Poutline\fR ... resp. \fBdvips\fR \fI-Ppk\fR ...
+.br
+Valid settings for dvipsPreferOutline are \fItrue\fR / \fIfalse\fR.
+.P
+\fBLW35\fR
+.br
+Which fonts of the "Basic 35 Laserwriter Fonts" do you want to use and
+how are the filenames chosen? Valid settings:
+.br
+URW: URW fonts with "vendor" filenames (e.g. n019064l.pfb)
+.br
+URWkb: URW fonts with "berry" filenames (e.g. uhvbo8ac.pfb)
+.br
+ADOBE: Adobe fonts with "vendor" filenames (e.g. hvnbo___.pfb)
+.br
+ADOBEkb: Adobe fonts with "berry" filenames (e.g. phvbo8an.pfb)
+.P
+\fBdvipsDownloadBase\fR
+.br
+Configures if \fBdvips\fR (by default) should download the standard 35 LaserWriter
+fonts into the document (set \fItrue\fR) or should these fonts be used from the ps
+interpreter / printer (set \fIfalse\fR).
+.br
+The user can override the default by specifying \fBdvips\fR \fI-Pdownload35\fR
+... resp. \fBdvips\fR \fI-Pbuiltin35\fR ... to either download the LW35 fonts resp. use the
+built-in fonts.
+.br
+Valid settings are \fItrue\fR / \fIfalse\fR.
+.P
+\fBpdftexDownloadBase14\fR
+.br
+Should \fBpdftex\fR download the base 14 pdf fonts? Since some configurations
+(ps / pdf tools / printers) use bad default fonts, it is safer to download
+the fonts. The pdf files will get bigger, though.
+.br
+Valid settings are \fItrue\fR (download the fonts) or \fIfalse\fR (don't
+download the fonts). Adobe recomments to embed all fonts.
+.P
+\fBdvipdfmDownloadBase14\fR
+.br
+Should \fBdvipdfm\fR download the base 14 pdf fonts? Since some configurations
+(ps / pdf tools / printers) use bad default fonts, it is safer to download
+the fonts. The pdf files will get bigger, though.
+.br
+Valid settings are \fItrue\fR (download the fonts) or \fIfalse\fR (don't
+download the fonts).
+.P
+\fBMap\fR
+.br
+Points to a map file, which describes a mapping from a font (called in the TeX
+document) to the pfb file containing the Postscript code.
+.br
+Usage: \fBMap\fR filename.map
+.P
+The syntax of map files is the same as \fBdvips\fP(1) uses, see
+section 6.4, "'psfonts.map': PostScript font catalog" in the manual of
+\fBdvips\fP(1), available as info and pdf file.
+.P
+\fBMixedMap\fR
+.br
+Similar to \fBMap\fR. It should be used when there is Type1 and a bitmap
+implementation of the font (the latter mostly coming from MetaFont). These
+entries will not be used in the default map of \fBdvips\fR if
+\fBdvipsPreferOutline\fR is set to \fIfalse\fR.
+.br
+Usage: \fBMixedMap\fR filename.map
+.P
+The sign \fB#\fR precedes a comment.
+.P
+Not used Map files should be commented out using the string \fB#!\fR at the
+beginning of the line. These entries can be (de-)activaed using \fBupdmap\fR
+with the options \fI--enable\fR and \fI--disable\fR.
+.SH "SPECIAL TO DEBIAN"
+In Debian the file \fBupdmap.cfg\fR is a generated file sitting in /var. It is
+generated by concatenating the *.cfg files from /etc/texmf/updmap.d/. These
+files follow the syntax of updmap.cfg, but contain only parts of it.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+This manual page was written by Hilmar Preusse <hille42@web.de>, for
+the Debian GNU/Linux system by simply copying the comments from
+\fBupdmap.cfg\fR and rewriting some of them. It may be used by other
+distributions without contacting the author. Any mistakes or omissions in
+the manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this manual
+page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author).
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+updmap(1), info page of dvips(1)
+.SH "THANKS TO"
+Frank Kuester,
+Thomas Esser.